ti
``
`.
+.+
z
+-:
ri,?
``-?=
rË.,--'rr
J._
.^.^
4
,w
Ei.+t4.
:n
s4` 1
^Á
-¡.
Z_
'^s
!°`.r3 "3_a`+e- #~fi..r
`.
,s.x,
t-_,_a.Y'_1Zi
`-...."'4.'''.'
t .i+S-r/`
,r+-' 'n-;__,t `°'.C
Yç1.
r -Ri_-:^--"'-'----->---.:7272';-----a
--`^`_f`-ÿ'.---.,.t,
...
= í....z.:.-,',1 st``
`+.--->._.
r
s7.
.Yr:`.*
?---;^,.
--r+a-.-----..r.,,,-,y1: y_sr¿--:L
`.y
____,.,-.-e..---,q
^--r-ç
rs
.r.
1-'
í>
--4r--1.----7-,..."---e
-,-_,
`...-_-,r,,...
1's_
rS
A1 +
.`.
7_. 4_:
__,l.ÿ._-_
..
.0
...
''',._7",,,.4-.7:t':`
2
-
ç-
a`}+`»
---"-ime........,---
-
_
2"
2_,_12,,_;--,n_
-........-_---,-----...---e-",
-:
.
ti
,---,-_-
G i-+s+
_4T'
7
---7.-'5'
-.
_T
^T_`-`..m¢ -"«."--'.".'-2-'
-_u.
_r-+s `
-_
,l.^!
L:'.
--,c
-.ç
i`
_
.
-._,1M
*s,_y`-.
.º--r:-,
,v!-^^_-.-',,r._4..
4;'A
=-...
+s..:-?
,_,ss,ss_,_
+_-
.
-^,
_
.r_=
=-s.-
Ma--
_
.-,-...-'..
2.
'ss
^__ r._-
`-â,-
e'..
,`^-í.`t
s^ss`^"
JOHN
F_
....je.
..'.,_'
-."---,--.z"-.7
a+.
-a._
-r-a
Ri135R
www.americanradiohistory.com
=--r-
,.
`-
o.++.
3,_
-+4
-.
...-r
-
,..-_'^-.r^r.:
..
_'-
-r
__:-_-
AFFILIATED RETAILERS MISC. PAGE 20-1
MODEL AR -920-A
to
U
75,
m
O in O
N
r.-
o
¡ ,---I
ry
O
aYcc
1
Io
O
LL
;9;O
Ì1' MO
I.
Of
O
N
M
Oti
O
4.)
N O
ua
et cr N
CO
F-
M
IF-Hi
Q
N
3
cV
QI
(V
UI
oU
1=
>I
z
in
Ò
X
w
©John
F.
I
t-.
ó
n (D
r
ÑU Ú
'
O
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
O Q
U
YI
O
U
J
MISC. PAGE 20-2 ANSLEY
MODELS 707, 708;
Ch. 113
Iy.1'.
l
09S
o
-
¡I
\
4
-N --
n
rt
¡1
'
I-
0iw 900
2
o
o
ó
I
zl
o
QL
iH
110
DSO W3
I
H
t,*.
I
;
¡1Hi
0091
MI-)ILZ
10L
M
00££
I
VWs--
011410'
ii-
MI-)IÇ£
o
a_
o
'='John F.
-09-0S
"AY
ál
1
1»11141,
3)10M) a "ö
1311n0 7W
z
_ J
)IZZ
H-I
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
sAM.r
OOSç
AOZ I -SOI
J. W. DAVIS MISC.PAGE 20-3
MOIDELS 4810,
UAU
os
colt
-
J
o
dV\
+rotz
r
II,.
0
O
1
f
MT
"
T
110o
aoaal---tr
z
irlr
[
°
Lj
I`^il
oC
I,1
Ir
'
©John
F.
L
--*
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
lo
, m
Cf
.
tiE
4820
MISC.
©John
PAGE
F.
20-4 ESPEY
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
GAROD MISC. PAGE 20-5
MODEL 5K-1
0
z
'56
:cgZ
(
s
r1
O,
o
HI'
;"
A
O
u
r1
M
N
Y
o
>
(1
m
__((
N
fn
A
W
--111Hil
,
I
m
.r
N
\;_t>
-IHh
r
o
I(
N
;óx-'
-
O
o
r
f
h
I
CC
o
7
O
m O
I
z
38E;
ú aW
;N
A
L
N
>
J
CC
O
CCO
lYY
a
o
F Ñá
I:
g;
_: ó3
r
44'V\,
,-A.A1r
^i61rs-rp
~W
FQ
m
1
W
a
30
~
s
jM
21J
Ñ
Y
pÑJá
a
SN1
Ú
Cl
N
O
OF
<J Nm
p>
'X `.
<
1a
N
¢
p
W
12
W
N
Q
Ú
W
ó 3
N
2
g ú
¢
¢
`
<
<
<W
O
www.americanradiohistory.com
0-
3
W
>
>
1
Ñ
N
I.
00A
Rider
3
Og
U
W
W
11
i
iÿ
u
LI
tLL
m
®
OOOO O
H
JJJ
W Q
JJ2 J>
N
F.
3
¢U
RO¢33
2f1
ON
ñ o
33
13(
©John
W¢
.,.0<m
22
N WO
Wór
W
W3
NZ
OUa I- UO
OSYau
W
W
W
;,-J
~a
m
N
II
2
.).g.!,
2
W
i
n
000
MISC. PAGE 20-6 ROD
6R6o8
MODEL
u.su
"k2
.1}.-11..4117F
lV^c
lls!I
''
0
c.>
1
-new`°c
zo
\
HrC_
,
1-4-,^
1
D`
1
!
l1
0
04-c
>74
rl
iz)
~-"r
HO+300
OO
00
c.c..)
hl!-iOLn111
E -i
C
fL
in
h
ó
H
I
RJ rl r-4 N
UUUU0UEiE-cE-1
>
r-I
\-
HN
v-
ti
iE-+ .7,5
P-1 4-3
^
tOr-If-tN
w0000 cao
NMI
ti
<
-1-3F1 c'd
-1-3
w
Hi ,--I
rZ
V)
_
_
-
_ _
tO_
r
r
eC5
Oc-,
d]0000
OON OU\
w O L-c"1N OlI\V\
O N
q N-1-- rl r-I N rl If\
cU
--I
r
'-;
U
E1
H N rl.-.Lc1D c---co
P-4
Q
Ñ
jll.1 1!l
;ili1C
l
©John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
4
ß',CY.xiLY:L
a
lr w
[`--
SARGENT-RAYMENT MISC. PAGE 20-7
MODEL SR28FAM
6SÁ7
61X7
t66 K.C.
ite
00
ANT.
o
o
oo
615
68X6
613E6
10.7
1
'Ì.
4Q....T
TRPBLw.
.o
SR28FAM
6BAb
0 0
lM
68Aó
.0
/
11
3
sT
20n
6X5
N
The
operate
7.5a
SIC
dual Superhet designed to
adjusted for acoustically flat
electronic circuit is
into an amplifier
a
response.
range bass and treble controls make it possible to
diminish or augment any major portion of the audible scale
allowing for an unsurpassed flexibility of tone pattern (Fig. I.)
Full
USE ONLY
1
AMP. FUSE.
ANTENNA REV,UIREIENTS.
For best non -directional standard AM broadcast results
to ana single wire five to ten feet in length connected
Additional selectenna terminal "A" will be sufficient.
to
rewould
tend
tivity to this efficient input circuit
strict the wide band reception capabilities of the Infinite
Impedence type detector.
10DB
5DB
0 DB
-5DB
-10DB
6
40
2
8
4
6
2
8
4
6
1000
100
Electron ray tuning indicator
as a
8
10000
SR28FAM embodies such
Infinite Impedence type AM detection.
features
as
tuned
.4 volts.
Licensed
patents of Hazeltine
under
Laboratories,
Power Consumption:
F.
each
I
6BE6;
50 watts,
6C4,
6AL5,
tuner.
jack marked 1:AG is the phono input for the new
variable reluctance cartridge with its properly compensated pre -amplifier.
Inc.,
and others.
Tubes:
3,
6BA6;
6SA7, 6SK7, 6E5, 6X5.
INPUT JACKS.
and
All phono or TV audio signals as well as the AM
of
FM radio are subject to the volume and tone controls
The
Input jacks for Magnetic phono pickup, Crystal pickup,
and TV audio channel on selector Control Switch.
Average output:
For best F.ì. results a 100 K.C. dipole should be inThe twisted
stalled well above surrounding obstructions.
to antenna
300 ohm line from the dipole should oe connected
("G" also grounds unit.)
terminals "D" and "G".
with
the tuner
is
supplied
dipole
A console type folded
and will prove a satisfactory substitute in most cases
impractical.
is
dipole
where an external
the
visual tuning aid.
Complete shielding for the elimination of strays.
©John
CAUTION
No multi -tube unit
IS EXTREMELY II,PORT:.h T.
should be housed in an insufficiently ventilated cabinet.
Damage to the unit and the cabinet will result.
VE:. TILATION
6SL7GT,
110-125 volts, 50-60 cycles.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
XTAL is
the phono input for a standard
crystal pickup.
the audio
The TV jack makes it possible
a television tuner thru the redids amplifier and speaker.
to channel
of
hlvh impedThe OUTPUT jack should be connected to the
a quality
ence input control (250,000 to 500,000 ohms) of
Use the prepared shielded lead supplied
audio amplifier.
range
wide
of
capable
a
speaker
with the tuner. Choose
reproduction.
110-125
A.C.POWER. SR2BFAK is completely powerized for
Volume
volts 50-60 cycles. The power switch (on the
back of
on
the
Control) also controls the A .0 .recepticle
installation.
the chassis for convenience in amplifier
MISC.PAGE 20-8 SONORA
MODELS
171, 172
TUNING RANGE
This receiver is designed to operate over the standard broadcast band which
extends from 535 to 1620 Kilocycles (KC) (185 to 560 Meters).
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
GENERAL DATA. The alignment of this receiver requires the use of a test
oscillator that will cover the frequencies of 455, 600, 1400 and 1620 KC and an
output meter to be connected across the primary or secondary of the output
transformer. If possible, all alignments should be made with the volume control
on maximum and the test oscillator output as low as possible to prevent the
AVC from operating and giving false readings.
The intermediate frequency (1.F.) stages
should be aligned properly as the first step. After the I.F. transformers have been
properly adjusted and peaked, the broadcast band should be adjusted.
CORRECT ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE.
chassis and loop antenna from the cabinet and
set them up on the bench so that they occupy exactly the same respective position on the bench as they did in the cabinet. Care should be taken to have no
iron or other metal near the loop. Do not make this set-up on a metal bench.
With the gang condenser set at minimum, adtust the test oscillator to 455 KC
and connect the output to the grid of the first detector tube (12SA7) through a .05
or .1 mid. condenser. The ground on the test osculatot snvuul be ..wu,v jeu íu
the ground buss, indicated on the circuit diagram. Align all three I.F. trimmers
to peak or maximum reading on the output meter.
I.F. ALIGNMENT. Remove the
Connect the test oscillator to a dummy loop
which can be made by coiling 2 turns of hookup wire about 6" in diameter.
Place this dummy loop about a foot from the loop on the receiver and in the
same plane as the receiver loop. With the gang condenser set at minimum
capacity, set the test oscillator at 1620 KC, and adjust the oscillator (or 1620 KC
trimmer) on the gang condenser. Next-set the test oscillator at 1400 KC, and
tune in the signal on the gang condenser. Adjust the antenna trimmer (or 1400
KC trimmer) for maximum signal. Next set the test oscillator at 600 KC, and
tune in signal on condenser to check alignment of coils. BROADCAST BAND ALIGNMENT.
receiver is designed to operate on any alternating current
supply (AC) ranging from 110 to 120 volts, 50 to 60 cycles; or on any direct
current supply (DC) ranging from 110 to 120 volts.
POWER SUPPLY. This
12SAT
0,
12SRT
12507
SOLOIST
4010,,
Q. 24-7
OS
eó40
c
z-
o
Cy
4.
e
V
uur
V
i.aRT
V
iaAT
V
nuucr
352 SOT
.acule.
2114014
M.
N%
NW
4041T40r
v140tií
1e
O.
caw
aw
YIN,C1.1
ON
V01,142 CON.101.
C.
I.F
C.
C.
C.
4.11013
.wl
/004 ww
w ,.,a
r.
455
KC.
5 TUBE A.C.-D.C.
600v
SUPER NETERODY NE
SINGLE BAND
cwm
.
114-4410
vCIVYC COMTR0.
SCHEMATIC AND PARTS LIST INCLUDING CHASSIS LAYOUT AND TUIE POSITIONS
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CHANGES PAGE 20-1
Bendix 69 Series
EIIt ANT.
This model appears on pages 19.1 through
of Rider's Manual Volume XIX. The
location of trimmer C3c on gang capacitor in
Figure 8, Trimmer Location Diagram,
should be on terminal 4, rather than terminal 3.
Air King A400, Minstrel; Ch. 470
This model appears on page 16-1 of
Rider's Volume XVI. The following mate
rial should be added to that which appears in the Manual. The voltage and
resistance measurements follow.
SETS
IßNE
ptt
cono
ICIOTTE
AWq HOBUT
19-8
PIN
TOM
VTVR
20.000 1.000
ON11/V
Converter
osc.
0
0
o
2
AC
AC
AC
3
+76
+76
+76
+76
*76
550 xc
VOLTAGE
1600
6
let
KC
.3.2
-0.3
-0.3
0
0
-1.3
0
1.0
5
6
+486
7
AC
9
0
501.6
AUDIO
4)j2
OUTPUT
6
-0.7
0O
0
0
0.8
+*48
AC
-0.6
0
-0.
23 $
MW
M
6.5 MO
OUR 500E
0
0
0
AC
AC
AC
26
+110
+110
OVER
-1.1
-054
340E
i5
-3.8
,-
0H11
500E
500E
éó
AC
o
0
+1.6
AC
AC
Aó
6
AC
AC
AC
AC
9
AG
.1z2
AC
AC
AC
+122
+122
5
NEO
5.2
0
AC
Sacs.
6.5
AC
+1.6
1
0.6
o
2
0
3
1
17E
17E
14
AC
-0.8
0
-0.6
500E
OVER
0
1
2
1
óisR 500E'
+76
0
-3.9
-1.5
AVC
AP
0
-3.1
8
12547
DST.
OHN/V
1
125A7
RESISTANCE
0
6
---
6ilaó !BO
130
155
AC
OV
500E
ALL RESISTANCES IN OBIS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
AIL
VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE IVEASURENENTS RADE WITH
RESPECT TO CHASSIS GROOM WITH 166 V AC LINE V
VOLTAGE.
I -F Alignment
Connect an output meter across the
voice coil. Connect the signal generator
to the primary of the antenna transformer
through a 100-µµf capacitor.
Set the signal generator to 455 kc and
fully mesh the receiver tuning capacitor.
Keep the receiver volume control at
maximum and the output of the signal
generator sufficient to give a readable
deflectipn on the output meter and adjust
i -f trimmers C15 and C14 for maximum.
AUDIO OUT
TRANSE.
T
SPEAKER
ON-Off SN
VOLCONT.
TOP FRONT VIEW
SHAFT
TUN NG
sNAEt
The top front view of the Air King A400,
showing tubes and trimmer locations.
R -F Oscillator Adjustment
Keeping the same setup
i -f alignment, set the signal
1600 kc and adjust oscillator
for maximum output.
Set signal generator and
1400 kc and adjust antenna
as used for
generator for
trimmer C13
receiver for
trimmer C12
for maximum output.
The parts layout and alignment points
are shown in the accompanying diagrams.
©
oN-o55 s
VOI.CONTR.
SPEAKER
11;417
DE
SHAFT
08110M FRONT VIEW
AS
The bottom front view of the Air King
A400, showing parts layout.
Bendix 1217B, 1217D
Model 1217B appears on pages 19-9
through 19-19 of Rider's Manual Volume
XIX and Model 1217D appears on pages
19-20 through 19.33 of Rider's Manual Volume XIX. Hum can be corrected by
removing the shielded lead between the
two chassis from the plug assembly and
running it in through a separate connector.
All of the hum pickup is taking place at
the eight -prong plug on the radio chassis.
With the cable running in through the
chassis about two inches away from the
plug assembly, the hum level is so low
as to be almost unmeasurable.
Crosley 9-212B
This model is the ,same as Model 9-209
appearing on pages 19-19 through 19-21 of
Rider's Volume XIX.
Espey 509
This model is the -same as Model 7B1, appearing on pages 18.1,8 of Rider's Volume
XVIII, except for the following changes
Capacitor C55 (10 µµf) connected from
pin 1 of the 7F8 tube to ground has been
removed. The 0.003-µf capacitor C9 has been
changed to 1500 µµf.
The position of the trimmers has been
changed. Looking at the front of the set,
they are: C49 (broadcast trimmer), C51
(f -m oscillator), C50 (broadcast oscillator),
and C52 (f -m r -f trimmer).
A coil has been placed in the cathode
lead of the 7Q7 tube before this lead is
connected to 050. Capacitor C53 (15 µµf)
has been changed to a variable capacitor
and is now connected between L5 and
ground, instead of across L5. The junction
of C50 and the cathode lead of the 7Q7
tube is connected to the ground side of
this capacitor.
The 22,000 -ohm resistor, R.51, connected
between R13 and ground has been eliminated. The side of C19 that is not connecter.
to R13 is grounded directly. The side of
the tone control, R14, previously connected to C19 has been left open. 1120 has been
changed from a 470,000 -ohm resistor to a
1-megohm variable resistor. The movable
aria of R20 is now connected to pin 5 of
the 7F7 tube, and one side of R20 is connected to the junction of C21, C22, and
C23. C56, the 1500-µµf capacitor across the
filaments of the 6BA6 tube, has been removed.
Farnsworth H-084, K-086. H-289
The first two models appear on pages
18-6 through 18-12 of Rider's Volume
XVIII. The following changes have been
made in production. Model K-289 incorporates these changes.
A 3 -gang tuning capacitor is used, necessitating changes in the r -f amplifier circuit.
The 100,000 -ohm resistor connected to the
grid (pin 1) of the 6AG5 r-f amplifier has
been changed in value to 1 megohm. The
lead which was formerly connected from
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
the bottom of this resistor to the junction
of resistors 7 and 8 (1 megohm and 4.7
megohms, respectively) is now connected
directly to resistor 4 (100,000 ohms) and
to D5 of switch section 2 rear. Resistors
7 and 8 have been eliminated.
The band-pass coil and the 470-µµf
capacitor which were connected between
the plate (pin 5) of the 6AG5 tube and
the third grid (pin 8) of the 6SB7Y oscil-
lator convertor tube have been removed.
A connection has been made from the
plate of the 6AG5 tube through a 100-µ4
capacitor' to D3 of switch section 2 rear.
The third grid of the 6SB7Y is still connected to D2 of switch section 2 rear.,
The 100,000 -ohm resistor, which was formerly connected between Dl of switch'
section 2 rear and the junction of D4 of
the same switch section and the 1000 -ohm
resistor, has been removed. There is a
connection from Dl of switch section 2
rear and Cl of switch section 2 front,
indicated on the schematic by the black
dot on these connections.
The 0.005-µf capacitor connected to C7
of switch section 2 front has been removed,
as has the wave trap and 100-µµf capacitor
connected to Cl of the same switch
section. The third section of the ganged
tuning capacitor is connected between Cl
and ground, and is shunted by the f-m
converter trimmer, and also by a bandpass coil (49) in series with a 0.0594f
capacitor. A 100,000-ohm resistor is connected from the junction of this capacitor
and coil to D4 of switch section 2 rear.
A 0.01-µf capacitor in series with a coil
is connected from this common ground
point to the junction of the 4700 -ohm
resistor and the r -f choke in the plate
circuit of the 6AG5 r -f amplifier. A 47,000 ohm resistor has been connected in the
line going between A3 of switch section
1 front and the junction of the 47,000 -ohm
resistor, the 470,000-ohm resistor, and the
100-µµf capacitor in the filter circuit of
the a -m detector.
The following step should be included in
the a -m alignment table on page 18-1
between steps 6 and 7.
Set generator Set Gang
Step Connect
At
Generator At
Ex. Ant.
1500 kc.
1500 kc.
8A
Binding Post
Adjust
To Obtain
BC R -F Trimmer
Maximum
Output
The following a seltlons should be made
to the parts list.
Ref. Part
Description
No.
No.
27
26456
26182
26277
18766
13784
34
39
46
46
47
50
61
62
69
73
73
38932
26181
38933
38934
81175
42186
42187
22147
22160
31421
31422
31463
81454
31481
31452
92192
17014
54091
54310
69451
92228
60665
H-283-1
H-283-2
H-285-1
H-286-2
H-315
60-µµf ceramic capacitor
0.1-µf tubular capacitor, 200 volts
Tuning capacitor
Loop antenna (GK -084,-088; K-084)
Loop antenna (GK -086, -087;
K-086. -289)
F-rn antenna colt
0.05-µf tubular capacitor, 200 volts
F -m converter coil
F -m oscillator coil
Speaker
Pilot lamp, 260 ma (K-084, -086)
Pilot lamp, Mazda 66 (K-289)
Pickup cable (GK-084, -088: K-084)
Pickup cable (GK -085, -086, -087;
K-086, -289)
A -m dial glass
F-m dial glass
A -m dial glue
F -m dial glass
Dial escutcheon
Dial escutcheon
Dial drive cord
(K-084. -086)
(K-084. -086)
(K-289)
(K-289)
(K-084. -086)
(K-289)
(46 inches)
Drive drum
Band switch lever (K-084, -086)
Band switch lever (K-289)
Knobs (K-084, -086)
Dial background (K-084)
Escutcheon backing (K-289)
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
and
and
and
and
and
carton
carton
carton
carton
carton
for K-084
for K-084
for K-086
for K-086
for K-289
(walnut)
(blonde)
(walnut)
(blonde)
PAGE 20-2 CHANGES
Farnsworth Chassis
C-170, C-194, C-216, C-201
These chassis are used in Model. (;K-100,
GK-102,,GK-103, and GK -104, appealing on
pages 17-3 through 17.10 of Rider's Volume
This completes the changes. It is now
necessary to align the i.f.'s on f.m. Connect
a voltohmyst on the AVC line (Pin 3 on
6H6 socket through a 1-megohm resistor).
6H6
.VVI1. These chassis are listed as follows:
Model
GK -100
OK -102
GK -103
('bassi.,
!:K-104
C-201
K-669
O
0678
C'-170
C-194
5 (
7
33K
1
33K
C-216
Dial
escutcheon, EK-264,
GK -267, K-669, K-267
59199 Dial escutcheon, EK-263,
EK-265, GK -266
58587 Dial
background, GK -266,
59211
TERM. BD.
58586
Dial
background,
GK -267,
K-267
H-278.1 Cabinet and packing,
267, walnut
H-278-2 Cabinet and packing,
267, blonde
GK -
GK -
Cabinet and packing, OK 266, walnut
H-277-2 Cabinet and packing, GK 266, blonde
H-317 Cabinet and packing, KH-277-1
Farnsworth GK140 Series
This model appears in Rider's Manual
XVI, pages 16.6 through 16-11. The following procedure is conducive to increased
sensitivity, noise rejection, broader tuning,
and reduced thermal drift of the f-m section of the GK140 series combination instrument.
To reduce drift, change the oscillator
grid coupling capacitor (grid of 6C4 to the
oscillator coil) from 50 µµf zero temperature coefficient to 40 µµf N-1400 temperature coefficient. The part number of this
replacement is 25442. Change the oscillator
padder capacitor (oscillator coil to f-m
gang section) from 55 µµf N-330 to 55
µµf zero temperature coefficient. This
new part number is 25441. These changes
will necessitate alight realignment of the
f-m converter and oscillator. To make
these modifications, use the following procedure:
Clip out two 330,000 -ohm, 1 -watt resistors connected between the ratio detector transformer (next to the 6H6 socket)
and the terminal board, one 5,00014
mica capacitor between the B-supply for
the transformer and ground and two 6,000 ohm, 1/2 -watt resistors connected to the
6H6 socket. Clip four leads connected to
the transformer. Remove the ratio detector
transformer and replace with the transformer No. 38879. To do this, it is necessary to drill two new holes as shown in
the accompanying diagrams.
After the transformer is connected (make
leads as short as possible) connect two
33,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistors, Part No.
77183, one between pin No. 8 on the 6H6
socket and ground, and the other between
Pin No. 3 and ground (short leads). Connect a 1,50014if capacitor, No. 25273, between the B-supply to the transformer and
ground. Connect a 0.0021if, 600 -volt capacitor, No. 25185, between ground and the
point where the 22,000-ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor connects to the shielded lead on the
terminal board by the 6H6 socket.
6H6
39K
1W
PiN4
PIN
669
65K7
59134
59450
1500
The circuit of the Farnsworth GK140
series as it appears after modification.
Connect the a -m signal generator, set at
10.7 mc, to the grid of the 6SK7 which
feeds the diode transformer. Connect the
output meter across the voice coil of the
speaker. Turn the bottom slug next to the
chassis of the diode transformer out as far
as possible. Tune the top slug for maximum output (negative voltage) on the
voltohymst. Move the generator to the
grid of the second i -f amplifier. Detune
the slug under the chassis by turning it
out as far as possible. Tune the top slug
for maximum voltage, next tune the bottom slug for maximum voltage. In each
step do not use an input greater than
necessary to give three volts AVC. Move
the signal generator to the grid of the
first i -f amplifier. Detune the bottom f-m
slug (nearest corner of can) by turning it
out as far as possible. Tune the top slug
(nearest corner of can) for maximum voltage, next tune the bottom slug for maximum voltage. Move the signal generator
to the 6AG5 converter grid and tune the
first i -f transformer as described previously. With the generator still hooked to the
6AG5 grid and modulated with 400 cycles
and with about 200 microvolts input, adjust the slug next to the chassis on the
diode transformer for maximum output
voltage on output meter, which is across
the voice coil.
Farnsworth GK-266, K-699,
Chassis C-152, GK-267, K-267
Chassis C-153
These models are the same as Models
EK-263 and EK-264, which appear on pages
16-7 through 15-9 of Rider's Volume XV,
except for the cabinets. The parts list
should be amended to include the following:
Ref. Part
No.
No. Description
41
Output transformer, GK -266,
GK -267, K-267, K-669
38533 Loop antenna, EK-264, GK -
41
38997
41
38894
39
94235
267, K-267
Loop antenna assembly, K669
4
16
OR X12 DRILL
The 3/16 -inch holes pointed out here must
be drilled to accomodate transformer 38879
in the Farnsworth GK140 series.
John
F.
47
47
Loop
antenna assembly,
GK -266
81169 Speaker, K-669
81170 Speaker, GK -266, GK -267,
K-267
31318
Dial glass, EK-264, GK -267,
K-267
31280 Dial glass, EK-263, EK-265,
GK -266, K-669
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Knob for walnut cabinets
Knobs for GK -266, GK -267,
blonde
Farnsworth P7, P9, P10, Capehart
These models appear on pages 19-19
through 19-33 of Rider's Volume XIX.
The program control knob on these models
turns a switch with detent contacts. If
this knob is not pushed down to grip a
substantial portion of the knurled shalt,
the inside of the knob may become reamed
out and in time lose its ability to grip the
shaft sufficiently to actuate the switch.
5'
TAPERED
STRIP METAL
(BRASS,COPPER
OR LIGHT STEEL)
INSERT
PRESS INTO
KNOB IN
POSITION
SHOWN
KNOB
BOTTOM VIEW
Method of wedging the program control
!;nobs of the Farnsworth P7, P9, P10, so
they grip the shaft.
if such a condition occurs and there is
no replacement knob handy, refer to the
accompanying diagram and the following:
A piece of metal strip 5/16" X 3/4"
or 1/2" should be wedged tightly into the
center of the knob. When the knob is
placed over the shaft, the metal insert
will engage the shaft slot.
Improved knob gripping can sometimes
be obtained by slightly spreading the shaft
slot. Care must be exercisied in doing
this however. If the shaft slot is spread
too far, it is likely to break or be spread
unevenly, thereby imparting an undesirable
"wobbly motion" when turned.
If hum is encountered in the 35P7
or in any instrument using the P7, P9, or
P10 chassis, it may be due to either a
gaseous or aged 6Th that is used as the
1st audio amplifier, or a signal that is
being picked up on the power line because of a faulty 0.005-µf, 600 -volt capacitor, Part No. 25031, ideated between the
unbuffered side of the line and ground.
CHANGES PAGE 20-3
Farnsworth P71
General Electric 41, 42, 43
This model appears on pages RCD. CH.
19.1 through 19-10 of Rider's Manual Volume XIX. The following changes should
be noted in the parts list:
Part No.
07594 Turntable assembly, changed to
15241
Tone aim counterbalance spring,
changed to 64343.
l'art number 44064, phono motor, has
been deleted. This is shown on pages RCD.
CH.19-o. It is available as Part Number 11437
only. Motor parts, Numbers 15237, 37241,
54308, 64471, and 92335, are no longer
available as separate parts. If any of
these are required, a complete motor assembly, No. 11437, must be ordered.
Farnsworth P72 Record Changer
This record changer may be found on
pages RCD.CH. 18-25 through RCD.CH.
19-9 of Rider's Volume XVIII. A production
change has been made in the Surfa -Sonic
Control. The 0.02-µf capacitor has been
changed to 0.1 µf. The 3,300 -ohm resistor
64437
has been changed to 2,200 ohms.
The following have been deleted from
the parts list:
Part No.
Description
0.02 µf, 200 v
3,300 ohms, '/z w
25276
77240
The following have been added to the
parts list:
0.1 µf, 200 v
2,200 ohms, '/z w
25182
77184
Farnsworth P71, P72, P73
Model P71 appears on pagesRCD.CH.19.1
through 19-10 of Rider's Manual Volume
XIX, and Models P72 and P73 appear on
pages RCD. CH. 18-1 through 18-9 of Rider's
Manual Volume XVIII. There appears to
be some misunderstanding concerning the
correct nomenclature of parts numbers
58854 and 64467. Part 58854 is correctly
titled "Starting Lever Spring". The function of this part is to exert the proper
amount of tension on part 58853, starting
reset lever, which in turn performs the
dual purpose of transmitting the motion of
the trip mechanism to the starting lever,
thus setting the starting lever in the
proper position for starting the change
cycle and also resetting the starting and
reject levers, after the change cycle has
started, to their proper positions. Part
64467 performs the operation of transmitting the motion from the reject button
mechanism to the reject lever, thus starting the change cycle. Part 64467 is referred to in the parts list as the "Trip
Spring". In order to avoid future misunderstanding, the nomenclature of this
part has been changed to read-Part
#64467, Reject lever spring.
Farnsworth 41E Capehart
Record Changer
This record changer may be found on
pages RCD.CH. 18.25 through RCD.CH.
18-46 of Rider's Volume XVIII. The change
cycle is placed into operation when the
trip finger releases the mercury switch dog
(part number 561222). If, for any reason,
a changer should fail to cycle properly and,
upon checking, the trip mechanism is found
to be operating normally, it is suggested
that the top of the mercury switch Reset
Lever (part number 561221) be examined
to make sure that it is smooth. Many
hours of operation may tend to wear a
groove in the top of the Reset Lever
which would tend to hold the dog in place,
thus resisting the action of the trip mechanism. This condition is caused by normal
°John
F.
wear due to friction between the two parts.
When this condition is found, it is re-
commended that the mercury switch Reset
Lever be replaced by a new one. The new
stock has been hardened to provide longer
operating life.
In an early production run, a mercury
switch with a metal shell or housing was
used. Due to the slow action and greater
angle of drop necessary to actuate this
switch, it has since been replaced by one
using a glass housing or bulb. Changers
employing the metal -housed mercury switch
should be checked for positive switch action,
especially if it has been reported that the
changer cycles continuously, or more than
once for a single tripping action.
In such cases, it is recommended that
the metal switch be replaced with the
more positive glass bulb type (part numThe conber 90147).
tacts of the Play Control switch must be
set so that positive contact is made when
the play control knob is set in OFF position. In this position the contact points
must be OPEN.
It is not necessary to remove the play
control to adjust these contacts on the
majority of the Model 41-E changers now
in use. A 5/16" diameter observation hole
has been added to the back of the play
control housing directly in line with the
contact points. With the changer on the
service bench, it is an easy matter to
insert a screwdriver or a pair of long nose
pliers and bend the contact springs slightly.
This operation is a little more difficult
with the changer in the cabinet, as there
is only about a 3 -inch clearance between
the back of the play control housing and
the side of the cabinet. A small inspection mirror, a "knob" type screwdriver
and a penlite will be helpful in making
these adjustments when the changer is in
the cabinet.
Federal 1021, 1031, 1032, and 1540
These models are the same as Model
1030T, appearing on pages 16-6 through 16-
Rider's Volume XVI, except for the
cabinets.
Federal 1024TB
This model appears on pages
17-1
through 17-3 of Rider's Volume XVII.
Some sets have been equipped with a
12SK7 tube as an i -f amplifier instead of
the 6SS7. This gives better performance.
Federal 1027, 1035
These models are the same as Model
E1025TB, appearing on pages 16-1 through
16.4 of Rider's Volume XVI, except for
the cabinets.
Federal 1028m, 1029
These models are the same as Model
1024TB, appearing on pages 17-1 through
17.3 of Rider's Volume XVII, except for
the following changes. A 12SK7 tube is
used 'as the i -f amplifier instead of the
The cathode resistor (R2) of the
6SS7.
i -f amplifier can be either 1500 ohms or
750 ohms. C17 can be either 470 µµf or
1000
if. R13 (in filament lead) has been
eliminated, and pin 2 of the 50L6GT tube
connected to pin 7 of the 35Z5GT tube.
8 of
These models appear on pages 17-1,2
through 17-16 of Rider's Volume XVII. To
increase the sensitivity at certain points on
the broadcast and shortwave bands, a 470µµf capacitor, C111, catalog number UCU544, has been added between terminals 3
and 5 on the first i -f transformer. On early
production sets without this capacitor,
the following should be done:
1. This capacitor should be added between
terminals 9 and 10 of wafer #6 on the
band switch.
2. The orange, green, and black leads from
terminals 5, 3, and 8 of the first i -f
transformer to the band switch should
be grouped together and pressed to chassis.
3. C108, a 0.02-µf bypass capacitor, ground
end, should he removed and grounded
under the mounting lug of the first i -f
plate coil.
General Electric
50
This model appears on pages 15-1 through
15-4 of Rider's Volume XV. Add to the
description of catalog number RAU -009
Cabinet-plastic cabinet, the color "Brown
Mottle." Also, add the following to the
parts list:
Cat. No. Description
RAU -017 Cabinet-plastic cabinet (black)
RAU -018 Cabinet-plastic cabinet (dark
ivory)
RAU-019 Cabinet-plastic cabinet (ivory
and red)
RAU-024 Cabinet-plastic cabinet (white
urea)
General Electric
118, 119
These models appear on pages 19-8
through 19-10 of Rider's Volume XIX. The
green grid lead and blue plate lead of
the first i -f transformer must be dressed
as far as possible to the rear of the chassis and against the chassis.
Coupling
capacitor C24 should never lie against
either of these leads. This will eliminate
any possibility of r -f leakage into the
phono -preamplifier which causes stations to
be heard while operating the phonograph.
The following changes should be made
ir, the parts list. Add P2 under symbol
for RJP-003. Delete: RCN -014, C26,
Capacitor-phenolic, for Model 118. Add
to UCC-045: C26, Capacitor, 0.05 µf, 600
v., paper, for Model 118.
General Electric
118, 119M, 119W
These models appear on pages 19-8
through 19-10 of Rider's Manual Volume
XIX. The phono radio switch Si, catalogue
number RSW-043 has been changed to
RSW-065 and the new switch is wired as
follows:
Connect terminals 1 and 3 together.
Connect terminals 5 and 6 together. Connect terminals 7 and 8 together and then
connect terminals 9 and 10 together. The
leads may then be transferred from the
old switch to the corresponding terminals
on the new switch RSW-065, as shown in
the accompanying diagram.
Federal 1034
This model is the same as Model 1024TB,
appearing on pages 17-1 through 17-3 of
Rider's Volume XVII, except for the cabinet.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
General Electric
118, 11.9.
PAGE 20-4 CHANGES
General Electric
This model
through 19-16
The B battery
to the dummy
in Fig. 2.
145
appears on pages 19-13
of Rider's Volume XIX.
minus connection is made
lug 5 on the switch shown
General Electric
150
This model appears in Rider's Manual
Volume XIX on pages 19-10 through 19-12.
If a condition of parasitic oscillation
with strong signals and high volume setting, characterized by whistles and distorted output is reported on late production models in the gray cabinet the following change will correct the condition:
Change the grid return of the i -f am
plifier by moving bus wire lead on #2
lug of first i -f transformer to pin #5 of
the r -f amplifier (1T4), instead of pin #5
of the i -f tube. This changes the bias of
the i -f amplifier from zero volts to minus
1.4 volts.
The following replacements should be
made in the catalogue numbers:
Delete the following parts:
Old
Cat. No.
URD-009
RCE-069
RCW-3013
New
Cat. No.
URE -009
Description
Resistor - 330
ohms, I
w., carbon
RCE-087
C2A,B,C Capacitor Electrolytic
capacitor
RCW-3015 C11
Capacitor -Electrolytic capac-
RHB-004
RHB-009
ALL-029
ALL -034
SJS-068
RJC-016
Symbol
RI
itor`
Monogram But-
ton"
Loop
loop
-
Antenna
Speaker Contact
and Lead
RAB -080 Cabinet Back
Plastic (ivory)
RAU -041 Cabinet Plastic (ivory)
Add the following parts:
RAB -181
IIRD-045
115
RIIS-OIo
IICC-625
C12
LICC-635
C9
AHM-052
Cabinet Back Plastic (gray)
Resistor - 680
ohms, Fj w.,
carbon'Tube
shield`
Capacitor 0.005 uf, 600
Capacitor 0.05 µf, 600
v., paper`
Clip - Clip for
loop antenna
Applies to revellers with chassis number greater
than 100,000.
"The new button is attached to the cabinet by
means of glue.
For chassis numbers up to 55,000 the
capacitors C10, 100 µµf, and C12, 0.005
µf, were not connected according to the
schematic diagram. Their B. connections
were made to the left side of the switch
SIB, together with the capacitors C2A and
C2B. This was done to prevent a howling
sound when the power switch SI is turned
off.
For chassis numbers from 60,000 to 70,000
the capacitors 010 and C12 were wired
according to the schematic diagram. However, the wiring of the capacitors C2A and
C2B has been changed. It was found that,
under certain circumstances, these capacitors added their charge to the peak of
the line voltage, causing a current surge
which was capable of damaging any tube
Therefore, the negative sides of the two
capacitors (C2A and C2B) were connected
to the right side of the switch SIB (B- line)
and the positive side of C2B was connected to the terminal of the S2A switch
which is connected to the B+ line of the
receiver. Now the charge can leak off
after the set is disconnected from the
power supply. The following replacement
has been 'uncle in the parts list:
Connecting pin SIS -008 for the loop
antenna has been changed to MC -001.
General Electric 160
This model appears on
pages 19.17
through 19-21 of Rider's Manual Volume
XIX. The following change in parts list
should be noted:
Change catalogue number RTO.003 to read
RTC -003 T5 Transformer-charging transformer.
GE 201, 202
Since there are electrically identical,
these models have been ad-iid to the
listing for Models 200, 208, and 205 which
appears in Rider's Volume XVIII, pages
18-19 and 18-20.
The following items have been added to
the parts list:
RAU-001 Cabinet-ivory (plastic), model
201
RAU -023
Cabinet-brown (plastic), model
202
The Beam -a-Scope cabinet back listed
as RAB -003 also applies to models 201
and 202
General Electric 230, Kaiser-Frazer
This model appears on pages 18-26
through 18-28 of Rider's Volume XVIII.
When rough manual tuning action is experienced, it is usually traced to insufficient spacing between the end of the
center shaft of the turret assembly and
the guide rod bracket near the tuning
shaft. Production requirements call for
one or more (as required) brass shim
washers at this point for smooth tuning
action. Where rough tuning is experienced,
a thin "C" washer slipped onto the end
of the center shaft of the turret in addition to the brass shim washers will
relieve binding and result in smoother tuning action.
GE 230, 233
Model 230 appears in Rider's Volume
XVIII on pages 18.26 through 18-28 and
Model 233 in the same Volume, pages 18through 18-36. To the replacement parts
list for these two models add RMX-120,
Coil Cap Retaining Spring and Screw.
A quantity of these are used to service
the antenna r -f or oscillator -converter coil
and shield assemblies where the tabs have
been broken. The spring is placed upon
the assembly to form ) bridge. Bearing
upon the coil and held by the small self
tapping screw through the hole in the
shield, the bridge retains the coil within
its shield in lieu of tabs.
While early production receivers of
Model 233 were wired as shown in the
schematic, late production changes revise
the power supply circuit as follows:
R24 has been deleted and the circuit
for 030 is completed by connecting its
free end to the secondary winding lead
going to pin 5 of the rectifier, VS, so that
C30 appears across the secondary of T4.
Resistors R.26 and R27 are connected in
series with one another and across the
primary winding of T4. The junction of
the resistors is grounded.
To conform with these production
changes, Cat. Part URE-073, R24 is deleted from the replacement parts list and
item URD-023, R26 and R27, 82 ohms,
y w., carbon resistor is added.
Cat. No. RMX-123, pushbutton locking
screw is also added. This screw locks the
pushbutton device for automatic station
tuning and has a knurled head and threaded end.
29
-
°John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Cat. No. ROY -028 for Cl has been
changed for an improved antenna trimmer,
8-480 µµf, used in late production, listed
RCY-052. This item allows knob adjustment of the antenna trimmer for which a
knob is available under Cat. No. RDK-158.
General Electric 233, Kaiser-Frazer
This model appears on pages 18-29
through 1840 of Rider's Manual Volume
In cases wne.e the volume and tuning
control shafts appear too short to aceutnodate the shaft parts and knobs, a
loaned lip which is bent forward in the
escutcheon opening of the instrument panel
will be found to obstruct receiver installation. This lip may be removed by either
filing or bending it back.
In instances where the hole for the
receiver mounting bracket has not been
accurately located, it is possible that the
receiver is positioned a bit too far toward
the front of the car to allow the receiver
control shafts to come through instrument
panel holes to their maximum extent. If
the ''knock out" hole for the mounting
brackets screw must be drilled, make
certain it is accurately positioned.
In case of pushbutton sticking, check for
and remove any burrs from the bottom of
the cast grille for pushbutton openings. A
binding tuning shaft will also cause the
pushbottons to stick or fail to return to
their normal positions. To clear shaft from
binding, enlarge the tuning shaft opening
using a reamer, or a rat tail file.
If the receiver is dead, check installation
wiring to make certain the correct lead is
connected to the ignition and instrument
light switch respectively. If the receiver
lead that should go to the instrument light
control is connected to the ignition switch.
the receiver will not operate though pilot'
lamps will light.
Check the loudspeaker plug connection.
Though the plug pin receptacles in the
speaker lead connector are arranged in
such a manner to be polatized, it is often
that the operator neglects to alien the
receptacles with respect to the male plug
pins at the speaker. Forcing together of
the incorrectly aligned parts is liable to
cause the male pins to break through into
the thin walls of the non -conducting adjacent holes of the speaker plug. resulting
in open circuit wiring to the loudspeaker.
Exposure of the radio receiver to such
dampness as water drain -leaks upon the
receiver components and wiring. results in
voltage breakdown at tube sockets (especially the 6V6 output tubes), or the
shorting of capacitors and resistors. The
r-f trimmer strip at the center of the
receiver will also be affected, causing the
radio to become weak or dead. Water
leaks around the windshield, and screw
head holding the set mounting bracket to
the cowl should be well sealed against
water draining upon the receiver. A
thorough check for probable leaks and the
necessary steps .taken to prevent their occurrence should be taken at the time of
the initial radio receiver installation.
A lower than normal battery voltage can
he the cause of the radio to be weak or
rail to operate. The receiver will not
function properly if the battery voltage
men.ures Iraq than 5.8 volts.
The following changes in production wiring should be noted in the schematic diagram:
Capacitor 028 has been changed to the
left side of switch, Sl, at the junction of
C27 and the switch connection. The ground
lead of C28 is connected to chassis ground.
CHANGES PAGE 20-5
GE 210, 211, 212
These modela appear in Rider's Volume
XVIII, pages 18.21 through 18-25. In the
schematic diagram C12 is shown as 22 µµt.
This should be corrected to read 20 µµS.
C12 is listed correctly in the replacement
parts list as Cat. No. RCW-3016, 20 µµf.
The following items should be added to
the replacement parts list:
Textolite (to insulRII -021 -Insulator
ate the volume control from
chassis)
Textolite (to insulRII.022-Insulator
ate the band switch from chassis)
In the tube and trimmer location shown
on page 18.25, the secondary tuning slug
of T6 is available through the top of the
can, while the primary tuning slug of T6
is available through the holes in the bottom of the can.
General, Electric 219, 220, 221
These models appear on pages 15-28
through 15-31 of Rider's Volume XV. In
the parts list, catalog number RLL-003
should be identified as a replacement loop
assembly only for Models 219 and 220.
Catalog number RLL-025 should be added
as the loop assembly for Model 221.
-
General Electric 250, 260
Model 250 appears on pages 15-32 through
Rider's Volume XV. Model 260
appears on pages 16-6 through 16-12 of
Rider's Volume XVI. The following should
be added to the parts list for both models:
Hinge pin for cover, catalog number RMP15.36 of
011.
General Electric 321A
This model is the same as Model 321
Late, appearing on pages 15-46 and 15-52 of
Rider's Volume XV.
General Electric 356, 357, 358
These models appear on pages 18-40
through 18-44 of Rider's Volume XVIII.
The following changes should be made in
the parts list. Under UCG025, remove
symbols C43, C65, C70. Add to UCC-026
symbols C43, C65, C70.
General Electric 356, 357, 358;
376, 377, 378
Models 356, 357, and 358 appear on
pages 18-40 through 18-44 of Rider's Volume XVIII. Models 376, 377, and 378
appear on pages 19-36 through 19-41 of
Rider's Volume XIX. When an old type
construction 6BE6 (date coded 8/17 or
before) is replaced with a new type con&
truction 6BE6 (dated 8/22 or later) it is
necessary that the f-m oscillator choke
coil L8 be a 13V -turn coil (catalogue
number RLF-012) instead of the 17-turn
coil that was used in early production
models.
General Electric 376, 377, 378
These models appear on pages 19.36
through 19-41 of Rider's Volume XIX. The
f -m choke, LS, in the cathode circuit of
the 6BE6 oscillator converter tube, V2,
was listed under catalog number RLF-007.
Due to a production change, this choke
now becomes RLF-012.
Delete URD-933, R12, Resistor-220
ohms, 1/2 w., carbon. Add URD-037, R12,
Resistor-330 ohms, 1/z w., carbon. Add
RCW-3009, C37, Capacitor-20.5 µµf. ±5%,
ceramic. Delete UCW-2011, C37, Capacitor
-20 µµf, ceramic. Add symbol number P4 to RJP-003. Delete P3 and P4
(Plug-preamplifier power plug) from RJP004. Add RJP-005, P3, Plug-preamplifier
power plug.
©John
F.
General Electric 417, 417A
Model 417 appears on pages 16-16
through 16-19, and pages 16-81 through
16-24 of Rider's Volume XVI.
Model
417A
appears on pages 17.87,28
through 17-38 of Rider's Volume XVII.
These changes are in reference to the wiring of Phono Preamp Plug RJP-005.
Since some of the plugs supplied are
inconsistent with specifications regarding
the identification notch often referred to
in wiring guides, this notch must be disregarded for indentification purposes to
avoid confusion. While in some receiver
productions the position of this key
notch will differ from others, nevertheless, all receiver productions are wired
the same in respect to the polarized
system of prong arrangement.
CHASSIS GND.
(F)
6K6 tubes for Hoffman C501 and C511.
(A) B+
its
The parts list should be changed to read
follows:
Hoffman
QWrTO
LIGHT
0
HEATER
IJ HEATER
6,3
ltDiltT
Phone Preamp Plug RJP-005 in the GE
417, 417A
Description
C47, C23, C24, 100µµf, ± 20%, mica
C25
0.005µf, 600 volt, tubular
C28, C32
Symbol
should be wired as shown.
When replacing the plug RJP-005, it
is only necessary to follow the simple
wiring rule as used in all receiver production where the cluster of four prongs
is first located within one-half the area
of the plug base as determined by the
imaginary center line. Next, locate the
two remaining prongs as viewed from
the prong end of the plug and begin the
wiring in a clockwise direction as indicated by the letter designations in the
accompanying diagram. The letters A, B,
C, etc., in the diagram, are keys to wiring points, as referred to in the various
published receiver circuit diagrams.
paper
10µf, 450 volt, tubular
electrolytic
C31, C33, C34 0.01µf, 400 volt, tubular
paper
0.00 laf, 600 volt, tubular
C4I, C46
C29, C30
pa
C43
C42, C44
C45
er
0.01µf, 600 volt, tubular
3305µf, ± 10%, mica or
ceramic
650µµf, ± 10%, mica or
Number
4000
4102
4203
4112
4104
4103
4010
ceramic
4011
Loop antenna
LI
55210
LS
12" speaker, electrodynamic 9044
22,000 ohm,
20%, 1fi w 4501
R2, R17
2.2 megohm, ± 20%, % w
R3, R27
4502
10,000 ohm, ± 10%, 2 w
4503
R4
4,700 ohm, -1-720%, % w
4543
RII
47,000 ohm,--i- 20%, % w
R12, R I8
4504
500
ohm,
20%,
w
R23
±
3
4550
1,500 ohm,
R28
5%, 6 % w 4701
R13, R14, R24, 47,000 ohm,--i- 5%, % w
4537
R25
22,000 ohm, + 5%, % w
R26
4538
Output transThrmer
T10
5108
±
±
Magnavox AMP-101C
This model is the same as Model AMP 101A on pages 17-1 and 17-2 of Rider's
Volume XVII, except for the following
changes in parts values.
Ref.
Part. No.
No. Description
2-1
Capacitor, paper, 0.1 µf
250152G33
600 v.
2-2
Capacitor, paper,
0.1
µf,
600 v.
8
9
Resistor, composition,
15,000 ohms,±10%,1/2 w.
Resistor, composition,
100,000 ohms, 10%, 1 w.
250152G33
230084G76
230084G86
Magnavox AMP 111D, AMP 111E
These models are the same as Model
AMP 111, appearing in Rider's Volume
XVIII, pages 18.4 through 18-7, except for
the following parts value changes:
Ref. No.
Description
Part. No.
9
Capacitor, paper, 0.03 µf, 250152G25
Antenna rowieetion change. for Hoffman
('501 and 0511.
400 V
Resistor, composition, 230084074
22.000 ohms. ±10%. 14W
Hoffman C501 and C511, Chassis 108
same as Model
These models are ti
A501, Ch. 108S, appearing on pages 15-6
through 1510 of Rider's Manual Volume
XV, except that four 6K6 beam -power tubes
are used in push-pull parallel in the .ndput
6V6's.
stage instead of the two push -I
The change is indicated in the accampar.: ing diagrams. The alignment is still the
same as given on page 15-9.
22
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
('ire ait changes for Hoffman. C501 and C511
Hatay RP570T
This model appears in the Miscellaneous
section, page 15.8 of Rider's Manual Volume XV. This model is listed in the
Indexes as RP507T. It should read
R P570T.
PAGE 20-6 CHANGES
Magnavox AMP-109B, AMP-109C,
AMP -109D
These are the same as Model AMP-109
on pages 18-1,2 through 18-3 of Rider's
Volume XVIII, except for the following
changes. In Model AMP-109D, only, the
4 -ampere, 250-volt fuse has been removed
from the a-c line. Pin number 1 of the
changer motor receptacle is now connected
to the bottom of the primary of the a -c
transformer. A 4 -ampere, 250 -volt fuse is
connected from the bottom of the primary
of the a-c power transformer to the high
side of the a -c power socket. This side of
the a -c power socket is also connected to
pin 1 of the speaker socket.
The following parts have been substi-
tuted:
Ref.No. Part No.
3
Description
260152633 Capacitor, tubular,
µf, 600
22
22
32,
88
99
106
0.1
V.
s
Magnavox CR197 Series
Models CR197, CR197A, and CR197B
appear on pages 16-1, 2 through 16-7 of
Rider's Manual Volume XVI. The schematics and parts lists for Models CR197C,
CR197D, and CR197E are similar to those
listed above except for the following
changes:
Part No. 8 is now connected from ground
to the junction of 24, 83, and 99, in
all models.
Part No. 9 is now connected from ground
to the junction of 25, 85, and 99, in
all models.
The value of Part No. 13 has been
changed from 20 µµf to 13 µµf in all
models.
Resistor 61 has been deleted in Models
CR197D and CR197E, as shown in the
accompanying diagram.
CR197C
Capacitor, molded mica,
250159G131
680 µµf, +10%
49, 65 Omitted
Resistor, composition, 680,000
ohms, +10%, % w
230084G90
Switch, rotary band selector 160172GI
Omitted
CRI97D
Capacitor, molded mica,
680 µµf, +10%
32, 49, 61, 65 Omitted
88
Resistor, composition, 680,000
ohms, +10%, tf2 w
89
Resistor, composition, 150,000
ohms, +10%, 44 w
90, 91, 106 Omitted
19
19
32,
88
250152G33 Capacitor, tubular, 0.1
µf, 600 V.
230084G21 Resistor, composition,
22,000 ohms, % w.
(AMP-109B only)
230084G18 Resistor, composition,
6,800 ohms,
w.
(AMP -109C & D only)
4
19
89
90,
106
CR197E
Capacitor, molded mica,
680 µµf, ±10%
61, 65 Omitted
Resistor, composition, 680,000
ohms, ±10%, th w
Resistor, composition, 150,000
ohms, +10%,w
91 Omitted
Socket, 6 volt
32
49
6l
65
88,
99
106
CR197A
Capacitor, paper, 0.02 µf,
600 v
Omitted
Resistor, composition, 2,200
ohms, lh w
Resistor, composition, 10,000
ohms, 6 w
89, 90,91 Omitted
Switch, rotary band selector
Omitted
Magnavox
Part No.
250159GI31
230084G90
230084G88
189788G1
CR198C, CR198D, CR198E, CR198F,
CRI98H, and CR198J are the same as
those for CR198, CR198A, and CR198B
except for the changes that are noted
below.
Item No. 13 has been changed from 20µµf
to 13 µµf.
Section 1 front of item 99 is the same for
all models except for J. This wafer is
shown in Figure 1.
Fig. 1.
Wafer
used in Magnavox CR198
250152G37
005
005
005
015
015
01S
OIS
00066
0006a
00066
OIS
OMIT
85
OMITTED
00066
680K
.015
OMIT
690K
22K
RIOT
650K
225
220
4700
22K
CR196F
,_,9001
OMITTED OMITTED 150K
HOC
OMITTED DOTTED OMITTED
USED
OMITTED; SEE
69
106
2200
90
2200
150K
USED
CRy4O
CRI964
OMIT
OMIT
820R
52K
6200
225
OMIT
USED
OMIT
USED
3300
350e
10K
IOK
I
oxauar clRwrt
OMITTED OMITTED OMITTED OMITTED 04MES
OMIT
OMIT
OMIT
OMIT
OMIT
the 6J5, 1st a -f stage, has been deleted.
Resistor 83 is now connected between
pins 1 and 5 of the 6J5, in all models
except CR198A. The values are given
in the accompanying table.
Items 48, 90, and 89 have been added as
shown in Figure 3. Item 48 appears
Fig. 3.
6SK7
I
in Models CRI98H and CR108J only.
Its value is 0.001 µf.
The 6 -volt socket, item 106, has bcru
inserted across the filament leads in
models CR198E, CR198F, CR198H,
and CR198J.
'l'he positions of items 8 and 9 for all
models have been changed from the transformer side of the R-C filter to ground.
to the wafer side and to ground.
These models appear on pages 18.16
through 18-25,26 of Rider's Manual Volume
XVIII. Two resistors, R143 and R144,
have been added to Ch. CR -202C. R143
is connected between C41 and the junction
of R118 and C64. R144 is located between
the junction of R142, R113, and C40, and
the rotary band switch 153.
The parts list should be amended to
include the following:
Ref.
No.
34
40
41
113
124
-F
142
143
144
Fig. 8.
Circuit changes for Magnavox
CR198 Series.
Magnavox CR -202 Series
Series.
Auxiliary
Circuit for Magnavox
142
CR198 Series.
Resistor 62 has been deleted from all
models except CR198A, CRI98B, and
CR198C. The auxiliary circuit is shown
in Figure 2.
The connection from item 99, section 2
rear, to the cathode and grid leads of
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CR -202A
Capacitor, mica 510 µµf, ± 5%
Capacitor, mica 300 µµf, ± 10%
Capacitor, mica, 510 µµf, + 5%
Resistor, comp, 82,000 ohms,
% w, ±10%
Resistor, comp, 220,000 ohms,
t,4 w, +10%
Omitter
CR -202B
Resistor, comp, 3.3 megohm,
% w
40
41
capacitor, mica,
143
144
250159G88
250159G64
230084G85
230084G27
Resistor, comp,
470,000 ohms, ÿs w
Resistor, comp,
33,000 ohms, ', w, ±10%
Resistor, comp,
150,000 ohms, w
CR -202D
Resistor, comp,
470,000. ohms, % w
230084G34
µf,
0.0015µE,±10%
11
124
Part No.
250I59G64
Omitted
Omitted
CR -202C
Capacitor, mica, 0.002
124
230084G19
CR 197B
Capacitor, paper, 0.02 µf,
600 y
49, 88, 89, 90, 91, 106 Omitted
905
02
00055
Chassis CR198, CR198A, and CR198B appear on pages 164 through 16-11 of Rider's
Manual Volume XVI. The schematic
diagrams and the parts lists for Chassis
230084G15
32
005
31
21
0001
230084G88
250152G37
160172G1
01
0001
005
.0001
26
CR
Magnavox CR198 Series
Part No.
Part No.
PRIM
196A
00001.6
CR
91
The position of item 12 has been changed
for model J only. Capacitor 12 for
model J has been removed from across
item 4 and inserted in the wafer lead
to the junction of items 4 and 43. In
all other models, it remains in parallel
with item 4.
Resistor 91 has been inserted from the tap
of item 97 to item 91. Its value is
shown in the accompanying table.
106, a 6-volt socket, has been added between the filament connections
and the lamps in Model CR197E only.
The supplement to the parts list is as
follows:
LECTRICAJ. vaLUE
198! CR1980
16
RO
62
230084G90
-F
Circuit changes for the
Magnavox CRI97D
and CR197E.
ITEM
72
250159G131
6SK7
I
Table of electrical values for Magnavox
CR198 Series.
250160G68
250160G66
230084G94
230084C80
230084G26
230084G94
CHANGES PAGE 20-7
RCA RP -178 Series
Magnavox CR-208C
This model is the same as Model CR 208 appearing on pages 17.13 and 17-25,36
through 1731 of Rider's Volume XVII,
except for the following changes. Capacitor
15 has been changed in value from 510 µµf
to 150 µµf. A 150,000 -ohm resistor (80) has
been connected in series sO.h capacitor 15.
Capacitor 16 and resistor 72 in series with
it have both been omitted. Capacitor 17
has been changed from 510 µf to 150 µf.
A 33,000 -ohm resistor (79) has been connected in series with capacitor 17. Resistor
71 has been changed from 220,000 ohms to
470,000 ohms.
The following changes have been made
in the parts list:
Ref. No.
Description
Part No.
15
Capacitor, fixed mica,
220 µµf, 500 v
16
17
250160tí68
Omitted
Capacitor, fixed mica,
1500 µµf, 500 v
71
72
79
80
250160066
Omitted
Resistor, composition,
230084080
Resistor, composition,
150,000 ohms, ±10%,
R
I
R4
R7
R8
230084088
Majestic 6FM769, 6FM783,
Ch. 6C 14D
Model 6FM783 is a 1949 styled, 6 -tube,
using Oak and Milwaukee record changers,
console combination using a cabinet similar to Model 8FM783, which appears on
pages 17-17, 18 through 17-22 of Rider's
Manual Volume XVII and on page C18.4
of Rider's Manual Volume XVIII. Model
6FM769 is a 1949 styled, 6 -tube, console
combination using the Aero record changer.
For voltages, alignment, and chassis parts
refer to data on Model 6FM773 which appears on pages 18.3 through 18.4 of Rider's
Manual Volume XVIII. The output transformer, 'l'3, is located on the speaker
instead of on the chassis. The parts list
remains the same except for the following changes:
Symbol Pan No. Description
LI
S-2017 Loop antenna assembly (BC only)
117-108
Dial scale, glass
Dial scale, background
117-109
Dial scale clips, (6 req'd)
129-65
Dial pointer
133-34
15-91
Socket, speaker
115-61
Cabinet, console -Model 6FM783
Cabinet, console -Model
115-70
21-24
21-31
6FM769-mahogany
Oak record changer (6FM783)
Milwaukee record changer
21-36
22-63
122-57
128-63
128-68
128-69
128-80
120-60
123-39
123-40
Aero record changer (6FM769)
Speaker, 8" PM
Escutcheon plate
Knob, tuning
Knob, tone
Knob, volume
Knob, bandswitch
Spring, for knobs
Cabinet back Model 6FM783
Cabinet back Model 6FM769
(6FM783)
Motorola CR7
This model is the same as Model CR6,
appearing on pages 15.9 and 16-10 of Rider's
Volume XV and pages 16.1 through 16-8 of
Ili,ler'.c Volume XVI.'
Noblitt-Sparks Chassis RE-202, RE -231
These chassis are used in Models 555,
555A, 552N, and 552ÁN, appearing on pages
16-1 through 16.4 of Rider's Volume XVI.
© John F.
for the DA -601.
R5, R6
±10%a,
w.
the pentode (12BA6, 12SG7). Capacitor C5
is connected from the plate lead of the
tetrode (50B5, 50L6) to ground. The parts
list is given below, with the exception of
those parts that are identical to those
R2
230084G94
33,000 ohms,
1/2 w.
Chassis 4D7 is used in models DA -601,
DB -602. This chassis is similar to model
DA301,vhich appears on page 19-5 of Rider's
Manual Volume XIX. The 4D7 differs
from the 6B8 in the following ways:
Capacitors Cl, C2 and C7 have been
deleted. A capacitor, designated as C2,
has been inserted in place of C7. Resistor
RI has been removed from across the
junctions of R2 and R3, and LI and C2,
and is now located in the cathode lead of
LI
C4
C3
Description
Capacitor, paper, tubular,
0.025f, 400v
RC -10680
Resistor, carbon,
68 ohms, 1w
RC -11003
Resistor, carbon,
100,000 ohms, 16w
RC -11005
Resistor, carbon,
10 megohms, 1w
RC -14703
Resistor, carbon,
470,000 ohms, tibw
RC -11500
Resistor, carbon,
150 ohms, sw
RC -32001
Resistor, carbon,
2,000 ohms, Sow
TRF10017-A Antenna coil
CP-12502
Condenser, paper, tubular,
0.0050.f, 200v.
CP-12202
Condenser, paper, tubular,
0.002µf, 200v.
RCA Q109, Ch. RC -602
This model appears on pages 183
through 18-10 of Rider's Volume XVIII.
On some sets the filter capacitor C44
has two sections of 15 µf and one section
of 20 µf at 450 volts and one section of
20 µf at 25 volts. The capacitor specified
in the Q109 service data has three sections
of 10 µf at 450 volts and one section of
Use the specified
20 µf at 25 volts.
capacitor (Stock No. 33014) if replacement
is required.
RCA Q109, Q 109X,
Ch. RC -602, RC -602A
These models appear on pages 18-3
through 18-10 of Rider's Volume XVIII.
The following should be added to the
parts list under Chassis Assemblies.
72996
Capacitor-molded paper, 0.05µf,
600 v. (C53)
30787
Resistor-fixed composition,
47,000 ohms,
through RCD.CH. 18-23.
The RP -178 record changer is for operation on 105-125 volts, 60 cycles, a.c. A
conversion spring (Stock No. 73158) may
be used for 50 -cycle operation.
The
RP-178-2 is the same as RP -178 except for
a motor (Stock No. S-4283) for 105-125
volts, 25 cycles, a.c. This has been manufactured only for Canadian use. The
RP-178-3 is the same as RP -178 except
for a motor (Stock No. S-4773) for 105-125
volts or 210-250 volts, 60 cycles, a.c., and
a 6 prong plug (Stock No. 11953). A
conversion spring (Stock No. S-4774) may
be used for 50-cycle operation.
The following should be added to the
parts list
Stock No. Description
73158
Spring - Spring aleeve for converting 60 -cycle motors to 50
cycle operation
:
Symbol Part No.
C2
CP-14203
Resistor, composition,
470,000 ohms, ±10%
lh w.
This model appears in Rider's Manual
Volume XVIII on pages RCD.CH. '18.14
Meck Chassis 4D7
1/2
w. (R28)
RCA RP -176 Record Changer
This record changer appears on pages
RCD.CH. 17-1 through RCD.CH. 17-12 of
Rider's Volume XVII. The method of
attaching the pivot arm spring (Ref. #75
has been changed. The stud (Ref. #74) is
no longer being used. A curved spring
which clips into the inside rear of the
tone arm is used in its place. The timing
notch originally in the rim of the main
cam and gear is no longer used. A small
metal projection has been added to the
inside of the rim of the main cam and
gear for the same purpose. The indention
in the hub of the main cam and gear into
which a projection on the ratchet lever
fits may also be used for timing purposes.
Add the following stock number to the
parts list: 73198-Curved spring for anchoring pivot arm spring.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
-
RCA 8BX5, 8BX54, 8BX55;
Ch. RC -1059, RC -1059A
These models appear on pages 19.5
through 19.9 of Rider's Volume XIX. The
position of the battery pack in these
models affects the loop inductance. When
the battery is removed, the loop inductance will increase and the sensitivity will
decrease because of improper electrical
tracking of the loop circuit with the
oscillator.
When a battery is temporarily unavailable, a sheet of aluminum 81/2" long by
3-5/8" wide and from 0.020" to 0.050"
thick may be placed in the position occupied by the battery so that it is lying
flat on the bottom of the cabinet. This
sheet of aluminum has an effect on the
loop inductance similar to the effect caused by the battery and will, therefore, return the performance of the loop to approximately the same as obtained when
a batter, is installed. If aluminum is not
available, brass may be substituted with
approximately the same performance. DO
NOT USE STEEL OR IRON since the
performance will be adversely affected.
If desired, the sheet of aluminum may be
waxed to the inside bottom of the case.
DO NOT PLACE ANY WAX, CEMENT. OR OTHER MATERIAL ON
THE LOOP WINDINGS.
For the reasons mentioned, the battery
as well as the chassis must be properly
installed in the case when realigning the
oscillator an antenna circuits. Failure to
do this will result in extremely poor performance because of improper tracking.
It is, of course, necessary to remove the
chassis from the case for i -f alignment.
Since the first i -f stage employs neutralization by means of capacitor C7, incorrect
alignment of the primary of transformer T2
will result if stage -by-stage alignment
procedure is employed. Follow the alignment procedure on page 19.5 to assure
correct alignment.
The following changes have been made
in the parts list.
Delete:
73144
Hinge-
Add:
Hinge-cabinet hinge (2 required)
It has been found that the detent used
74180
on the original hinge (73144) caused strain
ou the cabinet which might result in
breakage of the cabinet or back if roughly
handled. The new hinge (74180) does not
have this detent.
PAGE 20-8 CHANGES
RCA Record Changers RP -176,
RP-177 Series
Model RP -176 may be found on pages
RCD.CH. 17-1 through RCD.CH. 17-12
of Rider's Volume XVII. The RP -177
Series appears on pages RCD.CII. 18-1
through RCD.CII. 18-13 of Rider's Volume
XVIII. The numbers in the following
discussion refer to the item numbers in
the service data for Model RP-176. The
numbers in parentheses refer to the item
numbers of the RP -177 series.
When the changer shows failure to trip,
or pre -tripping characteristics, the following
should be done: The engagement of items
59 (67) and 41 (93) must be 1/64" to
1/32"-file or bend positioning pin of item
59 (67) to obtain proper engagement. The
engaging surfaces of items 59 (67) and
41 (93) must be smooth and free of burrs.
Stone the surfaces if required-if the surfaces are rough, the tone arm jumps into
the label when the mechanism trips. The
overlap between the trip pawl of item 85
(29) and the ratchet of item 59 (67) must
be 3/32" to 1/8".
STOP
FI
PIN
TO
S
OVERLAP
RATCHET
55 1411
PAWL
PART OF 41193
RATCHET LEVER
RUNNING CLEARANCE
TURNTABLE
TURNTABLE SPINDLE
rG
=u /
-
MOTORBOARD
_.ORIVE
PAWL E CAM
ASSEM 41 (93)
%
i i
4: /
35 SPINDLE
SUPPORT (82)
MUST BE SEATED
To prevent binding of the turntable, it
should be adjusted as shown.
If the turntable should bind, refer to
Fig. C and the following procedure. The
spindle must be seated in spindle support
35 (82). The turntable must be parallel
to the motorboard. A running clearance
must
provided between drive wheel
39 (90) and spindle support 35 (82) and
also between drive wheel 39 (90) and pawl
and cam assembly 41 (93).
Record damage may be caused by incorrect spacing between the record separator shelf and knife or by an improperly shaped knife edge. Refer to Fig.
D.
S9(0
SECTION 'A -A'
POSITIONING
PIN
64Tq2
FLAT ON BOTTOM.003 TO .005 RADIUS-
SURFACES AT THIS POINT
MUST BE SMOOTH
SURFACE TO BE
SMOOTH
(95) 41
SEPARATOR
KNIFE
Tone arm travel over the record label can
be corrected by following these instructions.
If the tone arm travels over the record
label, try the following procedure. While
holding the pawl of item 41 (93) disengaged from the ratchet lever 59 (67),
place the tone arm in the eccentric groove
of a record with the turntable running.
The tone arm should swing back and forth
freely. Should the tone arm jump the ex centric groove and sweep over the label,
more overlap is needed between the pawl
of trip lever 85 (29) and the ratchet of
item 59 (67). This can be obtained by
filing approximately 1/32" from the trip
pawl as indicated in Fig. A.
If the spacing between the record posts
need ajustment, refer to page RCD.CH.
173 (RCD.CH. 18.6), adjustments B and
C, and Fig. B accompanying. Set the
record separator post, as described in the
service data, in the 10 -inch position. Adjust the 10 -inch position of the record support by means of '"e screws "B," so that
SPINDLE
SCREWS
'ASTOP BRACKET
RECORD SEPARATOR
8
NORMAL DIMENSION
A E
8
10' POS. 4 lit -
It' POS.
5'
3
35
RECORD SUPPORT
The spacing between the record posts may
be adjusted as indicated above.
the A and B dimensions indicated in Fig.
13
are obtained. Set the record support.
RCA 8BX6, 8BX65, Chassis RC -1040C
These models appear on pages 18-11
through 18.14 of Rider's Volume XVIII.
The parts list should be changed as follows:
Add: 71040 Socket -2 contact female socket for external loop
Delete: Speaker assembly 92577.3.
73123 Speaker-4" PM Speaker
Use Stock No. 71058 Speaker (4" x 6")
as replacement.
WHEEL 39 190)
b
E
(z9) 85
to the 12 -inch position, and adjust by
means of the screws "B" so that dimension B indicated on Fig. B is obtained.
Bend the stop bracket so that dimension
A indicated on Fig. B is obtained.
_
064
.000
-005
I
DISTANCE BETWEEN
SEPARATOR KNIFE
AND SHELF.
RCA 8BX6, Chassis RC -1040D
This model is the same as the mode!
nwng Chassis No. RC -1040C, appearing in
Ridcr:s I'afume XVIII on pages 18-11
through 18.14, except that the external
loop antenna socket is omitted on
RC -1040D.
RCA 8R71, 8R72, 8R74, 8R75, 8R76:
Ch. RC -1060, RC -1060A
These models appear on pages 19-10
through 19.15 of Rider's Volume XIX.
The second i -f transformer (T3) used in
these receivers may be stamped 970435-2
or 970435-5. The d -c resistance (82 ohms)
of the windings indicated on the schematic
is for transformer 970435-2. The d -e resistance of the same windings in transformer
970435-5 is 12 ohms.
The number of turns of dial drive cord
on the tuning knob shaft has been changed
from 31/2 turna to 41/4 turns.
The following changes have been made
in the parts list.
Delete:
79.11L3
Transformer
71033 Washer
71034 Washer
Add:
74019 Transformer-second i -f transformer,
dual (T3)
71333 Washer
insulating washer
extruded for mounting output transformer (2 required)
--
73332
-
Washer-insulating washer-f l a
for mounting output transformer
t(2
required)
In
Adjust the spacing between the record
separator shelf and the knife to prevent
record damage.
RCA 8BX65, Ch. RC -1040C
This model is the same as Model 8BX6
which appears in Rider's Volume XVIII
on pages 18-11 through 18-14, except for
the finish of the metal case parts. Model
8BX6 has an aluminum finish and Model
SBX65 has a gold finish. Replacement
parts are identical except for the following which are used on Model 8BX65
only
Stock No.
Description
73879
Back - Case back complete with
center strip, feet, and spring latch
73878
Front - Case front complete
less shutter
73875
Link - Carrying handle link
group, consisting of two links,
two shafts and four drive screws
(two groups required)
73876
Screw - No. &32 x 5/16" screw
to hold case together (Located
under c a r y i n g handle, two
:
73877
required)
Shutter - Case shutter
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
some instruments, speakers stamped 925724W have been used as a substitute for the
specified speaker (92572-2W). For replacement use the specified speaker (stock
number 72201).
In some chassis, two 3300 -ohm resistors
are connected in parallel as a substitute
for the 1500 -ohm resistor, R22. In other
chassis, two 820 -ohm resistors are connected
in series as a substitute for this resistor.
RCA 8R71 to 8R76, Ch. RC -1060,
RC -1060A; 9W1 0 1, 9W1 0 3,
Ch. RC -618B
Models 8R71 to 8R76 appear on pages
through 19-15 of Rider's Manual
Volume XIX and Models 9W101 and
9W103 appear on pages 19-35 through 1944 of the same Volume.
Some ceramic capacitors Cll (5 µµf)
have been used which have a color code
of black -green -black. The capacitor is correct, but the color code is incorrect. The
normal color code of this capacitor is
green-black -white.
19-10
CHANGES PAGE 20-9
RCA 8R71, 8R72, 8R74, 8R75, 8R76,
8V90, 8V91
Models 8R71, 8R72, 8R74, 8R75, and
8R76 appear in Rider's Manual Volume
XIX on pages 19.10 through 19-15 and
Models 8V90 and 8V91 appear in the same
Volume on pages 19-16 through 19-25.
To insure greater oscillator stability a
support has been added for the f-m oscillator coil as illustrated in the accompanying diagram. Adjustment of the coil is
CO,
First Production RC -616
JFour position selector switch
lM.M.-PHONO-AM-FM
Aux. input jack is not used
Second Production RC-616F
give position selector switch
RCA 8V151, Ch. RH -121C
This model appears on pages 18-25 through
Rider's Manual Volume XVIII.
In the diode load circuit, R29 (270,000)
should be deleted-R20 (82,000)- and R34
(180,000) should be added, as shown in
the accompanying diagram.
18-40 of
T.
TRANS)
F
(1
C49
loo
1AUX.-M.M.-PHONO-AM-FM
SUPPORT
INNT
OM1
FRONT VIEW
TUNING
CONO
OSC
CO..
COK
SUP PORT
Lta
In order to provide adequate lead
length, resistor RIO (56,000 ohms) has
been changed from V2 watt to 1 watt.
Chassis RC-616F, used in the second
production of these instruments, is very
similar to Chassis RC-616 except for the
following:
TOP VIEW
Aux. input jack is used,
Except for the following replacement
parte, all parts are identical.
74163 Selector switch is used in place of
73608 (switch S1, S2)
74164 Control panel decal for mahogany
or walnut instruments is used in
place of 73764 decal
74354 Control panel decal for blonde instruments is used in place of 73765
R31
22K
S 6
REAR
c50
RS7
620K
100
R29
R19
1
MEG
R34
112K
IDOK
decal
Coil Sr¢pors
Diode Load Circuit for RK -121(.'.
support has been added to insure greater
oscillator stability for the f -m oscillator
coil for the RCA Models 8R71, 8R72, 8R74,
A
The wiring diagram is incorrect in the
wiring of the range switch. The illustration below shows the changes which should
be made.
Late production models of Chassis No.
RK -121C use a crystal rectifier for a -m
detection instead of the diode plate (pin
6 of V8) of 6AT6 as shown.
8R76, 8R76, 8V90, 8V91.
made as described in the Service Data.
After adjustment the coil is cemented to
the coil support.
The following is added to the parts list:
74202 Support-Polystyrene coi I support
complete with mounting bracket.
RCA 8V112, Chassis RC-616
This model appears on pages 18-17
through 18.24 of Rider's Volume XVIII.
To minimize the possibility of "A" band
oscillation and to reduce interference, a
resistor (R35) has been added in the
mixer grid circuit as shown in the accompanying diagram.
r
CRI
WIRING
R1NOV10
.
$2
FRONT
Ras
3901
12
`
3
It
.
R9GTIPIER
(ROMEO
CCI
Fig.. 1. (Above) shows the selector switch
used in RCA Chassis RC -616F. Fig. 2.
(Below) The simplified circuit of the
selector switch in the
T
SATO
DI
v
C
-A,
#2 position.
Crystal Rectifier for RK -121C.
S1
P ROUT
10
Ve
COS
9
Service Caution: (1) Maintain a minimum lead length of % inch on the
crystal leads. Excess heat from a soldering iron will damage the crystal, (2) the
normal voltage existing in this circuit
should never be exceeded when testing
maintain
or trouble shooting, and (3) main
polarity of crystal.
The following change has been made
in the parts list.
Add:
54374 Rectifier-crystal rectifier (CRI)
s
7
resistor has been added in the
mixer grid circuit of the RCA 8V112 to
reduce interference.
A 390 -ohm
In late production sets C42 has been
changed from 22 µµf to 15 of and R18
has been changed from 22,000 ohms to
18,000 ohms. This change was made to
prevent oscillation at the high end of the
f -m band.
Add the following te the parts list:
fixed composition, 390 ohms,
Resistor
±10%, % watt (R35)
-
RCA 8V112, Chassis RC -616,
RC-616F
The schematic diagram for this model,
which is contained in pages 18-17 through
18.24 of Rider's Volume XVIII, is in error
in showing the connection of R22. It
should be shown connected to C18A instead of to the RED lead of the output
DOTTED
1101.11,
Cc,
11.4
61
1.1
110/0.410.
10/111
CCT
Figs. 1 and 2 show the selector switch
S1 used in Chassis No. RC-616F. The
connections to S2 are identical in both
chassis. Note that position #2 (M.M.)
of RC-616F corresponds to position #1
(M.M.) of RC -616. No connections are
made through S2 in AUX. position.
transformer.
°John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Change in Wiring of RCA 8V161.
An addition to the Parts List under
Miscellaneous is:
Wood fibre ornament
74312 Ornament
for front of cabinet.
-
PAGE 20-10 CHANGES
RCA 9W101, 9W103, 9W105
10 INTER.-
V7
VI
Vd
v3
V2
VS
V4
LOG%
These models appear on pages 19.35
through 19-44 of Rider's Manual Volume
XIX.
A capacitor (150 µµf -C44) has been added
between the screen grid terminal of V8
(6V6GT) socket and chassis as shown in
the accompanying illustration. This was
a
1.01
x 11
1
CU
[
p111
e45VOts
Heater Connection,-Models 8X71. 8X72
71923
Capacitor-Tubular,
0.01
µf. 200 v.
(C38) same as C23, C36.
RCA 75ZU, Ch. RC-1063A
MOTORS
gYATCh
PICAUP ARN
CARLE
t
CRYSTAL
PICK UP
This model appears on pages 19-45 and
Rider's Manual Volume XIX. A
groove approximately 1/16 inch deep by 1/a
inch wide is now included on the outer rim
of the bakelite station selector indicator pulley, Stock No. 73060.
19-46 of
If trouble
Onyrt Tobet Ckarit Pitkny Ann Cable
Models 9W101, 9WI03, 9W103
done to eliminate spurious audio oscillation.
The simplified schematic diagrams
(phono position) on page 19-39 show C34
and C56 connected to ground. They should
be shown connected to the cathodes of the
6V6GT tubes as shown in the accompany-
XVII!.
LAN&
schematic diagram is illustrated in the :Iccompanying diagram.
The following have been added to the
parts list:
GVoGT
OUTPUT
8BX8 and SBX65 appear on pages 18-11
throltgh 18-14 of Rider's Manual Volume
The line -battery switch used in these
receivers is of the "slide" type. The actual
switch does not have numbered terminals,
although the schematic diagrams have
numbers indicated. The numbers on the
schematic diagrams do not indicate the
actual sequence of the terminals on the
switch. The accompanying illustrations
show the actual sequence of the switch
terminals and the corresponding numbers
which appear on the schematic diagrams.
Figure 1 is the diagram for the SBX5,
DC SUPPLY
FRON RECTIFIER
'114V.
encountered with the drive
cord coming off this pulley, either of the
following corrections may be applied:
is
(a) Position the pulley in relation to
the gang drum by the adjustment provided
on the long support bracket for the dial
back plate assembly so that the drive
cord occupies the position indicated in the
accompanying illustration.
R17
2200
'B sV
RIS
RIS
2200
SUPPLY
TO TUBES
3
50
ACTUATED
BY PLUG
OF LINE CORD
L
INEI }7
BATT
LINE CORi'
PLUG
.
ing illustration.
11sv
To improve f -m stability one dial lamp
is now connected to pin- #2 of V9
(6X5GT). Previously both were connected to pin #2 of V8 (6V6GT).
Speakers stamped 92569-1WX have been
used as a substitute for 92559-5W speakers
in Model 9W101; 92569-1WX speakers have
a 22 -ohm voice coil; 92569-5W 'speakers
have a 32 -ohm voice coil.
The following additions have been made
to the parts list:
Capacitor-Ceramic,
µµf (C44)
Same as C7, C19, C38, C50, C53
13867 Cap-Dust cap
48125
150
36145 Cone--Cone and voice coil assembly
5039 Plug
prong male plug for speaker
71145 Suspension-Metal cone suspension
Transformer-Output
transformer
37899
-4
(T3)
Note: When replacing complete speaker
order Stock No. 73635 (92569-5W).
37396
AC -DC
°John
F.
32
ON-OFF
SW
7S V.
"Nee
I
.
Dust Drive Cord of RCA 75ZU.
(b) Replace the pulley with one incorporating the groove indicated above.
The service data for the 50-cycle version
of Radiola 75ZU will apply to this instrument except:
RP-178 record changer only is used.
A conversion spring (Stock No. 73158)
is added to the motor spindle shaft for
50 -cycle operation.
Grommet-Rubber grommet for
mounting speaker (3 required)-for
Model 9W103
73896 Loop-Loop antenna complete for
Models 9W101 and 9W103 (previously listed for 9W101 and 9W105).
The RP-I68A-1 record changer pickup
arm cable now beine used is a three wire
cable (RED -WHITE-BLACK). In some
instruments the black wire is omitted or
a shielded wire may be used as shown in
9W101, 9W103, 9W105 Service Data. The
Latest connection diagram is shown in the
accompanying illustration.
RCA 8X53, 65X1, 65X2, RC -1064
Model 8X53 appears on pages 18-41 and
1S-42 of Rider's Volume XVIII and Models
65X1 and 65X2 appear on pages 15-61 and
15.62 of Rider's Volume XV.
The number of turns of dial cord on
the tuning shaft has been increased froto
2-IA turns to 3.1A turns.
RCA 8X71, 8X72
These models appear on pages 19-30
through 19-34 of Rider's Manual Volume
XIX. A capacitor (0.01 µf-C38) has been
added between pin #3 of V6 (35C5) and
chassis. The revised heater connection
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
TO TUBES
A-
A 13-
B
B AT T ER IE
Fig.
1.
Line-battery switch for RCA SBX5.
first production, Ch. RC-1059. Figure 2
applies to models SBX5, SBX54, SBX55,
second production, Ch. RC-1059A ; 9BX5,
first production, Ch. RC -1059B; 9BX5,
second production, Ch. RC-1059C. For
models SBX6 and 66BX, the circuit is as
shown in Figure 2, except for different
resistor numbers and values.
("RCA Victor" Stock No.71984)
added to the front of the cabinet.
A decal
is
These changes apply to the RC -1063B
PROM tlEtrTITÌER
also.
The following have been added to the
parts list for instruments using blonde
mahogany cabinets:
73722
73629
Knob-Power-Phono-radio switch
knob-for blonde instruments
Knob-Tuning Knob-for blonde
RIT
2200
6.35
-B. SUPPLY
TO TUBES
instruments
73630
Knob-Volume Control Knob-for
blonde instruments
71" SUP PLY
TO TUBES
RCA 66BX, Ch. RC -1040, RC -1040A.
RC -1040B; 8BX5, 8BX54, 8BX55,
Ch. RC -1059, RC -1059A: 8BX65,
Ch. RC -1040C, RC -1040D; 9BX5,
Ch. RC-1059B
Model 66BX appears on pages 15-87
through 15.88 of Rider's Manual Volume
XV and on page C17-7 of Rider's Manual
Volume XVII. Models SBX5, 8BX54, and
8BX55 appear on pages 19-5 through 19-9
of Rider's Manual Volume XIX. Models
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
52
POLARIZED
LINE CORO
ONOPf
w.
A-
Ao
B-
BATTERIES
B
113K
AC -DC
SUPPLY
Fig. 2. Line-battery switch for RCA 8BX5,
8BX54, 8BX55, 9BX5, 8BX6, and 66BX.
CHANGES PAGE 20-11
RCA 8X544, 8X545, 8X546, Chassis
RC -1065, RC -1065A
These models
5X541, on pages
Volume XVIII,
the cabinets and
The parts are
Loop
73486
sembly
73487
1-2096
1-2097
1.21)98
8X545
Loop
loop and back cover a.,sembly for Model 8X546
maCabinet
plastic cabinet
hogany
complete with station
indicator and dial backing disc
for Model 8X544
-nut - -
-
Cabinet
-
-
-
-
-
1251(7
25A7
L
13T OCT
A OSC.
r.
-
plastic cabinet
walcomplete with station indicator and dial backing disc
for
Model 8X545
Cabinet
plastic cabinet
blonde
complete with station indicator
for Model
and backing disc
8X546
704.29
-
are the same as Model
18.45 and 18-46 of Rider's
except for the color of
the parts noted here.
the same, except. for:
loop and back cover asfor Models 8X.544 and
to secure the transformer to the
mounting plate. The accompanying diagram
illustrates the revised schematic.
The following have been added to the
Parts List:
73935 Clip-Spring clip for mounting i -f
transformers, type 970441
93036 Transformer
First i -f transformer,
stamped 970441.1 (C6, C7, L6, L7)
used
Grommet
rubber grommet to
mount speaker (4 required). This
part has been added to Models
8X541, 8X542, 8X543,
8X544,
8X545, 8X546, and 8X547. To reduce microphonics, the speaker is
now mounted to the chassis and
to the cabinet using rubber grommets. The screws through the
grommets should be tightened only
enough to obtain a secure assem-
bly.
RCA 68R1, 68R2, 68R3, 68R4,
Ch. RC -608; 610V1, Ch. RC -610;
610V2. Ch. RC -610C
The 68R series appear on pages 16-59
through 16-43 of Rider's Volume XVI. The
610 series appear on pages 1946 through
19.64 of Rider's Volume XIX.
In locations where 10.7 -mc i-f interference (not tunable) is encountered on the
f -m band of these receivers, the following
may eliminate the condition:
1. Check lead dress (and correct if
necessary) to minimize antenna coupling
into the i-f amplifier input. Resistor R1
(located on the antenna terminal board)
should be dressed on the side of the terminal board away from the 6BE6 1st
detector socket, Vl.
2. Dress the 6BE6 1st detector plate
lead along the shelf base and under C2
(330 µµf) using C2 as a partial shield for
this lead.
3. Ground one f-m antenna terminal to
the chassis at the terminal board. (Dipole
still connects normally.) This is generally
more effective than connecting a 10.7 -mc
series -tuned trap from the f -m antenna
terminal to the chassis.
4. Place a tube shield over the 6BE6
1st detector tube, grounding the shield to
chassis using as short a ground as possible.
Correct for any detuning caused by this
method.
5. Correct realignment of circuits is suggested to provide maximum sensitivity,
since step 3 may reduce sensitivity slightly.
Delete:
73007
wets.
AVC
Sabsan:sit 1st
1.F.
Transformer-7SX Series
RCA 77U
This model appear on pages 18-53 and
Rider's Volume XVIII. The following parts should be added to the parts
list.
73109 Nut-Tee nut to mount record
changer-3 required.
73110 Screw-1/4.20 x 13/4" fillister head
machine screw to mount record
changer.
The service data previously issued for
this model also apply to instruments using
blonde mahogany cabinets, except for the
following parts which are used with such
cabinets.
73631 Knob-power, radio and phono
switch knob-tan-for blonde instruments.
18-54 of
-tan-
Knob-tuning knob
for
Monde instruments.
73630 Knob-volume control knob-tan
-for blonde instruments.
The following voltage and current measurements
apply to this model. A selenium rectifier
is used. The oscillator grid voltage (pin
73629
WAN
Seno. Cathode Ca11.d.
Voter. Volta/. Volker Cun..t
7\b.
(1) 125A7 rot dal ow.
(2) 125X7 I.P. Amp.
A.F. Amp.
IQ SAGS tad EIN.-AVC(3)
SCA
Ir.
oh.
R) SSLSGT Output
en 351SGT Oup,d
92.
92.
15.
50.
121.
121.
9A mo.
13.3 ma.
92.
92.
0.32 ma.
92.
It
5.6
5.6
0.19 ma.
31.7 ma.
31
7 ma.
the 12SA7) is -10 volts at 600 kc
and -11 volts at 1600 kc. Voltages are
measured with Chanalyst or VoltOhmyst
to common insulated wiring -B). The
voltages and currents should hold to
within ± 20% with a 117 -volt, 60-cycle
power supply.
5 of
125A7
IST
Dir 056
°John
F.
Add:
73007
Condenser-
Condenser- variable tuning
c o n-
denser (C3, C4, C6, C7)
RCA 610V1, Ch. RC -610C; 610V2,
Ch. RC -610
These models appear on pages 19-58
through 19-60 of Rider's Volume XIX. A
small quantity of these receivers were
shipped with the incorrect loop antennas.
The incorrect loops contain approximately
14 turns instead of 17 turns. This reduced
inductance causes low sensitivity and poor
selectivity, particularly below 900 kc.
Complaint cases of poor sensitivity, poor
selectivity, or interference in the form of
local station(s) repeating at gile or several
places on the "A" band (except response
at the image frequency) should have the
loop checked as one possible cause.
The incorrect loop may peak at the
high end of the "A" band but will not
peak at lower frequencies. This may be
checked by varying the oscillator, coil inductance. The correct loop tracks normally across the band.
The stock number of the antenna terminal board is 7205S. It was listed incorrectly as 70258.
RCA 710V2, Ch. RC -613A
These models appear on pages 18-65
through 18.60 of Rider's Volume XVIII.
Resistor R15 in the cathode circuit of the
type 6AÚ6 f-m driver stage has been
changed from 68 ohms to 120 ohms. This
change was made because certain 6AU6
tubes were found to draw grid current
at the bias value produced by 68 ohms,
which resulted in a decrease in f-m sensitivity.
Regal W800
This model is the same as Model S00
which appears on page 16.1 of Rider's Volume XVI. The socket layout for both models is shown in the accompanying diagram.
To
POWER
SUPPLY
P-ANTEMIA
LEAO
IN LT
09G.
RCA 75X11, 75X12, 75X14,
75X15, 75X16
These models appear in Rider's Manual
Volume XVIII on pages 18.49 and 1840.
In some chassis a substitute i -f trans-
former has been used in these models. An
adapter plate is riveted to the chassis for
mounting purposes. A mounting clip is
In some chassis capacitor C18 is 0.027
µf instead of 0.025 µf as shown on the
schematic. In some instruments a subs:
titute oscillator coil has been used. The
original coil (70477) uses a capacitive winding (IA) for coupling the oscillator circuit
to the oscillator grid (pin 5) of the 12SA7
tube. The substitute coil uses a 56-µµf
ceramic capacitor for the same purpose.
(L4 is not used.) The accompanying figure shows how this coil is connected into
the circuit.
The following changes should be made
in the parts list.
___-1
--- -
-ü
R.A
o
ON-OFF
VOLUME
Oscillator coil 73048 is connected into the
circuit of the RCA 77U as shown.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
PILOT
LAI/
TYPE N 47
STATION
SELECTOR
The socket layout of the Regal Models
W800 and 800.
PAGE 20-12 CHANGES
RCA 612V1, 612V3, 612V4,
Ch. RK -121, RS -123
Models 612V1 and 612V3 appear on
pages 17-31 through 17.43 of Rider's Volume XVII. Model 612V4 is the same except for the cabinet. Some of these receivers have developed a howl when operating on the f -m band. Howl of this nature
is generally a result of vibration from the
speaker being transmitted to some component, or series of components, in the
oscillator circuit. This vibration causes the
oscillator frequency to become modulated,
resulting in a howl being emitted from
the .speaker.
The following are possible causes:
1. Loose elements in the oscillator tube.
2. Loose plates or unequal spacing of
rotor and stator plates in the f-m
oscillator section.
3. Capacitor C88 should be placed adjacent to the side wall of the r-f shelf
and held firmly in place. This may
be accomplished by melting wax
against the capacitor and the chassis.
4. All oscillator, r-f, and ant, leads should
be well separated and arranged to
produce the least capacitance change
if set breaks into vibration.
When searching for the cause of the
trouble, an alignment tool having a high
dielectric constant and without a metal
tip can be used to probe in the circuit.
It is important that the position of the
wires and components be changed as little
as possible during realignment. During
such probing, the air column of the speaker
in relation to the chassis must be as near
as possible to normal operating position.
Failure to maintain such relation may
,result in false indications of either excessive howl or no howl.
On the RK-121 chassis, starting with
serial number 25,000, a 10-ohm carbon
resistor has been added between C16
71984
72962
7198!
72983
72951
Delete:
71791
Bushing -Threaded bushing for knob end of selector 0wiiob
(late producti soi
PM lein(c.haft
-C nnecting plae for lalm .itch c u lin Mal.
(late Production).
Resistor
ohms
watt
1I
Shafductiw)beleam switch coupling abaft -*wilco end (Mie pro.
-I0
Shaft -Selector
switch coupling shaft-knob
Headed bushing (late production).
Shield-Lead tube shield (for V5).
end
-lee
Cable-
Change i Stock No.:
45233 Capacitor
39396 C3wcítor-(C16, C21, C113).
33789 Capacitor -(C60) to 33223 Capuitor-(C601.
32634
Cord--to 72987 Cord-
-to
72955
RS -123
Capacitor-Electrolytictt comprisin
am
W,
50 mid., 400 voile, and
25 volt; (CIA, CI B. C1C).
1
1
Delete:
36599
1
Capacitor-
Change in Stock No.:
72596
mfd., 450
melt. of 40
f 30
1
le
Cacitorw
71551 Capacitor
-(C7).
MISCELLANEOUS
72979
70162
70101
70161
71888
36630
71174
3804
717
72447
71863
Ja7
21617
21624
21670
21621
I1628
21629
X1667
71904
71010
71
7e
71877
717
71043
71041
me
72.009
7=63
vast -Cabinet back let 01773-364, 1! tes
Reek -Cabinet beck-mahoMay-f« aides
li
g0iredlla 611
27
Rnü-C.bnet back-mabeol-fora unter -for 61274
beta-wleut-f«
4127Cabinet
I.05-Cabinet
beck
-walnut -for
aide. i2
rgviredl-la
center -tor 61254
Raleen-Rettom cover lien: for rollout mechanism
Bracket
-Pilet
lamp bracket
Rubng-Buhr[
and maser for Mtge Liebe (4 required,
Button -Plu`` batten for rollout ..tenably Milet Id romane)
Burt0 -Push butten
Cable -Shielded audio cable complete with auge
Cable -5 wire moulded antaaan 1aä -in able
Capacitor -Mica trimmer. en lens. 7-30 into!. ICI)
Cloth -Grille doll for 61271 -wool. or seabed. cabinets
Cloth -Grilla cloth for 61171 -Montle cabinets
Cloth -Grille cloth -upper
11773 -.et. a pm0on.
-/a
Mlles
Cléa-Grille cloth -lower -for 612V3-..1. or manes.
binet.
Cloth -Grille cioa-usai-loi 01253 -blonde cabinet
Cloth -Grille cloth -lower -for 61272 -blonde cabinet
Cloth -Galle cloth for 61274
-Trade ei
decal !RCA
deal :RCA-ictml
«blew «reen,wnee..e6 mark,
atria o, lam'
E.ctcheon-Escutebeonnuy le...,eu,.ndewand marker
mine for m.ngany m
Preto
Mouv
frame andMe
Galle -Metal trie -upper -for 0137,
Grille -Metal trille -lower -lot OIIV
Gille -Metal ille for 61274
Grommet -Rubber grommet for emoting Imp heaetWpart
Decal
Decal -Trade mar
1
8sculcheon-Eecvtcpaen
.
..
N
of loop
12
required)
ete-Pullrequired)
handle la rmoat maMnism
contact #3 of S-1 Front, then through
the space between the switch rotor and
through the bolt spacer. This lead should
be dressed between the spacer and the
shelf cradle. The bus wire from the 'IC"
band antenna coil to contact #9 of S-1
Rear is to be dressed a distance of V4 inch
from the loop load coil antenna lead (yellow). The f-m antenna lead (yellow) is to
be dressed between the switch spacer
through the bolt and the switch rotor
shaft, keeping clear of the shelf and cradle.
The changes indicated should be made
in the parts list. The entire listing Of
Miscellaneous parts is given for conven-
ience.
Add the following to the parts list:
72119 Escutcheon --Escutcheon only
less
screen, window and marker stripsfor blonde instruments.
-
Change 71868 Frame
71868
ill
the parts list
Frame-Rollout carriage frame with
brackets-less wheels.
The parts list for these models applies
to Model 612V4 also except for the following miscellaneous parts:
73719 Back-Cabinet back
blonde
for
sides
Fig. 2. The late production ange switch
coupling shaft of the RCA 612V series.
73004
71764
amge-Dew binge L.X. tor 61291 62 <nunedl
Nnge-Dear beat R.N. far 61151 (1 uasiOW,
Nine -Doer binge Mr 01253 -nt. « mheg. cabinet. cad
61774 record storage comarment dw.a 1e reguirent
Nn ge-De s hinge fer 61171 -blonde cabinet H reºuiudt
Xia``
Drsp de. binge for eliVi arid we>. or tort.[. elm
isba
,uireel
Norge-ee ddarr hOivte e66vJMen
70166
13103
717
71761
71821
73118
11767
71862
Hinge-Speakera"'")
li
comarmept
required/
N Ile-gSaPeN1
r
bg mubú
doer binge L.N. 1« 11270
compartment doer Ente R.X. for {1IY0
lr Pilot imp can
Cnob-Tae wptrol knob for ral or mahq.
77
Bleb -Tae control knob
for Mende
unmet
cabinet('
Knob -Volume control,
mi n, .elector ..itch es
toeing elate, 0
et m
molten.
ben. <:Oticets
Knob -Vet ire c tr I, power switch, alecter a.ieek «
Mote' knob fer Monde cabinets
Lamp -Pict lamp
1,
keep
-Antes. loop
complete ILI, LI3, ClI
eat nenanemret
hale. X
scree.
72965
Il
71370
71411
72764
so165
71907
32641
71964
31041
71990
71046
73034
71891
Prie!04ueg Pete for Waveform. wrist.
wee -Call letter marker pI.te
Pt.,e-Bt
a
am, for pullout handle
Metes
Pug -2 contact female plug for power cable
Plug -0 contact female plug Mr power cable
Plut -3 meeg male plug fer Map cable
Plug -0 meeg male ping fer power cable
Plu -Pe pi
le, .0 die cable 12 required)
Pull, -Door pull fer 11371 (2 repaired)
Pull -Door all fer 01153
Pull -Dar all fer 612Y4
Pro-D,ep toot
for 61271
7165
36112
34173
71847
30900
84
719
71170
Nnl-equuine nut to
11
73009
70164
7104
(1410
71904
72979
73000
71041
73003
472940
76719
71871
7171
'6047
71873
7167
72851
717.
71415
71413
wu
-Rubber retainer
-rent
required)
to
mount record
ch[.,
an
(2
«rem
sc
a
Secket-) contact
act (creole sakes Mr Imp cable
Spent-Caiul serins to mount merit changer 14 required)
Serin -Retaining spring for push boom
Smug -Retain pug spring fer
Sm Mf' Rakng.pneg Mr right re. ebu11611V1M6013El
r
«od.l
Screen
required
Back-Cabinet
back
center
X1825
-
blonde
-
for
Cloth-Grille cloth-for 612V4
The RP -176A record changer is used.
Sears 8070, Ch. 101.817-1A;
8070A, Ch. 101.817-2A
These Models are the salue as Model
appearing on pages 17-2, 17-3, and
1;-15 of Rider's Volume XVII, except for
the following changes. The appearance
only of the parts have been changed in
Ch. 101-817-1A.
In Ch. 101.817-2A, capacitor C17 lias
been changed in value from 0.05 of to
0.01 µf. Resistor RS has been changed in
value from 100 ohms to 150 ohms. The
7070.
second i -f transformer has been changed
from capacitor tuning to slug tuning. The
new parts number is R65374. The location of the trimmers is shown in the accompanying diagram.
Melee70140
Spring
-pe king aping for left rear wheel
early
71846
to eecatahwe
,
l
Retainer
73720
-2
blonde
DESCRIPTION
1
7!1407
70107
7165
Aatwu-Di-pole antenne
Rub
Rb-Calm
u -Calmat beck for 012V1 -der cuter
en
725oes-Cabs,,
R
be ck fm 61271 -Woo 12 required)
Net -Cabe., back for 11273 -for cater
71664
725 04
90
72590
Refer to Fig. 2 for the late production
range switch coupling shaft. Loosen square
head set screws "C" in collar of gear. Remove nut "E" (on front apron of chassis)
from bushing "D". Push shaft and bushing
to the rear so that shaft and bushing are
clear of the chassis apron. Flex the shaft
and pull forward. To remove bushing from
shaft, use procedure described for early
type shaft.
The brown lead of the dial lamp for
phono. operation is at present dressed to
to read
fees
AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLIES
Add:
The range switch coupling shaft on the
early and late productions differ. To remove the early production coupling shaft,
refer to Fig.1 and the following directions.
Loosen square head set screws "A" in
collar of shaft, remove "C" washer from
shaft at inside of bushing "B", push shaft
through bushing to permit removal of "C"
washer normally recessed inside bushing.
Pull shaft through bushing to inside of
chassis.
73631
73032
71015
RE -121
71986
1. The early production coupling
shaft of the RCA 612V series.
B
RADIO CHASkta ASSEMBLIES
Add:
Fig.
II.
DESCRIPTION
4.
(11)0 µµf) and terminal number 1 of S4
Front. This resistor has been inserted to
eliminate dead spots between 1400 and
1600 kc on the "A" band. This resistor
should be added to any early model set
developing dead spots, but make certain
that the over-all lead length, including the
resistor remains the same as before.
«ee.l
031291 and 61273
Spring
old
Step-Rollout.65
atopeeninug
die... 90000, elem.
and
ce
Stop -Dina door fall supports metal slop for 61274
Stop -Stop for drop door ter 61204
Siop-e-SeCab
al
es,eoon
eunt
e" b" 012V,
cDomikaanm
trio for call letter marker Nota
Strip -Backing
savart -Drop ami fall .apport -la 11191 U required,
Supon -Drop door fall .apport-R.X.-for 01273 wool. or
non. ,ep
Supon -Dreg Boer 1.11 .ulprl-Cosh. Ito OIIV3 wool. «
leg. [beets
Drop doer fati enema-R.N.-Mr 61203 blend*
Sennett -Drop
_m,_
Support -Drop beer liti
41273 blend
cabinet
support -Drop dmr fell support -Lox. for 61170
Drop Boer 1.11 support-R.N.
Su
Support
-Drop
su
for m74
Tire -Rubber tire der (rent rollout .heel.
Tire -Rubber care for rear rollout wheels
Wssher-Si,in. lier for rubber retainer ll rg,tin
Washer -Series *abet for festering, fang wheel. and MM
Wheel-Frmeni.hel and fire assembly l2 required)
Wheel -Rear wheel and Ore dumbly (1 rq
remittent -late
TI
®
..,,,,L
auction only
wheel -Left rear wheel complete with Mablng mechanism,
less braking spring /71870
Wheel -0401 rear wheelcomplete nth braking
kas htaktag sprint 71849
Window-rondow for all MN. marker*
mWi
ecm,
Parts list of the RCA 612V1, 6121'3, 6121'4
°John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
77íe trimmer locations of the Sears Chassis
101.817-1A and 101.817-2A.
CHANGES PAGE 20-13
Sears 8020, Chassis 132.841
Sears 8011, Ch. 132.840
This model appears on pages 18-56 through
18-60 of Rider's Volume XVIII. It has been
discovered that the dial cord on some of
these receivers binds. If the dial cord is
strung as shown on page 18.58, continued
turning of the tuning knob in a clockwise
direction, after the pointer has reached the
right-hand end of the dial, will cause the
tuning shaft to turn in the cord and the
cord will slide back on the shaft toward
the chassis. Then, when the knob is turned
in the counterclockwise direction, the cord
will travel farther back on the shaft and
have a tendency to come in contact with
the chassis and bind on the shaft.
If the cord is wound from back to front
on the tuning shaft, as shown in the accompanying figure, it will travel away from
the chassis when the knob is turned in a
counterclockwise direction and the binding will not occur.
This model is the same as Model 8010.
132.840, appearing on page 19-26 of
Rider's Manual Volume XIX, except for the
following changes. Model 8010 has a brown
cabinet and knobs, while Model 8011 has
an ivory cabinet and knobs. Parts which
are different from the 8010 are as follows:
N21092-1 Cabinet less front trim assembly
N21204-3 Knob, control, volume and tun-
('h.
inst.
Stewart-Warner A51T Series
These models are the same as Model
A51T1, appearing on pages 17-4 through
17-6 of Rider's Volume XVII. The code
listings for these models are:
Model
Code
A51T1
9020-A
9020-B
9020-C
9020-D
A51 T2
A5iT3
A51T4
On chassis which have the letters H or
R stamped on the rear surface adjacent
to the model numbers, the rotor of the
gang tuning capacitor is grounded instead
of being connected to the AVC line. Oscillator coil 505397 (see accompanying diagrani) is used on chassis which are stampped with the letters "S", "H", or "R".
Sears 101.809 Series
These chassis are all the same as Model
7080, Ch. 101.809, appearing on pages 16.1,
16.4, 16-5, and 16-8 of Rider's Volume XVI,
except for the following changes.
Models 8083, 8083A, Ch. 101.809.1A.
Pushbuttons have been added. The record
changers used in these models are all different. Resistor R5, 330,000 ohms, formerly across the phono pickup socket, has
been removed. The dial drive hookup is
as shown in the accompanying diagram.
The dial drive hookup for the Sears Chassis
101.809-1A.
If
Used on chassis
with no letter
All resistors which were t/3 watt are now
'it watt. All capacitors, except C23, C26,
and C27, now have a voltage rating of
A 6 -by -9-inch p -m speaker
600 volts.
(R62658) is used, requiring cone and voice
transformer
coil R62659, and
R62660.
Models 8084, 8084A, Ch. 101.809-1B. Same
as Chassis 101.809.1A, except for the record
excessive hum is encountered, try disconnecting the low -voltage section of the
terchangeable
changers.
Used on chassis
stamped with
When the dial cord of the Sears 8020 is
wound from back to front on the tuning
shaft, the cord will not bind on the chassis.
output
letter "S". "H",
designation. Inwith
coil
No.
505397.
electrolytic capacitor, part number N21744,
which is the cathode bypass capacitor on
the 501.6CT output tube. Substitute a separate 20-µf, 25-v. capacitor for this section.
Some of the original electrolytic capacitors had the sections wound in improper
sequence, so there was capacitive coupling
between the input high -voltage section
and the low -voltage cathode bypass seetion. This condition would cause excessive
hum in the receiver output. It is probable
that, this condition will be found only on
the later production sets of this model.
505397
504458
OSCILLATOR COIL
Oscillator coil for Stewart -Warner A51T
series.
Regal W900
This model is the same as Model 900
which appears on pages 16-2 and 164 of
Rider's Volume XVI. The socket layout
and voltages for both models are shown
in the accompanying diagram.
NLAM.
55TA'NCE
Models 7080, 7080A, Ch. 101.809-2. Same
as Chassis 101.809, except for a new type
tone control circuit. A 0.001-µf capacitor
(C24) is connected from the plate (pin 2)
of the 7C6 tube to the variable arm of
the 2-megohm tone control (R16). The
other end of this tone control is connected
to the B-line. The parts layout for this
chassis is shown in the accompanying
diagram.
TO POWER
sup,LT
ANTENNA
LEAD
LOOP
WAVE TRAP
45615c.
5W ANT. 'UDDER
AUDIO
I.i. AMPLRR
ER
1º
IESRT
OR
Ocs
SOLA
e
456
MC.
OG10
CONVERTER
ELECT.
COND.
ANC. DETECTOR
º
1
o
LP.
OcT
SOLI
The parts layout for the Sears Chassis
101.809-2.
CI
SW. AMT.,
TRIMMER
1.0 MC.
CI
SW O5C.
MT ANT.
TRMI LR
T.OMG.
TRIMM
II1w.
CZ
ON.
CI
ARE
'
R.r
EC.AMT.7RILIAIER
NE0 RC.
ALIDO
I. SRC.
RECTIFIER
1
---'-i.
`----t----- -'-
MINT
=
CO
RE. 05C.,
1660 R0.
ItNT
OR
'
JtSRT
Stewart -Warner A41T1. Code 9032-A
71
-
co
BC.
IOÇ.
LAI;
ION-OFF
VOLUME
ON
MODELA
S[Rp
O0
o 0
000
FTPET
SW. ANT.
MINER
.n0
tVAc.
OC
AREITEO
V00
A
O
o
1227OR
1
I.WITCM
.C. O.C.
ON
610E OF
O
MAC. O
AO
CRAWS
AS
EVACIEEAC
In
000
DC
°
AMC.
VDC
O
O
SVAG.
MAC.
REcnn[R
u ANI
CONVERTER
Tube layout, trimmer locations, and voltages of the Regal
ALSO AMP.
IIgEATEO.
OAO
O
Models 8101, 8101A, ß101B, 8101C, 9101,
Ch. 101.8094C. These models are the
same as chassis 101.809-2 except for diffrencos in the cabinets, and the fact that
different record changers are used.
DET
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
00,0
Rl.
W9t10.
VAG-
NV.DC
This is the same as Model A41T1 appearing on pages 17.1 through 17.8 of
Rider's Manual Volume XVII, except for the
following change. Resistor 40, formerly 270
ohms, has been changed to 560 ohms to
minimize "B" supply drain. Chassis which
incorporate this change have a letter "S"
stamped on the rear surface. The new
resistor is desçribed as follows:
502127 Resistor-carbon---560 ohms, i/a w.
PAGE 20-14 CHANGES
Stewart-Warner 61T Series; 9022-T
These models are the same as Model
61T16, appearing on pages 15-7 and 15-8
of Rider's Volume XV, except for some
changes. The code listings for these models
are:
Code
Model
9022-A
61T16
9022-AW
61T16W
9022-B
61T26
A 0.01-µf capacitor (45) has been added
from the black lead (center tap) of the
loop antenna to ground. A 0.05-µf capacitor
(46) has been connected from the cathode
of the 12SF7 tube to the AVC line. A
390 -ohm resistor (44) has been connected
in shunt with the pilot lamp.
The following should be added to the
parts list:
Diagrain Part
No.
Description
No.
45
502151
502153
502140
46
14
Resistor-carbon
V4
390
PART
NO.
28
PART
Transf.-output, for
5-inch
1502298
(
11
61T16W
502506
502564
(
...
Crystal
.
scartridgeusi for standard and cord
records (used on "VM" -506911 record
changer)
..
Switch-"ON-OFF" for type
"VM"-505339 6 "VW -506911 record
_.
record changes
._
Switch-"ON-OFF" for type "A''.505650
record changer
507402 Switch -"ON-OFF" for type "W ".5069l0
record changer
__.
..
505342 Speaker P.M. dynamic (8 inch) (used
.
on all models)
Speaker P.M. dynamic' (6 inch) Thie is
an additional speaker used only .on
models A61CR5. A61CR6. A61C147.
A6ICR7X, A6ICR7LPW. A6ICR7LPWX,
A61CR12.
A61CR12LP, A6ICR13,
A6ICRI3LP, A61CR14, A61CR141P.
A6ICR15. A61CR15LP, A61CR16,
A6ICR16LP. A61CRI7 6 A61CR17LP
507662 Switch-"ON-OFF" for type "R"-507556
record changer
507746 Crystal cartridge (used on "R"507556
record changer)
507747 Motor -for type "R"-507556 record
changer 115 volt 60 cycle
506657
60
1
61....
62
9022T
506412
Clip-mts. escutcheon. ..
Door (leu hardware) for Modem
A61CRI 6 A6ICRILP
Door --left hand (leu hardware) for
Knob-ivory, Model
506075
9022-T
507184
Stewart-Warner A61C and
A61CR Series
T1ie following models are the same as
Model A6ICR1, appearing on pages 174
and 17-7 and 17-8 of Rider's Volume
XVII, except for the record changers and
cabinets. The parts list for these models
appears on page 17-3. This information was
inadvertently left out of the index and
should be inserted.
The parts list appearing on page 174
should be amended to include the following:
Model numbers and code numbers:
Model No.
A61C20
A61CRI
A61CR1LP
A61CR2
A6ICR2LP
A61CR3
A61CR4
A61CR4X
A6ICR4LP
A61CR4LPX
A61CR5
A61CR6
A61CR7
A6ICR7X
A61CR7LPW
A61CR7LPWX
A61CR8
A6 I CR9
A61CR10
Code No.
9034-P
9034-C
9034-CLPW
9034-D
9034-DLP
9034-E
9034-F
9034-FX
9034-FLP
9034-FLPX
9034-G
9034-H
9034'
9034;X
9034 LPW
9034- -LP
90349034-L
9034-M
507 185
507196
507187
507188
507189
507190
507191
505488
507480
A61CR7LPW 6 A61CR7LPWX
Doer (less hardware) for Models
A61CR17 6 A61CR17LP _
..
Door -left hand (less hardware)
for
Models A61CR12 6 A61CR12LP....
Door -left hand (less hardware) for
Models A6ICR13 6 ASICRI3LP ..
Door -left hand (less hardware) for
Models A61CRI4 6 A61CR14LP
Door -left hand (leu hardware) for
Models A61CR15 6 A6ICR15LP.
Door -right hand (leu hardware) for
Models A6IC I2 6 A6ICRI2LP.
Door -right hand (less hardware) for
Models A6ICRI3 6 A61CRI3LP....
Door -right hand (less hardware) for
Models A61CRI4 6 A61CR14LP
Door -right hand peu hardware) for
Model. A61CR15 6 A6ICR15LP
Drawer -record changer: for Model
A6ICR3
Drawer --record changer: for Model
A6ICR2I
.....
.
plank
505666
505333
505466
Emblem,
506077
Handle-door: for Models A6IC417
F.cutcheon-dial
HanA6ICdle-door:A1LP
6
506116
506417
ALP
-door
for Models A61011(5
..
_..
.-
for Models A61CR5,
Handle
A6ICRI2, A6ICR12LP, A61CA13,
A61CR13LP, A61CR14, A6ICRI4LP,
A6ICRI5 6 6610115LP
Handle-door: for Models A6ICR6.
A6ICR7 A6ICR7X, A6ICR7.PW 6
A61CR71PWX
505486-Handle -drawer; for Model ARICR3
506265 Handle for Models A6ICR8, A6ICR9
507481
565467
6 A61CRIO
Handle -drawer: for Model A61CR21
Hinge-door (supplied In pairs) for
Models A6ICRI6 A6ICR1LP ...__..
Hinge -door (supplied in pairs) for
Models A61CR17 6 A61CRI7LP. ..
Hinge-door (supplied in pairs) for
.
506076
506421
505669
A61CR4, A61CR4X, A6ICR4LP,
A6ICR4LPX A61C1417 6 A61CR17LP
Knob -tuning (clear plastic)
Models A61CR5, A61C46, A6ICR7,
A6ICR7X, A61CR7LPW, A6ICR7LPWX,
A6ICRI2, A6ICRI2LP. A6ICR13.
A61CRI3LP, A61CR14. A61CR141P,
A61C1615 6 A6ICR15LP
7'hc parts list of the Stewart
507179
507180
507181
www.americanradiohistory.com
A61CRI6 A6ICRILP
Lid (less hardware) for Models
A61CR4, A61CR4X. A6ICR4LP,
A61CR4LPX. A6ICRI7 6 A6ICR17LP
(less hardware) for Model A61CRII
(less hardware) for Model A61CR6
(less hardware) tor Model A61C119
less hardware) for Model A6ICR10
(leu hardware) for Model A61015
'leu hardware) for Model.
A61CR6, A61CR7. A61CR7X,
A61CR7LPW 6 A61CR7LPWX
Lid (leu hardware) for Models
A61CR16 6 A6ICRI6LP
Lid (leu hardware) for Models
A61CR12 6 A61CRI2LP
Lid (less hardware) for Models
A6ICR13 6 A6ICRI3LP
Lid (leu hardware) for Models
A6ICRI4 6 A6ICRI4LP
Lid (leu hardware) for Modela
A61CR15 6 A61CR(5LP
Lid support for Models A61CR2,
A61CR2LP, A61CR8, A6ICR9.
506074
A61CRIO. A6ICRII, A61CR16
6 A61CRI6LP.
Lid support for Model. A61CRI.
A6ICRILP. A61CR4, A6ICR4X.
A6ICR4LP 6 A61CR4LPX
Lid support for Modem A6ICR17
506422
Lid support for Models A61CR5, A61CR6
505463
6 A61CRl7LP.
A61CR7, A61CR7LPA, A61CR12,
A61CR12LP. A6ICR13, A61CR13LP.
A61CR14, A6ICR14LP. A61CR1S
6 A61CRISLP
Light dafusing strip
Needle --phonograph; for standard
record (used on "A"505650,
6 "VM" -505339 record change.)
507401 Needle -phonograph; for standard and
"LP" records (used on "W"-506910
cord changer)
507406 Needle -phonograph: for standard and
"LP" records (used on "VM"406911
record changer)
507748 Needle -phonograph (used on
"R"-507556. record changer).
....
507749
Nut -retains needle (used ea
"R"-507558 record changer)........
500966
Plug -phono. pick-up cable
501031 Plug for phono. motor cable
505686 Pointer
505487 Rail for drawer: Model A61CR3
(supplied in
ts)
506234 Roll cor drawer; Model A61CR21
(cupplisd in arts) ........
119087 Ring for dial cord
113463 Rubber pad for mtg. chassis
79905 Screw -#S:45' for loop mounting
79993 Screw -#8s11/4,. for mtg. chassis
505716 Screw -set for phono needle (used en
"VM" -505339 6 "A"-505650 record
changers)
507404 Screw-set for phono. needle (used as
"W"-506910 record chmger).
503588 Shalt 6 Drum tor dial
505313 Shalt-tuning
505653 Shield for phono. pick-up cable
Connector
505722 Shield --light
505469
505717
..
116690
160039
160392
505307
505459
505654
Socket-octal bale
Socket-phono. plug
Socket -octal (rectifier)
Socket 6 phono. motor cable
Socket -dial lamp
Socket for shone. pick-up table
50.5161
Spring-tenefon
Connector
$06276
111456
Waner AMC
°John F. Rider
,
Knob -"VOLUME" (clear plastic)
Knob -"RADIO -PHONO" (clear plastic)
Knob -tuning (block plastic)
Kngb-"VOLUME" (black plastic)
Knob -"RADIO -PHONO" (black plastici
Lid (leu hardware) for Models
A6lCR2 6 A6ICR2LP
Lid (leu hardware) for Models
Lid
Lid
Lid
506270
Lid
506418 Lid
506419 Lid
506160
506268
506269
505456
61T16W
Knob-ivory, Model
505462
507183
.
Model A6ICR5
506413 Door -right hand (leu hardware) for
Model A61CR5
506414 Door -loft hand pesa hardware) for
Models A61CR6. A6ICR7 A6ICR7X,
ASICR7LPW 6 A6ICR7LPWX
506415 Door -right hand (lus hardware) for
Models A61CR6, A61CR7 A6ICR7X,
Clamp-dial scale mtg.,
-lid
Hinge
(supplied in pairs) for
Models ASICR1, A6ICRILP,
505344
505345
505346
506262
506263
506264
505455
507182
MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
160832
505465
A61CRI3LP, A61C1114, A61CRI4117,
A61CR15: A6ICR15LP, A61CRIS
6 A6ICR16LP
505464
505759
Cabinet-ivory, Model
Model 9022T
502553
( 505269
63
Cabinet-ivory, Model
Hinge-lid (supplied in pairs) for
Models A61CR2, A6ICR2LP, A61CRS,
A61CR6. A6ICR7, A61CR7X,
A61CR7LPW, A61CR7LPWX, A6ICR9:
A6ICR9. A61CRIO. A61CR11,
A61CR12, ASICRI2LP, A61CR13,
505457
record
...
9022T
502476
(used on "A"-505650 6
VM".505339 record changers)
chant c
507405
30 ..........
and voice coil,
with prefix Y.
and voice coil,
with prefix Z.
and voice coil,
with prefix C.
for cabinet, Model
DESCRIPTION
MISCELLANEOUS PARTS (Coot.)
Crystal cartridge for standard and "LP"
records (used on "W"-506910
Speaker-p.m., dynamic,
Cone
spkr.
J504759 Cone
spkr.
1504782 Cone
(
spkr.
502502 Back
500385
507400
5 -inch
(504757
r;o.
OTHER ELECTRICAL PARTS
r 505273 Motor- for type "VM" -505339 record
changer, 115 volt 60 cycle
505758
Motor --for type "A".505650 record
J
changer 115 volt 60 cycle
507403 Motor--for type "W"-506910 record
changer 115 volt 60 cycle
VM" -506911 record
ir 507409
Motor -for type
chonger 115 volt 60 cycle
(505100 Crystal cartridge for standard records
1
w.
speaker with prefix Y.
1504758 Transf.--output, for
speaker with prefix Z.
1
I504781 Transf.-output, for
(
speaker with prefix C.
1502208 Speaker-p.m., dynamic,
)
12
PHONO
CONNECTIONS
FOR MODELS
A61CR4X,
A61CR4LPX,
A61CR7X 6
A61CR7LPWX.
DESCRIPTION
I
37
9034-N
9034 -GR
9034-GRLP
9034 -GL
9034-GLLP
9034 -GM
9034-GMLP
9034 -GT
9034-GTLP
9034 -FH
9034-FHLP
9034 -CM
9034-CMLP
9034-R
The phonograph connections for sonic of
these models are shown in the accompanying diagram.
Capacitor -0.01 µf, 400 v.
Capacitor-0.05 µf, 200 v.
ohms,
(504756
A61CR11
A61CR12
A61CR12LP
A61CR13
A61CR13LP
A61CR14
A61CR14LP
A61CR15
A61CRi5LP
AC1CR16
A61CR16LP
A61CR17
A61CR17LP
A61CR21
Stop for door: Models Ae1C1117
6 A61CRI7LP
Washer-sprieg wasber fer lumina shall
and ABICR series.
CHANGES PAGE 20-15
Westinghouse H-125, H-126, H-127
United Motors R-705
Tele -Tone Chassis A
Models 123, 125, 127, and 131 are the
same as Model 100, Chassis A, which appears on page 15-2 of Rider's Volume XV.
Tele -Tone Chassis D
Models 110, 119, 124, 126, and 132 are
the same as Model.117, Chassis D, appearing in Rider's Volume XV, page 15-4.
This model appears on pages 17-1
through 174 of Rider's Volume XVII.
This receiver may be installed in the 1949
Fords by using parte from the adapter
parta package number 4428. It is necessary to use the Delco universal speaker,
part number 6111-6" X 9" eliptical speaker, in place of the speaker supplied with
the radio set. This speaker should be
returned to your stock under part number
8104.
Tele-Tone Chassis U
Models 172 and 176 are the same as
Model 156, Chassis U, which appears on
page 17-4 of Rider's Volume XVII.
The parts that are to be used from
adapter package 4428, are shown in the
following operations.
OPERATION
STEERING
Tele -Tone Chassis W
I
OOWNN ADAPTER
ASSEMBLED TO CONTROL HEAD
Models 154, 155, 173, and 177 are the
same as Model 152, Chassis W, which appears on pages 17-2 and 17-3 of Rider's
Volume XVII.
Templetone H-127
OPERATION 2
This model is the same as Model G-725,
appearing on pages 17-3 through 17-6 of
Rider's Volume XVII.
STRAP ASSEMBLED TO
CONTROL HEAD
This model appears on pages 19-44
through 19-49 of Rider's Manual Volume
XIX. The following service parts have
been changed after serial #1-38500.
7240724
Service
Part No.
1219508
1219509
M908
28
7237836
E202
48
1213217
1218107
1213793
7237751
7277752
A101
5233
5241
5229
5222
25
25A
25B
25C
Cover, right hand
V-3498-2
Handle Assembly
V-3481-2
V-3333-2
V-3455-2
Knob (H-127)
Medallion (H-127)
(H-127)
7257
OPERATION 3
Description
CONTROL HEAD ATTACHED
TO STEERING COLUMN
1st i -f coil assy.
2nd i -f coil assy.
Electrolytic
20 µf, 25 v.
20 µf, 400 v.
20 µf, 400 v.
0.002µf, 600 v.
tubular
100 ohms,
rA
w.
6SR7
6V6GT
6SK7
7256394-<::,CLIP
OFF EXCESS
7256405-i
OPERATION 4: Remove the tips from
speaker cable and solder ends to 6" X 9"
speaker terminals.
6SA7
Watterson RC-4581
OPERATION 5
This model is the same as Model 4581
appearing on page 15-1 of Rider's Volume
to four studs
in panel.
INSTRUMENT FANEL
Western Auto D2718 Series
Serial No. 137000 Up
B,
This model is the same as Model 132718,
appearing on pages 17-20 through 1743 of
Rider's Volume XVII, except for the following changes. Capacitor C30, formerly
connected from the junction of R-16, C-29,
and pin 8 of the 12SQ7 tube to pin 2 of
the 35Z5GT rectifier tube, is connected
from the same junction to the center tap
(pin 3) of the filament of the 35Z5GT
rectifier tube.
The part number of capacitor C16 and
C20 should be changed from 47X446 to
47X466. The value remains the same.
Part number 17X96, celluloid crystal, should
be added to the parts list.
000 ohms.
The new part number and description
are as follows:
R-4 B-85103 10,000 ohms, 0.5 w.
H-166A, H-167
These models appear on pages 18-12
through 18-19 of Rider's Volume XVIII.
To reduce hum in later production of
these models, a de -coupling network was
inserted in the plate circuit of the 6AT6
a -m detector, aye and a -f amplifier tube.
This network consists of a 100,000 -ohm
V watt resistor (RC20AE104K) and a
0.1 pf 400 volt resonant type capacitor
(V-5442-1). The resistor is inserted between
the plate load resistor (R11) and the B
plus line, and the capacitor is connected
from the junction of R11 and the new
resistor to ground.
Westinghouse H-183, H-183A
These models appear on pages 19-16 through
Rider's Manual Volume XIX. An
error exists in the schematic diagram. The
value of R9 in the converter circuit should
be 3,300 ohms instead of 300 ohms.
19-17 of
6111
131015-121752----t
120622-'+
VOICE COIL LEADS MUST BE
CLEAR OF METAL BASKET
The position of C20 in the circuit has
been changed. On some chassis this
capacitor was connected across the primary
of the output transformer as shown on the
schematic diagram. In later production,
the capacitor is connected from the plates
to the cathodes of the parallel 25L6GT
output tubes.
Westinghouse H-186, H-187
Western Auto D4832 -B
This model appears on pages 18-69
through 18-72 of Rider's Volume XVIII.
The "B" chassis of this model differ fror.l
the "A" chassis by a change in the value
of resistor R-4 from 220,000 ohms to 10
Dial (H-127)
Westinghouse H-164, H-166,
Assemble
XV.
0
(H-127)
V-3992
(H-127)
United Motors 982421
Illus. Production
No. Part No.
6
1219508
7
1219509
Models H-125 and H-126 appear in
Rider's Volume XV, pages 16-8 through
15-10. Several changes were made in the
chassis of these two models in late production. A 35L6GT output tube replaces
the 35A5. The electrical characteristics of
the tubes are similar except for a difference in tube bases and connections. An
isolating network consisting of a 470 -ohm
resistor (44) and a 0.02-µf capacitor (14)
has been inserted in the plate and screen
voltage supply line for the r -f and converter stages. In the circuit, the rotor
plates of the tuning and trimmer capacitors are now connected directly to chassis
ground rather than to the AVC line.
Model H-127 is the same as the previous
models with a burgundy and gold cabinet.
The following items should be added to
the parts lists for these models:
14
RCP10W2203A Capacitor, 0.02 µf
44 RC20AE471M
Resistor, 470 ohms
0.5 watt
V-3711-2
Case Assembly, center
(H-126 and H-127)
V-3991
Cover, left hand
The various operations necessary to install
United Motors Model R-705 in the 1949
Fords, as well as the assembled control
head are illustrated.
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
These models appear on pages 18.26
through 18.80 of Rider's Volume XVIII.
To reduce hum in later production of
these models, a de -coupling network was
inserted in the plate circuit of the 6AT6
AM detector, AVC wad A -F amplifier tube.
This network consists of a 100,000 ohm l
watt resistor (RC20AE104K) and a 0.05 µf
400 volt capacitor (RCPIOW4503A). The
resistor is inserted between the plate load
resistor (R13) and the B plus line, and the
capacitor is connected from the junction
of R13 and the new resistor to ground.
PAGE 20-16 CHANGES
Westinghouse H-202, H-204
These models appear on pages
19.24
through 19.28 of Rider's Manual Volume
XIX. The schematic diagram shows C12
and R17 in series between the a -m antenna terminal and the top of L17. R17
should connect to the bottom of L17
rather than to the top of Ir17.
Westinghouse H-188, Ch. V-2133
This model appears on pages 19-18 and
19.19 of Rider's Volume XIX. Short wave
interference may be cured by "replacing the
0.05-µf resonant capacitor (C7) with a
0.1-µf standard paper capacitor of 200 volts
or higher rating.
The 220,000 -ohm resistor, 1t11,
which was previously connected between
the common negative line and the chassis,
is not being used on late chassis.
The switch, SW1, is incorrectly shown
on the schematic diagram and parts list as
a D.P.S.T. switch. Actually, it is a S.P.S.T.
switch, and it interrupts only one side of
the a -c line, the side which connects to
the common negative line.
In later production, a V-6199-2 2nd i -f
transformer was used in place of the V5686 2nd i -f transformer listed. Although
the new transformer is smaller than the
original one, it is directly interchangeable
through the use of a V-5426 mounting
clip. The new transformer is slug -tuned
and has one adjustment hole in the top
of the can and one in the bottom of the
can. The terminals are marked by numbers which are equivalent to the colors
on the old transformer as follows: 1
equals green, 2 equals white, 3 equals blue,
and 4 equals red. For replacement purposes, order the V-6199-2 2nd i -f transformer and V-5426 mounting clip.
Some chassis may use a V-5686 i -f transformer in place of the V-5685 1st i -f
transformer; however, the V-569.5 transformer as listed in the parts list should
be ordered for replacement of the 1st i -f.
The following items should be added to
the parts list:
Part No. Description
Transformer, 2nd i -f, (L6, L7,
V-6199-2
C19, C20)
i -f mounting
Cabinet, ivory
Baffle and grille cloth assembly
for- ivory cabinet
V5779.2 Grille, for ivory or black cabinet
Note: The V-1160-1 cabinet listed in the
parts list is a black cabinet, and the
V-5778.1 baffle and grille cloth assembly
is for use with the black cabinet.
Westinghouse H-190, H-191, H-191A
These models appear on pages 19.20
through 19-23 of Rider's Manual Volume
XIX. In later production, the cathode
resistor, R3, for the 6BA6 1st i -f amplifier
was removed and the cathode connected
directly to ground. In addition, a 0.0022-µf
mica capacitor (RCM30B222M) was connected across the 6BA6 2nd i -f amplifier
cathode resistor, R4.
On some chassis, V-5596 "HI-KAP"
capacitors are substituted for the following
capacitors:
V-5426
V-1160-2
V-5778-2
Clip,
V-5040-15 (C7, CS, C9, C10, C11)
V5040-11 (C19, C20, C21).
In the parta list, the part number of
"Pull, door, phono (H-191 and H -191A)"
should be changed to V5877-1 and the
part number of "Pull, door, record compartment (H-191 and H-191A)" should be
changed to V-5877-2. These part numbers
were reversed. Also, the part number, of
"Hinge, L.H." should be changed to V6603-1, and the part number of "Hinge,
R.H." should be changed to V-6603.2.
Westinghouse H -204A
This model appears on pages 19-24
through 19-28 of Rider's Manual Volume
XIX. On some chassis, V-5595 "HI-KAP"
capacitors are substituted for V-5040.13
(C51, C52, C53, C54, C55, C56, C57) capacitors. The substitution was made for convenience in production, and the receiver
operation is not affected.
Westinghouse H-210, H-211;
Ch. V-2144, V-2144-1
These models appear on pages 19.33
through 1955 of Rider's Volume XIX. If
the dial pointer has a tendency to bind,
lubricate the two dial pulleys with record
changer lubricant and move the dial cord
tension spring to another hole in the drum
to increase the tension.
If the dial pointer rattles, glue a piece
of bumper material (cork and rubber composition) 1/8" thick and about r/z" square
between the right-hand pulley rivet on the
dial background and the front of the
at essis.
In
later production models, the resistance of
the 12BA6 i -f amplifier cathode resistor,
R3, was changed to 668 ohms. The part
number of the new resistor is RC20AD680J.
In addition, the resistor, R12, in the lead
from pin 5 of the 35W4 was deleted from
the circuit, and a direct connection was
made in lieu of the resistor.
The tuning shafts used in later production have a wider groove for the dial cord.
With these shafts, there are 3V4 turns of
dial cord around the shaft rather than
2V4 turns as indicated on the dial -drive
drawing.
Zenith S-11468
Model S-11468 may be found in the
Record Changer section of Rider's Volume
XV, pages RCD.CH. 15-1 through RCD.
CH. 15.9.
The following instructions deal with repairing erratic landing of the needle of
Model S-11468. In the first production of
t his
non-intermixer record changer, a neoprene cork -tipped lift pin, Part No.
S-13056, was used to stabilize the set
down or landing of the needle on the
run-in groove of the record. The weight of
the tone arm and the friction plate, riding
on the neoprene tip of the lift pin was
relied on to provide effective braking action. Grease or oil on the neoprene tip of
the lift pin will cause erratic landing of
the tone arm on the record. To remove
the oil or grease, clean the pin tip and
friction plate with carbon tetrachloride and
roughen with fine sandpaper.
Later production S-11468 changers have
a spring type brake on the tone arm
shaft and use an all metal lift pin, Part
No. S-13086. Erratic landing, where the
arm swings sharply to the center of the
record or beyond, may be caused by an
incorrect locating bushing. Replace with a
94-415 bushing.
If the tone arm skips grooves and repeats, the vertical hinge on the tone arm
may be too tight, causing the arm to
hang slightly. This prevents the needle
from exerting enough pressure on the
record to follow the record grooves. To
free the hinge, use a pair of long nose
pliers and bend the horizontal spring "U"
bracket until it pivots freely, Be certain
that the connecting lead to the crystal
cartridge is dressed so that it does not
interfere with either the vertical or hori-
°John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
zontal movement of the tone arm. This is
important.
Excessive center hole wear on record.,
is caused by a sharp edge or burrs on the
spindle shelf. The edge of the record shelf
must be perfectly smooth and slightly
rounded. Check the edge, and if sharp,
smooth out with fine endpaper.
Zenith 5D0 and 5R0 Series,
5CO2. and 5C04
These models appear on pages 15-8 and
16-9 of Rider's Volume XV.
Alternate tubes are used in the 5001
chassis. A single chassis may contain octal,
lock-in, and miniature button tubes. The
alternate lineups are as follows.
Chassis 5C01,
Original
I2SA7GT
35Z5GT
12SK7
12SQ7
50L6GT
Alternate
Alternate
12BE6
35W4
12BA6
12AT6
50B5
14Q7
If the oscillator should shift, replace the
oscillator coupling resistor (RS'
with a 1000 -ohm resistor. When the oscillator drops out at the low end of the
band, remove the 10,000 -ohm grid leak
resistor (Rl) from the common return
(B-) and connect it instead to the cathode of the converter. If audio oscillation
occurs in the early model, disconnect the
0.0005-µf capacitor (C13) from the common
return and connect it to the cathode of
the 50L6GT output tube, as shown in the
late model schematic on page 15-8. Remove
the 250-µµf capacitor (C20) that is con
nected from the plate to the cathode of
the 50L6GT output tube. When hum and
microphones appear, check for a grounded
tuning capacitor frame to the cabinet ven
tilator plate.
The letter "V" after a chassis number
indicates that an aluminum chassis is used
220-ohm
Zenith Chassis 6C05, 6D0 Series
This chassis appears in Rider's Volume
XV, pages 15-2, 16-28, and 15-29.
There will be variations in the tube
line-up for different 6005 chassis. A single
chassis may contain octal, lock -in, and
miniature button tubes. If an original
tube is replaced with an alternate, the
socket must also be replaced.
Original
Alternate
Alternate
12SJ7GT
12SA7GT
12BE6
14Q7
12BA6
12SQ7GT
35L6GT
35Z5GT
12AT6
35W5
If the oscillator shifts, replace R3 (220
ohms) with a 1,000 -ohm resistor.
If the oscillator drops out at the low
end of the band, disconnect Rl (10,000
ohms) from the negative return and connect to the cathode of the converter tube.
For audio oscillation, disconnect C14
from the negative return and connect to
the cathode of the 35L6GT. Take out C21
(connected from the plate to cathode of
the 35L6GT).
If there is oscillation at 910 kc, change
05 (negative return to chassis) from 0.05
to 0.1 µf.
Check for grounded tuning capacitor
frame in case of oscillation, hum, and
poor sensitivity. Correct by inserting cork
or rubber pad between rear capacitor
frame and chassis. Cement in place.
The letter "V" as in Chassis number
6C05V, indicates that an aluminum chassis
is used.
CHANGES PAGE 20-17
In some cases when the front lid of the
receiver is open, the receiver will cut in
and out or sometimes be entirely dead.
The wire from the wavemagnet to the
front door hinge may break at the hinge
connection. To correct this condition, remove the handle and resolder these leads,
being quite certain that solder is not allowed to run back on the antenna lead
and that enough extra antenna lead is allowed for flexing to prevent breakage
when the door is open as illustrated in
the accompanying diagram.
Zenith 4G800 Chassis 4E41
This model appears in Volume XVII of
Rider's Manuals, pages 17-1 and 17-2.
The On-Off switch #85-433 does not completely break contact on some receivers
when the lid is closed, causing battery
drain. To correct this condition, saw one
plastic switch knob 96-736 into 1/16"
lengths and place a length on the switch
shaft, and then replace the knob. This
will force the switch down far enough
when the lid is closed to break contact
and disconnect the batteries.
In some cases the calibration pointer
touches the metal front of the cabinet,
thus putting the gang at an a -c potential
and causing a hum. To correct this condition place a fibre washer #93-323 between
the pointer and the metal dial front. This
fibre washer between the metal front panel
and the dial pointer, completely prevents
this "shorting" condition.
In very rare cases, when hum is encountered and cannot be corrected in any
other manner, changing the 1S5 tube is
suggested.
On later production runs the 3Q4 tube
was replaced with a 3V4 tube. The circuit
remains the same in this case. However,
the wiring to the tube base has been altered. The 3Q4 is not interchangeable with
the 3V4 because of socket connections.
Zenith 6G801, Chassis 6E40
This model appears in Rider's Volume
18-7, 18-8, and 18-10. In
some cases when microphonics are encountered they can be eliminated by replacing one or more of the tubes. The
offending tube can be located *by turning
the set on with the volume advanced and
the set tuned to an off -station position.
Then gently tap each tube, the one emitting the loudest "ping" is the defective
item.
XVIII, pages
Zenith 8H023, 8H034, Chassis 8C01
These models appear on pages 15-71 to
Rider's Volume XV. The rushing
noise that occurs when the volume control
is turned to minimum is caused by a poor
connection from the grid element to the
grid cap of the 6S8GT tube. A hot iron
and a little flux on the grid cap will remove the high-resistance solder joint.
If the f-m oscillator drifts, check for a
red dot on the oscillator tuning -slug wire.
If the wire is unmarked, replace with one
which has a red dot. If the receiver flutters on f.m., this may be cured by installing a 22-1635, 20-µf, 150-V capacitor and
two 1/4 -watt resistors, 63-583, 1000 ohms,
and 63-600. 2.2 Megohms, as indicated in
the accompanying diagra n.
15-74 of
ANTENNA
WINE TO
RECEIVE
BREAK OMURA
NERE
Enough extra lead length should be left
when replacing the wavemagnet lead on
the Zenith 40800 so that a break does
not occur at the point indicated.
Q
LII
3..-a
I
111,L 12
45S KC:
C3
=01
R2
680
2.2
C3
R6
MEG.
;
LIS
4 -SS
R2
ó17
6vÉIgv_
a
KC.
c
f:eeNi
455 KV1.
47 M-.6
I
rl
R9
1
IVOM
'210 X
11
II
R8
47M
;;
_
RI
Ì
-
11
iI
RIO
C22-".01
__tlyì_
4-
s?_S
tbF1T
10 M
-470
M
--II
47M
510Y,
14
BL
NORMJ
LNI
I
2
POSITION
T.O S
SOMFD
/11.2 MEG.
,SoV
3*w25Z6GT
RECT.
125v
G
2326
Drift in the
©John
F.
f -ni
R20
212
fa
6587
O
oscillator of the Zenith 811023 may be corrected by making the changes indicated.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
10
C27
.02
2VR
_-_J
O
G.
1
OPEN
HERE
AST
.
6SG7/OT
PAGE 20-18 CHANGES
Zenith Chassis 6C01, 6D0 Series
Zenith 9H881, 9H882, 9H885, 9H888,
Ch. 9E21
Chassis 6C01, 6:)O Series, which appears
on page 15-26 of Rider's Volume XV, will
contain variations in the tube line-up. A
single chassis may contain octal, lock -in,
and miniature button tubes. If an original
tube is replaced with an alternate, the
socket must also be replaced.
Alternate
Original
35W4
35Z5G/GT
These models appear on pages 19-22
through 19-29,30 of Rider's Volume XIX.
If capacitor C-4, 0.05 µf, in series with the
wavemagnet is open, the signals will be
weak and the addition of an external
antenna will not appreciably improve the
signal strength. The replacement of this
capacitor with a new 0.05 µf capacitor usually clears up the trouble.
If the phonograph is dead, check resistor
R-14, 10,000 ohms, 1/2 watt, for intermittent operation. Due to movement of the
r -f shelf when the band switch is operated.
this resistor sometimes becomes intermittent, thus opening the phono circuit.
In most cases when aligning these models, it is not necessary to change or
make any alterations in the i -f or discriminator trimmers. These trimmers are
quite stable, and the only change recommended in alignment is that of the r -f
section.
Be very sure to dress the tone control
wires away from the pulley and dial cord.
If these are not dressed away, binding
and dial slipping will result.
If static is present when tuning in a
station, check and see if the silver foil
on the paper tube shield is tightly wrapped on the cardboard form. Sometimes
this foil unwraps from the cardboard
form and lies against the gang plates,
creating static.
12AT6
12SQ7GT
When replacing speakers, use a speaker
with the same code letter (49U, AG etc.)
as the original otherwise a low -pitch hum
may be produced. If a speaker with a
different code is used, R10 (feedback resistor) may have to be changed. With 49U,
H, or AG speakers, R10 is 390,000 ohms.
When using a 49CS549 speaker, RIO must.
be 680,000 ohms. RIO is 330,000 ohms for
all other speakers.
To repair this set when it produces a
howl, change the 14C7 tube, which is
probably microphonic.
For oscillation, hum, and poor sensitivity, check for grounded tuning capacitor
frame. Correct by inserting a rubber pad
between the capacitor frame and chassis.
Cement in place.
Zenith 8G005 Series
These models appear on pages 15-63
through 15-70 of Rider's Volume XV. All
receivers of this series are similar. Different letters after the numbers 8G005
indicate differences in the cabinet only,
except for Model 8G005BT. The latter
is an export -standard model and employs
a 220 -120-volt changeover switch in the
rear of the chassis. Otherwise, it is the
same as the rest of the series.
Zenith 6R886Z, Chassis 6E02Z
Model 6R886Z is the same as Model
6R886 which appears in Rider's Manual
Volume XVII, pages 17-16 and 17-17,
except that a tone control has been added,
as illustrated in the accompanying diagram.
The following parts were added
©
.RT.
M
-©
.O, .G
12lA7ßT
iaT L,-TTIVht.
2
Ml..KTMN 5.
.__4,
j
KO
<BI
WITO MO
1..1©
00
^A.\0
e)(,,
1-
IFälr+.,,
nail
125-66
ñ
;W.
é
16641
f..0(1
w5t]RS!
TG
6G001YX, Chassis
6C40, 8G005, 8G005YX, Chassis
8C40
Model 6G001 appears on pages 15-30 and
Rider's Volume XV. Model 8G005
appears on pages 15.63 through 15-70 of
BC4
35W4
Rider's Volume XV. The On -Off switch
R[CT.
must be in the Off position whenever the
line plug is inserted into the changeover
121.,GT
MG.
switch on the rear of the chassis. Failure.
to do this may cause flashing and pos©0 00
00 00
u
iI.,GT
sible burn -out of the output tubes.
Intermittent operation may be caused
us« ems toorrel 10.6.roucTrel
OLAC.O.TK 00004.111
by the wavemagnet snap connectors being
11601/C.0 -45356
T'
-"'-520xc sprung, causing a poor contact. Poor wave e-+
. °K
magnet contact is made through the cabif rMTq
..,..:lJ
net hinge.
Changes in the Zenith 61886Z.
The letter "X" after the model number
(6G001YX, 8G005YX) indicates that an
aluminum cabinet is used.
15-31 of
..m,::.
FOR
1205 TGIL.N+a
3dCGR.9.
L[3f 0n55w1º
188-34
Tone control
Socket-octal tube
Phono -Radio switch
Rubber grommet
Rubber bumper
Retaining ring.
Zenith 6G001,
>r
C ZS
O
63-1653
78-793
85438
0 0
:,
EStic
L
Dial pointer and pulley assy.
Tone control brkt. and lug assy.
Cover plate support
0.1 µf 200 v.
Tone control knob
Escutcheon
WII. AYR
0
0 0
600
o .,........
soss
6AQE
D[T.-1fTAUDIO
I. F.
o o
©`T
OK
O
ià -
I2SK7aT
CONVIRT[R
1.00080I VOW OF
TKO 30011471
-0
:
S-14667
S-14670
12-1490
22-827
46-688
57-1398
fr.
1.,.
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-1
MODELS RC195, RC196,
RC197, RC210. RC211,
RC195, RC196, RC197 R'CORD CHANGERS
RC212
A very small quantity of record changers with model numbers
These Record Changers are
RC195, RC196, RC197 were produced.
early production version of the RC210, RC211, and RC212 Record
Changers. The only difference between them is that on the RC195,
RC196, and RC197 Record Changers, no provision was made for auto(Centerpost is not removable
matically playing 7 -inch records.
and pickup arm does not have size selector knob.)
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
HEAD ASSEMBLY
IO" POSITION
7" OR
ON - OFF
REJECT KNOB
HEAD ASSEMBLY
12" POSITION
RECORD SUPPORT
RECORD CLIP
CENTER POST
.
FOR
RECORDS'
RECORD SIZE
SELECTOR KNOB
PICKUP ARM
NEEDLE
SELECTOR
KNOB
`d
Figure
2.
RC211 Record Changer
SPEED CHANGE
KNOB
CENTER POST
FOR
FOR 45 RPM
RECORD
10" OR 12"
RECORDS'
4
CHA.!F.ER
Figure 1. RC210 Record Changer, Top View.
This Admiral Record Changer will automatically
play a series of ten 7-inch, twelve 10 -inch, or ten 12 inch records of either the 78 RPM, or the new 33 RPM
type. The records must be of one size and type for
each loading.
Models RC210 and RC211 can also be used, in connection with the Admiral 45 RPM Record Changer, to
play the new 7 -inch, 45 RPM records. Two plugs have
been provided to allow for connecting it to the Admiral
45 RPM Record Changer.
SETTING NEEDLE SELECTOR AND SPEED
CHANGE KNOBS
Rotate the pickup arm cartridge, by turning the needle
selector knob which extends out from the front of the
pickup arm. The small arrow next to the "33" and "78"
indicates the direction in which the knob must be
rotated. When turning this knob to either the "78"
or the "33" position, make certain that it is turned
until it reaches its stop.
For playing 78 RPM records, move the speed change
knob to the "78" position; for playing 33 RPM records,
move it to the "33" position. When moving the speed
change knob, make certain that it clicks or snaps into
position.
Be certain that the needle selector knob and speed
change knob are both set for "78", or are both set for
tt33f1
SETTING FOR SIZE OF RECORD
SELECTING CENTERPOST: This record changer
designed to be used with either of two centerposts.
The centerpost which has a curved portion in the center
is the centerpost for 10 -inch and 12 -inch records. The
second centerpost is bent approximately 45 degrees and
is
to be used for automatically playing 7 -inch records.
To change centerposts it is only necessary to lift the
centerpost from its socket. Place one hand on the turntable while pulling out the centerpost with the other
hand.
is
o
Figur73. RC212 Record Changer
SETTING HEAD ASSEMBLY: In order to play
inch or
7-
records, rotate the head assembly so
that the embossed design is toward the centerpost. See
figure 1. For 12 -inch records, rotate the head assembly
so that the embossed design is away from the centerpost.
SETTING RECORD SIZE SELECTOR KNOB: To
play 7 -inch records, turn the Record Size Selector knob
to the left so that the figure "7" on the knob is adjacent to the dot on the pickup arm. To play 10 -inch
or 12 -inch records, turn this knob to the right until
the figures "10 12" are adjacent to the dot on the
pickup arm.
10 -inch
STARTING THE RECORD CHANGER
Do not load 33 RPM records with the standard 78
RPM type. Also, the records must be of the same size
(all 7 -inch, all 10 -inch, or all 12 -inch) for each loading.
After setting the head assembly for the correct record
size, move the record clip so that it is away from the
centerpost before loading the changer.
Place your records over the centerpost so that they
rest on its offset. The edge of the bottom record will
be held up by the record support.
Move the record clip so that it rests on the top record.
Turn the On -Off Reject knob to the "ON" position.
Press down on the On-Off Reject knob momentarily
to the "Reject" position. The bottom record will drop
to the turntable and the Record Changer will play the
entire stack of records automatically.
REJECTING A RECORD
If you wish to stop playing any record and start playing the next one, merely press down on the On -Off
Reject knob momentarily.
STOPPING AND UNLOADING
This Record Changer cannot be turned off, by means
of the On -Off Reject knob, during its change cycle.
Therefore, after the last record, allow the mechanism
to go through its change cycle and start playing over
again.
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-2 ADMIRAL
MODELS RC210,
RC211, RC212
THE CHANGE CYCLE
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE CYCLE
(See Figures 4 and 5)
If at all possible, we recommend that you carefully
observe the operation of a changer that is in normal
operating condition. It is a good idea to rotate the
turntable by hand and repeat the changing cycle until
you understand the function of each part. It is important to note that this changer employs the oscillating
type trip, which depends upon the in and out movement of the pickup arm caused by the eccentric groove
in the record.
The changer operates as follows: The changer
mechanism is driven during its change cycle by the
knurled hub of the turntable rotating the rubber -tired
drive wheel (69). During normal playing, the drive
wheel is held in a neutral position as illustrated in Fig.
4A, so that the indentation prevents the tire from contacting the knurled hub. The drive wheel (69) is held
in this position by the trip stop wire (91A) and the cam
stop stud (72A) on the control cam (72).
During the record play and as the needle enters the
record eccentric groove, the pickup arm is moving in
toward the centerpost. The pawl (103A) is moving
across the trip serrations (94). When the eccentric
groove in the record causes the pickup arm to move
away from the centerpost, the pawl (103A) tends to
reverse its direction but its sharp point catches in one
of the trip serrations (94) and moves the trip lever (91)
As the eccentric groove moves the pickup arm back in
toward the centerpost, and then away from the center post again, the pawl (103A), again locks in one of the
trip serrations, moves the trip lever (91) far enough
so that the trip stop wire (91A) is no longer engaged
with the cam stop stud (72A) . This oscillating trip
action is dependent upon the adjustment of the trip set
screw (95). If it is adjusted properly, the pickup arm
will move away from the centerpost, toward the center
post, and as it comes away the second time the changer
will trip and start its change cycle. (See paragraph under
heading "Trip Adjustment.") The position of drive
wheel (69) at this moment is shown in Figure 4B.
This allows the cycle spring (92) to pull the control
cam clockwise (bottom view). Since the control cam
(72) and the drive wheel (69) are on the same shaft,
the drive wheel is turned so its rubber tire is against the
knurled hub of the turntable (see Figure 4B). The
turntable now rotates the drive wheel (69) which simultaneously rotates the control cam (72). As soon as
changer has been tripped, the trip cocking spring (90)
causes the trip lever (91) to return the trip stop wire
(91A) to the noraml playing position.
Roller (85) riding on the control cam (72) moves
the pivot link (84) which in turn rotates the control
plate (83). The rotation of the control plate (83) causes
its inclined tab (83A) to ride against the lift rod (28)
which lifts the pickup arm from the record. The arm
the
control lever roller and stud (103B) then engages cam
control
the
of
rotation
Further
safety arm (100).
rotation
(72) moves the pivot link (84) causing further
of the control plate (83) causing the pickup arm to move
taken
to the right, clearing the record. This much has
of
rotation
total
the
of
one-third
place in approximately
the control cam.
As the control cam rotates further, its push-off stud
the pushoff
(72B) engages with the end of the slot in
.
-
®John
F.
O
-
."A"
TURNTABLE HUB
(KNURLED)
"B"
Figure 4. Drive Wheel Positions.
link assembly (76), moving it. This movement is transmitted through the push -off arm (76A) and as a result,
the push -off shaft (10) is rotated. This rotates the
push -off cam (l0A) which in turn slides the push-off
plate (11) forward and drops the next record to be
played. Note that the record stack rests on the record
support shelf (12) . The small slide at the top end of
the centerpost holds back all records other than the
bottom one when the push -off plate (11) moves forward.
As the control cam continues its rotation, the pivot
link (84) moves back following the cam, since the roller
(85) is kept in contact with the cam by the control plate
spring (87). This moves the control plate (83) back,
the arm control lever (103) moves the pickup arm to
the set-down point for the record to be played. The
pickup arm is held above the record because the lift
rod (28) is still resting at the top of the inclined tab
(83A) on the control plate (83). The set -down point
is governed by the set-down adjusting screw (21). (See
figure 6.) The shoulder on the set-down arm (104A)
holds the pickup arm at the set -down point until it is
pushed back by the edge of the control plate engaging
the set-down arm stud (104B). The pickup arm is then
free and moves down toward the record starting groove.
When the record changer is set to play 7 -inch or 10 inch records, the set -down arm (104A) through the
tension of the set -down spring (106) moves the arm in
toward the centerpost until the return roller and stud
(103C) reaches the shoulder of the set-down arm
(104A). The pickup arm is held in this position until
the control plate (83) engages the set -down arm stud
(104B), pushing the set -down arm back, releasing or
freeing the pickup arm.
When the changer is set for 12 -inch records the size
change eccentric (82) moves the set -down and size
change assembly (104) so that the arm return roller
and stud (103C) does not travel as great a distance
along the set-down arm (104A) before it reaches the
shoulder. Therefore the pickup arm cannot move in
toward the centerpost as far as for 7 -inch or 10 -inch
records, during change cycle.
When the On-Off Reject knob (1) is pressed down,
the push-off cam and shaft (10) moves the reject arm
(97) down. This movement causes the trip lever (91)
to move which prevents the trip stop wire (91A) from
engaging the cam stop stud (72A). The change cycle
then proceeds in the manner described above.
The change cycle is exactly the same for either speed
(33 RPM or 78 RPM) except for the fact that the
change cycle time is proportional to the turntable speed
(33 RPM or 78 RPM).
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-3
MODELS RC210,
RC211, RC212,
728
72
72*
92
91A
91
90
95 TRIP ADJ.
SCREW
98 REJECT
ADJ.
94
SCREW
103A
103
100
1038
44
76
85
84
45
87
105
16*
106
82
Figure 5. Bottom View Assembled.
and the pivot spring and hub (29). This in turn moves
Playing 7 -inch records automatically is accomplished
by removing the centerpost for 10 -inch or 12 -inch rec.the arm control lever, studs, and pawl (103) so the
ords and inserting the centerpost for 7 -inch records.
pawl (103A) is closer to the lip of the trip serrations
Rotation of the record size selector knob (17) to the
(94). This results in moving the end of the pick-up
position for 7 -inch records, rotates the set -down eccenarm closer to the centerpost, by the distance needed for
proper set -down on 7 -inch records.
tric (23). The set -down eccentric rotates or moves the
set -down plate, part of pivot and mounting plate (24),
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT OF SET -DOWN POINT
Adjustment of the set -down point, for either 7 -inch,
10 -inch, or 12 -inch records, is made by adjustment of
the set -down adjusting screw (21), see Figure 6. Screw
(21) is accessible through hole in right side of pickup
arm. This adjustment must be made with the record
size selector knob (17) in the "10.12" position. When
turning this knob be sure to turn it all the way (the
dot between "10.12" should line up with the indicating
dot on the pickup arm) to avoid making the set-down
adjustment at the wrong point, resulting in improper
set -down on 7 -inch records. Turning the set-down adjusting screw (21) in, moves the set -down point of the
pickup arm closer to the centerpost and turning the
screw out moves it away from the centerpost.
Make the set -down point adjustment as follows:
1.
Set record size selector knob (17) to the "10.12"
position; be sure the knob is turned all the way to
its stop (the dot between "10.12" should line up
with dot on pickup arm).
2.
Set needle selector knob to either position being
certain that the knob is turned to its stop so the
needle projects straight down.
3.
Set the head assembly to the position for playing
7-inch or 10-inch records.
e John F.
4. Press down on the On -Off Reject knob (1) mo-
mentarily. Rotate the turntable by hand through
the change cycle until the pickup arm moves
down toward the turntable.
5. Check the distance between the needle point and
the near side of the centerpost. For proper set down on 10-inch records, the distance between
needle and centerpost should be between 478"
and 4-11/16".
6. Adjust set -down screw (21) and repeat steps 4
and 5 until the proper distance is obtained. If
this adjustment is made carefully, the set -down
point for 7 -inch records and 12 -inch records will
be automatically correct.
7. Check 12 -inch set -down as follows: Set the head
assembly to the position for 12 -inch records, press
On -Off Reject knob momentarily, rotate turntable
by hand through the change cycle and check the
12 -inch set -down point. The proper distance between the needle point and the near side of the
centerpost is between 578" and 5-11/16".
8. Check 7 -inch set -down as follows: Set the head
assembly to the position for 7 -inch and 10 -inch
records, set the record size selector knob (17) so
the dot under the "7" lines up with the locating
dot on the pickup arm. (NOTE: In some early
production sets, it may be necessary to set the
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-4 ADMIRAL
RC210,
RC211, RC212
record size selector knob (17) so that the dots
are slightly out of line.) Press the On -Off Reject
knob momentarily, rotate the turntable by hand
through the change cycle and check the 7 -inch
set -down point. The proper distance between
needle point and the near side of the centerpost
is between 3-3/16" and 3'4".
9. If step 7 or step 8 indicates improper set -down
on 7-inch records or 12 -inch records, make a
compromise adjustment for 10 -inch record set down as outlined in steps 3, 4, 5 and 6.
ADJUSTING THE PICKUP ARM HEIGHT
(See Figure 6)
This record changer is designed so that when the
needle point rests 1/4" above the changer pan, the pickup arm will automatically lift high enough, during
change cycle, to clear the top record of a stack of ten
7-inch, twelve 10 -inch, or ten 12 -inch records on the
turntable. With proper pickup arm height setting, the
pickup arm will not lift high enough to strike the bottom record of the stack to be played.
r
21
_J
27
30
Figure 6. Arm Detail Showing Adjustments.
With the record changer out of change cycle and
the pickup arm clear of the turntable, adjust the lift
adjusting screw (27) so that the needle rests approximately 1/4" above the top of the changer pan. Turning
screw (27) in raises the pickup arm; turning it out
lowers the arm.
After this adjustment has been made, the record
changer should be run through its change cycle a few
times to make certain that the pickup arm does not
touch the bottom record of the stack to be played. If,
for some reason, the arm lifts too high, a compromise
adjustment should be made. That is, turn the screw
out and lower the pickup arm slightly.
REJECT AND TRIP ADJUSTMENTS
Before making either reject or trip adjustments it is
very important to make certain that the reject spring
(2) is holding the push -off shaft (10) up, as far as
it will go. If this precaution is not observed, erratic
reject and trip action may result.
Possible causes of the spring not holding the push -off
shaft up are:
a. The On -Off Reject knob (1) may be loose.
b. The reject spring (2) may be broken, missing,
slipped down between washer (3) and push -off
shaft (10), or has lost its tension.
c. Push -off shaft (10) binding.
REJECT ADJUSTMENT
1. Be sure to read the paragraph under "Reject and
2.
Trip Adjustments".
Adjust the reject link adjusting screw (98) until
e John F.
is approximately 1/32 of an inch space between the end of the reject arm (97) and the
rivet on the push -off arm and link assembly (76).
NOTE: If there is no space between these two
parts, it will be possible for the changer to begin
its change cycle when the on -off reject knob is
turned to the "OFF" position. If there is too
much space, the changer may reject erratically.
3. Operate the Record Changer, press the On
-Off
Reject knob momentarily and check reject action.
TRIP ADJUSTMENT
Since this Record Changer uses the oscillating trip
principle to begin its change cycle, it is very important
that the trip adjusting screw (95) is properly adjusted.
See Figures 5 and 7.
there
103A
95
94
Figure 7. Positioning Trip Serrations.
The trip adjusting screw (95) is properly adjusted
when the record changer trips into change cycle after
the eccentric groove in the record has caused the pickup
arm to move away from the centerpost once or twice,
that is, one or two backswings of the pickup arm, before
the changer trips into change cycle. Since some eccentric grooves cause greater movement of the pickup arm
than others, the changer might trip into change cycle
with only one backswing on some records and with two
backswings on others.
The ideal adjustment of screw (95) for best operation
is when the point of the pawl (103A) is horizontally,
even or level with the smooth side of the trip serrations.
(94). NOTE: The point of the pawl will be approximately 3/32 of an inch from the bottom edge of the lip
on the trip serrations. See Figure 7.
Adjust the trip adjusting screw (95) as follows:
1. Be sure to read the paragraph under "Reject and
Trip Adjustments".
2. Connect record changer motor to power source
and turn the On -Off Reject knob on and off as
needed to check this adjustment.
3. Adjust trip adjusting screw (95) until the point of
the pawl (103A) is horizontally even or level with
the smooth side of the trip serrations (94), or
until the point of the pawl is 3/32 of an inch from
the bottom edge of the lip on the trip serrations.
See Figure 7.
4. If the top of the trip stop wire (91A) is not level
with the top of the main cam stop stud (72A) as
shown in Figure 8, check to see if the trip stop
wire is bent slightly. If it is, bend the wire until
it is even (level) with the top of the stud.
5. Place a record on the turntable and check to
make certain that the changer trips into change
cycle with one or two backswings of the arm.
IMPORTANT
The eccentric groove of a record should be used
when checking the trip adjustment. Do not lift the pickup arm and move it in and out by hand.
If the trip adjusting screw (95) is turned out too
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH .PAGE 20-5
MODELS RC212,
RC211, RC212
far, it will take more than two backswings of the pickup
arm to trip the changer into change cycle. If the screw
(95) is almost all the way out, the changer will not trip.
If the screw is turned too far in, there will be excessive
drag and wear on the trip serrations, pawl point and
on record eccentric grooves. Consequently, the trip
adjustment should be made very carefully.
TRIP
STOP
WIRE
91A
SERVICE AND
.
.
CARTRIDGE AND NEEDLES
The cartridge (34) used in these record changers is
especially designed and there are a few things which
should be observed when replacing the cartridge (34),
needles (36 and 37), or pickup arm cable (40).
When replacing either needle make certain that the
correct needle is inserted in the proper "side" of the
cartridge. The needle (36) for 33 RPM records is an
osmium tipped needle especially designed for playing
33 RPM records. The radius of the point of the 33 RPM
needle is onl. 1/3 of the radius of the point of a standard (78 RPM) needle. If this sharp needle is used on
o
72
A
CONTROL CAM
72
RC2I0 536
Figure
CAUTIONS
1. See that the rubber tires on both the drive wheel
and the idler wheel are kept clean and free from
oil, grease, dirt or any foreign material. Carbona
or carbon tetrachloride may be used for cleaning
these parts.
2. The drive wheel assembly (69) appears to be
almost identical with that used on the model
RC170 and RC170A record changers. These parts
are not interchangeable.
3. When replacing the rubber tire (68) do not bend
the tab on the drive wheel over too far as this
may result in the tire catching or rubbing on the
drive wheel pressure spring (71)
4. If the On -Off Reject knob (1) cannot be pulled
off with the fingers, pry very carefully. The head
cover (7) is plastic and if the On -Off Reject knob
is pried off, excessive force should not be used.
5. When removing or replacing the pawl spring (102)
care should be taken not to stretch it.
6. When removing or replacing the pickup arm (18),
always loosen the Allen set screw (30) and lift
off the complete assembly. The pivot spring, hub
and pin assembly (29) can be removed from the
pivot plate assembly (24) and replaced much
more readily with the complete pickup arm assembly off of the changer.
7. When replacing the switch mounting bracket (79)
or the trip bracket (89) be sure to locate the half
punches in the holes in the pan before tightening
their mounting screws (80)
8. When replacing the on -off switch assembly (81)
care should be used in bending the tab fasteners
so that the switch is mounted firmly to the bracket.
9. When replacing or reinstalling the record size
selector knob (17), turn the set -down eccentric
(23) to the position for 10" and 12" set -down.
Then install the knob (17) so that the dot between "10.12" lines up with the locating dot on
the pickup arm.
CAM STOP STUD
8.
Positioning Trip Stop Wire.
REPAIR
standard 78 RPM records, it has a tendency to "wobble"
in the record groove and would possibly damage the
standard record groove. A needle for 78 RPM records
may possibly damage 33 RPM "microgroove" records
because of its tendency to "skate" across a microgroove
record. Consequently, care should be taken when replacing needles.
The needle (36) for 33 RPM records is painted red
to identify it. The needle guard on the 33 RPM "side"
of the cartridge has red color dots to distinguish it
from the 78 RPM "side" of the cartridge. The red (33
RPM) needle (36) should be inserted in the side of the
cartridge which has the red color dots.
When replacing the cartridge (34) care must be
taken when placing the pickup arm cable pinjacks on
the cartridge. There must be sufficient slack in the
cable to allow the cartridge to rotate. It is also important that the short length of plastic tubing be kept over
one terminal.
TWO SPEED MOTOR (67)
The turntable speed of these Record Changers is
changed mechanically. When the speed change knob
(58) is moved to the "33" position, the speed change
arm (56) moves. This causes the 33 RPM drive shaft
to pivot and ride against the idler wheel (60). When
the speed change knob is moved to the 78 RPM position, the speed change arm causes the 33 RPM drive
shaft to pivot away from the idler wheel (60). When
the speed change knob (58) is moved, make certain
that it "clicks" or "snaps" into position.
Note that the 33 RPM drive shaft is driven by the
78 RPM drive shaft by means of a rubber belt (63).
This belt should be clean and free from oil. If the belt
is greasy or stretched, it might possibly slip which
would cause the turntable speed to vary, resulting in
unsatisfactory operation.
When replacing the speed change knob (58), make
certain that the shaft in the knob does not touch the
sides or ends of the tut -out in the pan. The speed
change arm (56) must be installed properly (its half punches keep the proper angle). If it is not installed
correctly, the speed change knob shaft may rub against
the edge of the opening in the pan causing rumble and
noise pickup. Also, the clearance between the bottom of
the speed change knob and the top of the pan should
not be less than 1/64 of an inch or more than 3/64
of an inch.
REMOVING THE PLASTIC BASE HOUSING (14)
Should it be necessary to remove the plastic base
housing, proceed as follows:
I. Remove retaining rings (86 and 88).
2. Release one end of the index spring (105)
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
.
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-6 ADMIRAL
MODELS RC210
RC211, RC212
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Lift the entire head assembly up from the top of
the changer.
Loosen Allen set screw (30) and lift complete
pickup arm assembly off.
Remove retaining ring (31) and washer (32) .
Remove three screws (16) holding base.
Lift off the plastic base housing (14).
When reassembly has been completed, the pickup
arm height should be carefully checked and adjusted, if necessary, by means of the lift adjusting
screw (27). The set -down should also be checked
and adjusted, if necessary, as outlined under
"Adjustment Of Set-Down Point".
REMOVING TURNTABLE (8) AND BEARING
ASSEMBLY (49)
To remove the turntable it is only necessary to grasp
the turntable by its edges and lift up. Before replacing
the turntable, make sure that the recessed part of the
drive wheel (69) is towards the centerpost. If necessary, turn drive wheel counterclockwise about a turn so
it locks in this position. The pickup arm should be
positioned away from the turntable. In replacing the
turntable, force is not needed to seat it. Make certain,
however, that the idler wheel of the motor has been
,pushed in towards the centerpost and that the idler
wheel is making contact with the inner side of the turntable flange.
The dimensions of the two speed motor are such
that three cork washers (47) are used under the turntable hub to keep the turntable from rubbing against
the idler wheel drive shafts.
In some cases it may be found that the three cork
washers, after considerable use, are compressed so the
turntable will rub. To build the stack up, an additional
thin cork washer should be used. This fourth cork
washer may be placed at the top or bottom of the stack.
The washers (47 and 48) and thrust bearing assembly
(49) are removed by sliding them off of the centerpost.
In replacing, have them in the order shown in Figure 9.
REMOVING BOTTOM COVER (107)
For Model RC210 only. To remove the bottom cover
(107) from the record changer, remove the two rear
screws (50) through the bottom. Then press on the
front edge of the bottom cover; this frees the changer
from the slotted mounting brackets at the front of the
bottom cover. To replace bottom cover, reverse above
operations.
The changer must float on the springs (51) to prevent microphonic feedback, thus these springs must be
re -installed properly. The wider end fits around and
hugs the extrusion in the mounting brackets in the
bottom cover. The narrow end of the spring fits over
the threaded bushing on the changer pan (54). To
assure "free floating" of the changer, spacer washers
(52) are used under the narrow portion of springs (51) .
For Model RC211 only. To remove the bottom cover
on this model (RC211), remove the three mounting
screws (50), from the top of the changer pan. Then
merely lift the changer pan off of the bottom cover
(107) being careful to see that lead-in cables and motor
leads are disconnected.
When reinstalling the changer pan on the bottom
cover be certain the float springs (51) are properly
installed. Insert the mounting screws (50). IMPORT.
c John
ANT: These screws must be installed so they travel
freely through the extruded holes in the changer pan.
If the screws touch the edges of the holes in the pan,
a scraping sound will occur when records
drop to the
turntable and microphonics might also result.
LUBRICATION
Under normal operating conditions, the motor should
never require oiling. The rest of the changer, however,
should be lubricated with grease whenever it comes into
the shop for repairs or adjustment. All pivot and friction points should be greased adequately but not excessively. A good automobile chassis grease may be
used for this purpose.
The push -off shaft (10), powdered iron roller (85),
oilite bearings, (used in the turntable hub and base
housing), may be lubricated with SAE No. 20 motor oil.
Care shoull be taken to prevent any of the lubricant
from coming into contact with the drive or idler wheel
tires. Also be careful, when using oil, that an excess
does not seep into the felt of the turntable.
RECORD CHANGER TROUBLE SHOOTING
1. Records Do Not Drop To Turntable Or More
Than One Record Drops.
(a) Check the distance between the inside edge
of the centerpost (9) and the edge of the
record support (12). This distance should be
4-61/64" ± 1/32", in the 10 -inch position.
With the centerpost for 7 -inch records in
place and the head assembly in the 10-inch
position, the distance between the inside edge
of the centerpost and the edge of the record
support should be 3Y2" ± 1/32". These dimensions are critical and if distance does not
meet specifications, bend the centerpost
slightly toward or away from the head assembly as needed.
2. Changer Repeatedly Trips Into Change Cycle.
(a) Check for broken trip cocking spring (90), or
(b) Check for broken reject spring (2), or
(c) Check for On-Off Reject knob (1) loose, or
(d) Check for misadjustment of reject adjusting
screw (98), or trip adjusting screw (95).
3. Changer Will Not Trip.
(a) Check for broken or loose cycle spring (92),
(b) Check On -Off switch cover (81). If cover is
is not assembled to switch properly it may
bind push -off link and arm (76) preventing
cycle spring (92) from pulling the main cam
(72) around, or
(c) Check for misadjusmtent of the trip adjusting screw (95), or
(d) Check for bent trip stop wire (91A), or
(e) Check for broken pawl spring (102).
4. Changer Will Not Reject.
(a) Check adjustment of reject screw (98).
S. Cannot Get Proper Set Down.
(a) Check set -down spring (106), or
(b) Check for broken or loose set-down adjusting
spring (22), or
(c) Check for loose pickup arm counter weight
screws (20) resulting in erratic set -down.
(These screws hold pivot and mounting plate
(24) in position).
F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD.
Figure 9. RC210 Record Changer, Exploded.
o
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CH.
PAGE 20-7
20-8 ADMIRAL
0,
RC211, RC212
'RCD. CH. PAGE
LS
Ref.
Ne.
RC 3.
7
403A27
405A97
481-166-47
406A18
403A32
405A94
403A31
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
61
Centerpost Assy. (for 10" & 12" Records)
Centerpost Assy. (for 7" Records)
Push -Off Cam and Shaft Assembly
62
Push -Off Com (Part of 10)
65
-Off Plate
Support Tube and Shelf Assembly
Washer (Flat) .390:5/8x1/16
Base Housing
66
G400A248
33
98A.54-1
35
98A54-2
36
98A15ó
37
98A15-7
402A139
401A264
G400A307
{114A30
414A34
113A11-1
30
31
32
38
39
40
41
42
1413A11-2
88A2-3
43
89A5-27
44
413Al2
45
88A8-1
46
1A/0 -S
47
412A9
412A1
415A11
G400A197
49
50
51
63
64
Push
67
Screw, Base Housing Mounting
68
Record Size Selector Knob
69
Pickup Arse
Pickup Arm Counterweight
Screw, #4 FH S.T. (2 req.)
Set -Down Adjusting Screw 4-40x'/4 BH MS
Set -Down
70
71
72
Lift Adjusting Screw
Lift Plate and Rod Assembly
402A154
19A10-3
53
54
481-72-21
403A24
403A38
(G-4000303
04000291
04000306-1
G-4000306-2
404A17
Size Change Eccentric
83
G400A226
0400A224
415A9
Control Plate, Hub and Stud Assembly
Pivot Link and Stud
Powdered Iron Roller
87
401A229
405A91
88
401A230
89
0400A228
Retaining Ring
Control Plate Assembly
Retaining Ring
Trip Bracket and Stud Assembly
90
405A88
Trip Cocking Spring
91
G400A230-1
Reject Arm Support and Trip Lever
92
405A87
Cycle Spring
Spring Washer
Trip Serrations
Trip Adjusting Screw
Spring Washer
79
Screw 8-32
Washer
Cartridge Indexing Spring
Cartridge, includes Needle Screws (less Needles)
Needle Screw (Knurled)
33 RPM Needle (Pointed Red)
78 RPM Needle
Plastiscrew, #2 (2 req.)
Cartridge Hold -Down Bracket
Pickup Arm Cable and Lugs
Wire Clip, approx. Sy" long (2 required)
long (1 required)
Wire Clip, approx.
Shielded Lead-in Cable & Plug (15") for RC211,
3"
Shielded Lead-in Cable & Plug (301 for RC210
only
Plug (for lead-in cable)
Shielded Cable & Socket (RC210, RC211 only)
for 45 RPM Record Changer
Motor Socket & Leads (RC210, RC211 only) for
45 RPM Record Changer
Motor Plug (Male)
Stud Bolt (for RC210 only)
Cork Washer 3/64" thick (1 req.)
Cork Washer 3/32" thick (2 req.)
Thrust Bearing
Mtg. Screw & Washer Assembly for RC210, RC212
(4 req.)
Float (Mounting) Screw for RC211 only (3 req.)
Conical Mounting Spring (for 1C210, RC211,
RC212)
52
On -Off Switch and Cover
82
78
Retainingy Ring
Fibre Mounting Washer for RC210 only (4 req.)
Plastic Trim (for RC210)
Plastic Trim for RC211 (2 req.)
Changer Pan Assembly (RC212)
Changer Pan Assembly (RC210)
Changer Pan Assembly, (RC211) Copper
Changer Pon Assembly, (RC211) Black
Fibre Washer (under Idler Wheel)
Retaining Ring
Rubber Mounting Grommet (3 req.)
2 Speed Motor
50 Cycle Conversion Spring (for 78 RPM Drive
Shaft)
50 Cycle Conversion Spring (tor 33 RPM Drive
Shaft)
Drive Wheel Tire Only
Drive Wheel (Includes Tire)
Drive Wheel Support Assembly (includes Rivets)
Drive Wheel P
Spring
Control Cam Assembly
Cam Stop Stud (Part of 72)
Push -Off Link Stud (Part of 72)
Control Cam Washer
408A1
77
Pivot Spying & Hub (includes 8-32 Set Screw)
Hairpin Clip
Washer (under Hairpin Clip)
Drive Belt
81
75
76
Lift Adjusting Lock Spring
Washer
Speed Change Knob
Idler Wheel Spring
Idler Wheel Assembly
80
74
Pivot Shaft
DescrlpHee
Hex Nut #10-32
Speed Change Arm (for RC210, RC211)
Speed Change Arm (for RC212 only)
401A145
361-26-47
85-375-C2.39
G400A219
411-68-47
401A177
401A223
1A53-9-47
73
Pivot and Mounting Mate
Se
406A13
G400A252
404A18-1
414A23
G400A227
72A
726
Adjusting Spring
Set -Down Eccentric
Allen
Number
2A1-20-47
401A242
401A269
411-68-47
403A33
405A107
G400A279
405A15
412A30
406A20
98A54-4
401A229
406A2I
407615
405A113
405A112
Terminal Strip
RC212
42A
48
58
G4008311
G400B310
34
29
57
Record Clip (Plastic)
60
G400A238
G400A294
1A43-14
401 A235
412A32
40SA111
28
56
Turntable
G400A249
461-166-47
403C28
1081-6
402A148
403A37
403C35
404A23
1A50-6-47
45-500-C2-47
403A118
402A173
G400A297
414A31
405A 120
402A156
17
Reject Spring
Wosher (Flat) .390,45/W(16
Rubber Bumper for Record Clip
C+4008167
401A166
16
55
59
12
15
On -Off Reject Knob
Record Clip Spring
11
14
Ref.
Ne.
Dserlptto.
Head Cover (Plastic)
l0A
13
PARTS LIST
Pert
Member
84
85
86
93
405A22
94
401A271
95
65-500-C2.47
405A98
401A237
97
98
#8
I.T.
Control Cam Screw 8-32x% BH MS
Push -Off Arm and Link Assembly
Washer
Retaining Ring
Switch Bracket
Screw, Switch Bracket Mounting
Trip Stop Wire (Part of 91)
91A
96
Lockwasher,
65-500-C2-47
401A173
Reject Arm
Screw, Reject Adjusting 6-32x%"
100
401A202
Washer
Safety Arm
101
405A90
Safety Spring
102
405A89
Pawl Spring
103
G400A233
Arm Control Lever, Studs and Pawl
104
Set -Down and Size Change Assembly
105
G400A222
405A92
106
405A93
Set -Down Spring
99
fG.400D260
Index Spring
108
27A24
Bottom Cover (RC210)
Bottom Cover, Painted Black (RC211)
Bottom Cover, Pointed Copper (RC211)
Bushing in Bottom Cover for RC210, RC211
109
405A99
414A33
Spring Washer for Bushing (RC210, RC211)
Size Change Tension Spring
107
1104000287-2
04000288-1
110
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-9
I`IODF,LS
RC 221, RC222
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
HEAD ASSEMBLY
7 -OR 10" POSITION
RECORD SUProRT
ON-OFF
REJECT KNOB
(I)
.t'
(II)
HEAD ASSEMBLY
I2" POSITION
Figure 2.
RC222 Record Changer.
RECORD CLIP (S)
CENTERPOST (61)
10"-I2" RECORDS
RECORD SIZE
SELECTOR KNOB
FOR
(16)
PICKUP ARM
(17)
SETTING NEEDLE SELECTOR KNOB
NEEDLE
SELECTOR
To play
78 RPM records, rotate the needle selector
knob so the side marked "78" faces up; to play 33
RPM records or 45 RPM records, the side marked
"LP" must face up. The small arrows next to the "78"
and "LP" indicate the direction in which the knob
must be turned. When turning this knob to either
position, make certain that it is turned until it reaches
its stop.
KNOB
(36)
SPEED
CHANGE
KNOB
(54)
SETTING HEAD ASSEMBLY
TURNTABLE
To play any
(B)
RC22I-553
Figure I.
7 -inch or 10 -inch records, rotate the
head assembly so that its embossed design is toward
the centerpost. For 12 -inch records, rotate the head
assembly so that the embossed design is away from the
cen terpost.
RC22I Record Changer, Top View.
This Admiral Record Changer is designed to auto
matically play a series of twelve 10-inch or ten 12
inch 78 RPM or 33 RPM records. It will also autoSETTING RECORD SIZE SELECTOR KNOB
matically play ten 7 -inch 33 RPM records or twelve
To play any 7 -inch records, turn the Record Size
of the new 7 -inch 45 RPM records, by using an accessory 7 -inch centerpost and an accessory 45 RPM Selector knob (16) all the way to the left until it
Spindle Unit. The records must be of one size and reaches its stop.
To play 10 -inch or 12 -inch records, turn this knob
type for each loading.
to the right until it reaches its stop.
CENTERPOST
SELECTING
78 RPM or 33 RPM records (7 -inch, 10
To play
-
inch or 12 -inch), insert the proper centerpost into the
socket in the center of the turntable. To remove a
centerpost, merely place one hand on the turntable
and lift up the centerpost with the other hand. To
play 45 RPM 7 -inch records, insert the 45 RPM spindle into the socket in the center of the turntable.
Turn the spindle counter -clockwise until the "Lock
In Lugs" fall into and lock in the three holes in the
turntable. To remove the spindle, hold the turntable
stationary, turn the spindle clockwise, then lift it out
of the socket.
IMPORTANT: If the 45 RPM spindle is being
used for the first time or if the changer does not operate properly on 45 RPM, be sure to read the information given under the heading "45 RPM Spindle Adj ustment."
-
SETTING SPEED CHANGE KNOB
For playing 78 RPM records, move the speed change
knob (54) the "78" position; for playing 33 RPM
records, move it to the "33" position; for 45 RPM
records, move it to the "45" position. When moving
the speed change knob, make certain that it clicks or
snaps into position.
©John
F.
LOADING AND STARTING THE RECORD CHANGER
To load 78 RPM or 33 RPM records, place a stack
of records so that they rest on the record support (11)
and the offset in the centerpost. Do not mix recordsplay a stack of the same size and type.
To load 45 RPM records, place as many as twelve
records over the 45 RPM Spindle, so that they rest
on the record supports (67). Be sure that the records
are held up by BOTH record supports as shown in
figure 9. If the bottom record slips down over one of
the record supports, the record may not drop when
the changer goes through its change cycle.
REJECTING A RECORD
If you wish to stop playing any record and start
playing the next one, merely press down on the On Off Reject knob momentarily.
STOPPING AND UNLOADING
This Record Changer cannot be turned off, by
means of the On -Off Reject knob, during its change
cycle. Therefore, after the last record, allow the mechanism to go through its change cycle and start playing
over again.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-10 ADMIRAL
MODELS RC221, RC222
THE CHANGE CYCLE
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE CYCLE FOR
78 RPM AND 33 RPM OPERATION
(See Figures 3, 4 and 5)
DRIVE
WHEEL
(86)
at all possible, we recommend that you carefully
observe the operation of a changer that is in normal
operating condition. It is a good idea to rotate the
turntable by hand and repeat the change cycle until
you understand the function of each part.
It is important to note that this changer employs
two different types of trip arrangements. For 78
RPM and 33 RPM operation, the oscillating type
trip is used, which depends upon the in and out
movement of the pickup arm caused by the eccentric groove in the record. For 45 RPM operation,
a position type trip is used which trips the changer
into change cycle when the pickup arm reaches a
given distance from the 45 RPM spindle.
The changer operates as follows: The turntable is
driven by the rubber tired idler wheel (58) on the
three speed motor. The turntable speed (78 RPM,
33 RPM or 45 RPM) is determined by the diameter of
the drive shaft that drives the idler wheel. See figure 3.
The 78 RPM drive shaft is a part of the motor armature. The 33 RPM and 45 RPM drive shafts are
moved in and out of position mechanically when the
speed change knob is moved.
1f
33 RPM
RIVE (50)
78 RPM
DRIVE
45 RPM
DRIVE (51)
RC221-555
IDLER
WHEEL
SPEED CHANGE
KNOB (54)
(58)
Figure 3.
Motor, Showing 3 Drives.
The changer mechanism is driven during its change
cycle by 'the rubber -tired drive wheel (86), which in
turn is driven by the knurled hub of the turntable.
During normal playing, the drive wheel is held in a
neutral position as illustrated in Fig. 4A, so that the
indentation prevents the tire from contacting the
knurled hub. The drive wheel (86) is held in this
position by the trip stop wire (111A) and the cam
stop stud (91 A) on the control cam (91).
During the record play and as the needle enters the
record eccentric groove, the pickup arm is moving in
toward the centerpost. The pawl (127B) is moving
across the trip serrations (114). When the eccentric
groove in the record causes the pickup arm to move
away from the centerpost, the pawl (127B) tends to
reverse its direction, but its sharp point catches in one
of the trip serrations (114) and moves the trip lever
(111). As the eccentric groove moves the pickup arm
back in toward the centerpost, and then away from the
centerpost again, the pawl (127B), again locks in one
of the trip serrations, moves the trip lever (111) far
TURNTABLE HUB
(KNURLED)
8
A
Figure 4.
Drive Wheel Positions.
enough so that the trip stop wire (111A) is no longer
engaged with the cam stop stud (91A). This oscillating trip action is dependent upon the adjustment
of the oscillating trip adjusting screw (115). If it
is adjusted properly, the pickup arm will move away
from the centerpost, then toward the centerpost, and
as it comes away the second time the changer will trip
and start its change cycle. (See paragraph under heading "Oscillating Trip Adjustment.") The position of
drive wheel (86) at this moment is shown in Figure 4B.
This allows the cycle spring (112) to pull the control cam clockwise (bottom view). Since the control
cam (91) and the drive wheel (86) are on the same
shaft, the drive wheel is turned so its rubber tire is
against the knurled hub of the turntable (see Figure
4B). The turntable now rotates the drive wheel (86)
which simultaneously rotates the control cam (91).
As soon as the changer has been tripped, the trip cocking spring (110) causes the trip lever (111) to return
the, trip stop wire (111A) to the normal playing
position.
Roller (105) riding on the control cam (91) moves
the pivot link (104) which in turn rotates the control
plate (123). The rotation of the control plate (123)
causes its inclined tab (123A) to ride against the lift
rod (30) which lifts the pickup arm from the record.
The arm control lever roller and stud (127C) then
engages the safety arm (124). Further rotation of the
control cam (91) moves the pivot link (104) causing
further rotation of the control plate (123); this moves
the pickup arm to the right, clearing the record. This
much has taken place in approximately one-third of
the total rotation of the control cam.
As the control cam rotates further, its push -off stud
(91B) engages with the end of the slot in the push -off
link assembly (95), moving it. This movement is transmitted through the push -off arm (95A) and as a result,
the push -off shaft (9) is rotated. This rotates the push off cam (9A) which in turn slides the push -off plate
(10) forward and drops the next record to be played.
Note that the record stack rests on the record support
shelf (11). The small slide at the top end of the centerpost holds back all records other than the bottom
one when the push -off plate (10) moves forward.
As the control cam continues its rotation, the pivot.
link (104) moves back following the cam, since the
roller (105) is kept in contact with the cam by the
control plate spring (106). This moves the control
plate (123) back; the arm control lever (127) moves
the pickup arm to the set -down point for the record
to be played. The pickup arm is held above the record
because the lift rod (30) is still resting at the top of the
inclined tab (123A) on the control plate (123). The
e John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-11
P:ODFT,S RC221, RC222
OSC. TRIP
91B
11
91A
111A
89
15
101
110
111
102
115ADJ.SCREW
/
103
126
POSITION TRIP
ADJ. SCREW
111
114
121 A
128
927 B
127
124
127C
RC
221-556
118
122
Figure 5.
point
RC221
governed by the set -down adjusting
figure 10.) The shoulder on the setdown arm (129A) holds the pickup arm at the set down point until it is pushed back by the edge of the
control plate engaging the set -down arm stud (129B).
The pickup arm is then free and moves down toward
the record starting groove.
When the record changer is set to play 7 -inch or 10 inch records, the set -down arm (129A), through the
tension of the set -down spring (131), moves the arm in
toward the centerpost until the return roller and stud
(I27D) reaches the shoulder of the set -down arm
(129A). The pickup arm is held in this position until
the control plate (123) engages the set -down arm stud
(I29B), pushing the set -down arm hack, releasing or
freeing the pickup arm.
When the changer is set for 12 -inch records the size
change eccentric (122) moves the set -down and size
change assembly (129) so that the arm return roller
and stud (127D) does not travel as great a distance
along the set -down arm (129A) before it reaches the
shoulder. Therefore the pickup arm cannot move in
toward the centerpost as far as for 7 -inch or 10 -inch
records, during change cycle.
When the On -Off Reject knob (1) is pressed down,
the push -off cam and shaft (9) moves the reject arm
(119) down. This movement causes the trip lever
(111) to move which prevents the trip stop wire
(1
A) front engaging the cant stop stud (91A), The
change cycle then proceeds in the manner described
set -down
screw (20).
I
is
(See
1
above.
o
119
REJECT
ADJ. SCREW
Bottom View Assembled.
The change cycle is exactly the same for either speed
(33 RPM or 78 RPM) except for the fact that the
change cycle time is proportional to the turntable
speed (33 RPM or 78 RPM).
Playing 7 -inch (33 RPM) records automatically is
accomplished by removing the centerpost from 10 inch or I2 -inch records and inserting the centerpost
for 7 -inch (33 RPM) records. Rotating the record
size selector knob (16) to the position for 7 -inch records, rotates the set -down eccentric (25). The set-down
eccentric rotates or moves the set -down plate, part of
pivot and mounting plate (22), and the pivot spring
and huh (31). This in turn moves the end of the
pickup arm closer to the renterpost and automatically
provides for proper set -down on 7 -inch records.
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE CYCLE FOR
45 RPM OPERATION
For 45 RPM operation, the record'changer functions
in exactly the same manner as described under the
heading "Description of Change Cycle for 78 RPM
and 33 RPM." However, a few parts not yet described
operate when the speed change knob (54) is in the
"45" position and the 45 RPM spindle (62) is in place.
Since 45 RPM records do not have an eccentric
groove, a position type trip is required to trip the
changer into its change cycle. When the speed
change knob is moved to the "95" position, the tension
on the position trip cord (102) is released. This allows
the position trip cocking spring (126) to pull the
trip engagement arm (114A) so that the position trip
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-12 ADMIRAL
MODELS RC221, RC222
adjusting screw (117) will ride on the position trip
incline (I27A) as the pickup arm moves toward the
centerpost. As the position trip incline (127A) moves
across the position trip adjusting screw (117), the
trip lever (111) moves, thereby moving the trip
stop wire so it is no longer engaged with the control
cam stop stud (91A). The changer then goes through
its change cycle in the same manner as it does for
33 RPM and 78 RPM operation.
After the control cam (91) has rotated approximately one third of its rotation, the riser control stud
(9IC) engages the riser plate (90), driving the riser
plate counter -clockwise so that its inclined portion
(90A) rides across the push -off adjusting shaft (75) on
the 45 RPM spindle. This forces the push -off adjusting shaft and the slicer cam and shaft assembly (69),
up into the spindle.
As the slicer cam (69A) rises, its sides push the
slicers (65 & 66) outward. The slicers move under
the second from the bottom record of a stack. The
record supports (67) are moved into the spindle simultaneously since the ears of the slicers are fitted into
the cut -away section of the record support on the opposite side of the spindle.
When the push -off adjusting shaft (75) reaches the
top of the inclined portion of the riser plate (90), the
slicers (65 & 66) are fully extended, and the record
supports are all the way into the spindle. This allows
the bottom record to drop to the turntable while the
remainder of the stack is held up by the slicers.
As the control cam continues its rotation, the riser
control stud (91C) releases the riser plate (90) and the
riser plate is returned to its normal position by the
riser plate return spring (89). The record supports
(67) and slicers (65 & 66) are returned to their normal
position by the record support spring (68) and the
slicer springs (64). At this point the record stack
drops from the slicers to the record supports.
ADJUSTMENTS
REJECT
AND TRIP ADJUSTMENTS
This record changer employs two different types
of trip mechanisms to trip it into change cycle. For
78 RPM and 33 RPM operation, an "oscillating"
type trip is used. See figure 6. This type of trip depends upon the in and out movement of the pickup
arm caused by the eccentric groove in the record.
For 45 RPM operation, a "position" type trip is
used. See figure 8. (45 RPM records do not have an
eccentric groove.) This type of trip arrangement, trips
the changer into change cycle when the pickup arm
reaches a given distance from the 45 RPM spindle.
Screw adjustments are provided for both types of
trips. However, before making either of the trip adjustments or the reject adjustment, it is very important to make certain that the reject spring (2) is holding the push-off shaft (9) up, as far as it will go. It
is also important that there is 11,1 of an inch clearance
between the end of the reject arm (119) and the rivet
on the push -off arm and link assembly (95). If these
precautions are not observed, erratic reject and trip
action may result, or if there is no clearance at the
end of the reject arm, the changer may repeatedly
trip into change cycle.
Possible causes of the spring not holding the push off shaft up are:
a. The On -Off Reject knob (1) may be loose.
b. The reject spring (2) may be broken, missing,
slipped down between washer (3) and push -off
shaft (9), or has lost its tension.
c. Push -off shaft (9) binding.
3.
parts, it will be possible for the changer to begin
its change cycle when the on -off reject knob is
turned to the "OFF" position. If there is too
much space, the changer may not reject or will
reject erratically.
Operate the Record Changer, press the On -Off
Reject knob momentarily and check reject action.
OSCILLATING TRIP ADJUSTMENT
For 33 RPM and 78 RPM Operation
IMPORTANT: This adjustment must be made
properly before making the Position Trip Adjust-
ment.
This record changer uses the oscillating type trip
for 78 RPM and 33 RPM operation. See figure 6. In
order for the changer to trip properly, the oscillating
trip adjusting screw (115) must be properly adjusted.
Also, this adjustment affects the position trip adjust-
ment and consequently should be made carefully before attempting the position trip adjustment.
The oscillating trip adjusting screw (115) is properly adjusted when the record changer trips into
change cycle after the eccentric groove in the record
has caused the pickup arm to move away from the.
centerpost once or twice, that is, one or two back swings of the pickup arm, before the changer trips
into change cycle. Since some eccentric grooves cause
greater movement of the pickup arm than others, the
changer might trip into change cycle with only one
backswing on some records and with two backswings
on others.
TRIP SERRATION PLATE
REJECT ADJUSTMENT
(114
I. Make certain that the push -off shaft (9) is not
binding and is being held up, as far as it will go,
by the reject spring (2) and the On -Off Reject
knob (1).
2. Adjust the reject adjusting screw (118) until
there is approximately
of an inch space between the end of the reject arm (119) and the
rivet on the push -off arm and link assembly (95).
NOTE: If there
is
no space between these two
OSC. TRIP ADJ. SCREW
115)
CORD
Figure 6.
TENSIO
SPRING (103)
Trip Serration Plag, Showing Oscillating Trip Adjustment.
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-13
MODELS RC221, RC222
The ideal adjustment of screw (115) for best operation is when the point of the pawl (127B) is horizontally even or level with the smooth side of the trip
serration plate (114). NOTE: The point of the pawl
should be approximately v8 of an inch from the bottom edge of the lip on the trip serration plate. See
figure 8.
Adjust the oscillating trip adjusting screw (115) as
follows:
Make certain that the push -off shaft (9) is not
binding and is being held up, as far as it will go,
by the reject spring (2) and the On -Off Reject
of an inch clearance
knob (1). Also check for
at the end of the reject arm. See the third paragraph under heading "Reject and Trip Ad1
:.
justments."
2.
Check to be sure that the position trip cord (102)
is not broken or loose and that the cord tension
adjusting cam (101) is not misadjusted.
Check to see that the top of the trip stop wire
(l1 1A) is even (level) with the top of the control
cam stop stud (91A) as shown in figure 7. If the
stop wire is not even with the top of the stud,
bend the wire until it is even. The trip bracket
assembly should be removed before bending the
trip stop wire.
POSITION TRIP ADJUSTMENT
For 45 RPM Operation
IMPORTANT: Before making this adjustment,
the Oscillating Trip Adjustment should be prop.
erly made.
The position trip adjusting screw (117) is properly
adjusted when the record changer trips into change
cycle when the needle is 11/" to 1-h" from the neat
edge of the 45 RPM spindle or 2" to 2h" from the
center of the centerpost hole in the turntable.
Turning the position trip adjusting screw (117) in,
moves the trip point away from the 45 RPM spindle.
Turning the screw out, moves the trip point closer tc
the 45 RPM spindle.
POSITION TRIP
ADJ. SCREW (II7)
POSITION TRIP PLATE (II4A)
POSITION TRIP INCLINE
(127A)
Figure 8.
POSITION TRIP
COCKING SPRING (126)
Trip Serration Plate, Showing Position Trip Adjustment.
Adjust the position trip adjusting screw (117) as
follows:
1. Make certain that the push -off shaft (9) is not
binding and is being held up, as far as it will go,
by the reject spring (2) and the On -Off Reject
knob (1). Also check for
of an inch clearance
at the end of the reject arm. See the third paragraph under heading "Reject and Trip Ad-
h
CAM STOP STUD
TRIP
STOP
WIRE
9IC
CONTROL CAM
1I1A
91
R
Figure 7.
2
I
-
Positioning Trip Stop Wire.
speed change knob in the "78" or "33" position.
4. Connect record changer motor to power source
and turn the On-Off Reject knob on and off as
needed to check this adjustment.
5. Adjust trip adjusting screw (115) until the point
of the pawl (127B) is horizontally even or level
with the smooth side of the trip serrations (114).
See figure 6. The point of the pawl should be
tes of an inch from the bottom edge of the lip
on the trip serrations.
6. Place a record on the turntable and check to
make certain that the changer trips into change
cycle with one or two backswings of the arm.
Three or four backswings may be required on
7 -inch 33 RPM records.
3. Set
.
Important
The eccentric groove of a record should be used
when checking the oscillating trip adjustment. Do not
lift the pickup arm and move it in and out by hand.
If the oscillating trip adjusting screw (115) is turned
out too far, it will take more than two backswings
of the pickup arm to trip the changer into change
cycle. If the screw (115) is almost all the way out, the
changer will not trip. If the screw is turned too far
in, there will be excessive drag and wear on the trip
serrations, pawl point and on record eccentric grooves.
e John F.
justments."
Check to be sure that the position trip cord (102)
is not binding or twisted and that the cord tension adjusting cam (l01) is not misadjusted,
preventing the position trip cocking spring (126)
from pulling the position trip plate (114A) into
position.
2. Check to see that the top of the trip stop wire
(111A) is even (level) with the top of the control
cam stop stud (91A) as shown in figure 7. If the
stop wire is not even with the top of the stud,
bend the wire until it is even. The trip bracket
assembly should be removed before bending the
trip stop wire.
3. Check Oscillating Trip Adjustment.
4. Set the Speed Change knob in the "45" position..
5. Connect record changer motor to power source
and turn changer on and off as needed to check
this adjustment.
6. Adjust position trip adjusting screw so the
changer trips at the proper point as given above.
ADJUSTMENT OF SET-DOWN POINT
IMPORTANT: This adjustment must be made
with the record size selector knob (16) in the
"10.12" position. Also, the head assembly must
be in the position for 7 -inch and 10-inch records.
Adjustment of the set-down point, for either 7 -inch,
10 -inch, or 12 -inch records, is made by adjustment of
the set-down adjusting screw (20), see figure 10. Screw
(20) is accessible through hole in right side of pickup
arm. When turning the record size selector knob (16)
be sure to turn it all the way to avoid making the
set-down adjustment at the wrong point, resulting in
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-14 ADMIRAL
MODELS RC221, RC222
improper set -down on 7 -inch records. Turning the
set -down adjusting screw (20) in, moves the set-down
point of the pickup arm closer to the centerpost and
turning the screw out moves it away from the center post.
CAUTION: Normal practice has been to check
the set -down points, using records as a gauge. However, due to the large variety of record sizes, it is
recommended that the distances specified below are
checked to insure proper set -down on all sizes and
types of records.
Make the set -down point adjustment as follows:
1. Set record size selector knob (16) to the "10.12"
position; be sure the knob is turned all the way to
its stop.
2. Set needle selector knob to either position being
certain that the knob is turned to its stop so the
needle projects straight down.
Set the head assembly to the position for playing
7 -inch or 10 -inch records.
4. Press down on the On -Off Reject knob (1) momentarily. Rotate the turntable by hand through
the change cycle until the pickup arm moves
3.
down toward the turntable.
Check the distance between the needle point and
the near side of the centerpost. For proper set down on 10-inch records, the distance between
needle and centerpost should be between 4 5/s"
and 4 fit".
6. Adjust set -down screw (20) and repeat steps 4
and 5 until the proper distance is obtained. If
this adjustment is made carefully, the set-down
point for 7 -inch records and 12 -inch records will
be automatically correct.
7. Check 12 -inch set -down as follows: Set the head
assembly to the position for I2 -inch records, press
On -Off Reject knob momentarily, rotate turntable by hand through the change cycle and
check the 12 -inch set -down point. The proper
distance between the needle point and the near
side of the centerpost is between 5 5/A" and 5 a".
8. Check 7 -inch set -down as follows: Set the head
assembly to the position for 7 -inch and 10-inch
records, set the record size selector knob (16)
all the way to the right until it reaches its stop.
Press the On -Off Reject knob momentarily, rotate the turntable by hand through the change
cycle and check the 7 -inch set -down point. The
proper distance between needle point and the
near side of either of the two small centerposts is
between 3 Tö" and 3 t1 ". The proper distance
from the needle point to the near side of the
45 RPM Spindle is between 2 A" and 2 5/s".
9. If step 7 or step 8 indicates improper set-down
on 7 -inch records or 12 -inch records, make a
compromise adjustment for 10-inch record set down as outlined in steps 3, 4, 5 and 6.
5.
ADJUSTING THE PICKUP ARM HEIGHT
(See Figures 9 and 10)
table. With proper pickup arm height setting, the
pickup arm will not lift high enough to strike the
bottom record of the stack to be played.
f IllI
ARM SHOULD
NOT TOUCH
I
TIIIIIIIIL
Needle Guard
Record
Supports
45 rpm
Spindle
Pickup Arm
DURING
CHANGE
CYCLE
1
II/r
WITH CHANGER
OUT OF CYCLE
MIRIEMIRMIgImmmourmrm
Turntable
3/16'
Changer Pon(Base)
Figure 9.
Checking Pickup Arm Height.
With the record changer out of change cycle and
the pickup arm clear of the turntable, adjust the lift
adusting screw (29) so that the needle rests approxi-.
mately ;r" above the top of the changer pan. Turning screw (29) in raises the pickup arm; turning it
out lowers the arm. See Figure 10.
After this adjustment has been made, the record
changer should be run through its change cycle a few
times to make certain that the pickup arm does not
lift high enough to touch the bottom record of the
stack to be played. This adjustment should be checked
with the 45 RPM Spindle in place and a 45 RPM
record resting on the record supports (67). See figure
9. If, for some reason, the arm touches the bottom
record, a compromise adjustment should be made.
Turn the screw out and lower the pickup arm slightly.
SET -DOWN
ADJUSTING SCREW (20)
HEIGHT ADJUSTING
SCREW (29)
Figure 10.
Arm Detail Showing Adjustments.
POSITION TRIP CORD TENSION ADJUSTMENT
CAN
ADJUSTING
SCREN
POSITION
CORD
TO
CORD
(IS)
TENSION
ADJUSTING
CAN
(101)
TRIP
POSITION
TIED
CORD
TAB.
TRIP
(112)
CORD
TENSION
SPRIIC
CORD
TO
LENGTH
ENO
FRON
(103)
END
APPROXIMATELY
B}'
POSITION TRIP
3
(45
This record changer is designed so that when either
needle point rests T1" above the changer pan, the
pickup arm (17) will automatically lift high enough
during the change cycle, to clear the top record of a
stack of twelve 10 -inch, ten 12 -inch, ten 7 -inch 33
'RPM or twelve 7 -inch 45 RPM records on the turn-
SPEED MOTOR
RPM
COCNINC SPRING
POSITION)
(1261
BOTTOM
OF
CHANGER
PAN
RC221-551
Figure 11.
Adjusting Cord Tension.
An adjustment is provided which compensates for
variations in the length of the position trip cord (102).
® John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH PAGE20-15
MODELS RC221, RC222
It the position trip cord is being replaced or if the
adjusting cam lock screw (15) has corne loose, allowing the cord tension adjusting cam (101) to rotate
away from its normal position, proceed as follows:
I. Set speed change knob (54) to "45" position.
2. Move the cord tension adjusting cam (101) to
just the point where all slack has been removed
from position trip cord (102), and there is just
a very slight tension on the cord tension spring
(103). I)o not adjust it so tight as to stretch the
position trip cocking spring (126).
3. Tighten the adjusting cam lock screw (15).
ADJUSTING DISTANCE BETWEEN RECORD
SUPPORT (11) AND CENTERPOSTS (60 and 61)
(See Figures 12 and 13)
To check the distance between the record support
11)
1.
2.
3.
and centerposts (60 and 61), proceed as follows:
Set the head assembly to the position for 7 -inch
and 10 -inch records. Insert the centerpost (61)
for 10-inch and 12 -inch records.
Hold the centerpost away from the head assembly
to take up any play.
Measure the distance from the edge of the record
support to the inside edge of the offset shelf on
the centerpost. If this distance is not between
4-59/64" and 4-63/64", it will be necessary to
bend centerpost until. proper distance is obtained.
NOTE: To bend the centerpost, remove it from
the changer, and place the bottom end in a vise.
Grasp the centerpost BELOW the offset (with a
wrench) and bend it the amount needed in the
direction necessary
45 RPM SPINDLE
ADJUSTMENT
The push -off adjusting shaft
(75 is the only adjustment
on the 45 RPM Spindle (62).
This adjustment is fairly critical and must be made for the
individual record changer.
The push -off adjusting shaft
is pre-set at the factory so that
the distance between the end
of the shaft and the top of the
lock nut (74) is 44". This
adjustment should be satisfactory for most record changers.
However, the adjustment
should he checked and adjusted, if necessary, before
the 45 RPM Spindle is
used. To check for proper
adjustment, proceed as follows:
I.
2.
RECORD
UPPORT
lez)
LOCK
IN
LUGS
LOCK NUT
(74)
PUSH -OFF
ADJUSTING SHAFT
(75)
Ñ
e
BRONZE SLICER
(MUST NOT COME
OUT OF SPINDLE
Place the 45 RPM SpinWHEN PRESSING DOWN)
dle in the hole in the
center of the turntable and turn it so that "lock in lugs" fall into slots in the turntable (do not
lock the lugs into the turntable).
Press down on the spindle and CAREFULLY.
note whether or not the slicers (65 and 66) just
start to move out of the spindle.
3a If the slicers do not move when the spindle is
pressed down, proceed with step 4.
If the slicers start to move out of the spindle as
it is pressed down, lift the spindle out, loosen the
lock nut (74), turn the push -off adjusting shaft
(75) in approximately one turn and then tighten
the lock nut. Insert the spindle, press it down
and check to see if the slicers still move out. If
the slicers move out, repeat this procedure, turning the adjusting shaft in, approximately one
turn at a time, until the slicers do not move out
when the spindle is pressed down.
4. Insert the spindle and lock it in place. Put a
stack of records over the spindle, turn the record
changer on and momentarily press the on -off reject knob (1) to the reject position.
5. If the bottom record drops to the turntable, keep
rejecting records until the whole stack has been
dropped to the turntable. Each record should
slide smoothly down the spindle. If all records
drop properly, the adjustment is satisfactory.
6. If records do not drop, remove the spindle,
loosen the lock nut (74) and turn out the push off adjusting shaft (75) approximately one turn
and repeat steps I and 2, check step 3b and then
proceed with steps 4 and 5. Repeat this procedure until the records drop properly.
313
Figure 12
4.
Check ng Distance with 10' and 12" Centerpost
With the head assembly in the position for 7 -inch
and 10 -inch records, insert the centerpost (60) for
7 -inch 33 RPM records. Then proceed with steps
2 and 3 above and check for a distance of between 3H" and
If this distance is not within the dimensions specified in step 4, bend the centerpost as described
3".
5.
in step
3
pu
i
.
lI
I
,
o
iu
i.
iII
I
illllï
i
I
(
I
N
N
o
cc
Figure 13
e John F.
Checking Distance wi
h
7" Centerpost.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
20-16 ADMIRAL
MODELS RC221, RC222
RCD. CH. PAGE
AND REPAIR
SERVICE
DISASSEMBLING THE 45 RPM SPINDLE
(See Figure 14)
To disassemble the spindle for parts replacement
etc., proceed as follows:
1. Remove two screws from the underside of the
spindle and lift up the spindle cap. See figure
14a. CAUTION: When the spindle cap (63) is
off, use extra care to keep from accidentally pushing up on the push -off adjusting shaft (75). If this
shaft is pushed up, the slicer return springs (64)
and slicer may fly off and be lost.
2. Using a "long nose" pliers or tweezers, remove
the slicer spring (64) which holds the top slicer
(65) in place. Then remove the top slicer, see
figure 14b. (NOTE: This slicer has an offset.
It must
3.
4.
5.
6.
be removed first when disassembling and
installed last when reassembling).
Remove the other slicer return spring and the
bottom slicer (66).
Now, push up on the push -off adjusting shaft
(75) until the record supports (67) come up over
the top of the spindle.
Grasp both record supports with the thumb and
two forefingers and lift them off of the slicer
cam (69A). Release record supports carefully so
record support return spring (68) is not lost.
To remove the slicer cam and push-off assembly
(69), remove the retaining ring (72) and the
push -off return spring (71) from the underside
of the spindle and lift the assembly off from the
top of the spindle.
CARTRIDGE AND NEEDLES
The cartridge (36) used in these record chargers is
especially designed and there are a few things which
should be observed when replacing the cartridge (36),
needles (40 and 41), or pickup arm cable (35).
When replacing either needle make certain that the
correct needle is inserted in the proper "side" of the
cartridge. The needle (41) for "LP" records is an
osmium tipped needle especially designed for playing
"LP" records. The radius of the point of the "LP"
needle is only 1/3 of the radius of the point of a standard (78 RPM) needle. If this sharp needle is used on
standard 78 RPM records, it has a tendency to
"wobble" in the record groove and would possibly
damage the standard record groove. A needle for 78
RPM records may possibly damage "LP" records because of its tendency to "skip" across the fine record
grooves. Consequently, care should be taken when replacing needles.
The needle (41) for "LP" records is painted red
to identify it. The needle guard on the LP "side"
of the cartridge has red color dots to distinguish it
from the 78 RPM "side" of the cartridge. The red
(LP) needle should be inserted in the side of the
cartridge which has the red color dots.
When replacing the cartridge (36) care must be
taken when placing the pickup arm cable pinjacks on
the cartridge. There must be sufficient slack in the
cable to allow the cartridge to rotate. It is also important that the short length of plastic tubing be kept over
one terminal.
THREE SPEED MOTOR
PR 1114
NOTE
FIRST SLICER
REMOVED NASA
WHEN
REINSTALLING.
DEPRESSED
HOLD SUPPORTS
SI/RMPE
TOGETHER
BY THE FAT LIMS
(SPRING MUST
BE BETWEEN
SUPPORTS)
CAUTION
WHEN CAP IS REMOVED
00 .WT PuIw OP AV
PUUSNOff
RCM- 382
swAfr(7i)
Figure 14.
Disassembly of 45 RPM Spindle.
When assembling the spindle, merely reverse the
above procedure. When installing the record
supports (67) and their return spring (68), place
the spring between the record supports (67) and
compress the spring enough so the record supports can be slid down over the slicer cam (69A).
When installing the slicers (65 and 66) be sure to
install the flat slicer (66) first, and then the slicer
with the offset (it also has a smaller cut-out).
The turntable speed of this record changer is
changed mechanically by causing one of the three
drive shafts (having different diameters) to ride
against the idler wheel. See figure 3. The 78 RPM
drive shaft is part of the motor armature. The other
two drive shafts (33 RPM and 45 RPM) are driven by
the 78 RPM drive shaft by two rubber belts (55).
These rubber belts' (55) and the idler wheel (58)
must be kept clean and free from oil. If they become
greasy or stretched, they might possibly slip, causing
the turntable speed to vary, resulting in unsatisfactory
operation.
When replacing the speed change knob (54), make
certain that the shaft in the knob does not touch the
sides or ends of the cut-out in the pan. If the speed
change arm is bent, the speed change knob shaft may
rub against the edge of the opening in the pan, causing rumble and noise pickup. Also, the clearance between the bottom of the speed change knob and the
top of the pan should not be less than 1/64 or more
than 3/64 of an inch.
REMOVING THE PLASTIC BASE HOUSING (13)
Should it be necessary to remove the plastic base
housing, proceed as follows:
I. Remove retaining rings (84 and 108).
2. Release one end of the index spring (130).
3. Lift the entire head assembly up from the top of
the changer.
4. Loosen Allen set screw (32) and lift complete
pickup arm assembly off.
5. Remove retaining rin
33 and washer 34
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-17
MODELS RC221, RC222
6.
7.
8.
Remove three screws (15) holding base.
Lift off the plastic base housing (13).
When reassembly has been completed, the pickup
arm height should be carefully checked and adjusted, if necessary, by means of the lift adjusting
screw (29). The set -down should also be checked
and adjusted, if necessary, as outlined under
"Adjustment of Set -Down Point."
REMOVING TURNTABLE (8 AND BEARING
ASSEMBLY (48)
To remove the turntable it is only necessary to
grasp the turntable by its edges and lift up. Before
replacing the turntable, make sure that the recessed
part of the drive wheel (86) is towards the centerpost.
If necessary, turn drive wheel counter -clockwise about
a turn so it locks in this position. The pickup arm
should be positioned away from the turntable. In replacing the turntable, force is not needed to seat it.
Make certain, however, that the idler wheel of the
motor has been pushed in towards the centerpost and
that the idler wheel is making contact with the inner
side of the turntable flange. The idler wheel should
be pushed in with a screwdriver or similar flat tool.
Do NOT push toward the rear of the changer.
The dimensions of the three speed motor are such
that three cork washers (46) are used under the turntable hub to keep the turntable from rubbing against
the idler wheel drive shafts.
In some cases it may be found that the three cork
washers, after considerable use, are compressed so the
turntable will rub. To build the stack up, an additional thin cork washer should be used. This fourth
cork washer may be placed at the top or bottom of
the' stack. CAUTION: If an addition cork washer
is used, it may be necessary to make a compensating
adjustment on the 45 RPM spindle. See "45 RPM
Spindle Adjustment."
The washers (46 and 47) and thrust bearing assembly (48) are removed by sliding them off of the centerpost. Replace in the order shown in Figure 15.
REMOVING CHANGER FROM BOTTOM COVER
Model RC221 only. To remove the changer from
the bottom cover of the RC221, remove the three
mounting screws (79), from the top of the changer
pan. Then merely lift the changer pan off of the
bottom cover (136) being careful to see that lead-in
cables and motor leads are disconnected.
When reinstalling the changer pan on the bottom
cover, be certain that float springs (78) are properly
installed. (The wide end of the spring fits around the
extrusion on the changer pan.) Insert the mounting
screws (79). IMPORTANT: These screws must be
installed so they travel freely through the extruded
holes in the changer pan. If the screws touch the edges
of the holes in the pan, a scraping sound and micro
phonics may occur when records drop to the turntable.
REPLACING POSITION TRIP CORD (102)
is ordinary braided
The position trip cord (102)
silk or nylon dial cord approximately A" thick. To
replace this cord, cut a piece of dial cord about 10" or
12" long and tie one end to the tab on the motor.
See figure 11. This is most easily done by either making a slip knot so the knot will tighten when the cord
placed over the tab on the motor and pulled, or
removing one end of the idler wheel spring (57) and
pivoting the idler wheel and bracket out of the way.
Tie the other end of the cord to the cord tension
spring (103) so that the distance between the two knots
is approximately 81/2". Late production record
changers have a metal clip (137) to fasten the cord at
the tension spring end. After threading the cord
under the control cam (91), hook the cord tension
spring as shown in the illustration. Then adjust the
cam (101) as outlined under "Position Trip Cord
Tension Adjustment."
is
RISER PLATE (90)
The inclined portion of the riser plate (90) was
copper plated in later production, to eliminate the
possibility of stalling the changer during change cycle
RPM operation only).
If the record changer stalls during change cycle, try
replacing the riser plate with part number G400A336.
(45
LUBRICATION
Under normal operating conditions, the motor
should never require oiling. Also, do NOT use oil on
the 45 RPM spindle. The rest of the changer, however, should be lubricated with grease whenever it
comes into the shop for repairs or adjustment. All
pivot and friction points should be greased adequately
but not excessively. A good automobile chassis grease
may be used for this purpose.
The push -off shaft (9), powdered iron roller ( (105),
oilite bearings, (used, in the turntable hub and base
housing), may be lubricated with SAE No. 20 oil.
Care should be taken to prevent any of the lubricant
from coming into contact with the drive or idler
wheel tires, or the rubber drive belts. Also be careful,
when using oil, that an excess does not seep into the
felt of the turntable.
45 RPM RECORD SLIPPAGE
45 RPM records may have a tendency to
slip on each other when they are new. This would
result in unsatisfactory reproduction which might
be confused with results of a varying turntable speed.
In most cases, record slippage can be eliminated by
making a series of shallow scratches, with a pen knife
or other sharp instrument, on each record label. Another method of correcting this condition would be
to place two small pieces of scotch tape, directly across
from one another, on each record label.
The 7 -inch
RECORD CHANGER TROUBLE SHOOTING
Changer Will Not Trip.
1. Check for broken or loose cycle spring (112).
2. Check On -Off switch cover (100). If cover is not
assembled to switch properly, it may bind pushoff link and arm (95), preventing cycle spring
(112) from pulling the control cam (91) around.
Check for misadjustment of the oscillating trip
adjusting screw (115).
4. Check for bent trip stop wire (111A).
5. Check for broken pawl spring (128).
3.
o John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-18 ADMIRAL
MODELS RC221, RC222
Changer Repeatedly Trips Into Change Cycle.
1. Check for misadjustment of reject adjusting
screw (118), or trip adjusting screw (115). See
"Reject and Trip Adjustments".
Check for broken trip cocking spring (110).
Check for broken reject spring (2).
Check for loose On -Off Reject knob (1).
Check for bent trip stop wire (111A).
Changer Will Not Reject.
1. Check adjustment of reject adjusting screw (118).
2. Check for bent trip stop wire (111A).
3. Check for control cam (91) binding.
Pickup Arm Does Not Set Down Properly
1. Check set down adjustment. See paragraph under
heading "Set Down Adjustments."
2. Check for broken or loose set down spring (131).
3. Check for broken or loose set -down adjusting
lock spring (21).
4. Check for missing or loose pickup arm counterweight screws (19) resulting in erratic set -down.
(These screws hold pivot and mounting plate
(22) in position.)
5. Check for taut pickup arm cable (35). The cable
must be loose between the pickup arm and the
2.
3.
4.
5.
Changer Trips Into Change Cycle Before Finishing
Record (45 RPM only).
1. Misadjustment of position trip adjusting screw
(117). See "Position Trip Adjustment".
Records Do Not Drop to Turntable (7-inch 45
RPM only).
1. Adjust push -off adjusting shaft (75). See paragraph under heading "45 RPM Spindle Adjustment".
2. Check for broken or missing riser plate return
spring (89).
Turntable Jumps (Rises) During Change Cycle
(45 RPM only).
1. Adjust push -off adjusting shaft (75). See paragraph under heading "45 RPM Spindle Adjustment".
Changer Stalls in Change Cycle (45 RPM only)
1. See "Riser Plate (90)" discussion in the Service
and Repair section.
CAUTIONS
1.
terminal strip (14).
Pickup Arm "Skips" Across Records
1. Check to be sure that cabinet is level.
2. Check for worn needle.
Turntable Rubs Against Motor Drive Shafts
1. Check for missing or compressed cork washer (-16
or 47). See discussion under heading "Removing
Turntable (8) and Bearing Assembly (48)" in
the Service and Repair section.
Changer Trips Into Change Cycle When On -Off
Reject Knob Is Turned to Off.
1. Check paragraph under "Reject Adjustment".
Changer Causes Rumble Or Noise
1. Check for broken or missing "float" springs (78).
2. Check for "float" screws (79) rubbing against the
edges of the holes in the changer pan.
3. Check for the speed change knob shaft (54)
rubbing against the cut-out in the changer pan.
Records Do Not Drop to Turntable or More Than
One Record Drops. (33 RPM and 78 RPM opera-
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
tion only.)
Check distance between record support and
centerpost as described under "Adjusting Distance Between Record Support (11) and Center posts (60 and 61)"
Changer Trips Into Change Cycle Before Finishing
Record (78 RPM and 33 RPM only).
1. Check for broken position trip cord (102 or
cord tension spring (103).
2. Check to see that cord tension adjusting cam
(101) has not loosened or is misadjusted.
Changer Will Not Trip (45 RPM operation only).
I. Check for broken or missing position trip cocking spring- (126).
2. Misadjustment of the position trip adjusting
screw (117). See paragraph under heading
"Position Trip Adjustment".
3. Broken or bent position trip incline spring
1.
7.
8.
9.
(127A).
4.
5.
Check to see that position trip cord (102) is not
too short or is twisted or binding.
Check for misadjustment of the cord tension
adjusting cam (101).
o John F.
10.
See that the
rubber tires on both the drive wheel
and the idler wheel and both drive belts are kept
clean and free from oil, grease, dirt or any foreign
material. Carbona or carbon tetrachloride may
be used for cleaning these parts.
When handling the idler wheel (58) or drive
wheel (86), keep fingers and hands away from
the rubber tires. This is also true when handling
the rubber drive belts (55). Natural body oils
on these parts may possibly cause slippage.
When replacing the rubber tire (85) do not bend
the tab on the drive wheel over too far as this
may result in the tire catching or rubbing on the
drive wheel pressure spring (88).
If the On -Off Reject knob (1) cannot be pulled
off with the fingers, pry very carefully. The head
cover (7) is plastic and if the On -Off Reject knob
is pried off, excessive force should not be used.
When removing or replacing the pawl, spring
(128) care should be taken not to stretch it.
When removing or replacing the pickup arm
(17), always loosen the Allen set screw (32) and
lift off the complete assembly. The pivot spring,
hub and pin assembly (31) can be removed from
the pivot plate assembly (22) and replaced much
more readily with the complete pickup arm
assembly off of the changer. When reinstalling
pickup arm assembly or the arm control lever
(127) be sure to replace all washers that were
used originally.
When replacing the switch mounting bracket
(98) or the trip bracket (109) be sure to locate
the half punches in the holes in the pan before
tightening their mounting screws (99).
When replacing the on -off switch assembly (100)
care should be used in bending the tab fasteners
so that the switch is mounted firmly to the
bracket.
When replacing or reinstalling the record size
selector knob (16), turn the set -down eccentric
(25) to the position for 10" and 12" set-dowr
(all the way to the left). Then install the knot
(16) so that the dot between "10.12" lines up with
the locating dot on the pickup arm.
When disassembling the 45 RPM spindle, do not
push up on the push -off adjusting shaft just after
removing the spindle cap.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-19
MODELS RC221, RC222
In later production, turntable (8) is held in place by a retaining
ring (part number 401A2.86). Remove before lifting turntable.
85
114
06E
109
99
87
110
88,
11
Ai_
101
102
89
`s
:1`
113
114
15
122
91A
115117
la
116
27D
127C
84
91
81
124
81C92
.
Ó
93
o".
iJ`
83
84
118
1298
119
918
82,
94
105
95
106
96
N
97-
101
91
29A
iZAA81
125,
129
121
-
1
107
96
97
130
131
108-
98
958
132
133
99
'100
134
Figure 15.
RC221
Exploded View.
°John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ZS
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-20 ADMIRAL
MODELS RC221, RC222
Ref.
Part
No.
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
403A27
405A97
4B1-166-47
406A18
403A32
405A94
403A31
G400A332
G400A248
9A
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
401A166
G400A249
4B1-166-47
403C28
1081-6
402A148
403A37
403C37
404A23
A50-6-47
45-500-C2-47
405A118
G400A297
414A31
414A33
402A185
414A34
414A30
405A120
402A156
G400A238
G400A294
1A43-14
401A235
412A32
G400A307
409A11
401A264
402A139
98A54-2
98A15-7
98A15-6
405A111
413A11-1
88A2-3
1
88A8-1
412A9
412A1
415A11
98A15.9
98A15-10
98A15-11
2A1-11-47
3A4-5
G400A330
406A20
412A30
98A15-13
G400A279
405A15
G400B310
G400B311
G400B329
403A41
414A35
401A276
401A275
403A40
405A125
G400A327
403839
405A124
401A235
Description
PARTS LIST
Port
Ref.
73
74
75
Washer (Flat) .390x5/8x1/16
Rubber Bumper for Record Clip
Record Clip (Plastic)
Record Clip Spring
Head Cover (Plastic)
Turntable
Push -Off Cam and Shoft Assembly
Push -Off Cam (Part of 9)
Push -Off Plate
Support Tube and Shelf Assembly
Washer (Flat) .390x5/8x1/16
Base Housing
Terminal Strip
76
77
78
79
80
81
Screw, #6 P.K. Spec. 3/e" OFHST
Record Size Selector Knob
Pickup Arm
Pickup Arm Counterweight
Screw, #4 FH S.T. (2 req.)
Set -Down Adjusting Screw 4-40x1/2 BH MS
Set-Down Adjusting Lock Spring
Pivot and Mounting Plate
Pivot Shaft
Size Change Tension Spring
Set -Down Eccentric
Wire Clip, approx. 34" long (1 req.)
Wire Clip, approx. t/º" long (2 req.)
Lift Adjusting Lock Spring
Lift Adjusting Screw
Lift Plate and Rod Assembly
Pivot Spring & Hub (includes 8-32 Set Screw)
Allen Set Screw 8-32
Retaining Ring
Washer
Pickup Arm Cable and Lugs
Cartridge, includes Needles
Cartridge Hold -Down Bracket
Plastiscrew, #2 (2 req.)
Needle Nut (Knurled)
78 RPM Needle
"LP" Needle (Painted Red)
Cartridge Indexing Spring
Shielded Lead-in Cable & Plug (15")
Plug (for lead-in cable)
Motor Plug (Male)
Cork Washer 3/64" thick (1 req.)
Cork Washer 3/32" thick (2 req.)
Thrust Bearing
Oil Retaining Felt Washer (2 req.)
33 RPM Drive Shaft
45 RPM Drive Shaft
Hex Nut #6-32
Lock Washer
Speed Change Knob
Drive Belt (2 req.)
Fibre Washer
Idler Wheel Spring
Idler Wheel Assembly
Hairpin Clip
Centerpost Assy. (for 7" Records)
Centerpost Assy. (for 10" & 12" Records)
45 RPM Spindle Complete
Spindle Cap
Slicer Return Spring (2 req.)
Top Slicer
Bottom Slicer
Record Support (2 req.)
Record Shelf Spring
Slicer Cam and Shaft
Spindle Base
Push -Off Shaft Return Spring
Retaining Ring
Number
No.
On -Off Reject Knob
Reject Spring
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
91a
91b
91c
92
93
94
95
96
07
98
99
100
101
60-1000-C2-47
402A182
402A181
f G400D346-1
I G400D346-2
G400D349
19A10-3
402A154
G400A197
407817
406A21
412A32
401A229
406A13
G400A252
404A18-1
414A23
405A87
G400A336
G400A342
401A145
381-26-47
85-375-C2-47
G400A219
4131-68-47
401A177
401A223
A53-9-47
1
408A1
412A34
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
405A127
G400A224
415A9
405A91
405A22
401A230
G400A228
405A88
G400A230-1
111A
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
405A87
405A128
G400A333
65-500-C2-47
405A120
402A186
65-375-C2-47
401A237
405A98
401A173
404A17
G400A226
401A202
405A90
405A126
G400A340
405A89
G400A222
405A92
405A93
403A38
32A88
27A24
2810-10-59
f G400D287-2
Ì G400D288-1
401A283
481-152-47
Description
Screw (2 req.) #6-32x1 RHMS
Lock Nut
Push -off Adjusting Shaft
Changer Pan Assembly, Copper (RC221)
Changer Pan Assembly, Black (RC221 i
Changer Pan Assembly (RC222)
Conical Mtg. Spring (for RC221, RC222
Float (Mounting) Screw for RC221 only (3 req.l
Mtg. Screw & Washer Assembly for RC222
3 Speed Motor
Rubber Mounting Grommet (3 req.)
Fibre Washer (3 req.)
Retaining Ring
Drive Wheel Tire Only
Drive Wheel (includes Tire)
Drive Wheel Assembly (includes Rivets)
Drive Wheel Pressure Spring
Riser Plate Return Spring
Riser Plate and Hub
Control Cam Assembly
Cam Stop Stud (Part of 91)
Push -Off Link Stud (Part of 91)
Riser Control Stud (Part of 91)
Control Cam Washer
Washer, #8 I.T.
Control Cam Screw 8-32x% BH MS
Push -Off Arm and Link Assembly
Washer
Retaining Ring
Lock
Switch Bracket
Screw, Switch and Trip Bracket Mtg.
On -Off Switch and Cover
Cord Tension Adjusting Cam
Position Trip Cord
Use 10" of braided silk or nylon radio dial
cord (approx. 1/32" diameter).
Cord Tension Spring
Pivot Link and Stud
Powdered Iron Roller
Control Plate Spring
Spring Washer
Retaining Ring
Trip Bracket and Stud Assembly
Trip Cocking Spring
Reject Arm Support and Trip Lever
Trip Stop Wire (Part of 111)
Cycle Spring
Trip Serration Adjustment Spring
Trip Serration Plate
Trip Adjusting Screw
Position Trip Adjusting Lock Spring
Position Trip Adjusting Screw
Screw, Reject Adjusting ó.32x38"
Reject Arm
Spring Washer
Washer
Size Change Eccentric
Control Plate, Hub and Stud Assembly
Safety Arm
Safety Spring
Position Trip Cocking Spring
Arm Control Lever, Studs and Pawl
Pawl Spring
Set-Down and Size Change Assembly
Index Spring
Set -Down Spring
Plastic Trim for RC221 (2 req.)
Antenna Lead Support (RC221 only)
Bushing in Bottom Cover for RC221
Speed Nut (RC221)
Bottom Cover, Painted Black (RC221)
Bottom Cover, Painted Copper (RC221)
Metal Clip
Washer (Flat) .328x3%1/16
©John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-21
MODEL RC400
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
PUSH -OFF
45FPM
CENTER.OST (2)
i
,t
To play 33 RPM records, insert the small diameter
(metal) centerpost (1) into the center of the turntable
and press it down until it "locks" in place. To remove
this centerpost, merely lift it straight up and out.
PLATE (16)
_.
33RPM RECORD
SUPPORT
.1.1.
SPEEp.>,..
CHANGE...,.
KNO$(19)-'
PIaKUP
SETTING SPEED CHANGE KNOB
ARM 120)
To play 45 RPM records, set the Speed Change
Knob (19) so that its indicating arrow points to "45".
To play 33 RPM records, set this knob so its indicating
arrow points to "33". When moving this knob to either
FREJECT
KNOB i42)
position, make sure that the knob "clicks" into position.
e/
This control also has a center ("neutral") position
disengaging the rubber -tired idler wheel (47).
for
0it'
e,
u'
The changer pan is not marked "neutral" but the
45RPM RECORD
position can be felt when the Speed Change Knob
SUPPORT (8)
TURNTABLE (38)
is halfway between "33" and "45". In this position,
Figure 1. RC400 Record Changer (Top View).
the compound idler wheel is not in contact with the
drive shaft or the turntable. When the record
changer is not going to he used for some time,
This Admiral Record Changer is designed to auto- set the speed change knob in the center position.
matically play a series of ten 7 -inch 33 RPM "Long
Play" records or ten 7 -inch 45 RPM "Long Play" LOADING AND STARTING THE RECORD CHANGER
records. A wide-diameter, plastic centerpost is used
To load 45 RPM records, place as many as ten over
for playing 45 RPM records and a conventional, metal the 45 RPM centerpost so that the bottom record rests
centerpost is used for playing 33 RPM records.
on the record supports (8). To load 33 RPM records,
place as many as ten over the 33 RPM centerpost so
that the bottom record rests on the ledge on the center SELECTING CENTERPOST
post (1) and the 33 RPM record support (17). Start
To play 45 RPM records, insert the large diameter the changer by turning the Radio -Phono switch on the
(plastic) centerpost (2) into the hole in the center of radio to the "Phono -On" position.
the turntable (38). While holding the turntable with
STOPPING AND UNLOADING
one hand, turn the centerpost counter-clockwise until
the lock-in -lugs fall into and lock in the three slots in
Turn changer off by turning Radio-Phono switch on
the turntable. To remove this centerpost, hold the the radio to "Phono-Off" position. Do not turn changer
turntable with one hand and turn the centerpost clock- off during change cyclé. To unload, merely lift records
wise; then lift it up.
straight up.
IR
E
THE CHANGE CYCLE
45 RPM OPERATION
(See Figures 2, 3 and 4)
_33
COMPOUND
If at all possible, we recommend that you carefully
observe the operation of a changer that is in normal
operating condition. It is a good idea to rotate the
turntable by hand and repeat the change cycle until
you understand the function of each part.
IDLER WHEEL
(47)
MOTOR DRIVE
SHAFT
SPEED
CHANGE{I,9j_
KNB
I
O
45RPM SECTION
The changer operates as follows: The turntable (38)
driven by the smaller of the two rubber tires on the
compound idler wheel (47), riding against the outer
rim of the turntable.
TURNTABLE (38)
is
The speed of the turntable is determined by the
setting of the speed change knob (19). When the knob
is in the "45" position, the larger rubber tire on the
compound idler wheel (47) rides against the 45 RPM
section (larger diameter) of the motor drive shaft.
When the knob is moved to "33", the compound idler
wheel moves so that the larger tire rides against the 33
RPM section (smaller diameter) of the motor drive
shaft. See Figure 2.
©John
F.
33 RPM SECTION
RC400-576
Figure 2. Compound Idler Wheel and Motor Drive Shaft.
The changer mechanism
is
driven through change
cycle by the knurled hub of the turntable rotating the
rubber tired drive wheel (36). During normal playing,
the drive wheel does not touch the knurled hub of the
turntable. See Figure 3A. As the needle enters the
record spiral grooves and moves towards the centerpost,
the pickup arm lever and stud (72) moves simul-
taneously and rotates the trip bracket (61) counterclockwise. Since the trip bracket and drive wheel are
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-22 ADMIRAL
MODEL
RC400
on the same shaft, the drive wheel is pivoted approxi- pickup arm from moving out too far. (Later in the
mately 10. degrees counter -clockwise. The rubber tire change cycle the index bracket (65) and set -down
contacts the knurled hub of the turntable, and is ro- spring (64) control the set -down point.)
tated in a counter -clockwise direction. See Figure 3B.
At this point, the drive wheel (36) has gone through
one-half of its rotation and as the drive wheel continues
to rotate, the drive bracket (78) will begin to return
to its normal (out of change cycle) position.
DRIVE
WHEEL
(36)
The set -down spring (64) keeps the pickup arm lever
(72) in contact with the arm control stud (78C) on
the drive bracket. Therefore as the drive bracket moves
back toward its normal position, the pickup arm is
moved in toward the set -down point. When the pickup arm lever stud (72A) has reached the indexing
point (notch) in the index bracket, the pickup arm has
reached the set -down point and stops moving in toward
the centerpost. At this time, the drive bracket has
pivoted to a point where the lift rod (32) starts moving down the arm lift incline (78A) in the drive bracket
and the pickup arm starts moving down toward the
record. When the arm has moved down about halfway, the second stud on the drive bracket (78D) moves
the index bracket (65) away from the stud on the pickup arm lever so that the pickup arm is free to travel
in on the lead in grooves on the record.
DRIVE WHEEL
BRACKET
DRIVE WHEEL
DRIVE
WHEEL SPRINC
SHAFT
(35)
TURNTABLE
HUB
(KNURLED)
Figure
Figure 3B
3A
Drive Wheel Positions.
The drive wheel shaft is fitted through the drive
bracket (78) and is mounted OFF CENTER on the
drive wheel (36). Due to the cam action of the "off center" drive wheel (36), rotation of the drive wheel,
by the knurled hub of the turntable, forces the drive
shaft out. Since the drive shaft is fitted through the
drive bracket (78), the drive bracket is pivoted around
Almost simultaneously, the push -off adjusting shaft
the drive bracket hub. The cycle spring (76) main- (15) is riding down the push -off incline (78B) on the
tains pressure on the drive bracket so that the drive drive bracket. This allows the push -off return spring
wheel tire is kept in contact with the knurled hub. (11) on the centerpost to pull the cam and shaft asAfter the changer has been tripped and the drive sembly (9) down.
bracket begins to be pivoted by the movement of the
drive wheel, the arm lift incline (78A) on the drive
bracket moves across the lift rod moving it upward. The record supports are forced out of the centerpost
This lifts the pickup arm off of the record. Stud (78C) by their return spring (7) and the slicers are moved
on the drive bracket now contacts the pickup arm lever into the centerpost by the slicer return springs (4).
and begins to move it so the pickup arm moves out When the slicers are all the way in, the stack drops to
the record supports (8).
from the center of the record.
At, about this time, the push -off adjusting shaft (15)
on the 45 RPM centerpost (2) starts moving up the
push -off incline (78B) on the drive bracket (78). See
figure 12. This causes the push -off shaft to move up
into the centerpost. As the push -off shaft moves into
the centerpost. As the push -off shaft moves into the
centerpost, the slicers (5 and 6) ride on the incline of
the slicer cam and consequently move out of the center -
The drive wheel is no longer in contact with the
knurled hub but it is rotated approximately 20 degrees
further by the drive wheel bracket, which is held against
the knurled hub of the turntable by the drive wheel
bracket spring (35).
When the drive wheel bracket has rotated past the
post. The record supports (8) are also brought into the knurled hub, the drive wheel must be rotated another
centerpost as each slicer is hooked to the record sup- 10 degrees by the trip bracket (61), or reject lever (43),
before it will contact the knurled hub and begin the
port on the opposite side of the centerpost.
change cycle. When the reject knob (42) is moved to
the "Rej" position, the reject lever roller rotates the
As the drive bracket continues to pivot, the pickup drive wheel the necessary 10 degrees and the change
arm continues to move away from the record, the slicers cycle begins.
(5 and 6) continue to come out, and the record supports continue to pull in. When the pickup arm has
moved to the right almost as far as it will go, the record
supports (8) have pulled into the centerpost enough to
drop the bottom record to the turntable and the slicers
are out far enough to hold up the remainder of the stack
33 RPM OPERATION
of records.
The pickup arm lever control stud (72A) riding The change cycle for 33 RPM operation is exactly
against the indexing edge of the index bracket (65) the same as for 45 RPM operation, except for change
controls the movement of the pickup arm. The index cycle time and the fact that 33 RPM records are supbracket (65) and set down spring (64) prevent the ported by the offset on the 33 RPM centerpost and the
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-23
iiODr;L RC400
43
INCLINE
18B PUSH -OFF
61
16
18
15
TRIP ADJ.
SCREW
18A PICKUP
ARM
LIFT INCLINE
69
78D
PICKUP ARM
HEIGHT ADJ.
Figure 4. RC400 Bottom View (Assembled).
RPNI record support (17), and are pushed off by the
push -off plate (16).
33
When the drive bracket (78) has pivoted to the
point where the pickup arm is clear of the record, the
stud (80A) on the push -off bracket (80) is moved
by the slot (78E) in the drive bracket. This movement
causes the push -off plate (16) to pivot and push -off
the bottom record. The remainder of the records are
held back by the small sliding piece at the top of the
centerpost. When the drive bracket pivots back to its
normal playing position, the push -off bracket stud
(80A) follows the slot in the drive bracket and causes
the push -off plate to pivot back to its normal position.
Then the record stack drops to the record support (17)
from the push -off plate (16).
ADJUSTMENTS
33 RPM PUSH -OFF ADJUSTMENT
(See Figures 1 and 4)
TRIP ADJUSTMENT
This record changer employs the position type trip;
that is, it trips into change cycle when the needle in the
pickup arm reaches a given distance from the center
of the record. If the trip is properly adjusted, the
record changer will trip into change cycle when the
needle is betweeh 2" to 2-3/16" from the center of the
hole in thé turntable or approximately half way in on
the spiral groove in the center of the record.
If the record changer does not trip at the proper
position, it will be necessary to adjust the trip adjusting screw (75). See figure 4. Turning this screw in
(clockwise) moves the trip point away from the centerpost. Turning it out, moves the trip point nearer to
the centerpost.
If the screw is turned all the way out, the changer
may not trip. If it is turned in too far, the changer
may trip before the record finishes playing.
If 33 RPM records do not drop to the turntable
during change cycle, it may be necessary to correct the
push -off adjustment.
The push-off is properly adjusted when the leading
edge of the push -off plate (16) extends to a maximum
of 1/32" beyond the edge of the record support (17)
during change cycle.
To make this adjustment, proceed as follows:
1. With the record changer in change cycle, rotate
the turntable by hand until the pickup arm
STOPS moving away from the centerpost.
2. Loosen the set screw (81) on the push -off bracket
(80) and move the push -off plate (16) so that
its leading edge extends 1/32" beyond the edge
Then tighten the
of the record support (17).
set screw (81).
3. Load the record changer with 33 RPM records,
o John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL
20-24 ADMIRAL
RC400
place the changer in operation and keep rejecting
records until the stack has been dropped to the
turntable.
4.
4. Slightly loosen the Allen set screw (34).
5.
Place a ruler against the near side of the 45 RPM
centerpost and then move the pickup arm until
the distance between the needle and centerpost
is from 2-9/16" to 2-10/16".
6.
Tighten the Allen set screw (34) VERY CARE -r
FULLY to avoid moving the pickup arm. Before firmly tightening the Allen set screw, make
sure that there is a little space (ten thousandths
of an inch) between the pivot collar (33) and the
stand-off.
7.
Run the- record changer through change cycle a
few times to make certain that the set -down point
adjustment has been properly made.
If records still do not drop properly, repeat steps
1 through 3.
ADJUSTMENT OF SET -DOWN POINT
(See Figures 4 and 5)
This record changer does not have a conventional
screw adjustment. The pickup arm should
properly unless the Allen set screw (34) on
collar (33) is loosened, or excessive pressure
applied to the pickup arm.
set -down
set-down
the pivot
has been
When properly adjusted for correct set -down, the
point will set -down between 2-9/16" and
2-10/16" from the near side of the 45 RPM center post. (Between 3-5/16" and 3-6/16" from center of
ADJUSTING THE PICKUP ARM HEIGHT
the hole in the turntable.) Making this adjustment for
45 RPM records, automatically provides correct setThis record changer is designed so that when the
down for 33 RPM records.
needle rests 1/16" above the changer pan, the pickup
arm will automatically lift high enough during change
If the pickup arm does not set -down properly, the cycle to clear the top record of a stack of ten 33 RPM
set -down point adjustment should be made as follows: records on the turntable and will not lift high enough
to strike the bottom record of a stack of 33 RPM
1. Insert the 45 RPM centerpost (2); set the speed records to. be played.
change knob (19) to the "45" position; move the
reject knob (42) to the "Rej" position and then
rotate the turntable (clockwise) by hand JUST
to the point where the pickup arm stops moving
in toward the centerpost and starts moving downDRIVE BRACKET 118)
ward. DO NOT ROTATE THE TURNTABLE
PICKUP ARM
BEYOND THIS POINT.
LIFT INCLINE
needle
2.
a #6 Allen wrench into the Allen set screw
(34) on the pivot collar (33) as shown in Figure
5. Do NOT loosen the Allen set screw.
Insert
PICKUP ARM
LIFT ADJ. NUT (69)
LIFT
LOCK
SCREW (24)
1111W__a
,
PIVOT
SCREW(22)
egq)
m
LIFT ROD(32)
IP,
,101-
ALLEN SET
SCREW 34
STAND-OFF
Figure 5. Pickup Arm Mounting Detail.
3.
SPRING
(68)
Figure 6. Adjusting Pickup Arm Height.
PERMANENT
PIVOT
ALLEN
6WRENCH
PIVOT
COLLAR (33)
ADJ. LOCK
PICKUP
ARM (20)
With the record changer out of change cycle and
the pickup arm clear of the turntable, adjust the pick-'
up arm lift adjusting nut (69) (see figure 6), so that
the needle rests 1/16" above the top of the changer
pan. Turning the nut (69) clockwise raises the pickup
arm; turning it counter -clockwise lowers the pickup arm.
To check this adjustment, load the record changer
From the underside of the changer, hold the pick- with ten 33 RPM records. Turn the changer on and
up arm lever and trip bracket assembly (72) reject records until the stack has been dropped to the
STATIONARY so that it can not move down turntable. The pickup arm should not lift high enough
or to either side.
©John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-25
MODEL RCi_}00
to strike the bottom record (of the stack about to be
played) but should lift high enough to play the tenth
record on the turntable.
If, for some reason, the arm strikes the bottom record
or will not lift high enough to play the tenth record,
a compromise adjustment should be made. That is,
raise the arm slightly to make the arm lift higher or
lower the arm slightly to prevent it from striking the
bottom record.
Corner of record
support (8) must be
45 RPM CENTERPOST ADJUSTMENT
slightly (1/32") in-
side centerpost
NOTE
This 45 RPM centerpost (G400B410) is very similar
to, but is not interchangeable with, the 45 RPM center post (G400B329) used in models RC221, RC222. The
centerposts can be readily identified by noting that the
length of the un-threaded portion of the push -off adjusting shaft (15) is approximately 5/16" in G400B410,
and
in G400B239.
wall.
Figure 8. 45 RPM Centerpost Adjustment.
record supports are just inside the centerpost.
You should only be able to see approximately
1!32 of an inch of the centerpost wall. See
figure 8.
/"
If 45 RPM records do not drop to the turntable as
they should, or if the turntable stalls during change
cycle, it will be necessary to adjust the 45 RPM
centerpost (2).
The push -off adjusting shaft (15) is the only adjustment on this centerpost. When properly adjusted,
the dimension from the bottom of the adjusting nut
(14) to the end of the push -off adjusting shaft (15)
is approximately
inch. To make an adjustment,
/
4. If the record supports do not pull into the centerpost as far as the position shown in figure 8, re.
move centerpost, loosen the locknut (14) and turn
the push -off adjusting shaft out (counter -clockwise) approximately one half turn.
Insert the centerpost and check to see if the record
supports "pull in" to the proper position. If they
do not, repeat tep 4. If they pull in far enough,
5.
proceed as follows:
1.
.
proceed with step 6.
Turn the set off. Push the Reject knob (42) to
the "Rej" position. Then rotate the turntable
Place a stack of 45 RPM records on the center post and turn the record changer on. Push the
Reject knob to the "Rej" position and then keep
rejecting records until the whole stack has been
dropped to the turntable. If each record slides
smoothly down the centerpost, the adjustment is
satisfactory.
6.
RECORD
SUPPORT
(e)
LOCK
IN
LUGS
LOCK NUT
(14)
PUSH
-OFF
IMPORTANT: If the turntable stalls during change
cycle, the push -off adjusting shaft may have been
turned out too far. Remove the 45 RPM centerpost
and run the changer through change cycle. If the
changer does not stall with the centerpost removed, turn
the push -off adjusting shaft in about four or five full
turns and repeat steps through 6 above.
1
ADJUSTING SHAFT
(15)
Figure 7.
45 RPM Centerpost.
SERVICE AND REPAIR
DISASSEMBLING THE 45 RPM CENTERPOST
(See Figure 9)
To disassemble the centerpost for parts replacement
clockwise (to the right) by hand until thé pickup arm moves as far away from the turntable as etc., proceed as follows:
it will go. Do not continue to rotate the turn1. Remove screws (12) from underside of center table beyond this point.
post and lift up the centerpost cap (3). See figure
9. CAUTION: When the centerpost cap (3) is
2. Insert the 45 RPM centerpost and lock it in place.
off, use extra care to keep from accidentally pushing up on the push -off adjusting shaft (15
If
3. In this position the record supports (8) should be
this shaft is puked up, the slicer return springs
pulled into the centerpost until the top edge of the
(4) and slicers may fly off and be lost.
()John F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
NO DEL
20-26 ADMIRAL
RC4.00
Important
NOTE:
FIRST SUCER
WHEN
REINSTALLING,
REMOVED NASA
DEPRESSED
SURFACE
HOLD SUPPORTS
TOGETHER
BY THE
Waal
SIDE]
(SPRING MUST
BE BETWEEN
SUPPORTS)
CAUTION
WREN CAP IS REMOVED
DO NOT PUSH UP ON
RG 221-
To reinstall the pickup arm assembly proceed as
362
PUSMOFP SNATT (is)
Figure 9. Disassembly of 45 RPM Centerpost.
2. Using a "long nose" pliers or tweezers, remove
the slicer spring (4) which holds the top slicer
(5) in place.
Then remove the top slicer.
(NOTE: This slicer has an offset. It must be
removed first when disassembling and installed
last when reassembling).
3.
Remove the other slicer return spring and the
bottom slicer (6).
4. Now, push up on
Do NOT loosen the Allen set screw (34) in the pivot
collar (33). If the screw is loosened, it will be necessary to make the set -down point adjustment.
1. Loosen the pivot locking screw (24) at the front,
of the pickup arm counterweight (21).
2. Turn the pivot screw (22) almost all the way
out.
3. Move the pickup arm to the right to free the
permanent pivot (part of the counterweight)
from the pivot hole in the pivot collar (33). In
early production changers, it may be necessary
to use a slight twisting or "wiggling" motion to
free the permanent pivot. When the permanent
pivot has been freed, merely lift the pickup arm
assembly up and off.
.follows:
1. Slide the counterweight down on the pivot collar
(33) until the permanent pivot point falls into
the pivot hole in the pivot collar. In early production changers, it may be necessary to set the
permanent pivot point in the pivot hole and then
twist or "wiggle" the arm until the counterweight
falls into the proper position.
2. Tighten the pivot screw (22) until it is tight and
then back it off just enough so the pickup arm
can move up and down freely.
3. Tighten the pivot locking screw (24).
REMOVING TURNTABLE (38) AND
THRUST BEARING ASSEMBLY (40)
To remove the turntable first place the speed change
the push -off adjusting shaft
(15) until the record supports (8) come up over knob (19) in the "neutral" position. Being sure that
the changer is not in change cycle, move the pickup
the top of the centerpost.
arm away from the turntable. Then remove the re5. Grasp both record supports with the thumb and taining clip (37) on top of the turntable and lift the
two forefingers and lift them off of the slicer turntable straight up.
cam (9A). Release record supports carefully so
Before replacing the turntable, see that the drive
.record support return spring (7) is not lost.
wheel (36) is not against the centerpost socket and
6. To remove the slicer cam and push -off assembly move the pickup arm as far as possible from the center (9), remove the retaining ring (13) and the push - post. Be sure the speed change knob (19) is in the
off return spring (11) from the underside of the "neutral" position.
centerpost and lift the assembly off from the top
No force is needed to seat the turntable.
of the centerpost.
Replace the turntable retaining clip (37) on the cenWhen assembling the centerpost, merely reverse the
above procedure. When installing the record supports terpost socket so that its "turned -up" ends are facing
(8) and their return spring (7), place the spring be- upward and away from the pickup arm.
tween the record supports and compress the spring
The cork washers (39) and thrust bearing assembly
enough so the record supports can be slid down over (40) are removed by sliding them over the centerpost
the slicer cam (9A). When installing the slicers (5 socket. Replace them in the order shown in figure 12.
and 6) be sure to install the flat slicer (5) first, and
then the slicer with the offset (it also has a smaller
LUBRICATION
cut-out).
Under normal operating conditions, the motor should
never require oiling. Also, do NOT use oil on the 45
RPM centerpost and do NOT oil the roller on the
REMOVING THE PICKUP ARM
reject lever (43). Any oil on this roller will be
(See Figure 5)
transferred to the drive wheel tire when the reject knob
If the pickup arm must be removed for any reason, is moved to the "Rej" position, which might cause the
drive wheel (36) to slip during change cycle. The
proceed as follows:
©John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-27
MODEL R
drive shaft is fitted through an oilite bearing on the
drive bracket (78); it also should not require oil.
The rest of the changer, however, should be lubricated with grease whenever it comes into the shop for
repairs or adjustment. All pivot and friction points
should be greased adequately but not excessively. A
good automobile chassis grease may be used for this
purpose.
The push -off shaft (16) and the bearing in the turntable hub may be lubricated with SAE No. 20 oil.
Care should be taken to prevent any of the lubricant
from coming into contact with the drive or idler wheel
tires. Also, be careful when using oil, not to let an
excess seep into the felt of the turntable.
CARTRIDGE AND NEEDLE REPLACEMENT
Alternate cartridges, interchangeable when complete
with needle, are used in this changer.
In models having cartridge (27), part number
409A300, replace the needle (28), part number 98A15-6,
by loosening the knurled nut (29) and withdrawing the
old needle. Insert the new needle and tighten the
knurled nut. See figure 10.
In models having cartridge (27), part number
409A301, replace the needle (28), part number
98A15-14, by prying downward on the back edge of the
needle. Insert the new needle by pressing it into the
cartridge. See figure 11.
TONE ARM
Ref.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
G400B 409
G400B 410
403A 1
414A 35
401A 276
401A 275
405A 125
403A 40
G400A 411
403B 43
405A 124
60-1000-C2-47
401A 229
402A 312
402A 313
G400A 417
401A 311
G400A 418
403A 42
403B 300
G400A 433
402A 320
1A73-10
42-187-C2-47
G400A 439
2B10-5-59
300
or
409A 301
98A 15-6
or
98A 15-14
98A 54-2
Description
33 RPM Centerpost
t45 RPM Centerpost Complete
45 RPM Centerpost Cap
Slicer Return Spring
Top Slicer
Bottom Slicer
Record Supports Return Spring
Record Supports
Slicer Cam and Shaft
45 RPM Centerpost Base
45 RPM Push -Off Return Spring
Screw, #6-32x1" R.H.M.S. (2 req.)
Retaining Ring
Lock
Ref.
No.
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Nut
45 RPM Push -Off Adjusting Shaft
33 RPM Push -Off Plate and Shaft
33 RPM Record Support
Record Support Housing and Sleeve
Speed Change Knob
Pickup Arm
Pickup Arm Counterweight
Pickup Arm Pivot Screw
Screw, #6x3/8 Shokeproof Type (2 req.)
Lock Screw, #4-40x3/16 F.H.M.S
Cable and Pin Jack Assembly
Speed Nut
Cartridge with needle (See Figure 10)
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Cartridge with needle (See Figure 11)
68
69
70
Needle (See Figure 10)
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
71
Needle (See Figure 11)
72
Needle Nut (Knurled)
73
Flat Washer, .096x3/16x1/32 (2 req.)
4B 1-7-47
74
402A 335
Screw, #2x1/4 Fil. Hd. (2 req.)
31
75
Pickup Arm Lift Rod and Plate
32
G400A 401
76
Pivot Bracket and Collar (includes Allen screw)
33
G400A 432
77
Allen Hd. Set Screw, #6-32x1/4
34
IA 43-9
78
Drive Wheel Spring
405A 303
35
79
Drive Wheel Assembly (less spring)
36
G400A 407
80
414A 300
Turntable Retaining Clip
37
81
Turntable and Hub Assembly
38
G400A 403
412A 300
Cork Washer (2 req.)
39
40
415A 300
Thrust Bearing Assembly
41
G400C 438
Changer Pan and Stud Assembly
IThis 45 RPM centerpost (G400B410) is very similar to, but is not interchangeable with, the 45 RPM centerpost (G400B329) used in models
The centerposts can be readily identified by noting
RC221, RC222.
29
30
NEEDLE
GUARD
NEEDLE
Part No.
98A15-6
KNURLED
CARTRIDGE
(Port No.
4094300)
Figure 10.
NUT
Cartridge 409A300 and Needle Detail.
(Port
CARTRIDGE
No.
4094301)
TONE
ARM
NEEDLE
GUARD
REMOVE NEEDLE
HERE
PARTS LIST
Part
Number
C400
Part
Number
403A 302
G400A 414
405A 127
98A 54-5
(98A 54-6
98A 54-11
Figure 11.
BY
WITH
PRYING
Part No.
98415-14
Cartridge 409A301 and Needle Detail.
Description
Reject Knob
Reject Lever and Studs
Reject Lever Return Spring
Idler Wheel Retaining Spring
Fibre Washer, 3/16" ID x 9/32" OD (4 req.)
Metal Washer, 3/16" ID x 9/32" OD (Quantity required
varies; replace as found in changer.)
98A 54-7
Compound Idler Wheel
98A 54-8
Fibre Washer (5/32 ID x 3/8" OD)
98A 54-9
Metal Washer (5/32" ID x 5/16" OD)
98A 54-10
Idler Wheel Spring
407C 300
*Motor; 33 and 45 RPM; 60 cycle
3A 4-5-47
#6 Split Lock Washer
2A 1-11-47
Hex. Nut, #6-32
Motor Plug (male)
88A 8-1
406A 301
Motor Mounting Grommet (3 req.)
Flat Washer, .196x3/8x1 /32 (5 req.)
4B 1-68-47
401A 317
Retaining Ring (3 req.)
405A 308
Changer Mtg. Spring (3 req.)
Changer Mtg. Screw (3 req.)
402A 334
Plastiscrew, #6x3/8
402A 115
Trip Bracket
401A 307
Flat Washer
401A 173
Retaining Ring (7 req.)
401A 177
405A 302
Set-Down Spring
Index Bracket
401A 315
4B 1-87-47
Flat Washer, .25x3/8x1 /32
401A 229
Retaining Ring
Lift Adjusting Lock Spring
405A 307
402A 306
Pick Up Arm Lift Adjusting Nut
88A 2-3
Plug, Male (for shielded cable)
413A 11-1
Shielded Cable and Plug
G400A 427
Pickup Arm Lever and Trip Bracket (less springs)
405A 127
Trip Tension Spring
405A 305
Trip Adjusting Lock Spring
402A 328
Trip Adjusting Screw
405A 92
Cycle Spring
4B 1.178-0
Flat Washer, .196x3/8x1 /64
G400B 416
Drive Bracket (includes hub and studs)
4B 1-67-47
Flat Washer, .196x5/16x1 /32
G400A 420
Push -Off Bracket Assembly
65-375-C2-47
Push -Off Adjustment Lock
41A 17-40
Operating Instructions for Models 5W11, 5W12
S275
Service Manual for RC400 Record Changer
A45-2
Allen Wrench, #6
that the length of the un -threaded portion of the push-off adjusting
shaft (15) is approximately 5/16" in G400B410, and 3/4" in G400B329.
*At the time of publication, 50 cycle conversion parts were not available.
1
o John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL
20-28 ADMIRAL
RC400
16.. 16A
10
181
I
19
43
41
62
63
4.,45
46
47
48 --tm
5^
,AID
49
50-''`
1/48
53
10
y
51
11
65
155
-14
II:"15
73
63-ffi
54
64-,
;
12A
`,
16
56
Axe,-11e
66
57 ®
oa
68
80ttN
eg'56
63
I
69
Figure 12.
81
RC400 Exploded View.
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADMIRAL RCD. CH. PAGE 20-29
MODEL RC400
RECORD CHANGER TROUBLE SHOOTING
Changer Will Not Trip Into Change Cycle.
1.
Check adjustment of trip adjusting screw (75).
2. Check for broken, loose or weak trip tension
spring (73).
3.
Changer Causes Rumble or Noise.
1.
Check for broken or missing "float" springs (58).
shaft (19) rubbing
against the edge of the cut-out in the changer pan.
2. Check for speed change knob
Check for broken, missing or loose trip adjusting lock spring (74).
Check for oil or foreign material on the drive Pickup Arm "Skips" Across Records.
wheel tire (36).
1. Check to be sure that cabinet is level.
5. Check to see that the drive bracket (78) is free
(not binding) to pivot around drive bracket hub.
2. Check for worn needle.
6. Check for broken cycle spring (76).
4.
Changer Trips Into Change Cycle Before
Finishing Record.
1.
Check adjustment of trip adjusting screw. (75).
See paragraph under heading "Trip Adjustment."
CAUTIONS AND SERVICE HINTS
1.
Changer Will Not Reject.
Check for oil or foreign material on the drive
wheel tire (36).
2. Check to see that the drive bracket (78) is free
to pivot around the drive bracket hub.
that the rubber tires on both the drive wheel
(36) and the compound idler wheel (47) are kept
clean and free from oil, grease, dirt or any foreign
material. Carbona or carbon tetrachloride may
be used for cleaning these parts.
See
1.
the idler wheel or drive wheel,
keep fingers and hands away from the rubber
tires. Natural body oils on these parts may
possibly cause slippage.
2. When handling
Pickup Arm Does Not Set Down Properly.
1.
Check set -down adjustment. See paragraph under "Adjustment of Set -down Point".
Records Do Not Drop to Turntable.
1.
If 45 RPM records do not drop, adjust push -off
adjusting shaft (15). See paragraph under
heading "45 RPM Centerpost Adjustment".
If 33 RPM records do not drop, check the pushoff adjustment. See paragraph under heading
"Push -off Adjustment".
Changer Stalls in Change Cycle.
1.
Check for parts binding.
2.
If changer stalls with 45 RPM centerpost in
place, adjust push -off adjusting shaft (15). See
paragraph under heading "45 RPM Centerpost
Adjustment".
Turntable Will Not Revolve When Changer
Is Turned On.
If
1. Check position of speed change knob (19).
it is in "neutral" position, the turntable will not
revolve.
3.
When the turntable is off, do NOT push the drive
wheel (26) against the centerpost socket.
4.
If the record changer is not going to be used for
some time, place the speed -change knob (19) in
the "neutral" position. This will eliminate the
possibility of denting the idler wheel tires (47).
5.
When disassembling the 45 RPM centerpost, do
not push up on push -off adjusting shaft (15),
just after removing the centerpost cap (3).
6.
When removing the pickup arm, do NOT loosen
the Align set screw (34) in the pivot collar (33).
the reject bracket (43).
the drive wheel tire (26)
possibly causing slippage during change cycle.
7. Do not oil the roller on
Oil will be transferred to
8.
When replacing the turntable retaining clip (37)
be sure to slip it on with the "turned -up" ends
facing upward.
9.
When removing or reinstalling turntable, make
sure that the record changer is not in change cycle
and that the speed change knob (19) is in the
"neutral" position.
material on the tires of
the compound idler wheel (47).
Check for broken idler wheel spring (50).
2. Check for oil or foreign
3.
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
www.americanradiohistory.com
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-1
MODEL 12-43
Due to the fact that a complete understanding of the proper operation of a record changer is necessary before any attempt be made to repair or effect Service adjustments; we are giving a description of the
change cycle of the P-43 Series Capehart Record Changers.
played
The record shelves are set for the size record to be
indicated
either
to
the
position
turning
shelf
(either 10" or 12") by
then the correct number of records should be placed on
on the decal,
The tone arm should be
shelves.
record
the
(Twelve 10" or ten 12").
on its rest.
Before loading the records on the shelves they should be examined
for rough edges (burrs, flash or chips) and if any burrs are found they
should be removed with fine sandpaper.
Move the control switch which starts the phonograph and move the
lifting the
into cycle
The changer will go
reject button sidewise.
The tone arm
tone arm off the rest and swinging it under the stack.
a record should drop to the
should swing clear of the record stack,
hooks, pause, then gently settle to the turntable. The tone arm should
When
swing back and be lowered to the starting groove on the record.
have
the
records
repeated
until
is
the record is played the above cycle
been played.
Now let's follow the above cycle through the mechanism.
the Reject Lever (56-877) pushes
When the reject button is moved,
enough to disen(64215) far
and
Trip
Release
Assembly
Lever
the Start
Due to its construcgage it from the Starting Lever Assembly (13-38).
tion the Starting Lever (which is part of the Main Cam Assembly)
(13-296) tilts down and engages with the Starting Pin (34309) to make
the Main Cam Gear mesh with the Spindle Gear (part of 13-297).
The Turntable is screwed onto the Spindle Gear and both are driven
When the cycle is comthrough the Idler Pulley (3672) by the Motor.
from the Spindle Gear because
pleted the Main Cam Gear disengages
Gear, this is called the playing
the
Main
Cam
several teeth are left off
position, see Fig. A,
When the Starting Lever engages with the Starting Pin (see above)
speed and the corthe Main Cam Assembly is moved forward at the right
Then the Main Cam
rect distance to cause the gears to mesh properly.
goes through a complete revolution.
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-2 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
MODEL P-433
First the Tone Arm is lifted off the record through the Tone Arm
Lift Lever (13-303). As soon as it is elevated both the Record Plungers
move toward the Spindle to center the record for the drop to the Turntable; if no record is on the shelves the Automatic Switch is turned off,
however the cycling switch makes the changer complete the cycle with
the Tone Arm in playing position and needle resting
on the record.
As
this happens the Tone Arm Return Lever (09-119) moves the Tone Arm from
under the record stack.
The Rear Record Plunger moves forward at the
same rate of speed as the eccentric portion of the Spindle and the
Front Plunger does. This pushes the record off the Rear Shelf where
the Rear Record Hook catches it. Both Front and Rear Plunger move backwards at the same rate as the Spindle does, pushing the record off the
Front Shelf and dropping it to the Front Hooks, the record pauses here
until the Hooks move to center the record in respect to the Spindle.
Then both Hooks Snap back out of the way, allowing the record to settle
gently to the turntable. Next the Tone Arm swings into the proper
position and is lowered to the record. A wire feed -in spring acts
against the Tone Arm Crank to feed the Tone Arm into the music grooves
in case there is no feed -in groove on the record.
To accomplish the record feed there are three sections of the Main
Cam, together with the Centering Lever and Rocker Arm Assembly involved.
The first section of the Main Cam is a "Boss" illustrated at the end of
the Tone Arm Lift Lever in Fig. A.
The Second section is the Trip
Roller. Assembly on top of the Main Cam.
The third section is the "slot"
in the Tone Arm Lift portion of the cam adjacent
to
the Trip Roller
Assembly.
The action is as follows; As the Main Cam rotates, the "Boss"
strikes the Centering Lever and Rocker as shown in Fig. B, this moves
the Record Plungers toward the Spindle.
Because this pressure is applied through a spring, variations in record diameter are of little
consequence. After the Boss passes the Centering Lever, the Trip
Roller strikes the Rear Rocker the first time moving the Rear Record
Plunger forward and the Front Record Plunger is also moved forward,
Fig. C.
As the Main Cam moves on, the Record Plungers go to a central
position then both move backward, Fig. D, then resume the central position, this is while the record rests on the Hooks.
Then the Centering
Lever drops into the "Slot" in the Main Cam, Fig. E, the Front and Rear
Hooks are suddenly withdrawn from the record and it drops to the Turntable.
As the Tone Arm moves over the record, its motion is transmitted
through the Friction Trip to the Friction Trip Lever. When the needle
enters the change groove the Starting Lever Release Trip is released by,
the Friction Trip Lever, this allows the Starting Lever to drop and
engage the Starting Pin.
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-3
MODEL P -431
71-198
-b.
4--56-384
57-109
57-1
57-110
-+
-
-57-III
56-846--?
56-845
57-108
31-51
r-6069
09-122
13 -299
1-31-142
FIGURE
09-122
09-123
13-299
13-303
13-305
31-51
31-142
36-695
56-384
56-845
56-846
56-868
57-1
57-108
57-109
57-110
57-111
71-198
6069
46293
99-12-1
99-33-3
©John
F.
1
Automatic Stop Switch & Bracket Assembly
Tone Arm Return Lever & Spring Assembly
Turntable
Tone Arm Lift Lever & Bracket Assembly
Center Lever & Rocker Assembly
Decalcomania
Stop Switch Escutcheon
16-32x3/8 Phil. Oven H.M.S. St
Tone Arm Rest Pin
10" Record Plunger, Fig. SA
12" Record Plunger, Fig. 5A
Switch Lifting Lever
Tone Arm Support Housing, Fig. 4
Record Support Housing, Fig. 5A
Record Support Shelf & Tube Ass'y Fig. SA
Record Shelf Cover, Rear, Fig. SA
Record Shelf Cover, Front, Fig. SA
Tone Arm Assembly, Fig. 4
Reject Button
Trip Finger Stop, Fig. 2
8-32 Hex Nut
18 S.P. Washer
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CD. CH. PAGE 20-4 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
MODEL P-43
11
64215
15-78
13-38
*56-858
r---56-144
-
i
13-301
15-12
13-38
.
64215
I
56-154
3996
nm
m,q-_
dimdimy Illl
n11
rill
,
31U111
57-112
99-36-45
FIGURE
07-26
07-27
368-7
56-112
99-33-4
09-119
Mounting Parts
10-32x21/32" H.H. Screw
#10 Flat Washer
10-32 Hex Nut
Spacer
#10 S.P. Washer
Connecting Link Assembly
56-104
Connecting Link
56-106
Connecting_ Link Rivet
56-124
Gear Sector, Front
56-191
Gear Sector, Rear
56-263
Gear Spacer
99-36-28 Brass Washer
99-37-2 Wave Washer
*57-8364-4
11-180
36-141
36-465
3612-4
3624-2
56-166
56-167
3996
99-11-6
99-40-6
Feed -In Spring Assembly
6-32x1/4" R.H.M.S.
6-32x5/8" R.H.M.S.
#6 S.P. Washer
#6 Flat Washer
Ratchet Pawl
Shoulder Rivet
Pawl Spring
6-32 Hex Nut
10x3/16" Drive Screw
36-112
36-115
368-7
56-155
99-33-4
Mounting Ports
#10 Flat Washer 1" O.D.
10-32x1/2" H.H.M.S.
10-32 Hex Nut
Spacer
#10 S.P. Washer
13-296
©John
F.
Mounting Parts
10-32x21/32" H.H. Screw
#10 Flat Washer
60-4
Tone Arm Return Lever and Spring Assembly
13-38
36-114
36-136
57-6
Mounting Parts --Continued
36-231
10-32x1/2" H.H. Screw
368-7
10-32 Hex Nut
99-33-4
#10 S.P. Washer
Rear Locking Lever Assembly
36-114
36-136
07-28
Mounting Parts
10-32x1" H.H. Screw
#10 Flat Washer
10-32 Hex Nut
Spacer
#10 S.P. Washer
n
2
Front Locking Lever Assembly
36-117
36-136
368-7
56-112
99-33-4
...
34309
56-158
99 -34 -II
ma-
4949
15-78
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Main Cam Assembly
Starting Lever Assembly
Trip Roller Assembly
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-5
MODEL P-43
36-119
368-4
99-33-3
99-36-20
56-100
56-105
57-112
3996
99-36-1
Mounting Parts
8-32x3/8 B.H.M.S.
8-32 Hex Nut
#8 S.P.`Washer
#8 Flat Washer
Starting Lever End
Rivet
Main Cam
Spring
Washer
Mounting Parts
34312
Pivot Pin
99-34-12 H.P. Cotter
Mounting Parts, Main Cam
36-129
1/4 -28 Hex Nut
56-154
Main Cam Stud
99-33-5 1/4" S.P. Washer
99-34-11 H.P. Cotter
99-36-45 Washer
13-300
13-303
15-10
13-297
13-298
Spindle Gear and Bracket Assembly
13-301
Spindle and Gear
Assembly
56-858
Spindle *
57-8
Spindle Gear *
* Not Sold Separately
34309
Starting Pin
4949
Felt Washer
99-42-10 3/16" Ball Bearing
99-42-11 Turntable Stop Washer
Mounting Parts
36-303
8/32x7/15 R.H.M.S.
56-102
Spacer
50206
Rubber Grommet
99-36-21 #8 Flat Washer
Centering Lever & Rocker Assembly
36-690
#10 Flat Washer 1/2"
0.D.x .042" St.
368-7
#10-32 Hex Nut 3/8"
A.F.xl/8" Hi. St.
56-841
Centering Lever
56-844
Plunger Rocker
56-848
Rocker Lever Spacer
56-852
Rocker Connecting Link
Rivet
56-853
Centering Lever Return
Arm
56-857
Centering Lever Rivet
and Guide Pin
56-860
Rocker Connecting Link
56-878
Centering Lever Guide
Pin
64-13
Centering Lever Return
Arm Spring
64-290
Centering Lever Equalizing Spring
99-20-31 110-32x7/8" R.H.M.S. -
15-11
13-300
Int. Lockwasher
Play Control Assembly
13-302
Switch, Cam, Ratchet and
13-153
©John
#10 S.P.
F.
Hub
Switch Cover
36-143
36-593
56-168
56-169
56-171
56-173
64-18
64-19
90-12
99-18-1
99-36-7
3612-4
Switch Cam & Hub
Ratchet, Hub and Pin
Assembly
Taper Pin
12x1/4" Drive Screw
Shaft
Ratchet Locking Plunger
Switch Cam Spacer
Switch Bracket
Ratchet Plunger Spring
Switch Cam Spring
Switch
6-32x3/16" R.H.M.S.
Plain Washer
#6 S.P. Washer
36-236
Mounting Parts
6-32x1/4" Philips O.H.
Tone Arm Lift Lever & Bracket Assembly
Front Gear & Cam Assembly,
See Fig. T
99-28-31 6-32x3/16" Bristol Set
Screw
Rear Gear & Cam Assembly
99-28-31 6-32x3/16" Bristol Set
Screw
44-27
3671
44-28
Phono Motor 60 Cycles
Motor Pulley 60 cycles
Phono Motor 50 Cycles
Motor Pulley 50 cycles
Mounting Parts
45176
Tension Spring Holder
99-19-3 8-32x3/8" R.H.M.S.
99-33-3 #8 S.P. Washer
99-36-36 #8 Flat Washer
3681
36-114
36-136
368-7
99-33-4
Reject Lever
"Reject" Tab
Reject Button
Reject Lever Spring
Mounting Parts
10-32x21/32" H.H. Screw
#10 Flat Washer
10-32 Hex Nut
#10 S.P. Washer
60-205
Cycle Switch
Switch Cover
36-624
56-881
Mounting Parts
6-32x1/2" Philips B.H.MS.
Spacer
56-877 *
3160
59-48
39236
90-84
46293
Trip Finger Stop
64215
Trip Lever Release Lever
66351
Friction Trip Assembly
Springs
64-13
Rear Shelf Lock Lever or
Centering Lever Return Spring
6416
Front Shelf Lock Lever
64-290
Centering Lever Equalizing Spring
39234
39236
Tone Arm Swing Lever
Reject Lever Spring
St.
99-33-4
Play Control Assembly --Continued
15-16
15-80
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-6 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
MODEL P-143
3672
50209
99-36-21-,
3671
99-34-14
!
1
1 36-303
50206
3924
99-28-41
FIGURE 3
36-303
368-4
57-108
3671
3672
39245
42165
45176
50206
50209
64216
99-12-1
99-19-3
99-28-41
99-34-14
99-36-21
99-36-38
8-32x7/16" R.H.M.S.
8-32x1/4" Hex Nut
Record Support Post, See Fig. 5A
Motor Pulley 60 Cycle
Idler Pulley
Idler Spring
Spacer
Spring Holder
Rubber Grommet
Thrust Washer
Idler Bracket and Stud Assembly
8-32x11/32" Hex Nut
8-32x3/8" R.H.M.S.
6-32x1/8" Bristol Set Screw
H.P. Cotter
#8 Flat Washer
Flat Brass Washer
r
62-68
36-697
59-104
56-38511-182
I-182
34313
71-199
36-237
COMPLETE
ASSEMBLY
71-198
39235
64- 292---48216
43182-1
64219
FIGURE 4
°
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
-
57-1
CAPEHART=FARNSWORTH RC®_ CH. PAGE 20-7
MODEL P-43
71-198
11-182
61269
36-140
36-268
36-504
36-758
56-252
56-257
56-385
* 57-1
59-104
62-39
48216
64-292
Complete Tone Arm Assembly
Lead and Plug Assembly
Plug
14x1/4" Philips B.H.S.T.S.
4-36x1/8" Philips B.H.M.S.
4-36x3/16" Philips B.H.M.S.
Slotted Needle Set Screw
Crystal Mounting Bracket
Cartridge Mounting Spacer
Tone Arm Brace
Tone Arm Support Housing
Tone Arm Only
Dampening Shim
Tone Arm Bushing
Counterbalance Spring
71-199
34313
39235
64219
99-10-8
99-17-11
99-33-1
Crystal Cartridge
Hinge Pin
Spring Clip
Tone Arm Bracket Assembly
4-36 Hex Nut
4-36x5/8" R.H.M.S.
#4 S.P. Washer
36-120
56-251
43182
50204
Mounting Parts
8-32x5/16" B.H.M.S.
Wire Clamp
Tone Arm Lift Rod
Cork Washer
* Replaced by 57-122
43185
46301
,--50203
45165
39227
66355
---or
---
05-41
99-28-30
39 228
66366-''g'
99-26-16
FIGURE
66351
©John
Friction Trip Assembly
05-41
Trip Finger
39227
Spring Washer
39228
Coil Spring
43185
Upper Collar
99-28-30 6-32x1/4" Bristol Set
Screw
45165
Friction Trip Lever
46301
Friction Trip Stop Disc
F.
5
66351
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Friction Trip Assembly --Continued
50203
Cork Washer
66355
Lower Collar, Pin and
Screw
99-28-30 6-32x1/4" Bristol Set
Screw
66366
Tone Arm Crank Assembly
99-26-16 Tone Arm Crank Set
Screw
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-8 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
10" Plunger
12" Plunger
Record Support Post
Record Support Shelf and Tube
Assembly
Record Shelf Cover Rear
Record Shelf Cover Front
Mounting Parts
8-32x3/8" Philips B.H.M.S. Post
to Base
4-36x9/16" Philips F.H.M.S.
6-32x9/16" Philips B.H.M.S.
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-9
MODEL P-43
Mounting Parts --Continued
Rubber Grommet
50206
99-36-21 Flat Washers
Automatic Stop Switch Assembly
Tone Arm Return Lever & Spring
Assembly
Spindle, Gear and Bracket
13-297
Assembly
Spindle and Gear Assembly
13-301
34309 Starting Pin (needed to
complete 13-301
Spindle Support Bracket
15-12
Stop Switch Escutcheon
31-142
#6-32x3/8"Phil. Oven H.M.S. St.
36-695
6-32x1/4" H.H.M.S.
364-4
Spindle Thrust Plate
56-158
Tone Arm Rest Pin
56-384
Spindle Support Bracket
57-6
6048
Paper Gasket
4945
Felt Washer
99-42-10 3/16" Thrust Ball
99-42-11 Turntable Stop Washer
Mounting Parts
8-32x7/16" R.H.M.S.
36-303
Spacer, Spindle Bracket to Base
56-102
09-122
09-123
13-296
13-38
15-78
56-100
56-105
56-868
71-198
3996
34312
99-34-12
99-36-1
Main Cam Assembly
Starting Lever Assembly
Trip Roller Assembly
Starting Lever End
Starting Lever End Rivet
Tone Arm & Pick Up Assembly
Starting Lever End Spring
Starting Lever Pin
H.P. Cotter for 34312
Starting Lever End Rivet
Washer
Mounting Parts
1/4"-28x7/16" Hex Nut
36-129
Cam Stud
Main
56-154
99-33-5 1/4" S.P. Washer
99-34-11 H.P. Cotter for 56-154
99-36-45 Main Cam Stud Washer
FIGURE
T
46292
39229
07-215
56-874
64-285
99-26-17
56-875
l3-303
©John
F.
--
99-13-5
Tone Arm Lift Lever and Brake Assembly
Lever and Brake Spring Assembly
07-215
Lever only
56-874
64-285
Brake Spring
Rivet
362-1
6-32 Hex Nut
368-1
6-32x7/8" R.H.M.S.
3630-2
Switch Trip Finger
56-875
Pin
34312
Pin
34316
Spring
39229
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
4058
46292
99-13-5
99-26-17
99-33-4
99-34-12
99-34-13
Roller
Lever Mounting Bracket
10-32x3/8" Hex Nut
10-32x1/2" H.H.M.S.
#10 S.P. Washer
H.P. Cotter for 34312
H.P. Cotter for 31316
36-116
Mounting Parts
10-32x1/4" H.H.M.S.
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL
20-10 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
P-4.3
In the following five illustrations
we are showing the cycle of operation of
a P-43 Series Capehart Changer.
Figure
position.
A is
known
as
the playing
In Figure B the Main Cam has advanced
so the "Boss" on the
Main Cam has moved
the Centering Lever Return Arm away
from
the cam, which because of the
Return
Spring causes the Centering Arm thru the
Rocker Levers and Plunger Shafts to move
the Record Plungers toward the Spindle.
Due to the motion being transmitted thru
the Return Spring
different diameter
records are handled equally well.
The
equalizer spring aids in exactly centering
the record in regard to
the Spindle.
Note, in this
illustration the Tone Arm
Swing Lever 'is part way up the Cam
Shoulder.
In Fig. C
the Trip Roller
(part of
Main Cam) has advanced to move the rear
plunger rocker away from the spindle, at
the same time
rocker toward
Plunger Shafts,
of the Rockers
moving the
front plunger
spindle.
Due to the
which transmit the motion
to the Record Plungers the
Record Plungers move in the opposite
direction from the Rockers, i.e.
Front
Record Plunger moves away from t h e
Spindle.
This causes the record to be
pushed off the Rear Shelf and drop to the
Rear Hooks.
the
Between C & D the Record Plungers go
through the central position and assume
the position shown
in Fig. D where
the
Rear Record Plunger moves away from the
Spindle causing the record to drop to the
Front Hooks.
In Fig. E the Centering Lever Return
Arm has dropped into the "Slot"
in the
Main Cam, moving both Plungers Rockers
toward the Spindle,, causing the Front and
Rear Hoods to snap back, permitting the
record to settle flat on the turntable.
In this
illustration the Tone Arm Swing
Lever is returning to the normal position.
FIGURE A
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
20-11
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE
SERVICE SUGGESTIONS
TO REMOVE TURNTABLE 13-299
1.
The Spindle Gear may be wedged, by
screwdriver between it and the Main
turning, the Turnits
to prevent
Cam,
the
be unscrewed from
table should
Turntable
the
removing
When
Spindle.
make certain one of the Spacer Washers is
These Washers often adhere to
not lost.
the Turntable because of an oil film from
When replacing
4949.
the Felt Washer
is properly
it
sure
make
Turntable
NEVER USE GAS PLIERS TO HOLD
tightened.
a
SPINDLE.
2.
TO REPLACE
OR
ADJUST
IDLER
PULLEY
3672.
The Idler
First remove Turntable.
from the
power
transfer
to
is
used
Pulley
If
Motor Pulley 3671 to the Turntable.
the
incorrect
is
tension
the Idler Spring
Turntable speed may be too high or too
it should fall between 76.59 R.P.M.
low,
R.P.M. This tension is adjusted
80.00
and
Screw
the Motor Mounting
by loosening
holding the Spring Holder 45176 and turning the Spring Holder until the required
tension is secured.
necessary to replace the
Pin Cotter
the Hair
remove
Idler Pulley
99-34-14 and the Thrust Washer 50209.
Pulley also
Idler
After removing the
remove the Thrust Washer used underneath
Pulley is
Idler
the
If
the pulley.
replaced both Thrust Washers should be
If
it
is
also.
When replacing the
a single
on the Pulley
Pulley
drop of oil should be used
Stud.
CAUTION --Do not allow oil to get on
either the Idler Pulley or the Turntable
Rim.
3.
FIGURE C
°John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ALIGNMENT OF RECORD SUPPORT SHELVES
The center line of the record shelves
should form a straight line, in 10" position which passes through the center of
The shelves should be
the spindle.
inches apart, plus or
41/64
and
9
exactly
minus .005", and should be equidistant
from the spindle. In the event it becomes
necessary to change the spacing of the
record shelves it is recommended that
some
In
shims be used to adjust them.
records
undersized
or
cases if oversized
are used it may be necessary to change
the spacing of the shelves.
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-12 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
MODEL P-43
4.
ALIGNMENT OF RECORD SPINDLE
To prevent
feedback the
Spindle,
Gear and Bracket Assembly is rubber
mounted and
can shift
in
transit.
To
reposition the spindle loosen all three
mounting screws, position the spindle and
tighten all three mounting screws equally;
so as not to force the spindle
out
of
place which may happen if one screw is
tightened first.
5.
SHELF LOCKING LEVER ADJUSTMENTS
The Front Record Shelf 57-111 should
be lined up with the record
spindle in
the 10" position.
The Shelf Locking
Cam
15-10 Is lined up with the center line of
the Gear
Sector Assembly and adjusted
until the Locking Lever 07-26 is properly
seated in the Shelf Locking Cam.
The
Record Shelf should not be permitted to
slip when adjusting these parts.
When aligning the Rear Shelf Locking
Cam the Locking Lever Hex Head Mounting
screw may be loosened to permit the
necessary adjustment to properly align
the Shelf Locking Cam and Shelf Locking
Lever.
6.
ADJUSTMENT OF NON TRIP CAM OF STARTING
LEVER 13-38 (Fig. 6)
This Cam shown at "A" in
(Fig. 6)
should be adjusted so
that when the
machine is in the "Manual" position,
the
Starting Lever Release Trip 64215 (Fig.
6)
will pass over the end of the Starting
Lever 13-38 (Fig. 6) without touching.
The front end of the Starting Lever must
also clear the bottom of the Resetting
Dog and the top of the Starting Pin both
part of the Spindle Gear 57-8 (Fig, 6).
T.
THE TRIP FINGER STOP 46293 (Fig. 2)
The Trip Finger Stop 46293 should be
2-1/4" from the
inside of the base plate
to the inside face of the 90° bend at the
end of the Stop.
8.
NEEDLE LANDING
In 10"
Crank66366
®John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
position, adjust the Tone Arm
(Fig. 5) so the needle
lands
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-13
MODEL P-1+3
4-7/8" from center of the Record Spindle.
To adjust have record changer in playing
position, loosen Tone Arm Set Screw
99-26-16 (Fig. 5) set needle 4-7/8" from
Hold Tone Arm
center of Record Spindle.
Swing Lever
Arm
Tone
against
firmly
Crank
09-119 (Fig. 2) at the same time hold the
Tone Arm Crank firmly up against the Trip
Tighten the Set
finger 46287 (Fig. 5).
There should be a small
Screw 99-26-16.
amount of play up and down in the tone
To adjust
Next set the 12" drop.
arm.
records
12"
for
shelves
record
set the
posiin
playing
changer
record
and have
Loosen Lock Nut 99-11-6; which is
tion.
part of 09-119 and adjust Screw 36-465
until the needle drops 5-7/8" from the
Be sure
center of the Record Spindle.
adjustment
after
nut 99-11-6 is tightened
is made.
9.
ADJUSTMENT OF TONE ARM 71-195 (Fig. 4)
With records on the shelves, the top
of the pickup arm at the highest point in
should be 3/16" below the
its return
bottom record on the
the
of
bottom
flush and the pointed end projects about
and should engage the end of the
1/8"
Starting Lever 13-38 to allow the teeth
the Main Cam to mesh with the Spindle
of
Two adjustments
Gear without topping.
are
possible if the teeth do not engage
either drive the Starting Pin
properly,
in further or bend the end of the Starting
Lever.
12.
tolerances it is
Due to commercial
which will
motors
secure
to
impossible
Our limits
run at exactly 78.26 R.P.M.
are from 76.59 R.P.M. to 80.00 R.P.M.
necessary
it becomes
In the event
these
of
get exact speed on one
changers choose a motor pulley that gives
slightly higher speed than required.
a
Using a fine file reduce the diameter of
the motor pulley a little at a time until
the required speed is secured.
to
13.
shelves.
10.
TRIP MECHANISM (Fig. 5)
the Trip
The proper adjustment of
Mechanism is, when the needle is 1-7/8"
from the center of the record spindle,
the Trip Finger 05-41 (Fig. 5) trips the
Starting Lever Release Trip 64215
(Fig.
6).
To adjust tension loosen Bristol Set
Screw 99-28-30 in Upper Collar 43185
Turn collar counter clockwise
(Fig. 5).
friction (if changer does not
increase
to
trip at end of record) and clockwise to
decrease friction (if changer trips before the end of the record). There should
never be any more friction than is necessary to move Starting Lever Release Trip
64215 (Fig. 6) off the end of the Starting
Lever 13-38 (Fig. 6).
Excessive friction will cause a loud
click each revolution of the turntable
after a part of the record has been
played.
11.
STARTING PI N 34309
LEVER 13-38 (Fig. 6)
AND
STARTING
(Fig. 6) is
The Starting Pin 34309
normally driven into the Spindle Gear
end is
57-8 (Fig. 6) until the square
©John
MOTOR SPEED
The following simple OILING INSTRUCin a minimum of
result
TIONS will
service calls ---
Every six months or once each year,
of oil should be put
three drops
two or
the Spindle
in
washers
on the two felt
located at
is
washer
One
Gear Bracket.
the other
Gear,
Spindle
the
of
bottom
the
the top of the bracket and is
is at
accessible by removing the Turntable.
Two or three drops of oil on the felts in
oil on the Pin
One drop of
the Motor.
Lift Lever.
Tone
Arm
the
of
roller
for the
Vaseline
White
of
application
light
very
A
on .the teeth of the Main Cam, also some
Tone
on the face of this Cam where the
A single drop of
Arm Swing Lever rides.
and 12" plungers. Care
the 10"
oil on
should be exercised to prevent an excess
of oil being used on any part.
No further lubrication on the tone
arm bearing will be necessary unless a
In this case a thin
replacement is made.
film of vaseline may be used.
taken to see that no
Care should be
idler
pulley,
motor
the
on
gets
oil
No
oil
turntable.
the
of
pulley or rim
Trip
Friction
the
on
used
be
should
Assembly.
Use only a good grade of machine oil
with a viscosity of SAE 10.
F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-14 CAPEHART-
-.....
--
P-43
MODEL
xIllu
2
ro
4,
'
PO
:'b
,
Z
O
a.
.
aw
F°J
ÿ
eo
0Ó
U
Ä
c
,...4 -0
p
to
Fc`"eó
w
áw
03ó
,...
a
ar
á
0J
W
r.c 6 º'
>'Féa
aO
m>47v
°
nx
Á
'
g...4
c
,
'Ñ
C
al
c%
0
v
>
a
to
,
ñ
,co
?'
..inx.ax
c
v3i,
ß
v.>«.5
.ya,
á
a
.7
v7>
v
b>ü
a v
4!
>b
Ci)
S4aav
4
u
u u
o
ño4°ináü aa c ..7.: v,,ü
ú zl
v
v
i,
w
cmca
..acm..x.wvw
oN .)Cx
a4qo..
óó Q.o
.°
ÿ
a
w..
uóc>
U ,.7°,aú
-7c jpC
a,..a,y t/vw S 3c
»u>>aua
pUUTwá
[W~:.Cÿÿ>
á$á 4>mCt7._,CaHß'.(i
m,
CuvC,:
C3w+wC
'.ÉwCU~ G aaaCb
fl uaaa,ala
O.D.y aa Caa
aa.-j a
aJw
EH.c E
av
ÿ0
aC a=a g.-'2
C a~ $á
á
c
y....óax'ca,..ß
uy
46awwaao4n4o4oa
wv
Fúmu
>N ..C.ç a ó
t
I.w«wmf/w
q
O°
m
vNNmm
a1-'
y..0
v
. u u CU CUmfn .F a.c .a.- ..
,,
,,ü3 aaFUE,A U
ÿU w_°.mUm-C
d ÿvv
y¡
y 0
óÔ400000
U)+
C
u
67,[« QiiY
Uínfiv4bUb
o.),,,,,_,u
OO.
u u
ÿ v v ó7, ,[,[,,G..u, C y ÿ+.:
u
u
u cO'^" C...
oo...oalaaá44,
`.4aavalooaal
.7
,,.
O -C u
[,2 qt ß¡,xwm
°
r.r
...5
a
E
C
6i
.
úcaau>
v
C
m
w
O D
Ow,.
w
ó0
67
O
c9
.
.
4!
67
tr[04.X
w
C
00e9
..
!1
C
CL
>
O
F.
t- .>`-'a
ty.
al
c~a
C
.: ..
C7
tu
$...
0/ C
a
a a
t+
a>,
4111.4
Ç U
c0...
O r,.
a
4!
C
C
.
%
a/
COä
c+
%
F.
ti
t. .0 .C.
F.
$.41.
C
a, a,
C
á
v
m
ca
en
.0 .+ î. t.
C u..u+ x.u.u?C
Ú..u+.u+
01
.
a
1.
C C
Ó
C
C C
C C
y y ú ú Ó
aèoala+oalaloa33o3vu
FUaUaammC7mrmmürüFFmU ß..,.UUaUUPCtntnUlFU]tUúiátiáááágáE+áFß.ÚßÚV]auVIVUFU3
u'4uc'CCUNáááá3óó..-C
c0
7..
4r
cuC.v,
MV'InmC00)NN V'ad'Inm....C)eIn.-... V'7f10000°)ONMn07e]000V'wnCtl.-..!).rCOQ10.-.C7..NNeCOu')mó0Mt0000...7N0001e
OOOOOO.-.NNe.n.OMp,.[)m000000e ey.y.y.y.tn.n,n,nO00nhnhn00
y'OOO......NNeOeOOp.....0000)0)0)00
4)
7[)
In In In .n In
I[) If)
m
In ln
In
.[) If)
.n
.l)
In In In In
.() If)
.n u) .n
.f) .f)
u)
If)
.f) .f)
.n
.[)
.n
.f)
.[) .f7
m u)
.!) If) .f)
tn
.t')
in
m
u) In
mmm mm mmm mmn hh
.f)
Md.f)m000)NNVedu)OO.4.-.Ma.n.-....V'Inm000)ONMnO.nC00d'u':hN.4
OOOOOO..NNV.ntn4)0).f)mmCOmyy'q.y.d.y..n.n.n.nmmmhnhnnC00
m0)O...N...N a
WO,-.N000)V'
.....-1.-......r....-........-.........NNMMW000OOOCOOOWOONC00000
OO.......NN00000On)COMm000)0)CA0)0)O
W000000000000N.......................d'....V'N...m.-...NNNN....-.01
mmm mmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
n
mmmmmmmmmmmOOmmmmmmnnnnnn0
m
.f)
)OONNy.r.¡.r
dd'V'V'V'
[.d
O
á
CO
H
a
'
C
ó
I
Oa
w
E
>"
U
S
ov-xin
a.)
CE
,
,d
Z
A1
Q
äa
o
kA
E
3:vó
v m4
ó ráú3
aÓ ul0ral
c
gt
aa~
>
w
.,.ytMOOm
cm
C
.c
u
s.
C
as
Eü
4r O
6/b r..,'
v
0041
C.'
01
d
41
m
E
íIlii4.1+.4 ç)
m
x
a
Avi
ú
m
v mX
o; b
.. x
t
xm kÓcmz
w
C7
úxmV1,A.TOZk.
=>mx3
m
f/!
v xw ,
Ó
vv
ti v
f/i.l..
=
xx x
w' xxaixx
°,
àáav.
b
.c,
c
ti
CC7
>X.?x0 órx
c.:x'w
"cvvaix
wxx
v v
°'W a;
N:
,mß.=0.
wA
u vbvm
u
r7
0
w
mm
xgma=
=
xxzNNa>,>C
c
UU
zz
iO3=
a á.c00v-cF,3=:
T=
___-.
3s.,=
N
"
..,a+7,,,,,.,
íi aM.
n
4
k
wt- C
ç dr
E
F.
ú=
7
VÚ .c
cE0
`° cb $m
üw wac
yw
G
c«f0
.+
t, l0
L.
61
F+
XX
coaB°1á
. áa. ECEE
pc,
ems.
E°aaéa,
E'wú>É
gE
>ma'L7
3^
% l.ó
ßi
4a.,r.,w
Á
ob
m
á EÉbtiE+
Q
m
pç
:3
W
E
.am a _7'^-'
°
4.
c 0+..
.+
4i.+
to
NNNN
.1
íu.
CL
Ñ.+
(/i
Vì
a0)
a,
x...w..cvma4>
mtnma
íaal+á mOOÌ
a
4
wN N.tO,r_¡kílIlix
X r~
Nty
ONM NNNNN++OM99 u uNNNMmwNOYO....[
4U
y aOMMMM NN=
d O> O O `. 41áp_+'MM e..MOdMt`)MMM 00'.myV
a0C C Q A ß..° 6)Ir4 a.°+-10000
O O« c
waUSCF.wmZmFmFUwamwaFm#....'...F4ó4ó#fp..#cótófómOk.####ma°fO..##fZmm
f-°.
C.
C
61
C
M
C-.
C
M
0y
6)
MMMOmmM
t
OOhN0pÓ-NNNNMMMO0000000mmmmmm
Ó
Ó
~p
h'y
..
M
p
NN N
dmmmm mhh
...
NN
N
Ói.
m
maOmhmNnmommoO)OMOoNhmYONNtiMnmm00NmLMnNN.ymMOÓhmn0n000OmnNOON
O
mNM O mhp...Mm
NN-Ilmm0C00m....hMd)y'mMO.nhOm
mh00..NNmm0Q0p0000..Nmn0.-.OV..
ON
.-rNNMVMMOmmN00O0MminaO
NNNN..-.O..MNN NMNM......nnnnm........r..-...-..NNMyemmmmmmnn..W..dhdNNNNOO
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
MM
MMMMMYA)n
mmmmmmmmmcÓOGmmmmmmmmmmNVCOOCO4O4y.
.NMpy,nQ
MM MM Mm mm
M MM
°John
00...NmmOmmOmmmmmmmmm^'mmmn0)mÓddmm
O0000O
N N N N N MddnnZ
N
000000.ti.....yyyy'',MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
mbOOÓOÓO.........MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMmmmmtp
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-15
MODEL P -L3
I
I
I
I
I
I
>,
I
I
Z
>
a>,
d
a,
ä
w
a,é v
ävi
dd
3
d
.
ÿ
,y
a+vo va
>x
.7wP;
EE
úp
d
w
Ä
c
Ei
r»
r.,
3
Uro
ar
°J,
x
v
`Ep,w ? bin E md
dA
Nx
d°
w
dc°dam
cAw + +°p,r:wo
w
oaPG
xu
a)
M.
"°0.0.1
'a`",a`°
ood :eá úa,w -1°oc
EFaoCa^aw)dN.4wów3áiweoa
éc'i. °Uc0a3ááC)Úxx
, cxiw
2a
wEEváb E
c°ü3G.
eroonon rMO,
33 v wE o Úwd'+cHá
ç
AC
ór
a3
'
óGv
ñ o.] út
g,aa eoaeönôeooönow
yz Ç o á
ç y y;
::.+' pvpq_
ú ^'xx p
vp,öááááááóaá,'áº'áóó.wc°c'aÿ±º'.óóoó.ááócvoo
avaxxmUc/vvvvWEAwEHoaE..UUE-P.FbcaG.aHMMWaaWa
..
w
Ç Ç G
w
61Gv
m
z
a'
w
G
ar
Nn
N M co N 00 0) d ln eo In In N ln In cO N N 0M co M eM c0 0) Q1 n tD m r+ n o 00 e n NN .- m 0 0
000...+NNNMMMeCDOOcoN000)0).y0000co.....WInON...',NMNec.00
..... NNNNNNNNNNNNMMM.-4OO..A.-+O.-4
MMMMMNNNNNNN
NeeeeCfO)O)O)CnQ)WNMMONCDtOCO0o0000..eeecococ0coe0'OCoOmlnO)
coMMMMMOMMMMMMV'eed'd'ed'eeInInlnlncOCOlncocOCOcoC)tOcoMMln00
00 0)
NN
NN
co
O)
e
O)0)NMe0NOQ0)dInc0lnlnNlnlncONNMeOMee00)OneOQ)..cncoNenNM
cOO..A.4.4NNNMMMec00000cON000)O-4000000lncnc0...-..-yre..Ne
NNNNNNNNNN
NNN.......+..N
OMMC9C+9NNNN
NMMM.á,.r0..
M CO
OC)MMC)MMMc)MMMeeeedeeed'cncn.neCDcocOcocococoMCocoMc)Mlnto..
CD
O
M
I
I
w
ar
>
d
.k.
U
ar
.a
ó''
y
i.
ÿ
v
-ti
bvw`
Úx
1
P.a
,.
m
3
0.1
.
áw
U
.>
V
d
ayivij
U
Gx
y.-.- áá >PG íiRiwír.wvimw
al Id3.ß
u)
ar
Z
D
m
7Z
U,
zz'
UakivMn
e°:
=
ï?
O
CeW
oaÿó
..
Mtn'
L.
xxa\ ÑxvEÑt
xw
A
"X
M1241.0
ca
aé
m
CO
V Z0
ñ
.ó
0
v°Ú Gla «ti v °:C..4-1-I.
a
'.:.
7 o
~.[,CwNwC)+Ogro>+
arU UtP4
w m N3
ti ti
c0W
c
, 2 ;FMOeO ` E
°':º 33
ww
N
a) ar
CV>
W
CJ
awi
°PávmálnVlw
'ß,acóówm....-3
G.k.
>-ti<
ÿG" Ñ p ar:
ÿ ú úíSií'I',Ñ iS k i4 XNdN X VjUUUm m++
M
c+
mcO
m
n0
01.
p+p+p .n eaaoco w.. Fc4 Ca.. cn Z:v =, G.Y-.
NNMNNNNM 2MNO,
a)
OpMoo..`a
w 3 3MMpMMMMO
A.tlv2ccoo..eów0óoór.H,-,eó*k# xxx33.#Pv*kPv333vP4..a.v]FG4
G.,
O
0,
ct>
cE
,
O)
N
In e0 N
d. In N M N W.. 0)
cONe000inOON.n..eD000cONMO.ne00NN00.nMie)0a0c0.4.0)..0)
00000000.!NNNM000000)d.M.oeÓMÓ
tipplr)Inlé)OÓOOÖCOcoc00fO)0)cococOc`cOcoOCOCOCOCOCOCO.ACONInMIneInN
Np)O)OOOOO000000MMf7MC)M"''MCi~MMMMMMcoMMIn..CnCoInO)
In
N
N
NN N
Ñ NN ÑN NN N
.+
w
o
.z
p. ó
ó
©John
F.
NO..00co001n
Or.
..CONO
N
co..lf)....MOOM....MMdln,..'.'Ç)r+NNNMMVN...
.-.NM
.
.
I
yl
N.. t0 07 O)
ON
W..NM000)O)O)OCOCD00MCMMerd'e0eoeoeOe0coc0eocONNN
N0000..............NNNNMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMddION`00e
.
.
1
I
I
I
1
.
1
1
I
1
.-1
..000)O)O)O)O)O)OOO)0)O)OO)O)O)0)WCAQ)O00).0)0)0)O)MMMMM
NO)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)OO)OO)O)O)O)OO)O)OO)O)O)O)C)a)O)C)0)C)C)
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODELS P-77,
20-16 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
P-777
The Capehart P-77 Record Changer a dual speed changer
designed to operate at either 33 1/3 r.p.m. or 78
r.p.m. This changer is capable of playing is
12 -inch, 10 -inch, or 7 -inch records automatically
at either speed. Furthermore, 12- and 10 -inch records can be played
intermixed
The information herein presented is published
in
an
effort
to
assist
the
serviceman
instrument for operation and in effecting any replacement
in properly preparing the
or adjustment which he may be called upon to perform
on the long play section of the subject model
record
changer.
Information or adjustments that are not covered herein
are the same as those required for the standard
version of this changer (Model P-71),
record changer, previously published. and are already covered in the maintenance manual for the Model P-71
Voltage Rating
SPECIFICATIONS
105
78
Speed
Type Pickup
Type Needle
MICROGROOVE
33 1/3
r.p.m.
10
12
,
2
to 125 volts at 60 c.p.s.
r.p.m. and 33 1/3 r.p.m.
MAXIMUM RECORD
CAPACITY
12 -inch records
10 -inch records
12 -inch and 10 -inch records intermixed
7 -inch records
Variable Reluctance
Osmium Point
STANDARD
78
r.p.m.
10
12
10
12
IMPORTANT
WHEN PUTTING TONE ARMS INTO POSITION ON THEIR MOUNTING
DO NOT PRESS IN ON Tat; RELEASE BUTTONS. THESE
BUTTONS
SHOULD ONLY BÉCOMPRESSED WHEN REMOVING THE
TONE
ARMS!
IF YOU PRESS THE BUTTONS WHEN TONE ARM IS
BEING PRESSED INTO POSITION ON ITS MOUNTING
YOU ARE LIKELY TO BEND THE BRONZE LOCKING CATCH!
PREPARING FOR OPERATION
CHECKING
After carefully uncrating the instrument, the following checks should be made before attempting to operate
the record changer:
1. Remove all packing material and pieces
of tape
from the changer compartment.
2. Remove the shipping bolts from the floating mounting
panel.
See that the changer and mounting panel float
freely upon the spring mountings.
4. Check the sliding drawer to see that there is no
binding in the roller and that the leads to the changer
do not interfere with the action of the drawer.
5. Check both the 78 r.p.m. and 33 1/3 r.p.m. tone arm
to see that the needle and pickup has not been damaged.
6. Run changer by hand through cycle to make sure
3.
action is free from binding.
7. See that the changer is level. If the changer
not
level, use the simple method, described herein, tois correct the condition.
8. Check the turntable speed at both 78 r.p.m. and
33 1/3 r.p.m. with a stroboscope record.
LEVELING
1. Remove the four acorn palnuts which hold
the
changer mounting board to the spring mounts.
2. Lift the changer up from the front. It may or may
not be necessary to remove the changer; however, if
it is, be sure to remove the electrical connections from
the underside before removing the changer.
3. Place a small washer, which can be easily made of
soft cardboard (such as a blotter), on the spring mounts
on the side which is the lowest. One or more of these
washers may be used, depending on the amount the
changer was off -level.
©John
F.
Rider
4. Set the changer back on the spring mounts,
replace the four acorn palnuts. In this operation, and
be
sure that the wires do not become fouled by either the
changer or the slide mechanism.
DESCRIPTION OF SPEED CHANGING ACTION
In order to describe the action of the mechanical
motor speed changing action, consider the changer in
position for playing standard 78 r.p m. records. The
action of changing the speed from 78 r.p.m. to 33 1/3
r.p.m. and placing the correct tone arm on the changer
is actually accomplished with one physical movement.
The Long Play Tone Arm is placed on the Tone
Support and pressed down until a definite "click"Arm
is
heard.
In this one operation, the following action takes
place:
1. The Tone Arm being pressed down on
Tone
Arm Support causes inter -connection of the the
contacts
from the pickup and the phono -output jack, thus
the
pickup is connected electrically.
2. The Tone Arm, in addition, when pressed
contacts one of the two switching rods. In this down
(switching from 78 r.p.m. to 33 1/3 r.p.m.), it will case
contact the rod closest to the control button. One
of these
two rods, depending on which speed the changer
is
operating at, will at all times be protruding through
the top of the main frame, near the tone arm support
bracket. The rod is pressed down, by the force exerted
by the tone arm being pressed, thus actuating a mechanical switch on the underside of the changer. The action
of the rods at orbe end transmit the rotary motion by
means of a drive shaft to,a switch arm which is connected to the other end of the drive shaft. This switch
arm (or lever) in turn acts to raise or lower
idler
pulley (in this case, raise) so that it contacts thetheproper
section of the motor drive shaft for the desired turntable speed.
For additional data: See Farnsworth Model P71,
Pages RCD.CH. 19-1 through RCD.CH. 19-10
www.americanradiohistory.com
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-17
MODELS
P-77, P-777
PARTS IDENTIFICATION
1524!
¡ti
450i344-
4500394
4500744
4501454
450085A
It should be stated here that .006 inch spacing is
required between the Crank and the main frame (in
other words, .006 inch "play" is needed in the tone
arm support bracket). It has been found that a small
shim, as shown in the sketch following, placed between the crank and the frame will assist in holding
this tolerance while the set down adjustment is being
made.
Ï-:
4500644
`4500664
1-9"
.006
INCH
STOCK
32
37177
4500674
"4501294
4500614
I.450!22A
4500îiO4
FIGURE
4501074
450023A
58698
55328
15196
fr-
__
650005A
450194A
w
4501454
FIGURE
/
í
/
2
4501154
,.
6500074
/4500944
11378
4 501154
_4501144
FIGURE
FIGURE 4
If the tone arm sets in too far on the record, rotate
the tone arm outward slightly while holding the Tone
Arm Crank. If the tone arm does not set in far enough,
rotate the tone arm inward slightly.
6. Tighten the Tone Arm Crank set screw.
7. Check the set down for a 7 -inch record. If the
adjustment is not correct, repeat steps 4 and 5.
8. Set the 7 -inch Set Down Lever to the 10- and 12 inch record position.
9. Check the tone arm set down for 10 -inch and 12inch records at 33 1/3 r.p.m.
10. If the set down is not correct, adjust by means
of the Tone Arm Adjusting Stud (located on the changer
base). This adjustment will have no effect on the 7 -inch
adjustment already made.
11. Set the 78 r.p.m. Tone Arm in place on the Tone
Arm Support.
12. Check the set down on 10- and 12 -inch records.
If the adjustment is not correct, the 78 r.p.m. tone arm
may have become slightly bent in handling, and it willbe
necessary to rebend the arm slightly to provide the
proper set down.
5.
1
4500934
THE PUSH RODS
The Push Rods, as shown in Figure 5, should be adjusted between two limits. When the rod is in the "up"
position, it should not extend any higher than one-half
the thickness of the support bracket plate. This is to
insure that the rod does not bind on the Tone Arm
Housing. The other limit is that the rod be high enough
that when the tone arm housing is pressed down, the
switching action will be completed.
3
ADJUSTMENTS
NOT HIGHER
TONE ARM SET DOWN
THAN THIS
When it is necessary to adjust the Tone Arm Set
Down so that after the changing cycle is completed,
the tone arm will set down properly in the lead-in
grooves of the record, the adjustment should be made
first for the 7 -inch position and at 33 1/3 r.p.m. speed.
The procedure to be followed is outlined below:
1. Place the 33 1/3 r.p.m. tone arm in place on the
tone arm support.
2. Set the 7 -inch Set Down Lever in position against
the Tone Arm Interceptor Lever.
3. Make sure that the changer is in the playing position.
4. Loosen the set screw on the Tone Arm Crank (located on the underside of the changer).
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ADJUST RODS
TIGHTEN LOCK NUTS
FIGURE
5
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-18 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
MODELS P-77. P-777
The rods are adjusted at the factory, and the lock
nuts are tightened and secured with Glyptal. If it is
necessary to readjust these rods, be sure to tighten the
lock nuts and coat them with Glyptal or some similar
securing agent.
NEEDLE PRESSURE
This adjustment is accurately made at the factory;
therefore, it should not be necessary to readjust the
needle pressure under normal operating conditions.
If, for some reason the factory adjustment no longer
holds true, the following procedure should be used in
readjusting.
The procedure for adjusting the 78 r.p.m. tone arm is
the same as for the 33 1/3 r.p.m. tone arm, with exception of the pressure specifications.
There are two adjustments to be made in setting the
tone arm for correct needle pressure. These are: The
Tone Arm Spring Adjustment (located on the outer
side of the tpne arm housing), which is adjustable with
a small screw driver, and the Tone Arm Sideplay Adjustment (located directly opposite the spring adjustment), which requires a No. 8 Allen Wrench for adjustment. Both adjustments utilize a No. 6 Allen Head
Locking Screw to maintain adjustment. The locking
screws are located on the underside of the tone arm
housing. See Figure 7.
Detailed Procedure:
1. Loosen the locking screws on both adjustments.
2. Loosen slightly the Tone Arm Sideplay Adjust-
TONE ARM
SPRING
ADJUSTMENT
TONE ARM
RELEASE
BUTTON
FIGURE
SIDE PLAY
ADJUSTMENT
6
LOCKING
SCREW
LOCKING
SCREW
ment.
3. With a Gram Scale (if adjustment is being made
for the 33 1/3 r.p.m. tone arm), test the up and down
pressure of the tone arm. See Figures 8 and 9. This
should be within the limits of 5 to 7 grams. If it is not,
adjust the Tone Arm Spring Adjustment screw to provide the correct pressure.
Note: With the 78 r.p.m. Tone Arm, the up and down
pressure should be P/8 ounce ± % ounce.
4. Tighten the locking screw for the spring adjustment.
5. Adjust the Tone Arm Sideplay screw to provide
approximately 1/32" horizontal play, measured at the
pickup.
CAUTION: Do not tighten this screw beyond this
limit, as added friction will be exerted which will
effect the needle pressure.
6. Tighten the locking screw for the sideplay adjustment.
Lift the micro -groove 33 1/3 r.p.m. tone arm, as shown
in Figure 8, approximately I/ inch and make a note of
the gram scale reading. Then lower the tone arm approximately % inch and again note the reading of the
scale, as in Figure 9. The two readings noted are the
limits of needle pressure. The actual needle pressure is
taken as the average of these two readings. The difference between the two readings is referred to as the
Vertical Friction. This should not be more than 2
grams.
WOW AND RUMBLE
The condition known as "wow" is in actuality the
result of a variation in speed within each revolution of
the turntable. The most common cause of wow ip rim
drive motors is found to be in the idler drive wheel,
either in the bearing or the rubber drive tire. Proper
lubrication and elimination of "gumming" will eliminate the bearing as a source of trouble. Some faults of
the drive tire which may cause wow are listed as fol-
lows:
Oil or grease on the tire-clean with a cloth saturated in carbon tetrachloride.
Dent formed or worn in the tire. This can be caused
by pressure of the motor pulley if the changer has
remained idle for a long period of time or by the
motor pulley if the turntable should become stalled.
The remedy in this case is replacement of the idler
drive wheel.
Another possible source of wow is in the bearing support washer and its relationship with the turntable hub.
,This washer is held in place by two screws, the same
©John
F.
FIGURE
7
FIGURE
8
FIGURE
9
two screws that are used to fasten the Turntable Hold
Down Levers. The washer must be concentric with the
turntable hub, otherwise, friction may result. Concentricity of the washer and turntable hub is accurately set
at the factory; however, it is possible that the washer
will become misaligned when the turntable is removed
for servicing purposes. Therefore, it is recommended
(to eliminate this source of "wow") when removing or
replacing the turntable to loosen only one of the hold
down lever screws at a time. In this way the support
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH.PAGE 20-19
MODELS P-77, P-777
washer will be at all times held fast by at least one
screw. Also it is recommended that care be exercised
when replacing the turntable so as not to damage the
cork washer and to check the turntable hold down levers
to make certain they are not binding on the turntable
hub. Both of these points are possible sources of "wow".
"Wow" can also be caused by a warped or dented
turntable or by a bent turntable spindle. Care in removing and handling the turntable will tend to eliminate
these sources.
"Wow" may also emanate from sources other than
the changer itself, for example, the records. Badly
warped records will cause a noticeable "wow".
Rumble is a form of amplified noise vibrations resulting from insufficient cushioning of the rotating parts.
This results from the fact that a motor will transmit
vibration to surroundng objects unless it is adequately
"floated". Even then a certain amount of vibration is
transmitted to the changer, and it becomes necessary to
spring mount the entire changer mounting board. It can
be readily seen that when something destroys this cushioning, such as in the condition where the changer
drawer is not pushed all the way in and the compartment door touches the drawer pull, or if the power or
phono cables to the changer become fouled and are
drawn taut, the vibrations will be amplified by the entire cabinet acting as a sounding board.
HORIZONTAL FRICTION
Hold the gram scale in the right hand with the scale
divisions facing up.
Press the control button to put the changer in the
playing position. As soon as the Tone Arm is set down,
turn the instrument off with the On-Off Control on the
receiver. This turns the changer off and leaves it in the
playing position.
Place a small piece of folded cardboard between the
tone arm tube and the tone arm housing to hold the
pickup above the turntable.
With the scale pointer bearing against the pickup
housing, move the tone arm in toward the spindle (by
moving the gram scale) and note the reading of the
gram scale in so doing. This reading should not be more
than 2 grams.
If the reading is more than 2 grams, it will usually
be found that the .006 inch spacing (mentioned in step
4 of Tone Arm Set Down Adjustment) of the tone arm
support bracket has not been maintained.
REPLACEMENT OF PICKUP UNITS
The Standard 78 r.p.m. Tone Arm
The entire pickup housing on the 78 r.p.m. tone arm
is easily removable as the housing plugs into a fixture
in the end of the tone arm tube. This facilitates removal
and replacement since there are no screws to be removed and solder connections to be made. If it is desired to replace just the pickup cartridge, this can be
done by first removing the small spring clip which holds
the cartridge in its housing. Next, unsolder the pickup
leads from the plug pins in the end of pickup housing.
When the new pickup cartridge is placed in the housing,
its leads must be soldered to the same plug pins as were
those of the old cartridge.
The Micro -Groove 33 1 /3 r.p.m. Tone Arm
The pickup housing on this tone arm is iot removable. Replacement of the pickup cartridge in the 33 1/3
r.p.m. tone arm is accomplished by removing the two
small screws from the underside of the pickup. NO
UNSOLDERING is necessary since slip-on connectors
are used for connecting the leads to fhe terminals on
the pickup cartridge.
REPLACEMENT OF THE MICROGROOVE
NEEDLE
The needle in this 33 1/3 r.p.m. pickup is replaceable.
In order to replace the needle, the unit is first removed
as described above. An ejecting tool is needed. This
can be a straightened paper clip or similar object. Holding the pickup unit in the left hand, with the needle
facing down, insert the ejecting tool in the hole in the
brass eyelet in the center of the unit, and gently push
the needle out. To insert a new needle, place the base
pin of the needle in the center hole of the pickup and
press down at the base of the needle. Do not press down
on the stylus itself or its shaft. The needle aligns itself
properly when pressed down.
CIRCUIT MODIFICATIONS
CAPEHART P-4 INSTRUMENTS
circuit change is to be incorporated in instruments
using the P-4 chassis, when used with the P-77 Long
Play Record Changer. The change increases the frequency range of these instruments, and provides increased gain in the Pre -Amplifier. The change follows:
The .01 mfd. condenser (Ref. No. 41), which is connected in series with a 68K resistor from ground to
the junction of the 220K and 100K resistors (Ref. Nos.
12 and 5 respectively), in the plate circuit of the 2nd
pre -amp stage, has been changed to a .005 mfd., 600V
condenser.
A
CAPEHART P-7 INSTRUMENTS
The Pre -Amplifier Circuit used with P-7 instruments
when incorporating the P-77 Long Play Record Changer
will be modified in production to provide increased
frequency range and audio gain. The change follows:
On the Pre -Amplifier Equalizer Can, the two .01 mfd.
condensers (one connected in series with a 33K resistor from the grid of the 2nd pre -amp stage to
ground, and the other connected in series with a 68K
resistor from the phono output cable to ground),
have been changed to .005 mfd., 200V condensers.
PARTS LIST
(Parts not listed here are same as those used in P-71)
Part No.
650005A
450023A
450074A
450142A
450134A
450129A
450132A
450107A
650007A
650008A
450114A
11378
450094A
450093A
©John
F.
Description
Dual Speed Motor and Mtg. Brkt.
Assy.
Idler Assembly
Idler Block Assy. (Inc. in 450023A)
Record Lift Brkt. Assy
Tone Arm Lift Lever, Brkt. & Pin
Assy.
Tone Arm Swing Lever Assy
Tone Arm Lever & Pin Assy
Tone Arm Support
Tone Arm Assy. (78 r.p.m.) less pickup
Tone Arm Assy. (33 1/3 r.p.m.) less
pickup
Pickup and Lead Assy. (33 1/3 r p.m.)..
Pickup & Housing Assy. (78 r.p.m.)....
Tone Arm Housing Cover Plate
(78 r.p.m.)
Tone Arm Housing Cover Plate
(33 1/3 r.p.m.)
Part No.
450122A
450066A
450145A
450085A
450064A
450039A
450061A
450067A
450060A
37177
450115A
450194A
15241
55328
58698
15169
Description
Tone Arm Crank & Pin Assy
Speed Change Shaft & Lever
Cycle Completing Switch Housing &
Lead Assy.
Switch Cover & Bearing
Speed Change Detent Spring
Connecting Link
Speed Change Shaft Yoke
Speed Change Push Rod
Push Rod Pin
Hex Nut
Tone Arm Pressure Adjusting Spring
7" Tone Arm Set Down Lever
Turntable
Tone Arm Adjusting Stud
Tone Arm Interceptor Lever
Automatic Stop Switch Assy.
450275A-1 Replacement Needle for Microgroove
Pickup
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-20 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
MODEL P-777
The Capehart Model P-777 Automatic Record Changer is a three -speed changer,
designed to play, automatically, all types of records currently being made,
12 -inch, 10 -inch or 7 -inch records can be played at 78 r.p.m., 45 rop,m, or
33-1/3 r.p.m. In addition, 12 -inch and 10 -inch records, designed for the
same speed, can be played intermixed.
The information presented herein is intended to supplement the Maintenance
Information already issued covering the Model P-77 two -speed record changer.
The combination of the two then presents up-to-date preliminary service information on the P-777 record changer. The P-777 is similar to the P-77 in all
respects except two; these are the motor assembly and tone arm swing lever
assembly. Later production of the P-77 included the revisions to the swing
lever assembly; therefore, these changers will differ from the P-777 only in
the motor assembly.
A complete parts and price list for the P-777 Record Changer is included
herewith.
TONE ARM SET DOWN ADJUSTMENT
(This information applies to P-777 and late production P-77 Changers.)
When it becomes necessary to adjust the Tone Arm Set Down so that, after the
changing cycle has been completed, the tone arm will set down properly in the
lead-in grooves of the record, the following procedure should be used.
7 -INCH
RECORDS
1.
Place the Microgroove Tone Arm in position on the tone arm support.
2.
Set the 7 -inch record Set Down Lever in position against the Tone Arm
Interceptor Lever.
3.
Place a 7 -inch record (either 33-1/3 r.p.m. or 45 r.p.m.) on the spindle
shelf and press the reject button.
4.
Observe whether or not the needle lands in the starting groove of the
record.
5.
If the needle does not land properly, make adjustment to the eccentric
stop nut located on the tone arm swing lever spring bracket.
justment is accessible from the underside of the changer.
6.
This ad-
a.
Loosen the small lock nut which secures the eccentric stop.
b.
If the needle lands too far in on the record, rotate the eccentric
stop so as to move the swing lever toward the axis of the eccentric
stop.
c.
If the needle lands off the edge of the record, rotate the eccentric
stop so as to move the swing lever away from the axis of the eccentric stop.
d.
Tighten the lock-nut and secure with Glyptol or a similar fixative.
Check the adjustment by observing the set down with a full stack of recordso
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-21
MODEL P-777
10 -INCH AND 12 -INCH RECORDS:
1.
Check the needle landing for 10 -inch records with both tone arms.
2.
If needle landing is not correct, adjust by means of the Tone Arm Adjusting
Stud (located on the changer base). This adjustment has no affect on the
7 -inch record adjustment already made.
3.
Check the needle landing for 12 -inch records with both tone arms. This,
normally, will not require re -adjustment, if the 10 -inch adjustment has
been properly made.
Check the adjustment by observing the set down with a full stack of intermixed 10 and 12 -inch records.
POSSIBLE SERVICE PROBT.F1(S
TONE ARM SET DOVYN
L.
1.
If the Microgroove Tone Arm cannot be adjusted for proper set down on a
record, there are two possible causes, as follows:
7 -inch
a.
The tone arm crank has slipped on the tone arm support bracket tube.
To be certain of this possibility, place the standard tone arm on
the support bracket and observe the needle lending. If the standard
tone arm also cannot be adjusted for proper set down, then adjustment
should be made by loosening the set screw on the Tone Arm Crank. There
is a .006 -inch spacing required between the tone arm crank and the
main frame; therefore, a .006 -inch shim should be used to maintain
this spacing while adjustment is being made. After loosening the set
screw, hold the crank firmly with one hand and with the other rotate
the tone arm in the direction necessary for proper set down. Tighten
the set screw on the tone arm crank. A finer adjustment can now be
made by the procedure given in Step 5 under "7 -inch Records."
b.
The second possible cause is that the Microgroove Tone Arm has become
misshapened. This possibility can either be eliminated or proven as
in Step 2 by observing the needle landing of the standard tone arm.
If the standard tone arm does set down properly and the Microgroove
does not, then it is proven that the tone arm crank is in its proper
position. Therefore, the Microgroove Tone Arm is not shaped correctly.
The remedy is to reshape the Microgroove tone arm by bending the tube
slightly until it does set down properly.
If the Microgroove Tone Arm can be adjusted properly for 7 -inch recoras,
no difficulty will be experienced in adjusting this tone arm for 10 -inch
However, if'the standard tone arm cannot be made to
and 12 -inch records.
set down properly (while the Microgroove arm does set down properly) it
can be assumed that the standard tone arm has become misshapened. The remedy
in this case is to reshape the standard j.:.:ne arm to provide proper set down.
BENT TONE ARMS
2.
The possibility of P-777 tone arms (partïcularly the Microgroove arm) becoming
bent in shipment (resulting in improper set down when the instruments are unpacked and checked) is quite unlikely, `"or the tone arms are carefully packed
in a separate carton.
It is possible that there is some slight variation in the relative shapes of
the tone arms.
It is important that the persons who unpack and check the
instruments do not intermix the tone arms from various instruments at the time
of unpacking. To have the changer operate with the least amount of prior ad-
justment, the tone arms which are packed with each particular instrument should
The record changer in each instrument is
be used with that instrument only.
adjusted (at the factory) using the tone arms that are shipped with it.
©John. F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-22 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
MODEL P-777
BROKEN TONE ARM LOCK SPRINGS
The main cause of breakage of this lock -on spring results from improper
methods of placing and removing the tone arms. The small release button on
the tone arm housing is to be used only when removing the tone arm.
If this
button is depressed when placing the tone arm on the support bracket, the
shaft of the button will exert pressure on the top of the lock-on spring, thus
bending it as the tone arm is pressed down.
It is probable then that when the
tone arm is placed on the support again, the spring will not line-up with the
hole in the cover plate; therefore, the spring is bent down and broken. Damage
to the spring can also result from removal of the tone arm without pressing the
release button.
Do not press the release button when placing the tcne arm on the
IMPORTANT:
changer. Do press the release button when removing the tone arm.
MISALIGNED) MOTOR BEARINGS
It is possible that the floating bearings in the motor may become misaligned
in shipment, resulting in motor noise. This is possible if the changer or
instrument is subjected to excessively rough handling in shipment. The bearings can be easily re -aligned by tapping the motor (with the handle of a
screwdriver or light tack harmer) while the motor is running.
P-777 PARTS
Ref.
Part
No.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
ill
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
©John
F.
07651
09353
11378
11495
13672
13674
13816
13825
15195
15196
25112
25182
36857
36882
37155
37177-2
37203
37332
37333
37334
37335
37338
37339
37344
37390
37511
37512
37683
Description
.
Record Lift Lever Assembly. ,
,
.
.
,
.
Reject Button and Plunger Assembly. .
,
,
.
.
,
Pickup & Housing Assembly (78 r.p.m.) . ,
.
,
.
Inner Spindle Assembly. . , 0
0
0
0
0
0
Main Cam Assembly
.
,
,
o
Upper Spindle Assembly,
.
Ball Bearing Retainer (for turntable) . . .
,
Tone Switch & Brkt. Assembly (Complete)
Compression Lever Assembly,
,
,
,
,
,
0
,
,
Automatic Stop Switch Assembly. , .
.
.
.
.
,
.
o
Capacitor, .01 mid., 200 volt . o
,
.
Capacitor, .1 mid., 200 volt. . , , , , . , .
.
.
Hex Nut 1/4-28 (for cam mtg.) . , o
,
,
H. P. Cotter (1/8" shaft)
.
.
.
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
Bolt
Spade
(for tone arm lift lever spring) . .
Hex Nut 5-40 (for speed change shaft) ,
0
Spring slasher
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
Special Flat Washer #6 (mtg. reject lever assy.). .
"E" Washer (for tone arm adj. stud) . ,
,
,
.
Hex Head Screw #10-32x7/8" (to mount outer spindle)
Flat Washer #4 (for mtg. levers on main cam). . , .
Shim Washer (to mount main cam) . . . . ,
,
.
.
.
Flat Washer (to mount main cam) . , , , , ,
Special Hex Head Nut #3-48 (Spindle height adj.).
"E" Masher (small, for upper spindle) , , , .
Hex Head Screw #10-3 2x5/8" (on tone arm lift lever)
"E" Washer (large, for inner spindle) . , , ,
0
Set Screw (used in tone arm assy . ) . .
,
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
0
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
,
0
,
0
.
,
,
,
.
,
.
e
,
0
.
.
o
.
,
,
,
,
,
0
0
0
0
0
,
,
o
0
,
,
,
0
.
,
0
,
0
,
,
.
o
.
0
,
,
a
.
0
,
G
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
,
,
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-23
MODEL P-777
30
31
32
33
34
35
38
39
4o
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
6p
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
©John
F.
37688
54307
55193
55249
55328
55329
55332
55333
55335
55336
55345
55395
55397
55420
55446
57248
57262
58692
58693
58697
58698
58701
58702
58706
58707
58708
58709
58716
58789
58852
58853
58854
58863
59472
59486
60597
62152
62173
64324
64429
64430
64431
64433
64434
64452
64464
'64465
64466
64467
64474
71238
71244
77184
77246
80030
80150
80327
"E" Washer (used in 450039A Assy,), , , , , , , ,
o
,,
,
Motor Plug Insulator, , ,
Ball Bearing 1/8" Dia, (tone arm sup, bear, 10 used)
Brass Collar (for speed change shaft) ,
,
.
,
Tone Arm Set Down Adjustment Stud ,
Hinge Pin (for tone arm interceptor lever) o e eo
Hinge Pin (for compression lever) ,
, o , .
Hinge Pin (for record lift lever) ,
Cam -pacer (inside Main Cam Hub). o ,
Cam Bolt (for mounting Main Cam), 0 , , , , . , ,
Sleeve Support Washer (for record spindle).
Hinge Pin (for manual reject link), ,
,o
, o , , , , o , o , o , ,
Trip Adjusting Screw,
.
o
,
,
Manual Reject' Plunger Rod ,
Outer Spindle
,
,
Main Cam Switch (on Main Gam) , , . , 0 0 , . , ,
Surfa -Sonic Control Knob,
,
,
,
,
,
Interceptor Reset Lever , , ,
, ,
, . , , , ,
Switch & Reject Lever , e , , , , , , , . . , , .
Tone Arm Adjustment Lever ,
,
.
Tone Arm Interceptor Lever.
,
,
,
Turntable Holcldovrn Brkt, (2 used)
Bearing Support Washer (turntable bearing),
,
Starting Lever (on Main Cam).
,
o
,
o
,
,
,
Reject Lever (on Main Cam), , , , , ,
,
,
,
,
,
Tone Arm Holdout Lever (on Main Cam), , , , , , 0 o
Holdout Locking Lever (on Main Cam)
,
,
,
,
0
Bearing Race asher (for turntable),
,
,
,
.
Compression Spring (spindle height adj,), ,
Manual Reject Link,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Starting Lever Reset Lever,
,
,
,
'trip Adjustment-Spring (on Starting Lever).
,
Pickup Retainer Spring (7'8 r,p,m,),
,
(78
Pickup
,
, , , , , , , ,
[Housing
Reject Button
,
,
,
,
,
o
, , , ,
Cork Bearing Damper (for turntable) 0 , , , 0 0 ,
Rubber Sleeve (for record spindle), , , , , , , ,
Rubber Motor Mtg. Grommet ,
,
,
,
,
, , , 0 0
Spring (on compression lever) , .
,
,
,
Reset Spring (for interceptor reset lever), , , ,
Reject Spring (for switch & reject lever) ,
Tone Arm Lift Lever Spring. ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Tone Arm Adj, Stud Spring
,
,
Tone Arm Interceptor Lever Spring , , , . e 0 0 0
Cam Switch Spring (on Main Cam) . , , ,
,
,
,
Switch Release Spring (on switch & reject lever), o
Tone Switch Coupling Link . 0 , , 0 0 0 0 , 0 0 0
Tone Arm Holdout Lever Spring (on Main Cam) , , ,
Trip Spring (on reject lever on main cam) , , , ,
Reject Button Spring.
,
,
,
,
,
, ,
Magnetic Pickup (78 r.p.m. less housing),
,
,
Magnetic Pickup (Microgroove) , , ,
,
,
,
Resistor 2,2K 1/2 watt,
0
oft oe 0 . , , , , ,
Resistor 15K 1/2 watt ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Phono Output Jack . , ,
.
,
,
,
,
,
Motor Plug (4 -prong; male), . ,
Pickup Socket (78 r,p,m,; 2 -prong molded) 0
0
,
,
,
,
.
o
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
e
.
o
e
,
.
,
o
o
o
o
,
,
,
,
,
.
.
o
,oo0
,
,
,
,
,
,
0
,
.0
o
,
,
.
a
.
0
,
,
,
0
,
.
,
,
.
.
,
.
<
,
,
u
e
o
<
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
<
,
.
.
.
,
,
<
,
<
,
<
,
,
,
'rJ
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
a
,
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
o
,
.
o
,
,
,
,
,
,
o
,
0
r,p,m,),
,
,
,
,
o
,
0
,
.
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
.
0
o
o
,
,
,
,
,
o
,
o
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
o
,
,
o
,
,
.
o
.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
0
,
,
0
o
o
0
0
0
RCD. CH. PAGE
riODELS P-777
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
1114
115
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
734
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
141.
145
146
©John
F.
20-24 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
90243
2006-011
2015-001
2015-002
2019-009
2041-012
22161-105
4500041
4500091
4500131
450020A
450023A
4500244
45oo58A
450060A
450o61A
4500621
450063A
4500641
4500654
450066A
45oo67A
45oo74A
4500764
4500894
450093A
450094A
4500981
450107E
4501121
450114A
450115E
4501171
450118A
450121A
4501231
450124B
4501271
450128B
450132B
450134A
4501421
4501453
4501931
4501941
45022oA
450241A-G1
4502541
4502554
4502561
4502591
45o275A-1
4502981
6500071
650008A
6500741
6500751
Surfa-Sonic.Control Switch. 0 .
0
0
.
Fil. H.M.S. M2 -56x7/16" (to mount cam switch) . .
Std, Hex Nut #2=56 (to mount cam switch), 0 . . 0
Std. Hex Nut #3-48 (lock nut spindle height adj.)
o
.
.
.
.
o
o
.
0
00
o
0
r
Lockvrasher hakeproof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allen Set Screw (for tone arm sideplay adj.)0 0 . o o
Phillips T.H.MOS. #4-40x1/4" (to mt. 7" setdoffn lever)
Shaft Pin 0 o 0 0 0 0
Idler Arm Assembly. 0
Idler ï"fliecl Assembly.
0000000 000000
0
0
0
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Arm Sf,ring0
0
Idler Assembly (including #4500091 & #4500131).
Motor Mtg. Spacer Nut
0000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
. . .
0
Idl.er
0
0
0
0
0
0
0. 0.
0.
0
0
.
0
0
.
0
0
0
0
0
o
00
Speed Change Shaft Mtg.
. . o
Push Rod Pin. . 0 0 0 0. 0 0 o 0 o o o 0 0 0 0 .
Speed Change Shaft Yoke 0 0
0
0
0
0
0
. o 0
Speed Change Shaft Mtg. Brkt0
0.
0
. o
Spacer Plate (for mtg. brkt. #450062A)0. 0 0.
Speed Change Detent Spring.
0
0
00 0
Backup Plate (for detent spring)0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
0
Speed Change Shaft Lever. o
0
0
Speed Change Push Rod
0.. 0.
00
Idler Block Assembly. 0 0 0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Con,.ecting Link Assembly. 0
0
0
0
0. 00 0 0 0
Hinge Pin Pivot (for needle pressure adj.).
0
o
o
O
Cover Plate (for microgroove tone arm). 0
00 00 o
Cover Plate (for standard tone arm) 0 00 0 0 0 o o .
Tone Arm Release Button 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Tone Arm Support Assembly 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o
Tone Crank & Pin Assembly 0 0 0..
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Pickup & Lead Assembly (microgroove). 0 0 0 0
Tone Arm Pressure Adjusting Spring0 0
0
0
0
0
0
Guide Pin (on tone arm support) 0
0
0
0
0
0
. o .
Tone Arm Release Button Spring. 0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Swing Lever Mtg. Stud 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Tone Arm Support Bearing Washer 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .
Tone Arm Lift Rod 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
Washer. 0 0
0.0 0 0 0 0 0
0
.
0
0
0
0
0
Tone Arm Swing Lever. .. 0.
0.
0
0
0
0
o
O,
Tone Arm Lever & Pin Assembly 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
.
Tone Arm Lift Lever Brkt0 & Pin Assembly. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Record Lift Brkt0 Assembly. 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
0
o
Cycle Completing Switch Assembly. 0 0 0 0 0 0. 0 0 0
Spacer (for 7't Setdown Lever) 0
0
0
.
.
0
0
o
o
7" Set Down Lever 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
. o o
Compresion Ring. 0 0 0. 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00
Tone Arm Brake Assyq (on tone arm lift lever) . o 00
Eccentric Stop (on #450256A). 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Spring (used with #4502561) 0.
0
0
0
0
Spring Brkt0 Assy. (used with #450128B) 0 0 0 0
00
Retaining Ring (used on tone arm release button). 00
Replacement Needle for Microgroove Pickup . . o o 00
0
0
0
0
0
Pulley Drive Belt 0 0 0 0
00
Tone Arm Assy. (78 r.p.m. less pickup). 0 0 00 . o
Tone Arm Assy. (Microgroove less pickup)0
0
0
Turntable Assembly.
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
o
o
.
0
Motor Assembly. 0 0 0.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
C
000
000
0
o
c
o
0
0
0
.
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
000
0
0
0
0
C
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.
0
0
0
o
O
C
0
0
.
O
o
.
O
0
000
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
000
0
o
.
0
0
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
0
0
0
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-25
-E2
MODEL 41-E2
PRELIMINARY MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
This information is published for the purpose of aiding the serviceman
in properly setting the instrument up for operation and in effecting
replacements or adjustments which he may be called upon to perform on those
sections of the changer which have to do with its dual speed feature.
Information or adjustments which are not covered herein are the same as
those required for the standard version of this changer, and are already
covered in the maintenance manual for the Capehart Model 41-E Record Changer,
previously published.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Consumption at 117 volts
Turntable Motor .......
Cycling Motor ....
Voltage Rating
Turntable Speed
Type Pickup
Type Needle ..
22 Watts
91 Watts
105 to 125 volts at 60 cycles
78 r.p.m. & 33 1/3 r.p.m.
.
Variable Reluctance
Osmium Point
MAXIMUM RECORD CAPACITY
Microgroove 33 1/3 r.p.m.
16
16
10 inch or 12 inch records
10 inch or 12 inch records
manual
(intermixed)
7 inch records ...
Standard 78 r.p.m.
16
16
manual
BETTING UP FOR OPERATION
After carefully uncrating the instrument, the following checks should be
made on the record changer prior to its operation;
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove all packing material and pieces of tape from
the changer compartment.
Remove the shipping bolts which hold the changer base plate down during shipment.
See that the changer floats freely upon the spring
mountings.
Check both the 78 r.p.m. and 33 1/3 r.p.m. tone arms to
see that the needle and pickup have not been damaged.
Check the turntable speed at both 78 r.p.m. and 33 1/3
r.p.m. with a stroboscope record.
Refer to the section "41-E2 & 41E Check List".
ADJUSTMENTS
TONE ARM SET DOWN ADJUSTMENT
Check the tone arm height. The pickup needle should barely clear the
turntable cover' when there is no record on the turntable. The height of the
tone arm can be adjusted by means of a small screw, located on the underside
of the tone arm housing. The setting of this screw should be secured with
Glyptal after the adjustment is made. The adjustment is the same for both
the standard and microgroove tone arms and the check should be made with both
arms.
©John
F.
Rider
For additional data: See Farnsworth Model 41-E,
Pages RCD.CH. 18-25 through RCD.CH. 18-46
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
mcnz tra -E2
20-26 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
10 -INCH SET DOWN ADJUSTMENT
Allow the changer to deliver a 10" record to the turntable, and let
the tone arm move over the record. Just as the changer completes its
cycle and the tone arm sets down on the record, stop the changer by turning the "Offeen" switch on the changer to the "Cif" position. Lift the
pickup end of the tone arm up and move the tone arm away from the spindle;
a definite "stop point" will be noticed in so doing.
Beyond this "stop
point", a spring tension will tend to return the tone arm to the
set down
position.
Hold the tone arm against this "stop point", and turn the 10 inch indexing screw in the direction indicated depending on the direction
of the set down adjustment needed.
The changer should be allowed to
complete at least one more cycle w nth a 10 -inch record to check the adjustment. The adjustment should be checked with both standara and microgroove
records using the correct tone arm for. each,
12 -INCH 5ht DOWN ADJUSTMENT
The adjustment procedure is the same as that described for the 10 -inch
adjustment with the exception that a 12 -inch record is used, and the 12 -inch
ïrd®cing exewisrotated for adjustment. The adjustment should be checked
as
before with both standard and microgroove records and tone arms.
ADJUSTMENTS OF THE SULK
r
SELECTOR PINS
The selector pins or rods, should be adjusted so that there is always
at least .015 inch clearance between the top of the pin, when it is in the
up position, and the underside of the tone arm housing. This is to ensure
that the pin does not bind on the Tone Arm Housing as it moves while playing
If both pins are too high when in the up position, the pins can
a record,
be lowered by placing the paper spacer (Part No. 60674), between the speed
switch mounting bracket and the bearing casting. If only one of the pins is
too high, this means that the cam shaft has slipped in the cam. The shaft
is held in place by two allen head set screws. To adjust, the screws should
be loosened and the shaft rotated until the selector pin is at the right height.
If the motor speed is set for 78 r.p.m., the selector pin on the right should
be in the up position. Tighten the set screws,and switch to the other speed.
Cheek the clearance between the tone arm housing and the other selector pin.
NEEDLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
The needle pressure of both the standard and microgroove tone arms is
accurately set at the factory prior to shipment of the instrument; however,
if it should become necessary to readjust this setting on either of the
two
tone arms, the following procedure is offered,
Procedure for adjustment of the standard tone arm is the same as that for
the microgroove tone arm, with exception of the pressure specifications.
The adjustment screw is located on the underside of the tone arm housing
and is accessible from the rear of the tone arm housing when the tone arm is
in place on the changer. A small screw driver is used for adjusting this screw
which is arranged so that rotation in a clockwise direction will increase
needle pressure and rotation in a counter-clockwise direction will decrease it,
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-27
MODEL 41-E2
NEEDLE PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
3.
-
(cont.)
Check the tone arm side playa The tone arm should have approx.
1/32" horizontal play, measured at the pickup. If the amount
of play does not correspond with this figure, adjustment can be
effected by means of the two Allen Head set screws, which form
the pivot point for the tone arm tube. The screws are secured
with locking nuts,which should be tightened after the side play
adjustment is made. This adjustment should be checked for both
tone arms.
Using a Gram Scale for the Microgroove tone arm, and an Ounce
Scale for the standard tone arm, check the up and down pressure
of the tone arm in the following manner:
Lift the tone arm up with the scale approx. 1/2 inch and make a
note of the reading. Then lower the tone arm approx. 1/2 inch,
The two readings noted are
and again note the scale readings.
the limits of the needle pressure. The actual needle pressure is
taken as the average of these two readings. In the case of the
microgroove tone arm, the actual needle pressure should be within
the limits of 5 to 7 grams. For the standard tone arm, the
specifications are 1 1/8 oz. 1 1/8 oz.
It the needle pressure does nót come within the specified limits,
adjustment should be made on the needle pressure adjusting screws
and the pressure re -checked as described in Step 2.
ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONNECTING ROD
The connecting rod should be adjusted so that positive switching is
achieved at the Idler Block Assembly. There should be a small amount of
play in the rod action. The rod can be shortened or elongated in the following manner:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the hair pin cotter which fastens the motor end of
the connecting rod to the switching link at the idler block.
Loosen the locking nut on the motor end.
Rotate the motor end of the connecting rod in or out, depending on whether the rod needs to be shortened or lengthened.
Replace the hair pin cotter, and tighten the locking nut.
MODIFICATIONS I"CORPORATED IN THE 41-E2 RECORD CHANCR
Certain changes have been made to various parts of this changer, along
with the added features of two speed operation. These modifications, listed
herein, were incorporated to provide more accurate adjustment to accommodate
id crogroove records.
TRIP SLIDE ASSEMBLY (PART NO. 09387)
The trip slide assembly has been revised (previous part no. 09176), to
provide a more convenient method of trip friction adjustment and to provide
a means of adjusting the height of the assembly with respect to the baseplate.
A new trip lever bushing is incorporated with a bearing adjusting screw and
locking nut. To raise or lower the trip slide assembly, the nut is first
loosened and the screw is rotated to provide the correct height. The nut is
then tightened to secure the bearing adjustment.
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-28 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
MODEL 41
TRIP SLIDE ASSEMBLY
(
PART NO. 09387) Cont.
Adjustment of the trip friction is provideky rotating the small adjusting screw (Part No. 36278), located in the center of the flat metal trip
friction spring (Part No. 51166). Rotating the adjusting screw in a
clockwise direction will cause the spring to exert more pressure on the
trip pivot pin (Part No. 55465), thus increasing the friction between the
trip slide assembly and the automatic stop trip lever.
TURNTABLE HEICHT ADJUSTMENT
The 41E-2 incorporates an adjustable turntable bearing which enables
the height of the turntable to be varied with respect to the baseplate.
The new parts added to the changer for this purpose are:
55462 37690 37691 -
TURNTABLE ADJUSTING PLATE
ADJUSTING SCREW
ADJUSTING NUT
To raise the turntable, the adjusting screw is rotated clockwise,
after first loosening the adjusting or locking nut. To lower the turntable, the screw is rotated in the reverse direction. The correct height
for the turntable is the same height(4. 1/64"), as the milled surface on
which is mounted the tone arm support-housing.
MAIN CAM SHAFT (PART NO. 650013A)
The main cam shaft has been made in two sections, and a coupling has
been provided between the reduction gear box section and the main cam
section. The main cam section of the shaft can thus be de -coupled from the
motor and reduction gears. The main cam shaft section is fastened in the
coupling by means of á small set screw. The set screw should always be
tightened on the flat side of the main cam shaft only. This prevents the shaft
from slipping within the coupling.
This shaft de -coupling arrangement enables the serviceman to run the
changer through cycle by hand, thus facilitating the checking and adjusting of the -cycling mechanism.
41E-2 & 41E CHECK LIST
It is important to use a step by step method when checking either the
:apehart Model 41-E2 or Model 41E Record Changers. If this method is not
followed, it is possible to make one adjustment against the other, which will
result in improper operation. This could be the cause for erratic conditions.
Therefore, the following list should always be followed in order, referring
to the Maintenance Manual on the 41E Record Changer for adjustments, which
are not included herein.
TURNTABLE
1.
©John
F.
(a).
Check height of turntable with respect to the base plate.
This is accomplished by placing a straight edge ruler long
enough to reach the distance, taking in the diameter of
the turntable, to a point along side the tone arm collar
assembly. Observation will reveal the tone arm collar is
mounted on a milled surface.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-29
MODEL )0-E2
41E-2 & 41E CHECK LIST (Cont.)
TURNTABLE
1.
(a)
Cont.)
This milled surface and the ones under the hook post and buckhorn
are all milled at the same time and are the same height above the
base plate. We call these points bosses and are the points at
which we start our measurements. The top of the turntable should
be level with this boss. A tolerance of 1/64" high or low would be
allowable. For 41-:E2. refer to "TURNTABLE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT".
(b). To remove turntable, remove set screw in turntable shaft housing.
RECORD TRAY
2.(a).Check centering or record lowering tray with respect to turntable.
This can be accomplished by placing the record selector lever in
the "one side" position, run the record changer through a cycle
to a point where the record lowering tray pauses for the second
time. Stop the changer by the "on -off" switch at this point. Note
the distance between the lowering tray and turntable. This distance
must be equal on either side of turntable. Also note the level of
the tray at this time. The front points of the 10" felt in the
record tray should be level with the turntable cover,
(b). Check for binding between record tray gears. To do this, it will be
necessary to disengage the lever connecting the shaft with the
quadrant section of the record tray gear, from the record tray slide
arm assembly by removing the eccentric shoulder screw. Move tray
up and down by hand.
(c). Check 10" rubber bumpers.
(d). Check 10" rubber guard for smooth operation.
(e). Clean and remove rough spots on polished edges and surfaces.
BUCKHORN
5.(A). Check distance from the center of magazine pivot pin mounted
in the buckhorn section of the magazine support, to the milled
section of the base plate, on which is mounted the record separator
hook post. This distance should be 7 9/16", plus or minus 1/16".
Also check the distance between buckhorn pivot arms, which should
be 13 7/16".
MA^vAZINE
4.(a). Check distance between magazine pivot arms. This should be 13 1/4".
(h'. Check position of the upper record support on changers incorporating
the single knife. The lower points of this support should be even
and centered. Changers incorporating the double knife;check the
roller and position of assembly.
(c).
Check magazine position with respect to lowering tray. Channel
grooves will be noted at the base end of the record lowering
tray. These were cut for the purpose of allowing the two lowest
points of the record magazine to pass when traveling through the
change cycle to deliver a record; therefore, it is necessary that
these two points are centered within these channels. It will also
be noted there are two holes at the back end of these tray channels
to allow the level points of the record support bracket to protrude
through the record lowering tray. These points should be adjusted
to an equal distance with respect to the outside edge of the holes.
W.
Clean and remove-rough spots on all polished surfaces and edges.
Check & oil rollers -- Rollers should roll quietly.
.
Check record reverse arm and guide assembly. Should be parrallel
(f).
and centered with a 12" record in magazine when changer is stopped
at that portion of the cycle Where the reverse arm has come in
contact with the magazine and rubber bumper.
o John F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-30 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
MODEL
)4.1-E2
(g).
(h).
(i).
(j).
(k).
(1).
Check reverse arm fork as it engages the crank pin assembly.
Should be centered and engaged so that the jaws extend
around the
crank pin about 1/8". At this point, check the return position
of
the magazine with the stop screw located at center and
back of the
buckhorn support. This would be the adjustment that would
determine
the clearance of the crank pin. See the 41E manual
for adjustments
of the travel of the crank pin assembly.
Check linkage --magazine should return against stop snugly.
Check record selector knife.
Check record selector knife as it engages the record separator
hook.
Check felts on back side of lower record support casting.
If loose,
can be the cause of late delivery of records which would
cause chipping due to sharp contact with record lowering tray tongue.
Check record "U" Guide assembly.
TONE ARM
(a). Check Tone Arm Height.
5.
the 4lE
Refer to"Tone Arm Set Down Adjustment", or
Check the distance of Travel of the tone arm in toward the turntable spindle on a 12" record.
(c).
Check -pickup for tracking in record grooves.
(d).
Check 10" and 12" landing position.
(e).
Check feed -in tension spring.
TRIP SLIDE ASSEMBLY
(b).
6.
(a).
Height above base plate should be high enough at the rubber
roller end to contact the trip clip on under side of turntable. Refer to "Trip Slide Assembly", or to the 41E Manual.
(b). Slide action should work freely and oil should never be used.
Cc). Setting of stop should be
set so that it is impossible for
the trip clip on turntable to lock with trip slide assembly.
(d). Check rubber roller.
PLAY CONTROL
.
(a).
Check play control.
BELOW CHASSIS
GEAR REDUCTION BOX
©
(a).
Check adjustment of second reduction gear train. Should be
no slack or bobbing of this assembly. This can be determined
by under noise of gears.
(b).
Check to see that oil has been put in gear box. A maximum
of 1 oz. of heavy oil should be put in gear box. The gear
should dip into this oil level.
(c).
Check for oil leaks.
Check reverse arm mechanism.
(d).
Check position of reverse segment with respect to stops and
locking assembly.
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH RCD. CH. PAGE 20-31
MODEL 4.1-E2
41E-2 & 41E
CHECK LIST (Cont.)
TONE ARM MECHANISM
9.
(a).
Check horizontal and vertical position of tone arm crank assembly
also relation to tone arm swing lever.
(b).
Check position of tone arm brake spring collar.
(c).
Check action of tone arm stop bracket assembly.
(d).
Check position of tone arm, lift and swing cam.
(d).
Check tone arm trip pin.
MERCURY SWITCH OPERATION
10.
(a).
Check reset lever and timing with main cam.
(b).
Check contact of reset lever & mercury dog.
Check clearance between top of mercury dog and lever extending
down through base plate from trip slide arm assembly.
MAIN CAM SHAFT
(See "Main Cam Shaft"
(c).
11. (a).
(b).
Check action of slide arms of main cam.
(c).
Check record selector lever action.
(d).
Check cam track switches.
(e).
Check lubrication.
ADDITIONAL CHECK LIST FOR 41-E2 ONLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
e
Check for underplay with record magazine tilted up.
Check Idler Wheel.
Check Idler Mounting Assembly
.....
Part No. 14108.
Check connection link Assembly
09382.
"
"
Adjust link to divide travel of
33 1/3 r.p.m. to 78 r.p.m.
Check Support Bracket, cam & hub assembly
"
"
09385.
Adjust for equal throw of shift
pins unde' tone arm key.
Check vertical tone arm pressure
Adjust screw in cover plate assembly
"
"
09381.
Check for clearance between tone arm hinge
bracket No. 57271, and tone arm housing.
Check clearance on friction cork above tone arm
crank - should be .005.
Check for dirt in tone arm bearing.
Check clearance of shift pins against tone arm
hinge bracket on 33 1/3 and 78 r.p.m. arms.
Check needle --should protrude beyond guard 1/32".
Check needle height -Should be adjusted to clear turntable with
no record.
Check trip slide assembly --not to exceed 7 grams.
Check motor fan blades --should run true.
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-32 CAPEHART-FARNSWORTH
MODEL 41-E2
PARTS LIST
Following is a list of new parts and parts that have been revised.
Parts that are not listed here are the same as those used in the standard
version of this changer, the 41E.
44067
Two Speed Turntable Motor
15246
New Turntable
14100
Tone Arm Assembly (33 1/3 r.p.m.)
14101
Tone Arm Assembly
78 r.p.m.)
11378
Pickup & Housing Assembly
78 r.p.m.)
05160
Pickup & Lead Assembly
33 1/3 r.p.m.)
450148A
Gear Shaft and Hub Assy,
2003-161 003 #6/32 x 7/16" F.H.M.S.
2085-215 071 #6/32 x 5/8" 0.H.M.S.
14108 ...... Idler Mtg, Assy.
55456 ...... Selector Pin
37688 ......
"E" Washer
64492 ...... Selector Spring
60674
Paper Spacer
36926
Washer
62199
Rubber Tone Arm Rest
2003-109-003 #4/40 x 3/8 F.H.M.S.
04135
Tone Arm Support Housing
07721
Speed Switch Support Bracket Assy.
09382
Connecting Rod Ass'y.
05163
Connecting Rod Motor End Assy.
55459
Connecting Rod (Cam End)
55461
Connecting Rod Adjusting Sleeve
54329
Contact Washer
37689
Washer
80528 ..0009 3 pr. Plug.
15245 .... . Speed Switch Cam & Hug Assy.
57274
Tone Arm End
Pivot Screw #8/32 x 3/8"
37683 051
2016-005 003 #8/32 Hex Nut
2006-053 051 3/48 x 3/16 F.H.M.S.
04134
Tone Arm Hinge Bracket Assy.
Pickup Housing & Tone Arm Tube Assy.
05159 ....,
71244
Microgroove ( 33 1/3 r.p.m.) Pickup
77195 ...... Resistor (Ins. Car.) 3.3 K 1/2 W
55153
Pickup Contact Assy.
55462... Turntable Adjusting Plate
450150A
Spacer
37690...End Thrust Screw (Turntable
650013A
Main Cam Shaft
37691..
"
"
"
"Adjustment
55449
Tone Arm Locking Pin
55457.. Speed Switch Cam Shaft
64490
Locking Pin Spring
57273.. Speed Switch Crank
09700
Mercury Switch Mtg. Brkt. Assy.
14107., Contact "Lead & Plate Assy".
09387
Trip Slide Assembly
(Tone Arm Support)
09381
Cover Plate Assy.
71238.. Pickup (78 r.p.m.)
51152
Cover Plate
59472.. Pickup Housing (78 r.p.m.)
55450
Spring Adj . Screw
58863.. Retainer Spring
37884 .
Spring Adjust. Nut
51166.. Trip Friction Spring
37421
"E" Washer
55465.. Trip Pivot Pin
64489
Adjustment Spring
55466.. Trip Bearing Adjusting Screw
04136
Tone Arm Hinge Bracket,
37692.. Trip Bearing Adjusting Nut
fin#4
0 Assy.
2006-113-003 #4-40 x 1/2" F.H.M.S.
2215-201-003
40x 3/16" Slotted Hex
H.M.8.C.
(
(
(
..
.
e
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
GENERAL ELECTRIC RCD. CH. PAGE 20-1
MODEL P8
GENERAL
This record changer is designed for a power supply of 105-125
volts, 60 cycles. It operates at two speeds of 78 rpm and 33%
rpm and is equipped with one pickup arm head for standard
groove records (tan) and one pickup arm head for microgroove
records (red). The changer provides manual or automatic playing
and takes a one -inch stack of 10- or 12 -inch records. When the
last record is played, the pickup arm returns to its starting
position. The motor has to be switched off manually by the
Speed Control Knob.
MANUAL OPERATION
Turn the Record Selector Post (1, Figure 1) to the 12 -inch
position in the direction indicated by the arrow on the post, in
order to give more clearance in loading and unloading records.
Turn the Selector Switch (23, Figure 1) to Manual.
2. Place a record on the turntable. It may facilitate this
operation if the record is slanted, as it is slipped over the spindle
with the edge of the record held below the level of the record
selector post shelf. Records may be removed in the same manner.
3. Check the pickup cartridge to make certain it is the correct type for use with the record being played. This is important
as use of the wrong cartridge will cause excessive record surface
wear or even immediate damage to the record.
4. Move the speed control (9, Figure 1) from the OFF position to the 33 or 78 position as required by the type of record.
Hereby, the motor switch connects the motor to the power
supply, and the disk starts to rotate at the proper speed.
5. Push down the R button (24, Figure 1) in the front righthand corner of the record changer and gently place the stylus
of the pickup arm on the outer groove of the record. Lift the arm
just sufficiently to clear the record. If it is raised too high, it may
catch, restricting its travel.
1.
Fig. 1.
o John F.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Turn the Record Selector Post (1, Figure 1) to ten or
twelve, according to the size of the records used, and turn the
Selector Switch (23, Figure 1) to Automatic.
2. With the Record Stabilizer Weight turned back, place a
stack of records (one -inch maximum height) on the spindle so
that the bottom record rests on the step of the spindle and on
the shelf of the Record Selector Post. Turn the record stabilizer
weight forward to rest on the edge of the top record.
3. Check the pickup head assembly to make certain it is the
correct type for use with the records being played. Move the
Speed Control (9, Figure 1) to the 33% or 78 position, as required by the type of records.
4. Depress the R button (24, Figure 1) to reject any record.
5. To stop the phonograph before all records have been
played, simply turn the Speed Control (9, Figure 1) to the middle
OFF position. The pickup arm may be moved without damaging
the mechanism. However, after the last record has been played,
the pickup arm is automatically locked in position and should
not be touched until it has come to the rest post (25, Figure 1).
6. After playing, entire stack may be removed by the following procedure: Move the Record Stabilizer Weight (3, Figure 1)
back out of position, place fingers of both hands under opposite
edges of bottom record and lift straight up following the contours of the spindle.
1.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
The microgroove records are easily scratched so that it is
recommended to use utmost care in handling the pickup arm
while setting it on the record.
Be sure that the right cartridge is used with the various types
of records (tan for standard records, red for microgroove records).
DO NOT use warped, home -recorded, or odd -size records for
automatic operation, but use manual operation.
Top View of Record Changer
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-2 GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 2.
Underside View of Chassis (Motor End)
DO NOT use force to start or stop the motor or any part of the
record changing mechanism.
store the records on the record post or the turntable,
as they may warp, especially at higher temperature.
allow any oil or grease on the drive wheel or any rubber
part of the changer.
connect the motor to direct -current or to different alter-
nating current supply.
LUBRICATION
Apply light machine oil on:
1.
Motor bearings, saturate top and bottom felts.
2.
Pickup arm shaft (5, Figure 3). Apply one drop each to
bottom bearing point, bracket hole, and hole through main base
plate.
Ball bearing assembly (7, Figure 1).
3.
4.
Idler wheels' felt (6 and 16, Figure 1).
Apply Lubriplate No. 110 with small brush to:
Idler wheel linkage (5 and 17, Figure 1).
1.
2. Turntable shaft stud.
3.
Pickup arm hinge pins.
4.
Knife edge of raising lever.
5.
Main cam bearing. For lubrication, the subplate assembly
has to be removed.
Apply STA -PUT with a small brush:
1.
Teeth of main actuating gear (45, Figure 4).
Track of main cam gear (46, Figtire 4 ).
2.
3.
Teeth of large and small idler gear (12, Figure 1).
Raising lever bracket bearing surfaces (38, Figure 4).
4.
PICKUP
This record changer is equipped with two head assemblies
containing two different cartridges-one for standard groove,
and one for microgroove records. The pickup and head assembly
identified by the red color has to be used for microgroove Long
Playing records .(331A rpm). The other pickup and head assembly for use with standard groove records is identified by tan color.
The pickup head required for the type of record to be played
is fitted into its socket at the end of the pickup arm. The cartridge is designed according to the variable reluctance principle
which will give superior results from the standpoint of high
fidelity, low surface noise, and negligible record wear. The pickup is not interchangeable with a crystal pickup as the ratio of
output voltage levels of the two types is in the order of 70 to 1,
due to the very low output voltage of the variable reluctance
cartridge.
The stylus supplied is of a semi -permanent type. Dust and
foreign matter should be removed from the stylus assembly at
regular intervals with a soft brush. Make sure the stylus arm is
centered between the pole pieces.
o
John
F.
CYCLE OF OPERATION
motor is started by movement of the Speed Control Knob (9, Figure 1). The rotating
motor bushing (11, Figure 1) drives the Idler Wheel according
to the speed selected by the Speed Knob. The bushing has two
sections of different diameter which are engaged with the flywheel (8 or 15, Figure 1) corresponding to the position of the
Speed Control. This control operates a lever arrangement (5 and
17, Figure 7) which presses the corresponding flywheel against
the motor bushing and the rim of the disk. The rotating motor
drives the disk by means of the flywheel friction drive. By means
of the Gear Wheel on this disk the large Idler Gear (12, Figure 1)
is engaged transferring the movement to the smaller Idler Gear
which drives the Main Cam Actuating Gear (45, Figure 1).
The power of the motor (33, Figure 3) is transferred to the
disk by means of friction which is produced by the pressure
of the springs (10 and 21, Figure 7). This pressure is applied to
the Idler Wheel by means of the Levers (17 and 5, Figure 1).
The gear wheel of the Main Cam Actuating Gear (45, Figure 1,
or 45, Figure 4) is rotating all the time the motor is switched on
and only when this is coupled to the Main Cam Gear (46, Figure
4) the change cycle starts causing the Pickup Arm and the
Record Selector Lever to perform the respective movements.
This coupling is accomplished by means of a Pawl (46A, Figure
4 and Figure 5) mounted on the Bottom Cam Gear (46, Figure 4,
and Figure 5) which presses against the bottom teeth of the
Main Cam Actuating Gear (45A, Figure 2). The weight of the
lever causes the Pawl (46A, Figure 5) to engage the Main Cam
Actuating Gear. Only when this weight is lifted the Pawl moves
out of the tooth and disengages the lower Cam Gear (46, Figure
4). This movement of the Pawl is actuated by the left end of the
Trip Lever (47, Figure 4). Automatic cycling may be started by
pressing on the R button. The Automatic Trip Arm (34,
Figure 3) trips the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (47,
Figure 4). This releases the Actuating Pawl (46A, Figure 5),
allowing it to engage the Main Cam Actuating Gear (45, Figure
4) and couples it to the Main Cam Gear (45, Figure 4), driving
the mechanism through the change cycle.
STARTING THE CHANGE CYCLE-The
CYCUNG-A single revolution of the main cam results in a complete automatic cycling of the changer. This includes selection
of a record from the stack, lifting the tone arm from its rest
position and setting the needle in the first groove of the record.
PEED-The outer and lower surface of the Main Cam (46,
Figure 4) controls the record selection. The wheel on the rocker
arm lever follows the variation of the path on the Main Cam and
causes by its swinging movement the Selector Arm (2, Figure 4)
to push forward and drop a record.
RECORD
shaft at the end of the lever (38,
Figure 3) moves along a specially designed path in the lower surface of the automatic trip cam and guides the disk hub and with
it the pickup arm. The path is so designed that it swings and
PICKUP ARM MOVEMENT-The
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
GENERAL ELECTRIC RCD. CH. PAGE 20-3
MODEL P8
47
48
30
38A
3i
5
2
31
3713
Fig. 3.
41
42
32
\\49
49
33
Underside View of Chassis
lifts the pickup as required. If at the last groove of the record
the pickup arm advances % inch -31 inch in revolution, the
lever on the pickup arm which is forced to move with it by the
weight clutch (29, Figure 3) moves the trip lever which trips the
pawl between the turning cam and the automatic trip cam, causing the arm to swing back again.
SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS
A. AUTOMATIC TRIP-When the movement of the Pickup Arm
towards the spindle is greater than iá inch in 3', revolution of
the turntable, the Automatic Trip Arm (30, Figure 3) trips the
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (47, Figure 4). This releases
the Actuating Pawl on the Main Cam Assembly, coupling it with
the Main Cam Actuating Gear and, therefore, driving the mechanism through the change cycle. The Automatic Trip Arm follows
the movement of the pickup arm through the friction clutch (29,
Figure 2). This clutch must be kept free of oil and grease.
PICKUP ARM LIFT-The stylus should approach the top record
of a full stack on the turntable with approximately Vs -inch clearance. Adjust by bending the pickup arm raising lever (38A,
Figure 3) at point B (Figure 6). Do not attempt to move Pickup
Arm Raising Disk up or down because it would influence the
correct working of the Automatic Lock Lever (48, Figure 2).
The pickup arm is prevented from falling off the Rest Post (25,
Figure 1) by the upturned end of the pickup arm pivot shaft
bracket (37B, Figure 4). The clearance between the tongue of
the pickup arm raising disk (31, Figure 2) and the bottom of the
groove formed by the bracket and the Base Plate Post should
be
inch. In order to obtain proper positioning, bend the bracket
up or down. If the bracket is too high, the disk tongue will rub
op it when the needle approaches the edge of a 12 -inch record.
This will have the undesired effect of causing "glide in" on the
first grooves of the record.
E.
TRIP-At the completion of the change cycle, the
Actuating Pawl (46A, Figure 5) is engaged by the hook end of
the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (47, Figure 4) which has
been returned to its normal position by the reset points on the
Main Cam Drive Gear (45B, Figure 4). This hook should be
adjusted for about 3a inch and és inch clearance from the bottom
of the Main Cam Actuating Gear (45, Figure 5). Greater clearance may.permit the Pawl to bounce past the hook and re-engage,
causing it to go into another cycle.
ADJUSTMENT-As the change cycle is started,
the first motion of the inclined outer bottom surface of the Main
Cam (46, Figure 4) causes the Record Selector Post (2, Figure 4)
to move towards the Spindle about h inch. This position is maintained until the Pickup Arm has made its full outward lateral
excursion, at which time the Record Scicctor Post again moves
towards the spindle, causing the bottom record to drop into playing position. The distance between the Selector Post and the
Spindle should be such that with a standard record (97 inches
for 10 -inch and 117H inches for 12 -inch) the distance between
the edge of the record and the front of the selector arm groove is
approximately ai inch. If this distance is too great, records of
minimum diameter will not be pushed off the Spindle Step and
if it is too short records will be pushed against the Spindle with
undue force, causing center hole damage. If the Record Selector
Post (1, Figure 1) has been bent back away from the Record
Spindle, a standard record might rest on the spindle step with its
edge just over the edge of the Record Selector Post shelf. Then
at the beginning of the change cycle, the record is pushed off the
spindle by the initial movement of the Record Selector Post, so
that the record drops on the Pickup Arm. The push -off distance
can be easily adjusted by the Screw on the rocker arm (40,
Figure 5) which is accessible through the top of the main plate
(remove disk!). Turning the screw clockwise diminishes the
distance.
D. INDEXING-The
G. TO REMOVE THE PICKUP
LEVER-This lever (48, Figure 2) should
move up and down freely with no record on spindle. Hook end
of the automatic shut-off lock lever (48C, Figure 4) should catch
Pickup Arm Raising Disk (31, Figure 3) at the beginning of the
cycle to prevent travel of the arm and to cause it to drop on the
rest post. The weight of the records moves the spindle through
the hole and presses the Spring of the Automatic Lock Lever
(48A, Figure 4), thereby lifting this lever. With no records on
the spindle, the hook (48C, Figure 4) should clear the Pickup
Arm Disk by h inch with the mechanism at rest. This distance
can be adjusted by bending the lip (D, Figure 6) underneath
the lever.
B. AUTOMATIC LOCK
C. VELOCITY
eccentric screw, accessible through the top
of the Pickup Arm should take care of any normal adjustment.
Turn the screw clockwise to index the stylus in towards the
spindle and counterclockwise to index the stylus out away from
the spindle.
Should further adjustment be necessary, proceed as follows:
Operate the mechanism by revolving the turntable manually
until the stylus drops to within 3/¡ inch of a 10 -inch record on the
turntable. Check that the notch in the Pickup Arm Raising Disk
engages the Pickup Arm Raising Lever (38A, Figure 4). With a
No. 8 Bristol wrench in each of the setscrews (point C, Figure 6),
alternately loosen one and tighten the other until the stylus
rests above the records lead-in groove at the desired point. After
completion of this adjustment, see that both setscrews are
tightened.
F. RECORD DROP
ARM-While holding the Pickup Arm
firmly, bend in one end of the blue steel pickup arm hinge
brackets while lifting up on the arm. This will release the pickup
arm hinge pin. Repeat on the other pickup arm bracket, so that
the released arm may be turned over and laid on the turntable.
case it is necessary
to replace any of the major parts of the sub-plate assembly, this
can be removed by the following procedure:
1. Remove the Spindle which is held in by a clip under the
sub -plate.
2. Remove the Turntable and the Pickup Arm.
3. Unhook the Rocker Arm Return Spring (42, Figure 2),
and remove the Rocker Arm Pivot Pin (41, Figure 2).
4. Remove the holding screws.
H. TO REMOVE THE SUB -PLATE ASSEMBLY-In
o John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-4 GENERAL ELECTRIC
MODEL P8
Cat. No.
48A 46A 45B
45
45B
47A
RMS-177
/
RMS-179
RMS-180
48
27
SPRING-Tension spring for two -speed
shaft
SPRING-Spring for weight RWP-003
SPRING-Tension spring for stabilizer
SPRING-Shock mounting spring
TURNTABLE BASE ASSEMBLY
SPINDLE-Spindle assembly
IDLER WHEEL-Idler wheel assembly
(78 rpm)
DRIVE SLEEVE-Drive sleeve and setscrew
IDLER WHEEL-Idler wheel assembly
RMT-008
RMU-020
RMW-053
2
48G
44
37B
49 46 47 47P 38 4
Description
RM S-181
RM W-055
47D
Ref.
39 38A
23
RMW-056
(33
NUT-Post and nut assembly
31
RMX-076
RMX-077
RMX-078
RMX-080
RMX-081
RMX-084
RMX-098
RMX-102
RMX-128
RMX-129
RMX-135
RMX-137
29
46
47
RMX-139
47
3
26
RPA-009
RPH-003
4
RPH-004
RPJ-001
Main Cam Gear Assembly
Fig. 4.
RPJ-005
RPX-040
RPX-041
MODEL P8 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
RSS-004
RSX-017
32
Ref.
Description
RBX-017
RDB-017
RDB-018
RDE-050
33
24
25
RDF-007
RDK-167
RHC-011
RHC-019
RHG -024
16
9
22
MOTOR- -Motor assembly
REJECT BUTTON
BUTTON-Rest button
ESCUTCHEON BUTTON-Control escutcheon
WASHER-Felt washer for idler wheel
KNOB-Speed lever knob
CLIP-Retaining clip for idler wheel
23
RHM-031
RHR-001
RHS-003
RHS-030
RHS-009
RH W-003
RH W-004
R MG -005
RMG-007
RMG-008
RMK-003
RML-006
13
7
45
11
12
34
RML-008
RML-009
RML-010
48
RML-016
RML-017
RML-022
34
RML-024
RML-025
EM L-026
R M M-023
RMM-024
RM M-038
RM M-079
RMP-008
RMS-071
RMS-073
17
28
1
41
39
RMS-074
44
RMS-075
RMS-175
42
HMS -176
DISC AND HUB ASSEMBLY-For pickup arm raising
COLLAR-Collar assembly
CAM-Main cam assembly
TRIP-Velocity trip and roller assembly
SPRING-Collar clutch tension spring
IDLER GEAR ASSEMBLY
RECORD SHELF ASSEMBLY
NEEDLE PAD
PICKUP ARM LEVER AND BRACKET
HINGE-Pickup arm mount hinge
POST -Pickup arm pivot post assembly
TWO -SPEED SHAFT ASSEMBLY
COUNTERBALANCE-Pickup counterbalance assembly
VELOCITY TRIP AND ROLLER ASSEMBLY
ARM-Phono pickup arm
HOUSING-Housing for pickup assembly, 78 rpm (tan)
HOUSING-Housing for pickup assembly, 33 IS rpm (red)
STYLUS -Replaceable stylus, 3 mila (78
rpm)
STYLUS-Replaceable stylus, 1 mil (33 !s
rpm)
CARTRIDGE-Magnetic pickup, 3 mils
(78 rpm)
CARTRIDGE-Magnetic pickup, I mil
(333 rpm)
SWITCH-A-C power switch
SPEED CHANGER-Switch assembly,
less button
WEIGHT-Weight for RPH-003
RWP-003
Cat. No.
h rpm)
BEARING-Ball and retainer assembly
RMX-071
RMX-072
RMX-075
45
47
BRACKET-Spnng retainer bracket
COLLAR-Rubber collar for chassie
mounting screws
RUBBER-Rubber shock mount for motor
RIVET-Idler mounting rivet
CONE POINT SETSCREW-For motor
bushing
SCREW-Chassis mounting screw
SCREW-Idler gear mounting
WASHER-Bearing race washer
WASHER-Idler wheel (fiber)
GEAR-Main cam actuating gear
GEAR-Small idler gear (fiber)
GEAR-Larger idler gear (fiber)
COUPLING-Idler gear coupling
MANUAL TRIP LEVER-Lever and wire
assembly
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
STOP-Selector lever stop
AUTOMATIC "SHUT-OFF" LOCK
LEVER
LEVER ASSEMBLY PICKUP ARM
LEVER-Rocker arm lever assembly
LEVER-Lever and wire assembly manual
trip
LINK-Idler link
LEVER-Two-speed lever assembly
RELEASE-Link release
POST-Record selector post
RECORD STABILIZER
COVER-Switch cover
BRACKET-Hub assembly for pickup arm
PIN-Rocker arm pivot pin
SPRING-Raising lever tension spring
SPRING-Selector shaft compression
spring
lever compression
SPRIinNG -Selector
spring
SPRING-Rocker arm return spring
SPRING-Idler link tension spring (idler
wheel 78 rpm)
SPRING-Idler wheel (tension spring
3334 rpm)
J
40
45B
40
46A
4e
Fig. 5. Main Cam Gear Assembly
°John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
GENERAL ELECTRIC RCD. CH. PAGE 20-5
MODEL P8
0
10
20
5
Agri
iiil
2
01111)
'l
IRO
23_
lì
-`74.
fat
A
22
Mä
o
0
Fig. 6.
I
0
o
17
"
Adjustment Points
.
Fig. 7.
Idler Wheel Links
TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART
SYMPTOMS
REMEDIES OR CAUSES
TRIPPING
1.
Changer Fails to Trip.
2.
Changer Trips Continuously.
3.
Changer continues to play last record and does not switch off.
4.
Manual Trip Fails.
GLIDE IN ON 12" RECORDS
RECORD DROP.
MORE THAN ONE RECORD IS DROPPED.
INDEXING OF ARM.
SELECTOR POST ANGLE INCORRECT.
PICKUP ARM MOVEMENT.
NEEDLE SKIPS GROOVES.
PICKUP ARM DROPS OFF THE REST POST.
MOTOR
1. Motor Does Not Switch Off.
2.
o
Changer is Sluggish or Motor Overheats.
Check: (a) Adjustment A.
(b) Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly binding (47,
Figure 4).
(c) Actuating Pawl (46A, Figure 5) stuck.
(d) Automatic Trip Lever (30, Figure 3) bent and
not hitting the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (47, Figure 3).
(e) Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly rubbing on
the underside of the Main Cam Actuating Gear.
(f) Manual trip lever binding.
(g) No velocity lead-in groove in center of record.
(h) Worn record or needle.
(i) Foreign matter in record groove.
2. Check: (a) Velocity and Roller Assembly (47, Figure 3)
rubbing on Main Cam Actuating Gear (46,
Figure 3).
(b) Manual Trip Lever binding.
(c) Hook end of Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly
(47, Figure 3) bent and not engaging Pawl (46A,
Figure 5). To be adjusted for about c17 inch clearance from the bottom of the Main Cam Drive Gear.
(d) Bakelite Disengage Roller broken on Velocity
Trip and Roller Assembly (47A, Figure 4).
3. Check: (a) Floating Spindle (fiec up and down movement)
(b) Automatic Shut-off Lock Lever (48, Figure 4).
Hook end of this arm (48C, Figure 4) should
catch the Pickup Arm Rising Disk (31, Figure 3)
at the beginning of the cycle to prevent travel of
the arm and cause it to drop on the Rest button.
This hook should clear the Pickup Arm Rising
Disk (31, Figure 3) by h inch with the mechanism at rest. Bend lip (D, Figure 6) if necessary
to make this adjustment.
4. (a) Manual Trip Lever Hair Spring bent or broken.
(b) Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly binding (47, Figure 4).
(c) Actuating Pawl stuck (46A, Figure 5).
Check tension of compression spring (44, Figure 4).
Check adjustment E.
Check adjustment F.
Check latch of record spindle.
Check adjustment D.
Check adjustment F.
Check adjustment E.
Check: (a) Record changer not level.
(b) Pickup Arm binding. Check vertical and lateral friction.
(c) Badly worn record or needle.
Check adjustment E.
1.
1.
2.
Defective Switch mechanism.
Defective Switch (do not attempt to repair).
Check lubrication-oil, old or gummy.
Incorrect line voltage.
(c) Defective motor winding.
(a)
(b)
(a)
(b)
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-6 GENERAL ELECTRIC
MODEL P10
8. When through operating the record changer, set the Speed
GENERAL
control to the "OFF" position.
This single post and single tone arm record changer is designed
for dual speed operation (33% or 78 revolutions per minute)
from a power source of 110 volts at 60 cycles. It will play the
Standard Groove or Microgroove type records for these speeds,
a single record at a time or a series of twelve 10 -inch or ten 12 inch records or ten records of the two sizes intermixed. Note:
Never stack together the Standard and Microgroove records
intermixed for automatic operation as playing of each type record
requires special attention to the pick-up discussed below.
The tone arm is designed to use either of two pick-up
heads which are interchanged by a plug arrangement at the
end of the tone arm. The pick-up heads are finished in color
for identification. The TAN head is used to play Standard Groove
records while the RED colored head is for Microgroove reproduction. Always use the TAN head with Standard Groove
records and the RED head with Microgroove records. Use of
the wrong head is certain to result in damage to records and
pick-up stylus.
MANUAL OPERATION
1. Turn the Selector switch (23) to the "M" position.
2. With the Record Stabilizer Weight (1) turned back and the
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Turn the Selector switch (23) to "A" position.
Turn back the Record Stabilizer Weight (1). Place upon the
record spindle not more than twelve of the 10 -inch records, ten
of the 12 -inch, or ten records intermixed. The bottom record will
rest on the step of the spindle and the record selector shelf (62).
Set the Stabilizer Weight (1) forward so that it rests on the edge
of the top record.
3. Attach to the pick-up arm the correct pick-up head (19) required for the type records to be played.
4. Set the Speed Control (32) to the setting as required by the
type of records used.
5. Depress the "ON" button (24). The record changer will
operate automatically without further attention and when the
last record has been played, the pickup arm will automatically
come to rest upon the "OFF" button (25) turning off the changer
mechanism. The automatic shut-off feature applies to standard
groove record operation only. The TAN pick-up head, balanced
to give a greater needle pressure than required for the RED
head as applied to microgroove records, has sufficient weight to
trip the "OFF" button mechanism.
6. If it is desired to reject a record selection being played, push
down the ON button. The record changer will then immediately
shift to play the next record.
7. To stop operation of the record changer at any time during
automatic play, lift the pick-up arm off the record and return it
to the "rest" position on the OFF button, however, after the
last record is being played, the pick-up arm mechanism is automatically locked in position and must either complete the cycle
or the "ON" button must be depressed.
8. To remove a stack of records from the turntable, pull out the
record spindle, lift off the entire stack of records, and replace
1.
2.
spindle in position, place the record on the spindle. The record
is then moved slightly to slip over the step in the spindle and
lowered to the turntable.
3. Attach to the pick-up arm the correct pick-up head (19) required for the particular type record to be played.
4. Set the Turntable Speed Control (32) to correspond to the
speed required by the type of record.
5. Depress the "ON" button (24).
6. Gently place the stylus of the pick-up on the outer groove
of record.
7. Upon the end of record playing or to stop recording during
manual play, lift the pick-up arm from record and return it to
"rest" position. A slight pressure upon the pick-up arm at the
rest position will depress the "OFF" button (25) to stop the spindle.
9. When through operating the record changer, set the Speed
mechanism.
control to the "OFF" position.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
1. Do not, under any circumstances, connect the motor to a
sourceof direct current or to alternating current other than that
specified by the label.
2. Do not allow oil or grease to come in contact with the rubber
tired friction drive wheels (14 and 16) or the Automatic Trip
Arm (30) and Clutch (29) parts.
3. Never use force to start or stop the motor, or any part of the
record changer mechanism.
4. Do not intermix Microgroove records with the Standard
Groove type.
5. Make certain the correct pick-up head (19) is used to play the
desired records. The TAN head is for Standard Groove recordings, while the RED head is used to reproduce Microgroove
recordings.
6. Always make certain that the Speed Control (32) is set to the
proper speed position as required for the type of record.
7. Use only records in good condition for automatic operation.
For warped, odd size, or home recorded records, play as for manual
operation.
8. Do not store the records upon the record post and spindle or
on the turntable as they may warp, especially if the temperature
is high.
Fig.
©John
F.
1.
Top
View of Record Changer
9. When through operating the record changer, make certain the
Speed Control (32) is returned to the "OFF" position. This pre -
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
GENERAL ELECTRIC RCD CH. PAGE 20-7
MODEL P13
46
45
l
54
36
35
50
I
Fig.
43
48
41
42
40
49
26
5-3
1.
59
To
View of Record Changer
60
vents a damaging flat surface upon the rubber tired drive wheels
CYCLE OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION
otherwise developed as the motor drive shaft bears pressure upon
The following titled paragraphs describe in sequence each
them when the record changer remains idle for long periods enaction of the record changer mechanism through the automatic
gaged in either of the speed positions.
cycle of operation.
LUBRICATION
INITIATING THE CHANGE OF CYCLE-Depressing
the ON Button
(24) turns on the Motor Power Switch (33) and triggers the
Manual Trip Lever (34). The turntable driven by one of the Idler
1. Motor bearings, saturate top and bottom felts at end bells, Wheels (14 or 16) drives the Main Cam Gear (45) through the
2. Pick-up arm shaft (5), see Figure 3. Apply one drop each to Idler Coupling Gears (11 and 12).
bottom bearing point, bracket hole, and hole through main base
plate.
PAWL TRIP ACTION -The Actuating Pawl upon the Main Cam
Assembly (46) engages with the sawtooth serrations on the under3. Ball bearing assembly (8). See Figure 1.
side of the Main Cam Gear (45). The main cam assembly is thus
4. Idler wheel felt (21). See Figure 1,
driven by the main cam gear whenever the actuating pawl is enbrush
to:
110
with
a
small
No.
Apply Lubriplate
gaged.
The actuating pawl is tripped directly by the Velocity Trip and
1. Idler wheel linkage (15). See Figure 1.
Roller Assembly (47) which may be triggered either manually or
2. Turntable shaft stud (9). See Figure 1.
automatically. The pawl becomes engaged in the cam gear saw 3. Pick-up arm hinge pins.
tooth and the velocity trip lever is shortly returned to normal
4. Pick-up arm raising lever (38). Apply to edge lifting disk hub position in readiness to disengage the actuating pawl at the end of
the main cam cycle. In Manual control the velocity trip and roller
(31). See Figure 3.
5. Main cam (46) bearing. See Figure 2. It is necessary to re- assembly is triggered by control of the ON Button (24) through
Switch Assembly (33) and Manual Trip Lever (34). During automove the sub-plate assembly to lubricate this bearing.
matic operation of the record changer, tripping is accomplished
by action of the Automatic Trip Arm (30) which is driven by the
Apply Sta -Put with a small brush to:
Clutch Friction Weight (29) and Pick-up Arm Shaft Assembly.
1. Teeth of Main Cam Gear (45). See Figure 4.
Figure
Main
(46).
See
4.
of
Cam
Gear
2. Channeled undersurface
PICK-UP ARM MOVEMENT -The underside channeled surface of the
Main Cam Assembly (46) controls the pick-up arm movement
3. Teeth of Idler Drive Gears (11 and 12). See Figure 1.
4. Pick-up Arm Raising Lever (38). Apply to bearing surfaces. through the Pick-up Arm Raising Lever (38). The lever follows
the channeled contour of the main cam, lifting, turning and
See Figure 4.
lowering the Disk Hub (31) and associated pick-up arm and shaft
assembly so that the pick-up is started upon the first record
PICK-UP CARTRIDGE
grooves.
The Model P10 record changer is equipped with two pick-up This completes the movement of the main cam assembly as the
arm cartridge heads, each containing a General Electric Variable actuating pawl is released by the Velocity Trip and Roller AsReluctance Cartridge incorporating a replaceable stylus assembly. sembly (47) to be tripped and engaged again upon another record
The "TAN" colored head is plugged into the end of the pick-up changer cycle.
arm to play wide groove records known as the Standard type. The The Automatic Trip Arm (30), coupled to the pick-up arm and
assembly by friction, moves toward the velocity trip and
"RED" colored head is similarly inserted into the arm when using shaft
roller assembly as the pick-up arm moves across the record being
the Long Playing Microgroove records.
played. As the last or inner record grooves are reached by the
SERVICE-The stylus assemblies may be removed readily from the pick-up arm, the automatic trip arm triggers the velocity trip
cartridge for replacement. Instructions for replacement are sup- and roller assembly. The velocity trip, in turn, trips the actuating
plied with each new Replaceable Stylus Assembly catalogued in pawl to drive the main cam, beginning a new cycle of record play
the replacement parts lists on thé last page of this publication. and returning the pick-up arm onto the first grooves of a next
To insure optimum performance from the cartridge, its stylus, record.
magnetic pole pieces, and gaps should be cleaned periodically of
foreign particles accumulated from the record surfaces. A soft RECORD FEED -Movement of the Rocker Arm Lever and Roller
bristle brush similar to Cat. No. RQB-001 should be used to clean assembly (40) upon the underside and outer edge of the Main Cam
these parts. The gap clearance between stylus and each of its pole Assembly (46) controls the record feed. The attached Record Selecpieces has been adjusted to be not less than .011 inch. Care tor Shelf (62) and associated Record Selector Arm Fingers (61)
should be taken not to disturb this adjustment during service move to push forward a record from the shelf, off the step of the
record spindle, and onto the turntable.
adjustment or cleaning.
Use a light machine oil on the following:
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-8 GENERAL ELECTRIC
MODEL P10
23
24
19
25
29
Fig. 3.
59
60
33
34
49
47
38
30
39
44
5
31
Right Obliqua View of Bottom of Changer
43
INDEXING-The position of the Record Selector Proper
between the automatic trip arm and the Disk
Fingers (61) and attached Index Control Arm (3) just before a Hub (31) friction
essential to correct automatic trip operation. The
record leaves the Record Shelf (62), determines the proper inde x respective issurfaces
of the pick-up arm to start upon the first grooves of that particula r disk hub surfaces of clutch weight, automatic trip arm and
must be kept free of oil or grease.
record.
When a 10 -inch diameter record rests upon the record shelf, th
record selector fingers are tilted so that the attached index contro , C. AUTOMATIC LOCK LEVER-The automatic Lock Lever (48)
arm is engaged with the Index Lever Assembly (43). The index should move up and down freely with no record on the spindle.
lever, by virtue of its compressed spring, forces the Pick-up Arm Normally, its hooked end adjacent to the Pick-up Arm Raising
Raising Lever assembly (38) to follow the outer contour of the Disk Hub (31) will be raised clear of the disk hub as long as records
channeled undersurface of the Main Cam Assembly (46). Guided are upon the spindle. However, after the last record has been
by this contour, the pick-up arm raising lever lowers the pick-up played, the hooked end of the automatic lock lever is in a lowered
arm to the proper position upon the first grooves of the 10 -inch position (due to record weight removed from spindle). In this
position, the hook of the lever obstructs further lateral movement
record.
A 12 -inch record upon the record shelf will depress the record of the disk hub and pick-up arm and the pick-up arm is then
selector fingers, unlatching the attached index control arm from the lowered on to the OFF Button (25) shutting off the changer
index lever assembly. This renders the index lever assembly in- mechanism. To allow final indexing of the pick-up arm to play
operative and results in the pick-up arm raising lever following the the last record as it leaves the spindle and drops onto the turninside contour of the channeled undersurface of the main cam as- table, the hooked end to the automatic lock lever must clear the
sembly as guided by its associated tension springs. In following disk hub. This is accomplished for the last record play through
this contour, the pick-up arm raising lever lowers the pick-up arm the Tab "B" of the lock lever, shown in Figure 5, as it engages with
to the proper position upon the first grooves of the 12 -inch the adjacent tab of the Rocker Arm Lever and Roller Assembly
(40). This prevents the lock lever from being lowered which
record.
would otherwise obstruct the disk hub movement for the last
AUTOMATIC SHUT OFF-As the last record leaves the Record Selec- record play.
tor Shelf (62) and Record Spindle Step to drop onto the turn- For correct adjustment, there should be a clearance of
311 inch
table, the bottom of the spindle ceases to bear down upon the end between hook end of lock lever and disk hub, with the changer
of the Automatic Shut-off Lock Lever (48) directly beneath as a mechanism at rest and no records on the spindle. To make this
result of all record weight removed from the spindle. This changes adjustment, bend the Tab "F" shown in Figure 5. The
is
the position of the automatic shut-off lock lever so that the hooked located on the Base Plate (37) just beneath the automatictablock
segment of its lowered end engages with a segment of the Disk lever.
Hub (31), obstructing its normal movement. As a result, the pickup arm is lowered onto the OFF Button, depressing it to shut off D. VELOCITY TRIP-At the completion of the first part of change
the electrical power to the record changer mechanism.
cycle, the actuating pawl is engaged by the hook end of the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (47) which has been returned to its
normal position by the reset points on the Main Cam Drive Gear
(45). This hook should be adjusted between .005 to .015 inch
SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS
clearance from the bottom of the main cam drive gear. Greater
A. IDLER WHEEL DRIVE-The turntable is driven by means of one clearance may permit the pawl to bounce past the hook and reor the other friction idler drive wheels (14 or 16). The driving engage with the main cam gear sawtooth, causing the changer
power is transferred from the motor bushing (27) to the drive mechanism to operate into another cycle.
wheels and then to the rim of the turntable.
It is important, therefore, that the motor bushing, idler wheels, E. INDEXING-The eccentric screw (10) accessible through the top
and rim of turntable be kept clean of grease, oil, dirt, or any of the Pick-up Arm (4) should take care of any normal adjustment.
foreign matter. Naphtha or an equivalent quick drying solvent is Turn the screw clockwise to index the pick-up stylus in, toward
satisfactory for cleaning these parts.
the spindle, or counterclockwise to index the stylus out, away
B.
AUTOMATIC TRIP-The Automatic Trip Arm (30) follows the from the spindle.
Should further adjustment be necessary, proceed as follows:
movement of the pickup arm through a weight compression
clutch (29). When the movement of the pick-up arm (4) toward Operate the mechanism by revolving the turntable manually
the record spindle is greater in velocity than % inch in ! z revolu- until the stylus drops to within i2 inch of a 10 -inch record on
tion of the turntable, the automatic trip arm trips the Velocity the turntable. With a No. 8 Bristol wrench in each of the set
Trip and Roller Assembly (47). This releases the actuating pawl screws (points D and E, Fig. 5), alternately loosen one and
on the Main Cam Assembly (46), allowing it to engage the Main tighten the other until the stylus rests above the records lead-in
Cam Gear (45) to drive the mechanism through the changer groove at the desired point.
cycle.
Make certain both set screws are tightened after adjustment
Normally, the change in velocity of pick-up arm movement is completed.
occurs at the end of record play, due to the eccentric record leadThe 12 -inch position is indexed automatically by the pressure
in grooves toward the record spindle.
of a 12 -inch record on the Record Selector Fingers (61).
PICK-UP ARM
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
GENERAL ELECTRIC RCD. CH. PAGE 20-9
MODEL P10
PICK-UP ARM REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
48
45
62
49
43
37
The following step-by-step procedure may be used in removing
the pick-up arm for service and replacement.
1. The spacing spring between the hinge pins of the pick-up arm
bracket must be removed by pressing down on its center until it
snaps off the pins. This spring was used to prevent the pick-up
arm hinge from coming apart during shipment.
2. With a screwdriver or long -nose pliers, bend in one of the blue
steel pick-up arm hinge brackets while lifting up on the arm. This
will release the hinge bracket from its hinge pin.
3. Repeat step 2 to free opposite hinge bracket.
4. The pick-up arm may now be removed after freeing pick-up
cord from clips.
5. In replacing pick-up arm, the above procedure may be followed in reverse. Make certain cord does not become wedged in
bracket. The roller at the rear of pick-up arm hinge should pass
beneath the lift bracket attached to the record changer deck. The
spacing spring need not be replaced unless the unit is to be
shipped.
46
38
44 Fig. 4. Sub-plate Assembly
SUB -PLATE ASSEMBLY (REMOVAL AND ASSEMBLY)
should clear the top record of a
LIFT-The
stylus
F.
PICK-UP ARM
In the event that it becomes necessary to replace any of the
full stack of records upon the turntable by approximately
entire asinch in its approach to, or return travel across the record. Adjust major parts of the sub -plate assembly (Figure 4), theProceed
as
by bending the Pick-up Arm Raising Lever (38) at point "C" sembly should first be removed from the main plate.
shown in Figure 5. Do not attempt to move Pick-up Arm Raising follows:
Disk Hub (31) up or down as this would upset the adjustment of 1. Remove the record spindle and turntable.
the Automatic Lock Lever mentioned in a previous paragraph. 2. Remove four screws holding Center Trim (2) from Main Plate
47
RECORD DROP ADJUSTMENT-The distance between the Record
Selector Fingers (61) and the Record Spindle is critical and should
be adjusted as accurately as possible. If this distance is too
great, records of minimum diameter will not be pushed off the
spindle step during the change cycle. If it is too short, records of
maximum diameter will either be over the tips of the record
selector fingers (resulting in no record drop and improper pick-up
arm index), or be pushed against the spindle with undue force,
causing center hole of the record to become damaged.
G.
and remove trim.
3. Remove the Record Selector Shelf (62) held to the Rocker Arm
and Roller Assembly (40) by the two screws.
4. Detach Rocker Arm Return Spring (42) from main plate.
5. Remove the four No. 8-32 screws holding the sub -plate studs
and the main cam gear stud to the main plate.
6. Main plate may be lifted from sub -plate, letting rocker arm
drop through opening of main plate..
Reverse the above procedure to reassemble record changer,
making certain pick-up arm shaft, sub -plate dowels and other
parts are in their proper position.
RECORD SELECTOR SHELF AND ROCKER ARM
ASSEMBLY (REMOVAL AND REASSEMBLY)
Make certain that a standard size record is used in
making the adjustments in the following paragraphs. A standard
inch in diameter. A
10 -inch record measures 9% inches
a', inch in
standard 12 -inch record measures 11% inches
diameter.
With a standard 10 -inch record on the spindle, check the distance between the edge of the record and the front of the record The Record Selector Shelf and Rocker Arm Lever Assembly (62
selector fingers. This distance should be approximately h inch and 40) may be removed from the record changer by detaching its
and should be the same for each of the two fingers. With a full Return Spring (42), removing its Pivot Pin (41) and lifting the
stack of records on the spindle, the weight of the records will re- assembly out from the top of the record changer.
duce this distance to about % inch. Do not attempt to bend the
spindle to adjust this distance. Bending the spindle will destroy
the relationship between the heel of the spindle off -set and the
horizontal plane of the record. This spacing is set to permit only
one record at a time to slide between the heel of the off -set and
the step of the spindle. Standard records are 0.70 inch to 0.100
inch in thickness and any change in the angle of the spindle will
either close the angle of the off -set which will result in torn center
labels on thick records, or open the angle permitting two thin
records to drop at one time.
The procedure for adjusting the push -off distance is as follows:
1. Remove the four screws under the Main Plate (6) which hold
the Center Trim Section (2).
2. Remove the center trim section by lifting it straight and upward.
3. For forward adjustment of the record selector fingers, wedge a
screwdriver between the Rocker Arm and Roller Assembly (40)
and the Sub Plate (37) in front of the rocker arm pivot. With the
heel of the hand bearing upon the Record Selector Shelf (62),
push on shelf to bend rocker arm, bringing record selector fingers
nearer to record spindle.
4. For backward adjustment, wedge the screwdriver between
the rocker arm and the sub -plate in back of the pivot pin. Push
E
D
on record selector shelf to bend rocker arm, bringing record selecC F
tor fingers further away from record spindle.
AdjrstmeM Poiefs
Fig. S.
5. After making adjustment, make certain that both selector arm
fingers are equidistant from edge of record. A slight twisting of
the rocker arm will bring the fingers to the proper position.
IMPORTANT:
tL
©John
F.
t
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-1
MODEL P10
TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART
SYMPTOMS
REMEDIES OR CAUSES
TRIPPING
1. Automatic Trip Fails.
4.
Binding of velocity trip and roller assembly (47).
Actuating pawl stuck; part of main cam assembly (46).
Automatic trip arm (30) bent and not striking velocity trip and roller (47).
Manual trip lever (34) binding.
(e) No velocity lead-in eccentric groove at center of record.
(f) Foreign matter in record groove or broken record.
(a) Manual trip lever (34); wire spring bent or broken.
(b) Velocity trip and roller assembly (47) binding.
(c) Actuating pawl stuck.
(a) Check Service Adjustments paragraphs D.
(b) Velocity trip and roller assembly (47) rubbing on main cam gear (45).
Automatic lock lever failure. Check Service Adjustments, paragraphs C.
1.
Check Service Adjustments, paragraphs E.
1.
Check Service Adjustments, paragraphs F.
1.
Check Service Adjustments, paragraphs G.
1.
(a) OFF button stuck.
(b) Defective switch.
(c) Defective switch mechanism.
1.
2.
Manual Trip Fails.
2.
3.
Velocity Trip Fails.
3.
Last Record Is Not Played.
PICK-UP INDEXING
Pick-up does not start in proper
1.
record groove.
PICK-UP ARM MOVEMENT
Pick-up arm lift too high or too
1.
4.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
low.
RECORD DROP
Inconsistent record drop.
1.
MOTOR
Motor does not shut off auto1.
matically.
CAT. NO.
REF.
RMS-181
60
RMT-008
RMW-053
14
RMW-055
27
RMW-056
16
RMX-071
8
RMX-072
RMX-077
RMX-078
9
46
47
DESCRIPTION
SPRING -Record changer mounting
spring
TURNTABLE-Record.turntable
WHEEL -Turntable drive wheel (78
rpm)
DRIVE BUSHING -Motor shaft
drive bushing and set screw
WHEEL -Turntable drive wheel
rpm)
(33
BEARING -Ball bearing and retainer assembly
STUD -Turntable shaft assembly
CAM ---Main cam assembly
LEVER- -Velocity trip and roller as-
j
sembly
GEAR ASSEMBLY -Fiber idler
drive gears, coupling, washer, and
mounting bolt
RECORD SPINDLE
38
LEVER -Pick-up arm raising lever
and bracket assembly
61, 62, RECORD PUSH -OFF SHELF AS63
SEMBLY -Plastic shelf with record
selector fingers and index arm attached
ARM HINGE -Hinge asPICK-UP
51
sembly for pick-up arm
POST
-Pick-up arm pivot
5
PIVOT
shaft and hinge bracket
-Speed control
ASSEMBLY
35
SHAFT
shaft with retaining washer and toggle arm
SPRING AND BRACKET -Pick-up
52
arm counterbalance assembly
4
PICK-UP ARM ---Plastic shell with
female receptacle and pick-up cord
19
PICK-UP HEAD -Tan colored plastic head with male connector tips
and ballast weight (less pick-up
cartridge)
19
PICK-UP HEAD -Red colored plastic head with male connector tips
(less pick-up cartridge)
STYLUS ASSEMBLY-- 3 mil sapphire replaceable stylus (for use with
standard groove records)
STYLUS ASSEMBLY --1 mil sapphire replaceable stylus (for use with
microgroove records)
PICK-UP CARTRIDGE -Includes 3
mil sapphire replaceable stylus RPJ-
RMX-081 I1,
12,
13
RMX-097
RMX-102
RMX-119
RMX-128
RMX-129
RMX-I35
RMX-137
RPA-010
RPH-003
RPH-004
RPJ-001
RPJ-005
RPX-040
RSS-004
RSX-014
RSX-016
RWP-003
©John
F.
36
RAA-008
RBX-017
RDB-013
RDB-014
30
26
24
25
RDF-007
21
RDK-091
23
RDK-167
RHC-011
32
RHG -024
59
RHM-031
53
22
RHR-001
RHS-003
RHS-009
13
7
RHW-004
20
RMF-010
RMG-005
RMK-003
45
RML-010
48
RML-017
40
RML-018
RML-022
43
34
RML-024
15
RML-025
50
RML-026
28
RMM-038
RMM-079
31
RMM-088
62
001
RMP-008
RMP-009
41
005
RMS-071
39
RMS-074
44
RMS-075
RMS-175
42
SWITCH -A-C power switch
ASSEMBLY -Complete
SWITCH
mechanical assembly with a -c switch
(less ON and OFF buttons)
SPEED CONTROL MOUNTING
KIT -Qonsists of: bushing, dial
escutcheon, toggle bracket, lock
washer, and hex nut
WEIGHT -Used in tan pick-up head
(19) to obtain correct stylus pressure
for 3 mil cartridge
-
33
REF.
RHW-003
PICK-UP CARTRIDGE -Includes 1
mil sapphire replaceable stylus RPJ
RPX-041
CAT. NO.
1
12
49
17
RMS-176
18
RMS-177
54
RMS-179
DESCRIPTION
ARM -Automatic trip arm
MOTOR -60 -cycle motor
BUTTON -"ON" button
BUTTON -"OFF' button
WASHER -Felt washer over turntable drive wheels
KNOB -Manual control knob and
spring washer
KNOB - -Speed control knob
CLIP --Retaining clip for turntable
idler drive wheels
MOUNTING BUSHING --Rubber
mounting bushing for record changer
mounting springs
GROMMET -Rubber shock mount
for motor mounting
RIVET For mounting turntable
drive wheel lever (15)
SET SCREW --Allen Head, cone
point, 8-32 x % inch for pick-up
arm raising disk hub (31)
SCREW -Mounting screw for idler
drive gears
WASHER -Turntable bearing race
washer
WASHER -Fiber washer beneath
turntable drive wheels
RECORD STABILIZER WEIGHT
GEAR -Main cam drive gear
GEAR COUPLING -Drive coupling
between idler drive gears
LEVER Automatic shut-off lock
lever
ARM Rocker arm and roller assembly (less record selector shelf and
fingers)
LEVER -Index selector lever
LEVER -Manual trip lever and wire
assembly
LINK LEVER -Supports one of each
turntable drive wheel
LEVER PLATE -Speed control lever
plate with neutral positioning flat
index spring
LEVER -Turntable drive wheel link
lever release
COVER -A-C power switch cover
DISK AND HUB Pick-up arm rais
ing disk with set screws
RECORD PUSH -OFF SHELF -Plastic record shelf
PIN -Rocker arm pivot pin
PIN --Pivot pin for automatic shut-off
lever
SPRING -Pick-up arm raising lever
tension spring
SPRING -Index rod compression
spring
SPRING -Rocker arm return spring
SPRING -Tension spring on 78 rpm
turntable drive wheel
SPRING -Tension spring on 333-e
rpm turntable drive wheel
SPRING -Tension spring on speed
control shaft toggle
SPRING -Used in mounting pick-up
cartridges (19)
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
MODEL P10
REPLACEMENT
PARTS LIST
GENERAL ELECTRIC RCD. CH. PAGE 20-11
MODEL Pll
,
U a,
.0 .0
A
.0
yc >
á,áó
v
>
v 73
.c
H
W
ó0...,3.0N
v
c
vlV.C
a
v v
¡vA
a,°°0
2..).F.
.o
.t.,
? bb
,Z,
a
.,aac^
>bz
'
óv
owQN
v
a
L w
.ä'
a
O
°OQ
?
v0
u:
o.
0
ó
Q1
0.00a LL >,.v.
O C
v'¡, ^ ÿ OC Er.
-"F., 2JOÿ
p,
w
,Y,
â vx
..:0.c
rñ
vx:c" rña
H
.,
.,
...
C).
w
ÿ
b
a
p
ó..
0av
ÿ
a0. x
ma-
E
y6
(i
o
-0oxGa
va,
mEâE3
C.,l00.o c ov
ao
=
C.
C9
., v
ÿ
C w
lu
JQ
b
Ó>
w
íZii
C>
©John
F.
(0
O'4
Ô p
-
E
,X
O
v.
a
ovo
u 0.
"ro Ó;y
w.l; OO
0.b
Ñ u
8ÿÑ
o E
y y
cO
00
m.^
p...
a., ..A .,
G
i
pb
0= -.d2,Á
a v
>4.,2,2-2
3
oq
c zM i0 7
o0
Ç
º
v
a
ro
>..
x
w
ó
3
C
v.°['.bß.
w
.C,
o
00
O
a
x
ócáá a
C
i!
OGa,i
a
wawa
Á
ww
.+
...,bm
b°º
3 7 o ä
m
00.
.
w
w.d.da
b
O
C
..,f,
Ó
y0
V O v
W ,: °: o
.W]
y Ú.0
.cm
w C
(]._..
x dax 3... Nvb. xNoa ô.
ó.3
c
U
ai ,. 4.
m.0 Gz v
p o°Q
ó
Fº
m3
0
v
ÿ c>
ppw
W
m
>,e.i
o,r,
íTa
«..^ß.
.. v p
3
'z
0--
w
C
áw
O
w
m
z
0
L
x
0.0.Q ú
L)00Q
v_.b_
íTOA
zL.Caw
>óosfl"q
ó . tiß.
ó°ú$
óts Hri ó =á mvh p,riv
m.ó
-Pi. 0..v.P.
3
c
3É,:,L
öc
m
4v3,:
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
o
Cn
áa
o
v
+'
ób
I
cxi
cL
úv
E
á
z
á
ó
bom
p.á ÁRS V
X,..
de
Ho .c.Ea
z
Cl.
ro
ü:
L
Á
vyv.+wá,
V
L
°a ,v..
Ó
Ú
a"
0.,.fi ºp.,..,ma
«rñFúi 0.oCa
>
7
° >rOm uv,n
o
'00
áó
.-2,21x-
1)842512"
yaj
ro
Oo?,,,..<,
' ú,
V
+º
O
óº
aíAÚ
4
u0uv,
ai
v
xáó c;9
<
,.
sov
v
..,Â
â;;
0.
>
3
., H
wz
¡O
ó ...
en
o
m
E
p
ro
éx
ß
F.
3
ai
az
°Ó
E o:
v
N
c`a
Ñ
U
uai
,,
v
e
x
ú
,..
Ea°.
,.
'd
.2º
.0
.,
ú
il
3
o
0.
v
Á
w
G
~O
b
ó
á
w
E
bv
0.
a`,
.2
avvco`E
3 E v 0
ó
A
$ m
.,2g.,..,-'2,4
Ex.c ó v
ÿ--.....ce,,,,--1.2
w.-.
t.º1
.ÿ
ce
ryvo.>
'.v3 ,''.c
c
R1°
Q
z 0.01iaZi
O.w
v É
$
óçoóóá
O
°
óóú
O
..
,«4C
WU
a0U
'
f., --i
ou
v
>M >
v
V :: --
Eó wbv
c4
+
0,..
b
&cco
.,
"
oaw
GúcbvErnOr,+'v
o.c..._.x.o
a,
v
v
Ec
w
oócâHa.,
v
.,
`ÓÑ3b$m$
ó
o..
v
v3c ó33eº°á
v
dóYvvó
,. + b
v.dm
IIWÌFHmQáF
wáiái
xxiaaam
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Ú
v
m
eé .4Éwám
uÿV)..1..0'
oaa,o
óó......
(.;K,á><X3
o
z
.1
0
v.
ÉÉú
e
:
ówxázww¢áááóFó3
U C7aa.a: J3nmmFrn.1W
e th
ov óO°g; bxE>a,
w
p v
W6.7
a
o c
0.
°..
O
Oe
,..,
3v
v'
óTOG-
a
=v
ciz3Óc+içv.rº.ÿ
m
Eb
O
v
.0
v
0.'á.
v
éV
!;112K0
ú
Q
ou
j
U
°a
W
tRv`nlx
_
ó
a .a
m
.°C
v C Ñ.v,
O .c 0.y
cv Ar u wá v
71
00
c.);.8*
>
u
e
g` ,51
`vc.a0 m
d.
a. a.
ú
O
E
a`°O
,vÿab ázvz.o
ó.0] óm
0,.-,-8
óóóÚ
O u
2,
x(,?,
o
O
Co.
é
á;
.ÉXá
wotiE oäH
0
0..0000000...+
..-,
zT
ó
..=
_xáw
á.va
;;ÿ
..O
_m
_e'
3w
v
áz
v.ç ip>,bcoq
w
p
..
oc
.0.-
v
.rQ3bE
O
º
oö°4
cv i,
k,,
x
O
x
v m3 F
a
p
v
3
,0
C
ÿ
27.0Ol.v'd%_F^O
Ó
C
v
v v
W
U
âa
>
to'
Ó
v k,
,0 mÓ
â:
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-12 GENERAL ELECTRIC
Fig. 3.
Two -speed phono motor with belt driven 331/4 RPM bushing
©John
F.
Fig. 4.
RBH-01O
RBH-011
Two -speed phono motor with idler wheel switching cam
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
MILWAUKEE RCD. CH. PAGE 20-1
MODEL 11200, Series
MILWAUKEE Record Changer
No. 11200 Series
TO OPERATE MANUALLY
Raise the record balance arm (.2) and the 10" record support (38).
Place a record on the turntable and turn the control button to the manual
position.
Place the pickup arm at the start of the record and return it to the pickup
arm rest at the end of the record.
TO OPERATE AUTOMATICALLY
Place the pickup arm on the pickup arm rest and raise the record balance
arm (42).
(The 10" record support (38) must be lowered for 10" records and raised for
12" records.)
Place 12-10" or 10-12" records on the spindle and record support.
Lower the record balance arm (42) and turn the control button to reject and
release it. it will automatically return to the automatic position.
To reject an unfinished record turn the control button to reject and release
it.
To remove records from the turntable, turn the control button to the OFF
position and raise the record balance arm (4,2) and the 10" record support
(38) and lift the records off.
CYCLE OF OPERATION
The following drawings show a complete cycle of operation. Figures 1, 1A,
The rest
1B and 1C show the mechanism in the OFF or nonoperating position.
of the Figures show the mechanism in various phases of the change cycle.
To start the change cycle turn the control button (126) to the Reject posThis causes the notched washer (127) to take the
ition as shown in Fig. 2.
And as soon as the control button (126) Fig. 2
position shown in Fig. 2B.
is released, the selector lever spring forces the notched washer (127)
This action of
Fig. 3B, also (126) Fig. 3, into the automatic position.
Fig. 2B to
(132)
selector
lever
the
A
of
point
washer
causes
the notched
move against the ON-OFF switch (125 Fig. 2B applying voltage to the motor.
Point B of the selector lever (132) Fig. 2B moves away from the lead roller
Point C of the selector lever (132) pushes
shoulder nut (95) Fig. 2B.
against the lead roller dropping lever (78) Fig. 2B causing it to move
Thereby, allowing the
away from the lead roller shoulder nut (95) Fig. 2B.
lead roller (94) Fig. 2A to enter the spiral cam underneath the turntable
Fig. 2A.
This starts
Fig. 2C shows the lead roller (9)) engaged with the spiral cam.
the change cycle by the action of the spiral cam forcing the lead roller
(94) Fig. 3C and the swing arm (71) Fig. 3B toward the center of the turnAs the swing arm moves toward the center of the turntable, the camtable.
med end of it (Point D), Fig. 3B forces the adjusting plunger pin (21) Fig.
3C upward raising the pickup arm (14) Fig. 3C from the pickup arm rest (2)
Fig. 3C.
Fig. 3B moves farther toward the center of the turntable, the ratchet arm friction springs (82 and 83) Fig. 3B engage the ratchet arm (7) Fig. 3B and swings the pickup arm (14) Fig. 3 away from the
turntable (136) Fig. 3 until the ratchet arm (7) Fig. 3B is stopped by
coming in contact with the ratchet arm stop bracket (1)12) Fig. 3B.
As the swing arm (71)
®John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-2 MILWAUKEE
MODEL 11200, Series
swing arm (71) Fig. 3B starts toward the center of the turntable,
Point E, on the swing arm (71) Fig. 3B moves away from the ratchet arm
lever (6L.) Fig. 3B allowing it to pivot up due to the tension of the ratchet
arm lever spring (69) Fig. 3B so that it will be in a position for Point F
of the ratchet arm lever to contact the ratchet arm (7) Fig.3 B at the proper point for the pickup arm (14) Fig. 3C to set down on the record.
If
it were not engaged at the proper point, the tension of the ratchet arm
friction springs (82 and 83) Fig. 3B would carry the pickup arm past the
start of the record.
As the
Another operation that is taking place as the swing arm (71) Fig. 3B moves
toward the center of the turntable is that the roller (73) Fig. 3B of the
cammed dropping lever (74) Fig. 3B, makes contact with the lever trip
bracket (109)Fig. 3B and gradually forces the cammed dropping lever away
from the bearing pin shoulder nut (103) Fig. 3C so that as soon as a record
is dropped, the lower or return roller (102) Fig. 3C also (102) Fig. 3A is
allowed to enter the spiral cam Fig. 3A so that the swing arm (71) Fig. 3B
can return to its original position.
This will be covered later, as soon
as this phase of the change cycle occurs.
Point G of the swing arm (71) Fig. 3B pushes against the roller (117) Fig.
3B of the ejector idler lever (118) Fig. 3B and the adjusting screw (119)
Fig. 3B on the ejector idler lever (118) Fig. 3B pushes against the lower
push pin (11)4.) Fig. 3B, which in turn pushes against the ejector lever (31)
Fig. 3B (a side view of the ejector lever (31) is shown in Fig. 6).
The
ejector lever (31) Fig. 6A then pushes against the 12" record slide bolt
(33) Fig. 6A which pushes the 10" record slide bolt (14.0) Fig. 6A; causing
the 10" record to drop on the turntable.
To play e 12" record, raise the 10" record support (38) Fig. 8, which causes
point J on the 10" record support (38) Fig. 8 to engage the change lever
ejector (28) Fig. 8A, which pivots and moves the change lever (67) Fig. 1B,
toward the rear of the changer base plate.
This allows the ratchet arm
lever (64) Fig. 1B to pivot more causing the ratchet arm (7) Fig. 1B to hit
against point K on the ratchet arm lever (64) Fig. 1B causing the 12" record
to land on the turntable, as was the case with Point F for the 10" record.
As mentioned in a previous paragraph,
the roller (73) Fig. 3B of the caromed
dropping lever (74.) Fig. 3B has made contact with the lever trip bracket
(109) Fig. 3B and has forced the cammed dropping lever (7)) Fig. 3B away
from the bearing pin shoulder nut (103) Fig. 3C allowing the lower or return
roller (102) Fig. 3A (also 102) Fig. 3C) to enter the spiral cam Fig. 3A
and so to return the swing arm (71) Fig. 3B to its original position.
The lead roller (9)4.) Fig. 3A (also 94 Fig. 3C) is then forced out of the
spiral cam by a raised portion of the spiral c am Point H Fig. 3A.
Through
the action of the tension spring (79) Fig. 3B the lead roller dropping lever (78) Fig. 3B is moved into position over the lead roller shoulder nut
(95) Fig. 3B thereby keeping the lead roller (9)) Fig. 3C also Fig. 3A out
of the spiral cam.
As the swing arm (71) starts back to its original position, the ejector
mechanism returns to its' original position. The pickup arm is being moved
into position to land on the record through the action of the ratchet arm
friction springs (82 end 83) Fig. 4B, on the ratchet arm (7) Fig. 4B.
As explained in a previous paragraph, the ratchet arm lever (64) Fig. 4B
has been moved up so as to stop the ratchet arm (7) Fig. 4B at the proper
As the swing arm (71)
position for the pickup arm to land on the record.
Fig. 4B nears the end of its' return swing Point I of the swing arm engages
°John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
MILWAUKEE RCD. CH. PAGE 20-3
MODEL 11200, Series
This insures smooth
the friction brake spring spring (61) Fig. 4B.
the swing arm (71)
hold
to
tends
also
arm
and
pickup
lowering of the
As
played.
is
being
while
a
record
position
same
Fig. 415 in the
camthe
down
starts
Fig.
(21)
pin
plunger
4C
soon as the adjusting
ratchet
the
413
Fig.
arm
(71)
swing
of
the
med end Point D Fig. 4B
arm friction springs (82 and 83) Fig. 4B disengage from the ratchet
arm (7) Fig. 4B. Point F of the ratchet arm lever (64) Fig. )03 is
forced away from the ratchet arm (7) Fig. )IR by Point E on the
swing arm (71) Fig. )113.
The pickup arm (14) Fig. 4 also Fig. 4C is lowered on the record
and then Point R of the spiral cam Fig. 4A forces the lower or return roller (102) Fig. 4A also Fig. 4C out of the spiralc am.
Through the action of the tension spring (76) Fig. 4B the caromed
dropping lever (74) Fig. 4B also Fig. 4C is moved into position
over the bearing pin shoulder nut (103) Fig. 4C thereby keeping the
Thus
lower or return roller (102) Fig. 4C otzt of the spiral cam.
record.
the
across
continue
arm
can
the pickup
Fig. 5 shows the pickup arm (14) at the end of the record, and Fig.
5A shows how the ratchet arm (7) has also moved to the end of the
record and the adjusting screw (11) of the ratchet arm (7) is just
at the point of pushing the lead roller dropping lever (78) away
from the lead roller shoulder nut (95) so that the lead roller
(94) Fig. 5B may enter the spiral cam for another cycle of operation.
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-4 MILWAUKEE
RODEL 11200, Series
FIG.
1.4
BOTTOM VIEW OF TURNTABLE
SHOWING SPIRAL CAM IN
NORMAL POSITION
FIG 1
TOP VIEW
(NORMAL POSITION)
FRONT
142
FIG. 1B
BOTTOM VIEW
(NORMAL POSITION)
©John
F.
FIG. IC
RIGHT END VIEW
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
MILWAUKEE RCD.
PAGE 20-5
CH.
MODEL 11200, Series
FIG.
TOP VIEW
(REJECT POSITION)
FIG.
FIG.2C
28
BOTTOM VIEW
(REJECT POSITION)
©John
F.
2A
BOTTOM VIEW OF TURNTABLE
SHOWING SPIRAL CAM IN
REJECT POSITION
FIG.2
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RIGHT END
VIEW
20-6 MILWAUKEE
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL 11200, Series
FIG.
FIG.3
TOP VIEW
AUTOMATIC POSITION
(RECORD E.ECTEDI
3A
BOTTOM VIEW OF TURNTABLE
SHOWING SPIRAL CAM IN
RECORD EJECTING POSITION
FRONT
FIG . 3B
BOTTOM VIEW
(AUTOMATIC
©John
F.
FIG. 3 C
RIGHT CND VIEW
POSITION)
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
MILWAUKEE RCD. CH. PAGE 20-7
MODEL 11200, Series
FIG.4
FIG.
TOP VIEW
FIG.
(START
©John
F.
4A
BOTTOM VIEW OF TURNTABLE
SHOWING SPIRAL CAM IN
CYCLE OF RECORD PLAYING POSITION
AUTOMATIC POSITION
(START OF RECORD)
FIG.
4B
BOTTOM VIEW
OF RECORD POSITION)
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
4C
RIGHT ENO VIEW
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-8 MILWAUKEE
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
MILWAUKEE RCD. CH. PAGE 20-9
MODEL 11200, Series
40
41
39
38
33
32
FIG. 7A
32
12" RECORD EJECTOR
(EJECTING POSITION)
JuI!D
any.-®i
I
31
HimllN1N1 11111
lf
IIwIIII
114
_`
.U1M11/1
115
FIG. 7
12" RECORD EJECTOR
(NORMAL POSITION)
41
FIG. 8A
32
CHANGE LEVER
(28) EJECTOR
IN 12" POSITION
FIG. 8
18
13
FIG. 9
VIEW OF
PICKUP ARM AND
ADJUSTING PLUNGER PIN
5
1
VIEW OF
LEAD ROLLER
ASSEMBLY 98
SECTIONAL
F.
71
FIG. 10
16
SECTIONAL
©John
94
90
(28)
CHANGE LEVER EJECTOR
IN 10" POSITION
32
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
97
96
99
100
93
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-10 MILWAUKEE
MODEL 11200, Series
m
1
'o
U
r-I
ad
cm
aó
V
a) O
ro
U
cd
U^
c0
a)
Q.¢.,
GoH
o
e
+E
Aw
U
F,
O 04 cd
0c.)
a)
Ei
H
.i
rir-I
P.
ri U+
,i"
a) U
O U O a)
F,
F -r
R,
C,
a)
ad
E
ó
-P
U
C:
OOes~3Uoo
o ai
H
O a)
U U
a
ri rl
a)
Cd
U) .r -I
rI +
QaO02
rH a)
(20
r-1
rUi
x
'F -r
O
U)
N U
f,
U
r1
CO
U
g
p..'Li U
cd
a)
C",
61)a)
r
I
r-1 ad
>~
rl
f-1
+-)
o
2
O
U
F,
a)
p.
a0
U
ad
Oo
ri
a)
,O a)
o
+
s,
ad
a
I
1
+)
O
o
Óri
X
cd
+)'o
R,
>;,
3
O-
O O t,023
g -r -P a)
v
MO
a)
1-4
r1
rr1
o . t-. ---
1
CV
°John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
,sti
p+
U)
CV
U
F, U
C:
Cr
U)
O
r y'o
'O
a)
O C O O
.-1
E
C»
MILWAUKEE RCD. CH. PAGE 20-11,12
MODEL 11200, Series
DECAL
141
TO
GROUND
TO
110 -120V. A.C.
60 CYCLES
TO
ON-OFF
SWITCH
(1251
15
TO AUDIO
AMPL.
TO
110
90
-120V. A.C.
60 CYCLES
TO MOTOR
(46)
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
102
777J
MILWAUKEE RCD. CH.PAGE 20-13
MODEL 11200, Serie s1
rn
G
-
0
.0
`T> +-)
4)
.
1
a--i 4-4
(1)
4-4
H
u)0_2-4-1
C)
00
-i
.r -i
G)
co
71
Ti
0
0
Ti JP
N
}{ 4
r-I
G)
W
%
0
-.co
CL)
17
U
o
Q)
rl +)
+, (n
s~
C..
Ei
I
1
rl
UO
PART NO.
NO.
U
,-1
W
t -i
C1g
o
O
i,
W
U
441
.,
0 0
W
a)
U
W
ri r -i r1
N
C.
+
+)
CO
a)
N
LOpr--IH C.P'
1
N
G)
f~
0
U
CZ.
4-i
2
3
r
C.
CO
OD
OD
Q)
O
JP
IILWAUKEE RECORD MANGER
1
Ti
O a)
G)
Cy
G)
3
G)
rl
U
a)
Ts
(1)
PART N0.
+
ió
C)
Q)
rl rl
a) +)
G)
co
rd
MODhL 11200,series
CJ
r -i
U
RCD. CH.PAGE 20-14 MILWAUKEE
rl
I
U U
I
rI
F.
E1
1
N
c"1
4
Ç5
6
7
1
- - -
-
-
è!SQLINISM PLATE
PICKUP ARM REST
PICKUP ARM REST BUMPER
STATIONARY POST
--PICKUP AHN! SWING POST
11237
9
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
19
1
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
N
11201
11245
11224
1
8
20
21
ri
DESCRIPTION
MFR. STOCK 30.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1-11:18:053537:--
10752
10846
10754
10763
10764
10766
10798
10757
10810
10762
11219
11222
11218
11208
11217
11209
11232
11220
11241
11213
11215
112111
11212
11211
11223
1121310
108
10825
51
52
53
54
10827
55
56
57
10828
11249
10823-C
58
59
1150
60
107236
61
10741
10830-A
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
11234
11236
11235
70
°John
F.
Rider
©John
F.
Rider
DESCRIPTION
IRR. STOCK NO.
11200 SEEIES
RATCHET ARM
10-32x1" CLAMP SCREE
10-32 CLAMP SCREW NUT
6-32 ADJUSTING NUT
6-32x5/8" ADJUSTING SCREE
PICKUP CARTRIDGE
4-40x2;" SCREWS FOR CRYSTAL CARTRIDGE
PICKUP ARM
VISCOLOY STRIP
PICKUP LEADS SPRING CLIP
BALANCE SPRING TUBE
PICKUP ARM BALANCE SPRITE
PICKUP ARM RATCHET
PIVOT YOKE PIN
ADJUSTING PLUNGER PIN
10-32 BEARING PIN JAM NUT
ACORN NUT FOR PICKUP ARM
EJECTOR PIVOT CHANNEL
EJECTOR PIVOT CHANNEL RIVL'IS
CHANGE LEVER EJECTOR PIVOT PIN
EJECTOR PIVOT PIN WASHER
CHANGE LEVER EJECTOR
EJECTOR LEVER PIVOT PIN
LEVrr( PIVOT PIN TAOHER
EJECTOR LNVr,R
EJECTOR BOX
12" RECORD SLIDE BOLT
SLIDE BOLT COVER
4-40x3/8" R.H. MACHINE SCREWS
EJECTOR PRESSURE SPRING
4-4o HEX xvr
10" RECORD SUPPORT
EJECTOR COMPRESSION
10" RECORD SLIDE JOLT
BALANCE ARM
BALANCE ARM BUMPERS
HINGE PIN
BALANCE ARM SPRING
10-32x3/8" THREAD CUTTING MACHINE SCREWS
PHONO MOTOR
IDLER WHEEL TENSION SPRING
IDLER WHEAT.
IDLER WHEEL FLAT WASHER
HAIRPIN SPRING CLIP
MOTOR
3 GRU^ZRS FOR MOUNTING
3 SPACERS FOR MOUNTING MOTOR
3 FLAT 'BASHERS FOR MOUNTING MOTOR
3 6x5/8" SM MOTOR MOUNTING SCREWS
REINFORCEMENT WASHER
MITER POST ECG
FRICTION SPRING WASHER
CENTER POST
PIN FOR CENTER POST AND CENTER POST DOG
SPACER COLLAR FOR CENTER POST
FRICTION BRAKE SPRING
5/16-24 CENTER STUD JAM NUT
RATCHET ARM LEVER PIVOT PIN
RATCHET ARM LEVER
RATCHET ARM LEVER FLAT WASHER
CHANGE LEVER PIN
CHANGE LEVER
CHANGE LEVER FLAT WASHER
RATCHET ARM LEVER SPRING
CHANGE LEVER COUPLING RIVET
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
11229
10730
10733
11231
11233
11206
10735
10791
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
11;,
115
11239
112110
10747
10745
10743
11248
11242
10751
10750
11244
10801
10765
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
CAS
...2(
BEARING PIN
ROLLER
LEAD ROLLER SHOULDER NUT
BEARING PIN SPACER
COMPRESSION SPRING
ROLLER CUSHION
FULCRUM BEARING WASHER
ROLLER BEARING SPEED NUT
BEARING PIN
11248
10742
10751
10750
11244
10801
10765
10811
10831
ROLLER
BEARING PIN SHOULDER NUT
BEARING PIN SPACER
COMPRESSION SPRING
ROLLER CUSHION
FULCRUM 3EARINIG WASHER
ROLLER BEARING SPEED NUT
107214
10804
10728
10813
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
ROLLER RIVET
CALMED DROPPING LEVER ROLLER
DROPPING LEVER
CARVED DROPPING LEVER PIVOT PIN
TORSION SPRING
CANED DROPPING Um
CAMEO DROPPING LEVER WASHER
LEAD ROLLER DROPPING LEVER
DROPPING LEVER TORSION SPRING
DROPPING LEVER PIVOT PIN
LEAD ROLLER DROPPING LAVER WASHER
RATCHET ARM FRICTION SPRING
RATCHET ARM FRICTION SPRING
RATCHET ARM FRICTION SPRING RIVETS
RATCHET ARM FRICTION SPRING RIVETS
SWING ARM PIVOT PIN
33/64 I.D.x7/8 0.D.x.060" FLAT WASHER
ISC RETAINING RING
2 SWING ARM SLIDE WASHERS
2 SWING ARM CLAMPS
107143
116
117
118
119
120
SWIM ARV
11228
11243
11203
11225
10801
10848
11205
11226
10702
10704
10703
10850
11247
10843
LEVER TRI? BRACKET
6-32x3/8" THREAD CUTTING MACHINE SCREW
TRIP BRACKET RIVET
EJECTOR PIN GUIDE
EJECTOR PIN GUIDE ROtET5
LOSER PUSH PIN
EJECTOR ARK: EXTFNNSION SPRING
IDLER LEVER ROLLER PIN
EJECTOR IDLER LEVER ROLLER
EJECTOR IDLER LEVER
6-32x5/8" ADJUSTING SCREW
6-32 NUT FOR ADJUSTING SCREW
IDLER LEVER PIVOT PIN
IDLER IANLH BEARING WASHER
LEAD ROLLER RELEASE
ROLLER RELEASE RIVETS
SWITCH
CONTROL BUTTON
NOTCHED WASHER
FULCRUM BEARING WASHER
SEMI SCREW LOCK WASHER
10-32x3/8" SEAS SCREW
SELECTOR LEVER PIVOT PIN
SELECTOR LEVER
SELECTOR LEVER BEARING WASHER
SPRING RIVETS
SELECTOR LEVER SPRING
TURNTABLE
OUTER SPIRAL
INNER SPIRAL
NEEDLE SET SCREE
PICKUP LEADS GROMMET
DECAL
RATCHET ARM STOP BRACT
OAK RCD. CH.PAGE 20-1
MODEL
9000
DESCRIPTION OF CYCLE
In order to observe the action of the changer mechanism as it progresses through a complete cycle of
operation, disconnect motor plug from power supply
so that Turntable can be rotated by hand. Move the
front Control Button to the right so that only the
word "AUTO" is
REJECT" Control
go and release it.
changer can now
rotated clockwise.
EXPLANATION
FUNCTION
SETTING FOR DESIRED
RECORD SIZE
visible. Then slide the "START Button to the left as far as it will
The operation of all parts of the
be examined as the Turntable is
1.
The position of the "10-12" Control Button determines the size of records that may be
played on the changer
2.
When this Control Button is in the 12 inch position, the Index Pin (19) is stopped by the
front notch on the Index Stop Lever (43). The horizontal motion of the Pick-up Arm
(1) is thus stopped. After the Pick-up Arm Lift Pin (17) and Pick-up Arm (1)
are lowered, the Pick-up Arm will land in the correct position to start playing a 12 inch
record.
3.
When the Control Button is in the 10 inch position, the Index Pin (19) is stopped by the
rear notch on the Index Stop Lever (43). Since this notch is deeper than the front notch,
the Pick-up Arm (1) will be stopped at a point closer to the Center Post. After the
Pick-up Arm Lift Pin (17) and Pick-up Arm (1) are lowered, the Pick-up Arm will
land in the correct position to start playing a 10 inch record.
SETTING FOR DESIRED
NEEDLE
1.
SETTING FOR DESIRED
SPEED
1.
Operating the Needle Selector (62) rotates Crystal Cartridge (2) to engage the proper
Needle.
2.
When the Speed Selector Knob (61) is moved to the left as far as it will go toward the
number "78' the motor hub rotates the Idler Wheel (52) which, in turn, engages the
Inside rim of the Turntable.
When the Speed Selector Knob (61) is moved to the right as far as it will go toward
the number "33" an auxiliary shaft [connected to the motor hub through Rubber Drive
Belt (16)] rotates the Idler Wheel (52). The Idler Wheel engages the inside rim of the
Turntable.
STARTING
Operating the "ON-OFF"
Switch (46).
1.
2.
3.
®John
F.
Operating this Switch supplies power to Motor (48).
Motor (48) operates Idler Wheel (52) to rotate Turntable and Turntable Gear (59).
All other parts of mechanism remain at rest until Starting Pawl (24) is released by
trip action at end of playing cycle or by operation of the "START -REJECT" Control
Button.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL
20-2 OAK
9000
DESCRIPTION OF CYCLE (Continued)
FUNCTION
TRIPPING
EXPLANATION
1.
Operating the "START-REJECT" Control Button causes the Reject Link (39) to move
the Trip Release Assembly (23). This Assembly releases the Starting Pawl (24) and
allows the Pawl to engage the Turntable Gear (59) and start the change cycle.
FUNCTION OF THE
MAIN CAM (20)
1.
The grooves on the upper surface of the Main Cam direct and co-ordinate the motions
of the Pick-up Arm Lift Pin (17), which elevates the Pick-up Arm (1) during the change
cycle and the Pick-up Arm Follower (18), which moves the Arm horizontally during the
change cycle.
DISPLACEMENT OF
A RECORD
1.
While the Main Cam (20) is turning, the Eccentric (26) turns the Record Support Arms
(32) through the action of the Eccentric Arm (27) and Tie Bar (29).
2.
During the first half of the change cycle the Record Support Arm Shafts (30 and 31)
and Record Support Arms (32) rotate in a clockwise direction. The two lower changer
blades eject the bottom record loaded on the changer and the two upper changer blades
slide under the remainder of the stack.
3.
During the remainder of the cycle, the Record Support Arm Shafts (30 and 31) and
Record Support Arms (32) rotate in a counter -clockwise direction. The upper changer
blades now slide out from under the stack of records and drop the stack onto the lower
changer blades.
1.
As the Main Cam (20) starts to rotate, the Pick-up Arm Lift Pin (17) raises the Pick-up
Arm (1) by riding up the outer ridge of the Main Cam (20).
2.
After approximately a quarter turn of the Main Cam (20), the Pick-up. Arm Follower
(18) enters the groove in the Cam. The groove is cut so as to push the Pick-up Arm
Follower (18) and thus the Pick-up Arm (1) to the right.
3.
After approximately a three-quarter turn of the Main Cam (20), the groove in the Cam
causes the Pick-up Arm Follower (18) and Pick-up Arm (1) to move to the left.
4.
Near the end of the cycle, the outer ridge of the Main Cam (20) slopes downward and
the Pick-up Arm Lift Pin (17) and Pick-up Arm (1) are lowered.
To trip mechanism and start
change cycle, slide "START-
REJECT" Control Button
down and to the left as far
as it will go and then release
it.
MOVEMENT OF
PICK-UP ARM
®John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
OAK RCD. CH. PAGE 20-3
MODEL 9000
DESCRIPTION OF CYCLE (Continued)
EXPLANATION
FUNCTION
COMPLETION OF
MAIN CAM CYCLE
5.
The position at which the Pick-up Arm sets down on a record may be adjusted by means
of the Index Screw (41) located on the upper right hand side of the changer base. The
Screw acts as an eccentric in changing the position of the Index Stop Lever (43). A complete description of this method of positioning the Arm and another method which will
give greater range of adjustment if required may be found in the "Trouble Shooting
Chart" under the section entitled "Pick-up Arm (1) sets down at wrong starting point
on record".
6.
Elevation of the Pick-up Arm is adjusted by turning the Lift Adjusting Screw (5) located on the under side of the Pick-up Arm (1). For complete adjustment details, see
section of "Trouble Shooting Chart" entitled "Pick-up Arm elevation is too high or too
low during change cycle".
1.
After one complete revolution of the Main Cam (20), the notch in the teeth of this Cam
will disengage the Main Cam from the Turntable Gear (59). The Cam Stop Roller (55)
enters a groove on the side of the Main Cam (20) which serves to locate its rest
position.
2. The
Starting Pawl (24) contacts and again becomes held by the Trip Release Assembly
(23).
ACTION OF TRIP
MECHANISM AT END
OF RECORD
1.
During the playing portion of the cycle the Trip Latch (25) contacts the serrated edge
of the Trip Release Assembly (23). While the Pick-up Arm (1) is advancing toward
the Center Post (53) the Trip Latch (25) will not move this assembly. When the Needle
(3) enters the spiral groove at the end of the record, the motion of the Pick-up Arm
away from the Center Post will cause the Trip Latch (25) to operate the Trip Release
Assembly (23). The Starting Pawl (24) will be released and will engage the Turntable
Gear (59) to start the change cycle.
"MANUAL" CONTROL OF
CHANGER
1.
When "AUTO -MANUAL" Control Button is moved down and to the left so that the word
"MANUAL" is visible, the Starting Pawl (24) is held in such a position as to be unable
to engage the Turntable Gear (59) and it is impossible for the changer to cycle automatically. Forward or reverse recordings may now be played by manually placing the
Pick-up Arm on the record at the desired starting point.
STOPPING
stop the changer (NOT DURING CHANGE CYCLE), slide the "ON-OFF" Switch
(46) to its off position. Power to the Motor (48) will be turned off.
1. To
I
r-
- -
__J
I
1
L-
-----
®_SUPPLIED
° John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
AS ASSEMBLY
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-4 OAK
MODEL
9000
LUBRICATION
The record changer leaves the factory completely
lubricated and under normal conditions this lubrication should be sufficient for approximately one
year or 1,000 hours of operation. When operated
under extreme conditions of dust or heat, lubrication should be performed as frequently as required.
NOTE : AVOID EXCESSIVE LUBRICATION. Do
not permit any oil to get on the rubber tire of the
Idler Wheel, on the motor hub, on the Trip Release
and Starting Pawl mechanism, or on the drive rim
of the Turntable. Any oil on these places should be
removed with Carbon Tetrachloride.
A drop of good machine oil once a year on the Center
Post Assembly bearings, motor bearings, small cotton oil wick on Main Cam, and frictional surfaces
will provide the necessary lubrication.
PARTS LIST
DIAGRAM
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PART
NO.
507452
507453
J507454
1507455
506849
506850
507456
506851
506852
506853
506854
506855
507457
506857
506858
506859
507552
17
18
19
20
507458
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
507555
507459
507460
32
33
34
35
506864
506865
506866
506867
506868
506869
506870
506871
507461
36
506873
30
31
DESCRIPTION
Pick-up Arm, includes Hinge and Shaft (less Crystal
Cartridge, Needles, Needle Selector Assembly and
springs)
Crystal Cartridge (includes Needles)
Standard Needle
"Long Playing" Needle
Spring, Lift Adjusting
Screw, Lift Adjusting
Set Nut for Needle
Spring, Needle Pressure
Adjusting Washer
Tube, Hinge
Pin, Hinge
Indexing Assembly
Crank Assembly
bpring, Extension
Spring, Index Latch
Pin, Index Latch
Rubber Drive Belt for Motor
Pick-up Arm Lift Pin (part of Item 11)
Pick-up Arm Follower (part of Item 12)
Index Pin (part of Item 11)
Main Cam Assembly (includes attached levers
and springs)
Spring, Starting Pawl
Spring, Trip Latch
Trip Release Assembly
Starting Pawl (part of Item 20)
Trip Latch (part of Item 12)
Eccentric (part of Item 20)
Eccentric Arm Assembly
Drive Crank Nut
Tie Bar Assembly
Shaft, Front Record Support Arm
Shaft, Rear Record Support Arm
Record Support Arm Assembly
Plastic Cap, Record Support Arm
Cap Screw, Record Support Arm
Base Assembly (includes Escutcheon and other
riveted parts)
Escutcheon
*
©John
F.
DIAGRAM
NO.
PART
NO.
37
38
39
40
41
42
506874
506875
506876
506877
506878
506879
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
506881
506882
506845
506883
507462
506884
506885
506887
507542
507543
506891
506892
506893
506894
507544
507545
507546
507547
507548
507549
507550
500966
501031
507553
507551
506895
506842
506896
506897
506898
DESCRIPTION
Spring, Reject
Link, Manual
Link, Reject
Spring, Control
Index Bushing Assembly
Index Stop and Link Assembly
Index Stop Lever (part of Item 42)
Control Button
Control Insert
"On -Off" Switch
Switch Cover
Motor -115 volt, 60 cycle
Fibre Washer for Motor Mounting
"C" Washer for Motor Mounting
Rubber Grommet for Motor Mounting
Idler Wheel (includes fibre washer and retaining clip)
Center Post Assembly (includes Cam Stop Spring and
Roller, Turntable Cam, and Large Ball Bearing)
Spring, Cam Stop
Cam Stop Roller (part of Item 53)
Fibre Washer for Center Post Mounting
Screw and Lockwasher for Center Post Mounting
Large Ball Bearing (at base of Center Post)
Turntable Gear (part of Item 53)
Speed Selector Lever
Knob, Speed Selector Lever
Needle Selector Assembly
Pin for Mounting Needle Selector
Sleeve for Mounting Needle Selector
End Spring for Mounting Needle Selector
Return Spring for Mounting Needle Selector
Plug for Phono Input Cable
Plug for Phono Motor Cable
Small Ball Bearing (for Pick-up Árm Shaft mounting)
Pad, Needle Selector
Turntable
Rest Post Bumper
Screw for Mounting Changer
Spring for Mounting Changer
Clip for Mounting Changer
Not supplied as replacement part
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
OAK RCD. CH. PAGE 20-5
MODEL
9000
TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART
Turntable fails to
start after actuat-
ing "ON-OFF"
Switch (46).
REMEDY
CAUSE
SYMPTOM
1.
No Power.
2.
Idler Wheel (52) not
engaging turntable.
Defective "ON-OFF"
Switch (46).
4. Defective motor.
5. Broken Rubber Drive
Belt (16).
3.
Changer refuses
to cycle when
"START -REJECT"
Control Button is
operated.
Changer stops while
changing a record.
Check to determine if there is power at the wall outlet by disconnecting radio power cord and connecting a lamp to same outlet.
Check to see that pivot lever under Idler Wheel (52) is free. Also
be sure that spring which pulls Idler Wheel (52) toward Turntable
is hooked to motor frame and has sufficient tension.
Check continuity across switch contacts. Replace switch if
necessary.
Check and replace if necessary.
If Speed Selector is in "33" position and Turntable fails to rotate,
check condition of Rubber Drive Belt and replace if necessary.
For analysis of fault see symptom entitled "Changer stops while
changing a record".
6.
Binding in changer
1.
Broken or weak Starting Pawl Spring (21).
2.
Bent Reject Link (39).
1.
Grease on Idler Wheel
(52) or Turntable rim.
Clean with Carbon Tetrachloride.
2.
Idler Wheel (52) not
Check to see that pivot lever under Idler Wheel (52) moves freely.
Also be sure that spring which pulls Idler Wheel (52) toward
Turntable is properly engaged and has sufficient tension.
mechanism.
engaging Turntable
properly.
3.
Binding in
mechanism.
changer
If the Starting Pawl Spring (21) is defective, the Starting Pawl
(24) will not engage the Turntable Gear (59) when the Trip
Release Assembly (23) is operated. Replace this Spring.
Rear end of Reject Link (39) must contact side of Trip Release
Assembly (23). Straighten Link.
Check for binding at points where Turntable Gear (59) engages
Main Cam (20); also at base of Center Post Assembly (53). If 'fie
Bar (29) is bent and is rubbing against changer base, straighten
or replace Tie Bar Assembly (29).
Make sure Tie Bar (29) does not rub or jam against frame of
Center Post Assembly (53). If this condition occurs, proceed as
follows:
a. Loosen the bolt and Drive Crank Nut (28) at the end of the
Eccentric Arm Assembly (27).
b.
Rotate the Turntable clockwise by hand until the changer
c.
Move Tie Bar Assembly (29) [Record Support Arm Shafts
(30 and 31) and Record Support Arms (32) will also move]
until Tie Bar (29) is approximately 1/32" from the frame of
cycle is completed.
the Center Post Assembly (53).
NOTE: There are two positions of the Tie Bar (29) at which
it may be placed approximately 1/32" from the frame of the
Center Post Assembly (53). Set the Record Support Arms
(32) for automatic operation. Then make sure that at the
proper separation of the Tie Bar and the frame of the Center
Post Assembly, the lower blades of the Record Support Arm
Assemblies (32) are nearer the Center Post (53) than the
upper blades.
d.
Retighten the bolt and Drive Crank Nut (28), making sure
that the flange of the Nut faces toward the Record Support
Arm Shaft (31).
e.
Operate "START-REJECT" Control Button and rotate the
Turntable clockwise by hand through the changer cycle. If
the adjustment has been properly made, the Tie Bar (29) will
no longer come in contact with the frame of the Center Post
Assembly (53).
Lubricate changer mechanism if necessary; see section entitled
"Lubrication".
4.
Low line voltage.
Line voltage should not be less than 105 volts.
5.
Weak Motor (48).
If after checking the above items, the changer continues to stall,
it may be assumed that the Motor has low torque and should be
replaced.
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL
20-6 OAK
9000
TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART (Continued)
SYMPTOM
Changer cycles continuously.
CAUSE
REMEDY
Bent arm on Trip Release Assembly (23).
If the Trip Release Assembly (23) becomes bent, the Starting Pawl
(24) may not become held by this Assembly at the completion of
the Main Cam cycle. Straighten or replace Trip Release Assembly
(23).
Bent Starting Pawl
If the portion of the Starting Pawl (24) which contacts the Trip
Release Assembly (23) becomes bent, the Starting Pawl may not
become held by this Assembly at the completion of the Main Cam
cycle. Straighten Starting Pawl (24).
3.
Broken or weak Reject
Spring (37).
A
1.
Bent or broken
Latch (25).
Trip
The Trip Latch (25) must contact and exert pressure against the
serrated edge of the Trip Release Assembly (23) at the end of a
record. Straighten Trip Latch or replace Crank Assembly (12).
2.
Broken or weak Trip
Latch Spring (22).
A defective Trip Latch Spring (22) will prevent the Trip Latch (25)
from contacting the Trip Release Assembly (23). Replace Spring.
3.
Worn serrated edge cf
Trip Release Assembly
(23).
If the serrated edge of the Trip Release Assembly (23) becomes
worn, the Trip Latch (25) will not cause the Trip Release to release
the Starting Pawl at the end of a record. Replace Trip Release
Assembly (23).
4.
Broken or weak Starting Pawl Spring (21).
If the Starting Pawl Spring (21) is defective, the Starting Pawl
(24) will not engage the Turntable, Gear (59) when the Trip
Release (23) is operated. Replace this Spring.
5.
No eccentric or Spiral
The Needle (3) must enter the spiral groove at the center of a
record before the Trip Latch (25) will operate the Trip Release
Assembly (23). Old records which do not have this groove will
prevent automatic operation of the changer.
1.
2.
(24).
Changer fails to cyde after playing a
record.
groove at center of
record.
Record drops on one
side only during
change cycle
OR
Both sides of record
do not drop simul-
taneously during
1.
Record Support Arms
(32) incorrectly ad-
justed.
defective Reject Spring (37) will not return the "STARTREJECT" Control Button to its original position and may keep
the Trip Release Assembly (23) from engaging the Starting Pawl
(24). Replace this Spring.
Proceed as follows:
a. Make sure that the Record Support Arms (32) are set for
automatic operation and the changer has completed its change
cycle.
the three bolts and Drive Crank Nuts (28) that hold
the Tie Bar Assembly (29) and Eccentric Arm Assembly (27)
to the Record Support Arm Shafts (30 and 31).
Move the Tie Bar Assembly (29) until it is approximately
1/32" from the frame of the Center Post Assembly (53).
NOTE: There are two positions of the Tie Bar (29) at which
it may be placed approximately 1/32" from the frame of the
Center Post Assembly (53). Make sure that at the proper
separation of the Tie Bar and the frame of the Center Post
Assembly the Tie Bar (29) extends closer to the front right
hand corner of the changer base than in the other position.
Then, holding the Tie Bar Assembly (29) in place, rotate
Record Support Arms (32) and Record Support Arm Shafts
(30 and 31) until lower changer blades are pointing in the
general direction of the Center Post (53).
Place a 10" record on the lower changer blades of the Record
Support Arms (32) (as done when stacking records for automatic operation) and adjust Record Support Arms (32) so
that the record covers the same amount of space on the two
lower blades. Also, make sure that the nearest portion of
the upper changer blades is approximately %" from the edge
of the record.
Retighten the three bolts and Drive Crank Nuts (28). The
flange of the Nuts should face toward the Record Support
Arm Shafts (30 and 31) .
b. Loosen
cycle.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g. Operate "START -REJECT" Control Button and rotate the
Turntable clockwise by hand through the changer cycle.
If trouble is not completely corrected, repeat this adjustment but
make slight changes in the positioning of the lower changer blades
with respect to the 10" record.
°John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
OAK RCD. CH. PAGE 20-7
MODEL
9000
TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART (Continued)
SYMPTOM
Record fails to drop
off Record Support
Arms (32) at cor-
rect time during
change cycle.
Erratic motion of
I
1.
2.
For proper adjustment, see previous section of "Trouble Shoot ing Chart" entitled "Record drops on one side only during change
cycle OR Both sides of record do not drop simultaneously during
cycle".
Record size not standard.
± 1/32 and a standard
A standard 10" record has a diameter of 9h"
12" record has a diameter of 1174" 2-- 1/32.
1.
Broken Pick-up ArmFollower (18).
The groove in the Main Cam (20) directs the motion of the Pick-up
Arm Follower (18) and the Pick-up Arm (1) in the horizontal
direction. A broken Pick-up Arm Follower (18) eliminates or ad versely affects this motion. Replace Crank Assembly (12).
2.
Loose bolt and nut on
Crank Assembly (12).
The nut and
Assembly to
nut and bolt
semblies will
to section of
sets down at
3.
Pick-up Arm (1) in
vertical direction
during change cycle.
Record Support Arms
(32) incorrectly ad-
justed.
Pick-up Arm (1) in
horizontal- direction
during change cycle.
Erratic motion of
REMEDY
CAUSE
I
1.
2.
bolt on the Crank Assembly (12) clamp the Crank
the shaft of the Pick-up Arm Assembly (1). If the
are loose, horizontal motion between these two asbe transmitted by friction only. Retighten according
"Trouble Shooting Chart" entitled "Pick-up Arm (1)
wrong starting point on récord".
Weak or broken Extension Spring (13).
This spring is a safety device enabling the Pick-up Arm (1) to
be moved horizontally beyond its normal operating range without
causing injury to the changer mechanism. However, if the Extension Spring (13) is defective, horizontal motion between the Crank
Assembly (12) and the Pick-up Arm Assembly (1) will be transmitted by friction only. Replace spring.
Weak or broken Spring
for Index Latch (14).
This spring lowers the Indexing Assembly (11) when the Pick-up
Weak or broken conical
spring on Indexing Assembly (11).
Arm Lift Pin (17) enters the depression on the outer ridge of
the Main Cam. Replace this spring if it is found to be defective..
This spring is also instrumental in obtaining proper vertical motion of the Pick-up Arm (1). If this spring is found to be defective, replace Indexing Assembly (11).
Pick-up Arm Elevation is too high or
too low during
change cycle.
1.
Lift Adjusting Screw
(5) improperly adjusted.
When Pick-up Arm elevation is incorrect, proceed as follows:
a. Put twelve 10" records on the Turntable.
b. Slide "START -REJECT" Control Button to the left as far
as it will go and then release it.
c. Rotate Turntable clockwise by hand until Pick-up Arm (1)
and Needle (3) approach the stack of records.
d. Adjust the Lift Adjusting Screw (5) so that clearance between Needle and top record is approximately %".
Pick-up Arm (1)
sets down at wrong
starting point on
record.
1.
Incorrect adjustment of
set -down point.
The position at which the Pick-up Arm (1) sets down on a record
may be adjusted by means of the Index Bushing Assembly (41).
Proceed as follows:
a. Set changer for 12" operation and place a 12" record on the
Turntable.
left as far
as it will go and then release it.
c. Rotate Turntable clockwise by hand until Pick-up Arm (1)
and Needle (3) start to drop down to record.
d. Loosen nut on Index Bushing Assembly (41) and adjust screw
of this assembly to drop Pick-up Arm and Needle at desired
position on record. This position should place the Needle
5-11/16" from the Center Post (53).
e. Retighten nut on Index Bushing Assembly (41).
If the Index Bushing Assembly (41) does not provide sufficient
range for adjustment, proceed as follows:
a. Make sure changer has completed its change cycle.
b. Loosen nut and bolt on Crank Assembly (12).
c. Move Pick-up Arm Follower (18) toward Center Post Assembly (53) as far as it will go.
d. Holding the Pick-up Arm Follower in this position, place
Pick-up Arm (1) approximately 3/4" from Center Post (53).
e. Tighten nut and bolt on Crank Assembly (12).
f. Make final adjustment of set-down point using Index Bushing
Assembly (41) as explained above.
b. Slide "START -REJECT" Control Button to the
°John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-8 OAK
I70DEL 9000
TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART (Continued)
SYMPTOM
CAUSE
REMEDY
3.
Weak or broken spring
which operates Index
Pin (19).
Defective spring which
operates lever on inside
surface of Main Cam
(20).
4.
Broken
2.
Pick-up
Arm
Follower (18), loose
bolt and nut on Crank
Assembly (12), or weak
or broken Extension
Spring (13).
Tripping is possible
with Control Button
in "Manual" posi-
Starting Pawl
1.
Bent
(24).
2.
Bent Manual Link (38).
1.
Incorrect setting of
tion.
Improper "tracking"
-
of Needle with record
Needle slips
out of grooves and
skips portions of
record.
Needle Selector (62).
2.
Foreign matter in
3.
record grooves.
Badly worn record.
4.
Badly worn Needle (3).
5.
Incorrect adjustment of
Needle Pressure Spring
(7).
A defective spring which operates the Index Pin (19) will not engage this Pin with the notches on the Index Stop Lever (43). Re-
place Indexing Assembly (11).
The lever located on the inside surface of the Main Cam aids in
obtaining the proper set -down point for the Pick-up Arm (1). It
guides the Pick-up Arm Follower (18) during the final part of the
change cycle. If the spring which operates this lever is defective,
the Main Cam Assembly (20) must be replaced.
See section of "Trouble Shooting Chart" entitled "Erratic motion
of Pick-up Arm (1) in horizontal direction during change cycle".
If the portion of the Starting Pawl (24) which contacts the Manual
Link (38) is bent, the Starting Pawl will not be kept from engaging the Turntable Gear (59). Straighten Starting Pawl or replace
Main Cam Assembly (20).
Rear end of Manual Link (38) must contact flange on Starting Pawl
(24) when changer is set for manual operation. Straighten Link.
Make sure that Needle Selector (62) is in the correct position for
playing the type of records on the changer.
Clean record with record brush or soft camel's hair brush.
Examine record for scratches that may have destroyed continuity
of grooves.
Examine Needle for worn tip and replace if necessary. To remove
and replace a worn or damaged Needle, proceed as follows:
a. If Standard Needle is to be removed, adjust Needle Selector
(62) so that the words "78 ONLY" appear at the top.
If "Long Playing" Needle is to be removed, adjust Needle
Selector (62) so that the words "33 ONLY" appear at the top.
b. Loosen Set Nut for Needle (6) located directly below Needle.
c. Replacement Needles may be obtained by requesting the
following parts:
Standard Needle
Part No. 507454
"Long Playing" Needle
Part No. 507455
Do not attempt to use a substitute.
d. Insert Needle so that point extends away from Crystal Cartridge (2) and flat surface of shaft is against Set Nut (6).
When tightening Nut make sure that Needle remains parallel
to sides of Cartridge and point protrudes approximately 1/2"
from lower frame of Needle Selector.
To eliminate the possibility of installing the Needles in the wrong
sides of the Crystal Cartridge, the shaft of the "Long Playing"
Needle is painted red.
The pressure that the Pick-up Arm (1) exerts on a record is controlled by the Needle Pressure Spring (7). Using a Needle Pressure
Gauge, the needle pressure should be between 8 and 12 grams. To
change needle pressure, proceed as follows:
a. To decrease needle pressure, place a screwdriver in a notch
of Adjusting Washer (8) and turn Washer by moving screwdriver upward.
b. To increase needle pressure, place a screwdriver in a notch
of Adjusting Washer (8) and turn Washer by moving screwdriver downward.
In making this adjustment it will be necessary to disengage Adjusting Washer (8) from lip on Pick-up Arm Hinge (1).
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
OAK RCD. CH. PAGE 20-9
MODEL
9000
TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART (Continued)
SYMPTOM
Slow
speed.
CAUSE
REMEDY
Speed Selector (61) in
wrong position.
2. Grease on Idler Wheel
(52) or Turntable rim
causing slipping.
3. Idler Wheel (52) not
Make sure that Speed Selector (61) is in the correct position for
playing the type of records on the changer.
Clean surfaces with Carbon Tetrachloride.
I
Turntable
1.
properly
6.
Turntable.
Binding of drive parts.
Line voltage too low.
Operating temperature
7.
too low.
Faulty Motor (48).
4.
5.
Rumble or "wow"
engaging
1.
2.
3.
4.
Changer not floating
freely on its mounting
springs.
Improper motor mounting.
Worn tire on Idler
Wheel (52).
Worn Pad for Needle
Selector.
Check to see that pivot lever under Idler Wheel (52) is free. Also
be sure that spring which polls Idler Wheel (52) toward Turntable
is properly engaged and has sufficient tension.
Carefully check Center Post Assembly (53) for binding.
Line voltage should not be less than 105 volts.
If the changer has been stored in a cold room, the Turntable speed
may be slower than normal.
If, after checking the above six items Turntable speed is still too
slow, then it may be assumed that the Motor is at fault and should
be replaced.
Be sure the four Base Mounting Screws used for mounting the
changer have been screwed down as far as they will go.
Be sure
that Motor (48) is mounted on Rubber Grommets (51).
Examine Idler Wheel (52) for flat spots on tire and replace Wheel
if defective.
A worn Pad will cause the Needle Selector (62) to rest against
the Pick-up Arm (1). This will cause "needle talk -back". Replace
Needle Selector Pad.
PROCEDURE FOR REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
METHOD OF REMOVING OR REPLACING
NAME OF ITEM
Needle (3).
To remove or replace a Needle (3), proceed as follows:
If Standard Needle is to be removed, adjust Needle Selector (62) so that the
words "78 ONLY" appear at the top.
If "Long Playing" Needle is to be removed, adjust Needle Selector (62) so that
the words "33 ONLY" appear at the top.
b. Loosen Set Nut for Needle (6) located directly below Needle.
c. Insert Needle so that point extends away from Crystal Cartridge (2) and flat
surface of shaft is against Set Nut (6). When tightening Nut make sure that
Needle remains parallel to sides of Cartridge and point protrudes approximately
1/8" from lower frame of Needle Selector.
a.
Crystal Cartridge (2).
Remove the two Needles (3). Remove the two screws (and associated nuts and
sleeves) which pass through the Needle Selector Assembly (62) and the Cartridge
(2). Crystal Cartridge may now be removed by slipping the "quick disconnect"
electrical connectors off the prongs at the rear of the Cartridge (2).
Center Post Assembly (53)
Removal of the Center Post Assembly (53), as well as the remainder of the drive
mechanism, may be more easily accomplished if the changer has completed its change
cycle. Remove the Turntable by lifting it up from changer base. Then remove the
three Screws and Lockwashers (57).
To disassemble the Center Post Assembly (53), remove the two screws on this
Assembly.
When reassembling the Center Post Assembly (53), make sure that the Large Ball
Bearing (58) is properly seated in the base of the Assembly. To accomplish this,
invert the upper portion of this Assembly and place the Ball Bearing (58) in the
hollow at the base of the Center Post. Invert the lower portion of this Assembly
and slide it over the Ball Bearing (58) as far as it will go. Insert and tighten the
two screws. Then remount the Center Post Assembly (53) onto the changer base
using the three Screws and Lockwashers (57).
If binding occurs after assembly,
a. Disassemble and place one drop of good machine oil in base of Center Post
Assembly (53).
b. If mechanism still binds, remove Assembly. Remove the two screws on this
Assembly, rotate the flange on the upper section of the Assembly 180°, and
replace the screws.
°John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH.
MODEL
PAGE 20-10 OAK
9000
PROCEDURE FOR REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS (Continued)
METHOD OF REMOVING OR REPLACING
NAME OF ITEM
Arm Assembly
(27) and Tie Bar Assembly
(29).
After the Center Post Assembly (53) has been removed, loosen the Drive Crank
Nut (28) at one end of the Eccentric Arm Assembly (27) and remove the small
screw and washer at the other end. The Eccentric Arm Assembly may then be
Main Cam Assembly (20).
After the Eccentric Arm Assembly (27) has been removed, the Main Cam Assembly
will easily slide off its shaft.
Record Support Arm Assemblies (32) and Record
Support Arm Shaft Assemblies (30 and 31).
After the Eccentric Arm Assembly (27) and Tie Bar Assembly (29) have been removed, remove the Record Support Arm Caps (33). The Record Support Arms (32)
and Record Support Arm Shafts (30 and 31) are now disengaged from the Base
Pick-up Arm Assembly (1).
The Pick-up Arm Assembly (1) should not be removed from the changer unless it is
to be replaced. There are 18 Small Ball Bearings around the top of the Pick-up
Arm Shaft and 17 Small Ball Bearings in a circular slot near the bottom of the
Pick-up Arm Shaft. These Bearings will fall out of their respective positions unless
the changer is in a horizontal position when the Pick-up Arm Shaft is removed and
unless removal is accomplished with extreme care.
Eccentric
easily removed.
After the Eccentric Arm Assembly (27) has been removed, loosen the two Drive
Crank Nuts (28) and slide the Tie Bar Assembly (29) off the two Record Support
Arm Shafts (30 and 31).
When reassembling, make sure that the flanges on the Drive Crank Nuts (28) face
toward the Record Support Arm Shafts (30 and 31).
Assembly (35) and may be easily slipped off.
To remove the Pick-up Arm Assembly:
a. Make sure changer is in a horizontal position.
b. Pull Phono Pick-up Cable to obtain "slack" in cable between Pick-up Arm (1)
and changer base.
Loosen the bolt and nut on the Crank Assembly (12) and remove the Pick-up
Arm Assembly by carefully lifting at its base.
When reassembling, the Pick-up Arm Shaft (1) must pass through each part of the
Crank Assembly (12), and the hinge at the end of the Pick-up Arm (1) must be as
close to the pick-up arm post of the Base Assembly (35) as possible.
c.
Indexing Assembly (11) and
Crank Assembly (12).
These two assemblies may be removed by loosening the bolt and nut on the Crank
Assembly (12) and sliding these assemblies off the Pick-up Arm Shaft (1).
.CAUTION: Separation of these two assemblies is not recommended unless one of
the assemblies is to be replaced.
The Indexing Assembly (11) and Crank Assembly (12) may be separated by removing the small "C" washer on the Index Pin (19) and the Spring and Pin for
Index Latch (14 and 15).
When reassembling, make sure parts of Crank Assembly are in correct order and
position. Hold hinge at the end of Pick-up Arm (1) tightly against pick-up arm post
of Base Assembly (35) to prevent the 35 Small Ball Bearings around the Pick-up Arm
Shaft from falling out.
° John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
PHILCO RCD. CH. PAGE 20-1
MODEL M-20
se
Cb
e,
.0
u O
>V
.a 4
yE a.
V
b
OV
E.
'5';
b>V.u
O
°
.A.S
U
G.?
XV
V-
4b
ÑrlV
N V
ñ -S 12
O
.0
ÿ
oÿ
a
..+
c
a+
x
-a
4
wO
bo
cet"?,
-0
c
V
N O
.T
Évó,
b
c: F
ZoeQO.+^-dw
W
rr
w
o
4
ÿ.º
v
O
Vm
"5
.i
v>
4
>
.
y
.1.
ro
ß.
:I
V
,..2
uw .,LL
ÿ
vi
V
í.
í
..2
V
J
C
e
Ve.
C
Kt
.a
a .04
oÿ
m
Vv
Q
5Z
v ..r ÿ
V
C.
-
V 7F2 úd
ÿ 4
x
Ir,
'
ab
ÿ 4 ÿ o
W
014 0
u
V
4
cl
°"
O'
C
o..E
cdV2
o
.5
b
.
td
E
u
m
aN
VMm
ÿ
y O ..4 o,ÿ
m.V.ry
- áv
2J
v1 4 eÿ'v
O<
.
V1
e b L.V
i
o
e
yy
. ,r a.a.5á
it
4
m
C
'
a
.ÿ
NTV
C V
C
-OV
C ÿ ÿ
ÿb mÿ
4
O
42
9
ti
4 a
.5
.oÓÿ°ó4
ÿea"
aÿ4Eáw
. e>,Hí..
v
m.
Vóo. At
`4
uV
0F,4m
.
Cl
3
ÿ
V
ñ
4e
Zr,
'
V 1-t01
C7ó
O
e o
OS
4'
f
E
a/
V
ÿ
-2 -n e
a M
+
u
.+
C
V
Om
p
O tip
SJ
ÿ áá
G.
VV
uE
.4
x?
m
ó'-'º
ID
'0
m
2.
m.
N
u o
V
Ood ..m
O
Ve
-o
e,
`
O
S
bç
w p
N -G
ÿ
yN4.N+..
CI
V
e
4
V
el
41.4
ÿV
V
V
h02
ya,E Fr
á Vmy
V
V
C
V
.+
V
p.
O Q
4
ce
C
O
C
V
a.
o.5
.
ay
í,
tu .
m
y
C
Z
o
.m
O
ß.
XÑ
°AOZ
N
ó :r
C
um
.~
13
I
u
40Qy
"V
ÿ
Oywç
a.
O
m
O
m
=1....
Vß.
O
FV1
C
V
EV
4 °.°
.i
ÿ
NO
t.
.
4..
yV éa
4
N
O
V C
p
p
a
ÿ
C
V V
u
e NOmV.0
.
el)
E N
ÿ0
ÇV
42
a1
ÿV.e_Q w
.
E
04
E SF
4
:
m
ÿ ú
íV
.
.n .áE
.
ei
V
m
^.
'áa4
Ti.
E
Q
m
wOo ÿ
cu
a
.
O
O
..o
-o
O
-Ô .Y al
EC
fe
b 4
ú
V
V V
O
e ÿ
N
óo
E
V4
ÿ
a/
.+
.; -O
a
C
m
.
V
C
V
mC
Ve
°
0°4
4m.II
ru
e
OgmL
DA
^C
.N.
O
..x
ÿ.Ç d
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
N
...
wV
b
m
...9
ÿ rCI
-0
N .-u.
p
°
.°.
r`ea.0 E ÿ.
y .2V ^
L.rI
v
r, -5
e
p
Ó
L
o
N
-.F.
.0
»E
óG
V V
C ms
o
ÿ
V
ÿ
m
E°Af:vI
O 2;71 N 4
4avi y+V O E v
e,
Ñ0
C
O
C
N
O
óV
E cu
m.C+
.'
.
fyó44
óA
4at
c
\ÿ
p=ó
mpa
,ç
m
V O V
4
.ú 0 u
O
L..
4wmI
ev
O
^^.
ag
4
ß.
ryÿr
OO
-o.^u
V
..
L'
7 ñ 4V ÿ F
4 ^
m ..
m
.. n U
ai
V
0.0
u
° yVum
cea
4.,'
ú y
V
E:2-1E
E
m
F.
C
;y.>
C
>
¿ â.
.E
:
o
a.E
îN
N m
C
oi
o
v; .-1
L' X
OA
xvE_V;.
a
C
CU
.4.
ÿ
-Oÿ
ÿ
OOO
aC
m
Y.
V C
+
pp
lo
V e
H
Oo
O
Zo
ç'4`er
OoVm
w
u
.0 9,
Lr O
m
á
it.:mVL
_
.
aC
VV
co,
m
.
4
O
V
ce
V
b4 ó°-.0
No
..ÿÿa
u47ee
4.ÿ
e
4,1-1 e',.;;,-..2
7 C
ó
/
VOC
C te
ai
4
C
.
.E
a.
.. W
p
.b
ó
ci..,
a.
V
ÿ.edy
yG
m
^:4
F
V
4
ÿ?
r
2
OÿHzÍ
4
C V
O
úvyce
w
cV
e
E
24)4
1.vau
v
O.
..
Vm.t
V«.
eu7OQ 4V'rm
ç.0
Vm° óÑ Vu.r ÿu..
ºÿ.+m
QpC
b
0004mCo
.rV4^Od
u.rC
O5
me
.
.tiV
6..'>a.çp
.0ye.
a- ÿ .NrVN. a..0LOÿC:m5Ó
..
"W
Ó
rm-aG
.É-E4a1ºÿ
r
a.V~ENÿEEoa
ÿ /..w
3UV
ÿ
:m
eri.E E vá..ca$omE.
b
'Ar
ae.=O
.0m
opw
Vr
r
..w'V'.E1'
Cÿ pV5V
ú::
V
Vÿ4
ÿes
iu
FZII.ay
y.r y
< .o- v iV-Vuy
m.Cl'
el'V
ZakEÿ Ara .cñ. V7 OEL
ÿ0ó'ÿd ÿ :
M
í.
-_,t'
..=
V V
-.9 ;.-,^0
º
r
C`e.
C
g
ce
áá
g7.1ú
C-.p ai Ö
V
a m w c
FÿC4VFó,
V
'ji -p 4
V
V
.
,
óÿE,
a c ÿ.3
eOo
C
Ó
MNX.
> k
Lá
«irCpdrs
VO`u
m
«V
.
V4aÿ4.. ÿO
c^
C
U, V94.w
uF r-.ÿV7.
ç
ÿ-O 4sdF V
ÿ.ha.
ó
L
N°
vw x " ÿ W'ó4ÿ'
ÿ>ONO..
aº-~
óom
bÿúÿ
Ev5S°3-4
ypE:H4.r
.ue aVó
4..â=
,V ç.ÿ°1
r
í
vX3V
._
50M
a..oL3m4
>ÿ
CCÓ
d
7::,
ÿ
O
0.1
W
a1
m
4
4
.y.
pp>
m
C4
W
N
el
w
.2; -.3
ve4..
>
c. oÿE
Tid tiC. CVa4iiV4.4a.ÿuro
V.
y.
vO°r°O
NE
óÿ
ÿF
[-.6£'.2E.011
aveá°v v 0 m,DEV ¿
.
ÿ
ad..15
..N4b ÿí4
ñb
>V Oÿ°
p
.ee
C.yO
Oá
w
4ÿ
u
.
.4
..m4Qe5
ó
ÿ O.hu. ÓÓ
~
ÿ4 V>..y.G
'3°
Cy
0oVVVZ,uw aJ.L
2-ó
eno
EwV.0
N.rp
oÿN
e,áC
eV V.m
V
C
aWó
ÿÿ L.
a
w
+ÿ ay
4aú
ósaw^
ÿóEbºéóvÿc°O
it;
C
ç
i
-gÿ
.
ÿ. 'n -0
I
W N
o
ce
.1ui
a,
p
íi4
Ç
V
wî
°ÿ
éóemM
eáO. c
5 Z7Vd
I.
O
tj
-Me'.
á' g,,.9.V
ÿ
c
ca'
wa.
m
OC
m
>,H
Ç2
ÿí.
E
CO
F
WY'.
b
L4
V
O
SikVu°°:4
ai
ÿÿb º
ÿE
. y V u
Ô .4
§ácx.5
ÿ£O
k.ÿwC'8y,. ' ºÿ
.w
d
C
ó e v a
VC
Oa
V
leg
c ó
7,,>,Óe
N
G
ÿ
ñ703
C.
-"
M'bed'ay:
Vn 'i.p, a.pVtwóaFVE.a"
Eü a:ó EO1.z
dóoÿ Ó a ó Vú
c
OZ
N
-'a
É-
..-e
ea
.Ç
Y
O
Z4i
%p
C
V .
u
V
a, V4u
C
p...._N
a
aaC
x ávti
C C^eç
ò.-
ai
-,-.-4
4T
..°'v.
a.,,,
.
OE
^
V
O
Cd
Omm y'71
1'.
©
C
4n
C
2
a
C
4.2
E
Ó
W Ó
ea
a
Q
m
=óew.
r°
JC0
Óp>wl,a.
-O
E°
2.
e
- ÿd5
.<
-Oyvÿ4V
a
4Z
O O
`u.
a-ó p..y
'¿
.CC
y
ÿO7
O'ÿVV
"C
a.ÿ
3a;F4.0
ñ'wN'Ev7-°
:
Oe«Eb'
,,0»»,,...oV.
m^
V.i
'i
úVVbw
v
«N
:
ú42tiÿ
V
M
y
.
ÿ7.V
w ºÿ::vá
a Ò 4
in
a.
3, >.22...
:
V....,
>
2,
°e
CV.M4i
C>
Tm
.0O
8-c4vº
VE
^'F
'b;
0Ce0. 4gb9
p
.o
ao
C eO
E
O
V
t.)
Naÿ
-0
V
°
ÿ°.z,i
eú
i.'
C E >
G«CÓ
óV
ºm
.o.-ú=aáEa3ú
m
u
4
'a ,2-:.
-00.o
C
C
b4
°
o
C
i:.
.LN'E-..
'O.
i+C .N
7
4 .0 eer, ÿ
.+y>m
u
© O
.+
eo ú
ai
fÓV
'
.L
.ri
O`
d
o
J
-V r da.
Ç4 e .b .r
a
°
e.,'ZVo "v
,e,
1
V^ç
C.
bw
oOC
úOáo
b' n
.5 ..
a1
g
a v
a
IX
Z
C
V
ai
V-
S7
y
4
m
a;
V
.+O
V
á°
V
V
O
co
+
:-.J.
.a.
eWum
0
Ç_
PO°^oS
ZEo
O
e) r7
sk.
Wai
b ÿ.
ee
-ó'
me'ñoó
.i i
E
mc
o
.b
V
V
v
+
É
V
ÿdea
zi.'uÓe C:
V
4.
.
á
a
uÿV.l
0
b
1
UII
~`ó
%i
V
4
O
V
O.
45
gVw
u.r
v0
V
$.
ai
u
QC
a.)e
CO.
0áC.W
ó3'
ÿ..
ry
V N
N044ÿE
VáÓ
`
a° ÿF
VV.ó
- ÿ Ca
F
C.,
ivaua
w
V
C'
4,....0í4,....0
bW
V
.E
.4
.+
4 V
e
e
]
ÿ.m.pA0p
w
V
C
° u4 d
^=v
y
ÿ,
4Z
O
ú
:
v,
7
V
ÿ-.
4...ç
Vm4.a.
F n .0
V C
a.
O.ia
m""
ÿ"
p
óm'e.
,á"
.epáîo.ú
.C
O
u 4
.+
A-
VV.í
N
.5
a!
a.ß.
V 4
O
7
NOV
e
ÿá4.rtv
Ó
tj
a
h
.áa°,
0©
.. .m..a
W
m N O V
V
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-2 PHILCO
MODEL M-20
FEELER
76-5249
FEELER
SELECTOR HINGE
SPRING
56-7479
56-7494
MAGNETIC INDEX STOP
76-5497
SELECTOR HINGE SPRING
56-7495
FIGURE 1.
7" INDEX ADJUSTMENT
FIGURE 2.
10" INDEX ADJUSTMENT
TP
-9-201
TP -9-237
PUSH OFF BAR
LOCKING SCREW
ENGAGEMENT BETWEEN
STOP AND TRIP
TRIP LOCKING SCREW
TRIP LATCH RETURN SPRING
56-7033-2
TRIP ARM STOP
56-4614
TRIP LATCH
76-5247
HAMMER
75-5324
TRIP FINGER
56-7486
ADJUSTING SCREW
ON TRIP RECEIVER
TRIP FINGER
TRIP PLATE
54-7613-1
76-5252
HAMMER ACT. ATOR SPRING
56-7033
TP -9998
FIGURE 3.
©John
F.
TRIP ADJUSTMENTS
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
20-3
PHILCO RCD. CH. PAG
M-20
NEEDLE POINT 3/32" (MIN.)
ABOVE BASEPLATE
ADJUST EAR OF SHAFT AND SWIVEL
ASSY.
76-5207-1
BEND EAR TO OBTAIN CORRECT
BASEPLATE CLEARANCE
TP
FIGURE 4.
BASE -PLATE -CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
TP -9-205
-9999
FIGURE 5.
TONE -ARM HEIGHT AND LIFT ADJUSTMENT
Lt CORD
VERTICAL ACTUATOR
76-5322
HORIZONTAL ACTUATO
76-5323
VERTICAL TIMING ----ADJUST LOOP O
LOWER LINN
56-7023
FIGURE 6.
HORIZONTAL AND
TP
-10,000
VERTICAL TIMING ADJUSTMENTS
FIGURE 7.
SPECIAL RECORD -SHELF
GAUGE, SHOWN IN CORRECT POSITION
TP -9994
©
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
20-4 PHILCO
RCD. CH. PAGE
M-20
MODEL
Q
o
al
ro
-
6
C
4
a
C
ul
V
,
cu
:
Cpo
7'd
y
fl
L
v ú
,c
Ñ
J
opro OF«
O
`n
C
-
N i-,
^
GO...
cu
C
t
N
.0
>
'Ca>~a
U
rii
.ly
1113
2
43)
V
«.2
O
i' v
v
E
Q
i
M
ca
v
°v
I.
'5
41.d
'
areÿo«pÿ
..c v ÿa4Oa4.
.+
.0g
a~a bÓ
N
.
C Ó
a.«v
~v
a
C
O.
~
'te
v.
E
v
CC
EG
a1
V
u
v
O
ea
a1p
.0
p
«
v
4.1.
t"
ca
a.
w
v
a
O
U
n
O
ai
x
v
..
ú
°b
..
.
«
ú
i
,
yy
41A)
4
N
7
ta
w
y W
N
N
V
C
7 aî
:95-'15'
e.
w
vC
C
;17 15
O
v
.Ç
.. ÿ Ó)
,
v
º
a. >
ac1
ÁOF.4
WV
vi w
c
t0.06/
ed
c
Q
.01
'PC
4a
0 i.
Á«v
O
Ó.
o
w ..
$i
C
u y.ey
u c.
Os
O
O.
«
Ó
«
O
v..
V
,J
a
Ú
O a
N
c
..
v
e
a,.4
F
gy
f.
-5 C v t0 e
«
d.1
á0..a
F.
a
ca
"
«
Nv
C
O
z
-0.-g
ÿÿ°
gcF
U 2
Ñ"vvpC0
12,.
N
'r:
a
««
a.
ai
ai
aO
ca
°G0aä
v.ai« v.\ ..
°á'3
va
p
.
u
Áp
o
2o
ñ
d2
0
CT
O
O
>.
ed
V
a
o e"
y
O
O.'U:
al
v
«
o
a1
«.ty.^ C
..
'4'
ÿ
>
.
a CO«
au
y.
3
0
.
p=.ó
o>.edQ
v«
Ó
ce
Qa)
n
ó
V
v
ñ.w6
gw
a
Q.
ea 9ÿO.vÿ
a GO>
a
C. .O,
Cr
°
á w.
`
E
N
n
v
E0aoâ'N
.b
ac
.0
G
pE
H
to
U
a
ÿEá
ai
a
«
a
cdC
ea
CU
,n
ebv
> C
C e O
v u
v
.'/3
a.v.,
vE
E
;baiv.
«v V..v
Z
c
2
ú
a.
º x ? U.«
Co
O^
d
°
C` `'U>
Gpvv
«
ed
u
o
c
.
O
v. w u cj
.aZ.Q
Q
°
C..
pyU..
v
a
3
av
p>Ó2
>
Ev
.
Yc ...
C O
C
4.1..0
a
.
O
41
12
0
4..,,
O
Ep5 ó
o
a.,---a.,---.-..
N
á
0
r
v á'ñN
'/GNn,
.2
C]
Ó.
.O
o
O. u
\E
ed
ú5 N
d°ÿ.
zOCvv
C
> m
N
V
ñv
äQ7
3Q.
..H.:vpbatU
-
v
.Uea
^ O.3
v 6
""vc
0d':ave
a V
°
>,;; ..vÿ
O
iU
+
v
C
C'Nv
N
N
tl
v
>
cg
O
.0
2--°
o
p ó~
ñ.
vC«44.4
^
NOa e,
4.ro7>
y ºo
J
r...-
aN
°-
G5
vC
a,
Ó
CAÿri
vn
>ti
ó>
p0zOWCp.
a ÿ. v. ,eyiÓ.
«Ee«
'a 'v
,j
v
,L,
ea
üojv
v v n
E c
v 7.«a>,v
ep
Cpvo v
N
v.
a.
caá
° vO"w<
C
v e
v Um
ep'ä
.1.2)
v
v)
áoAbp vC á
ei ). U
.0 á1 U
ú
u,a .. a.v.ÿ
v N v>O
-c
a -6.« -oó
a"v
u
w
to>Qoa
v
.
.
y
bv.nca
óayçe>b
'
v v
dW
O
.
w
v
U
cd
Sñ
0eg)
.
tl-.,N
Ev. -
'
o
v
C
Á
v
.ú, 'NC
c
.nM
N.a
k O.O
ved)
7p
o4-4
>v`
D.:Or
.
.gv
aúea
Ts
QO ea
kÿU
v
v v vW
4.1
ca
a
G.ÿ...
cl...v
Ó
E
d
' Oe.
;vaóiaCEás.pv
v.7Qp
bev.L«eN0Ñ
0
--s
OOppp
á 0
>0
N
«
Cn c
,Cv°<
I. 4,
O
.
v ú
..
..
NÓ.
>> U.,
,S
0w
«Ça.-2Ó.+
C
'Q.
w°.
.0
Cd
av wP.v
á
7
y
U
v
v
o
41 Ñ
O.0 w v
.
M
O>
a1
'ó
«i
- n çppe
.dNáP
w b V ;; +úoçaß
rC
v0
Ñv
C
>
>
O
V
O
O
0>0oNi
.0
a)
al'
AO
7
«v
Ev°v
ÿvvOC
-.
e
p
Ó>. ÇO
>, E
u á
c
^
G
ÿCÁ
3v
"^
O
Z
4'
C
Ó
is
V
E -O
w
HO
m..
ú
C
0
0
v
5 0
c°
C
á.º
C
v
s
vQ «
aov
.
V
eon
vCCp
c
v.0vó a1".,,ó-ÿ
Nú.,
á v
...° M2'IZ
v x
N
°
vá
C .0v42
w CI.0
C0ÿ a EvCa
a
..
Ww-
F
.v
.,0
vºá^v
á
ú°-vyB
F.a7
u
e3
Q
41
t
úp
w
.i,
7CwiN"
Q.
OVc
,Mvp
7i
OO..,Ght
,, r, o c
d 4
Q
c'
CaiEl
,
.0
dd
M
Lv
ObE =:v"O
eOú.vOopúT.
Z.0vii
v
70.,
b
á`nvú
ei
e"
r'.y7Ná
«jp,°Éw^.3vú
vv
va [
C.op
î
"
v0
encr,v.
a) C
C
v
v
cd
'=
i.
avn \
w
.
Ó
cfvoI.
E
v
.4 -S
"-E
v v C
.%
yazn.: c
E.4
a
: óº
v..a -n.
«
vp.0.
7
. ºóF°°
.
v
v
de«yJCQúS
v
IL
-C v-pO
a
ÿ
x 7°6
ó<
ca
-5óbO
W
> OL
Q.
ON
ÿ"
Mÿyº°ü
O«
dO21
z
N,
1uió
v.
ti,-..
arv :. Ui
Li-.
y
Q.,
v I.
.r
wOA.
-e
Ñj
"a
v
E
w.
G
dº
61
w
vgóa
u-
v v
w.,O
C
l'o
^
G
i. ;;
.k
v
0 úv°r"aa
v v
al
v
J
\ v Eÿ
°./QEaa,.
0
4
OA
E
2
ÿâ>
o
ea
a)
),0 v bOO.
aE:\X..
tl
`nó
C
ú
M
u
v
a
..
4
v
O
a
Vñ.9 v .
J4
a
0 ú
O
ÿ
..ca
O
v v
..«O«
ev
a
°John
v
ca
O.
r25
"N
v
a.v N¡
v y
v.be
4
v
Ñ
O
U
v ..
CO
p
ya;
.a
a
-.a. Oá
v
Ñ
C
.^.1.-...
ñ
/)v
4.7
a
u 0
wW4
4
'
+.
v
U
N
ea
0
c v
v
U
p
E"íu
~
Ó k
..Q
`n
N
v.
.
C
`
í.
ay.,.
á
a
gj
..x4
aÿ
v
a
y.
vMbroc
..-...g,
N
C
112
á
v a v
0 v
>
Q
2
w
v
a_d.,,
vN vv C
b
v
.i
a
ea+
.N
C 4.
ev
6)
ai
O
v v
E
Ó
.w.
.c
a
vE
ÿ,,cI.
hNO
vvcXÿr
b
~v 1 O°
Aa1
WvC
C..
Na
II óvò e
a Cwÿ
ú v^
a
SG
N
."
2
v.
7,,. .-er
a
v
ÿ
O
~
0 vv
"a
0v
a+
C
.0 IIC
.á II
á,
u
aO. 6!
E
CO
4.
Cp
V
,ÿ
ea
C
E
:
C
v
ai
OÁ
!'
«
ß,
Ó
c,
in..c
.:
e iU
C
á1
4.)i
áoC
o«v>
N
u
c
.
vi
ÿ CM
to
.4
cl
G.
O
:S -0
p
n.
v
v.
vO
},á
>v o.,aO.
~k
e
z
i0NvCJ0G«0ca v0áca
i 4Nv
a 6C C9°MÿW v"
4.,
N.bcdNÉ.0°Op ~
E'ap]
v. Cÿ C
,
c
v~
,2
74
v a
aOW a.IIvv
in
de.
0I.
2,
CU
Ñ
ce
N
,
;
a
v
1,-.3
0.0
^ie
cu
N
O
avwzÿº.,d
ñ.óo;.
d
0
G«
0
a
CNÓ
Ni
I.
N
72,
C q
50v
=N4
C
.
v
V V
2,
(1'
.iUCro
Oái0
.Y
.
u Ñ«
O.
.7
v
ï
v0
v
O.
N
a
'ro ^d
.°vn
vE
o...O..0
I.
00
M/
vMi
v ÿ
N
Á
OCQII.Óvv
v
v T
..
a..
eN
O.
A.
v
.°
-
6J
ro
b
ó
C
>,
U
ÿ ppC
v
QJ
vI3 v.N(,.d1.- NpO
e ca_,ítU
Ñ?rGv
Ton°
úó
i v~
2.1
«
a..
d
.ti
d'N
6)lae'v'
°ú
0
a
ÿ
61
Oa.
Nco°
N
.Vv.v
v
v.)'7ÿv
d
V
Q...0
úW4pE
V
ap
ÿv wvlCv
o vO...
:53.5. O.7
Nÿ:
-.e,pti..0.
.
iav
Gw.- v
0L
vF--
e
u.Cw
tl..
o?1zsb
û_
ca
OC
N.
aO.aaop
e
ÿ0
^vw3 a
it -°
a
-x
Ctl Úv
.p'Óc
Cu
^4
O
Ow
O..
g
.V
a
e5
v
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
v
av
5
á) a
.d
-e 0
aJ
ENvv°7
g 3pzv
v>r
P,,
ep
Q
x
vvO
m0
W a-__O-Wea
C
W
O O
v
a
.-
Eú
aaa. ú ÿ
O
N
:
.
PHILCO
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-5
MODEL M-20
BEND
EAR OF BRACKET
56-7402
NEEDLE PRESSURE SPRING
56-7403
ii\i'H\i\\111i\
TP -9993
FIGURE 8.
MEASURING VERTICAL FRICTION
TP -9997
FIGURE 9.
NEEDLE-PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
COUNTERWEIGHT
TP -9992
FIGURE 10.
®John
F.
MEASURING HORIZONTAL FRICTION
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH.
PAGE 20-6 PHILCO
MODEL M-20
GREASE
OIL
(4 SLIDER POINTS
AND IDLER
SUPPORT SHAFT)
GREASE
GREASE
GREASE
GREASE
TP
FIGURE 11.
-9996
TOP VIEW, SHOWING LUBRICATION POINTS
GRAPHITE
OIL
GREASE
GREASE
GREASE
GREASE
GREASE
TP -9991
FIGURE 12.
©John
F.
BOTTOM VIEW, SHOWING LUBRICATION POINTS
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
PHILCO RCD. CH. PAGE 20-7
M-20
MODEL
L
\Ç
v
Oq
u
w4
S
:
I'
á
cu
T7 r4,
-2
-2
v
4
2
fe
(el
Y
i
V,
Tu
:: c
v
a,
3
.;
v
ó
a:
. c
++
m` =°
J ñ.i
¡yL
a;
4
E
yNj
a
á
X
m
C
"
...
C.
C.
°::º
at
6!
.
°',
ÿ
ÿ
Ó
a
v°
.4
RS
":
0
6.)
C
a.á. ir +
>
wca
4
N
>>
övac7a
Q v v ó o
`o .. (r) I-
f
º
2, el e,o
.L..'á
4
C
dsá
"" 4" ÿ
v:'
c
C-.
á
_A
WM
eu
t,o
ñ+ÿ7
a
L
4
..7.
~ c..G,C
E=
p4a ÿU[
rd
FFen
oe
a
°:
o
Fo
¿ "C
E
;¿.
E=9 -
O
v=x
UAC7cL
E
_°:
E
'
CA
C3
re
6/
,
1-1..0
Z.
ca
>`
O
4
0
-O
.Ir
V
E--+
è
:,
v_.)
C"!
oo
a
ó
e
.
61
º
4 .-.c
L.
Z ow
á
ú°áo
.9
b
a,
cá
C
¿"
,(2
ea
u
Ç
f'.r
ed
p
>`a
61
u
4 v a
4
ÿ
a cc «°: b
OA
Q
a
a _V
Cd
E
.
ti
3
E
cv0
.º
ó
4
N n
Z7
,v
awy, v.vhv.á3
QJ..C.o
3
y
FI
-E'
©
O
...
o O v
la
W
ó.r a... .V.
E
4
Ó.
cca
^o
0,0
v-°'bac
°ºw
p v
Z
A
44)0>m
w
<
ú
c
I O.0.6
ó.c
w vu
7
íu.
atC
cua
u
h
>ÿ
N
a4i
ó
O..
dc0
Ó Ó4
_ó
fl ^ ° O
c
C
'
c
6/
W
.a.
w°w'a°.33
;L
Ú
4 á
I11FdO
.:K;er,
C
r7
.w-e
C.J
m
O
s7
.:C
°c
v
o
o
c.. ñ.
*
b
Ó.
MO
4
v
CD
44)
v,
ea
ww4
ÿ
.9
u
Go
C
ea
oow°"
DA
a,
O
ÿ
coa
a
C
a
4
cu
w
ÿ
L
c
a
o
L
E
4 u
I
61
ta
.-.
C
O
vw
C
ta
v
L
b
Ó
.
CCo>....
°
ta
*
w2
-2"""«.
wty
N
v ,.-o C eu
.o
y
v,
G
p
C
C.: v b in 4 i...-;
v
N
"
o-.
".".
4a;,,
° ÿ
.a
c6Â a
+".
°a,a+.caeU^
Id.
a
á
yp
d0ÿ
4
~fS.in h
c
á E v
u
aw
a o
Cti
NcoC
2=:ÿ
a. 0-.
*
C" C pÑ
°p
."+"
...
w
Ó
4
b.
y
ac
""
...
-o o
C
ka
C
d>
*
C M
Ò
is
wy
q
Ñ
"
.0a
á. v
á
O
w
eg
>uti
Oa
.vC
-c2
ÿ
a;,,,
v
a
4
ü ª
,C
-a
G
4.1
d Ci
C7 F-
G1
t°
O
CI
c
C
a"w°
.II
.M
e~a
ú
ca
úi
ro
ao
,G
`
iy
..
v :9
C
.ó
vC
v
eCa
o
"O
E
í; -2, _g
s
.L tel
C
y
Ñ
b°
0
«
O
c ó, yp-22
`a
c? a vom n
v
u-euc
>,U
4có,v
4x'OAa
ª ch ! EoóC Eyç
cw v."
N
ó
w"
it
7
"
a>
a
a
O'ú
«c
g Gº ..... c4 M.aó ó`n`nú ú.Lcº°ocy':
6
cZv3 o ó` vy a01--mw ó º°
Gá .e: ú+ v' L°
C.
CQ
a.av,aú..>
e
«"v ai
, c v4Fw
acu
° a*4.-ao.0 w gC7aa g.g.enencnFAF<x>
4?,
dp «.?Q"VpCOC7aZ FFFenC4F.,AA
ca
V 4
V,
Q0"i....-..
u
4 .-.
ÿ
,
C
CI
c,
ó
-O°
v
re
O
-C
3
p". °
«O
o
>
C7
E
a
ÿ v
Ó
úe, r2
ed
V
-5-.9.
a
W
O V
cw
v
v
FI
IN-
w -.A
>. O.o
.c c 8d
..
pp
Nns
-Ó.ÿ
4 11,a4
wc. c.r ú °
CD
.+
C
y
A
o a
to
F-
c
O
N
4 e
p
v
tr
Q >-7,
W 11 "
Et~
Ñ
Cw
a
2
p
I
4
in
cc
4a.
ci
x'4
4
a
c
Ó O
V
m
W
...
C
4 EOC
4
V
T7 O
C C
w
<
o. cc
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
m`
ú
Ñ a
ea
a 4
4
a«7
c
e"
,°,
h
c() u u
c4a
w
v°
a
e"
V
4 4
Yl
Oa..
ÿ -
E
Cre"
u
ca
p v
u
61 '
a
Q
iá
4
eá
^o
.7
4
ó
`°
°1
C
c
S
a
A
ta
H
a
eCj
aa1
m
íuv..9m
>
ñ.
a4i
.u..
... f..
p
4
E
O
ia
Ii-' a
°
4-0
óE
o 0 0 o
o
ú
Ó
Ç
ó
7
m
W
N
í4..
°:
aEi
,a
...
ca
e"
7
09
`u
` /v
ÿ
y
es
cpoáEEo
...
o
u y v
v
aa ...ç4>voa,
ÿ a°« 9" h
4
E
r
nr
ÿ
x
o
v
v
E
y0
ca
.ZP
r -w
-a
'
v
oC
'Ñ
Ñ
.C...ÓL
V
a,
v
o ÿ
º
O
a
v
v" E
"+
O
zt
Nc0
.4
V G
H
v
i.
4X
4.tj
W
*
Ó
dco
4 p1
Z v y.
C0
C
C
ú
4
ä,
a o E-,
o E w
" 4u a
c A
c
C
C
dbb
a;
«y
C .C7`
O
CJ
u¿,
1a
1
.;
4 4
v d0
n!
"g .-c r, 4:r
u«
a>.
V
i
C1C
01p
"a
Ou
.t
V,
4
d
á
te
'w a0
ce
C
b
C
61
C
°ç
P..
v
°".°o O C
v
;44 $-o va' a Ha
-oó.94y'w°:eu
ú'>
4
C
r-ac
-ov(aóoN
;Ï
g Cb..
.+
eu
6J
v
CU
4
'
'°
V
4
aEi
O
-0
61
V
'á,.ti.
a
u=^>o'
C_.
c 7 C va '°a ÿ
X
7
..
o
c4a
CI)
ü
C
s
a°-a
o
C
o lo 4
v
.V.
4 v h
.á
0
...
ó"
...
A
py
w
P4
a)
3
QQ
O
O
a.
E.a
b
cui
v
Ó
.c u
ca
v
o
x=:
«c a
"^
" Ó á é°,á w
V-.
k
w
..T °«
v w
ru
Z.',
°a.=
d%
....c .+
C
ac°á~4
ÿ .2
v,
Zi
u W
p
>`
a
_\
C
°6J
a
E
l
_T
a."
ñ
1.44C^
^.
....
(a
V,
cCd
"
vgo
*a,
* W
v;.."
V
Ql
6/a
o4eá
C
o
>,
á v
d ..0 4
a
.-
cr.
b
fa
Ill
>
;
ea
<1J
C
«
E
3
Ci
a4i
O
N
b
OJ
..L
>.
u
u
v
4 ai
I.
.:.
^o
o
.
ca
o
Na
4
ai
_
20-8 PHILCO
RCD. CH.PAGE
M-20
MODEL
"
C
L
N
C:
r
G
..
L.
.°'..
L
c
t7
.0..
L
n
v
n
o
.,
> n
u
-
ÿ
L.
^
n
u
C
n
n
'
E
m
u
3
á
:
ii7
n
.,
CL
C
a;_-s
-
i_
L
;iu
C:L
n
7
_ ;.
JL
33.
=4
C
°V
U
C7
n
;
n
Uu_ x`u,-
u
u
-_
c c úEä_
dx xx'uc_ x
s
_
E.
L
-..
..
-
E
_?
^
W
>
^
`
C/D
r./2
.
+,
i+
r
EW
'.i
7
m`
,L
`n¡
ó
n n
U
.7
E
E
E
u
G
zL
U
v
0
pE
di
tel
u
C
L.
O'
'
3 ÿ
u
7.-ut3
E
u
C
Q
t7
u._
1
á U
c
J Q u u
E.
7
o
ci E
u
` u
E ai
CL
cC
Lú
L
cá
U
u u
u
Ñ^ S
-
cL
.-.
.
_
a
Ì
_ _.
-=
L
7
u
p_
1
:y
U
7
7,--=
-
L
7
E
.
u
r`
u=
=u'`
L L
`
U
ú
C
U
L 7L
ú
C
C
'
_
_
v ..:
Z _" - __ .--
-
ÑL
C4
Q
L
Lu _ -
A
.n>ú
Ce
O
o
e
ú
E
.c
z..
n
n
,
1
°J
n
C
c.
íc.
Ñ...
5
O
s
O
52._',-,..,1,21..
u
d
có
7O L
-'
-ó
o
O
xd- -!- n-x
B.
c
C
u
'
ó
L
c
0.
-
C:
O
u
O
u
T.
º-
ú
h
O
n
`
.9
in
U
Q V
Er
.,,
7
n
Á
L
ú7
t i_
>.
n
=
.,
u
r
Ìx
:
..i
u.
L_^ÿ¡
C1
r
^,
C
C
C
E
`J
`v
E
T.
Ó
a
y
oq
C
L
7{
Y
d
O
c
u
v
-
ú
L"-
L
Lú ti
::
m
$ u
tp
ú
W
Ä
C
11.!..'
L "up
7
ú
a
°'
... G
n
:'
.`.
N
o
.: r
§E
n
ÿ.
L
V
Ñ
t E
.U.
C
7
ái
O
c
d
: "Y,-=.2
=L
.
Ç
a.
Ó
ó
L
G_
_r
Jc
.x^
ñ
i
u
t'y
:7
n
r
u LLc
E
_Y
.
.
ÿ
E
Ir,
w
.. c
ÿ
ñ
2Ny
iI
.:
.. ! C-
'
4.
d
-r
eV7
LE
4.;-
7
L C'.i L' 7 n
L
.U.
eL
n
!-
`LV
O
O
c'
7
L
^
4j '61
E c
:
C
Ñ
7
O--'_-
OQ
j'ÿ
O.
=
-3
Gr
O
E
L
.
O-
L vui v
«
n
-L
.L.
0.7L
O
a 0
v>.C
O
G
U
7n
C
>
LU
.,.
t
lJ
r.
^ 3 n
.7.-
C:
U
Ç
L
U
.7U
;'
aU Zx7
o
,;
n
L7 L
=4
C
r.LL
7
E
u
7
.2 C: n
:Er
:r _L- !tp
cn
`L
.
Ú
- c
-Eu.7oc
¡
=
C
+
:L
u
CZ
7
..
"
ì Ls L
-
c_
yo
7.::
_-_3^,u
.' 7
E éi
-r
Z
r
Er
U
L
...
_
C
i
u
-9L
u-v óu
E
u
'
.LU.
73
L7
O
ó7
ú
L.
7L
E
7c
G.
O
-5,
J...
_
O
C
C
_
`- `
I
:L _c -9
7
= Cr
:7
g
E
^4
r.
.ZL`
."..
L. .._
v
9....c
Ç
C
n.
O
d
a.3i Lm
n
...
O
L
.`0
.
n
Ò
C
ì
tC
.'
E?
vui
O
O.
ú
O u
E
ñ
_'` '
:L
_
_
ì,7L
L E.`;
r'
n
-
C
E
:L
c
CL
y
LZ Lp_C
Ú
L U U
zu
íu.
n
P
eLr.
ü
C.!
5
"u
_e
c=
F
J
ÇL
7::
+,`_.
L-
7C C
u`
u ú
u
_
u7
c `
n O
_
3
_
_:---:.-t
ú
Ci
-_
.
d
U
u
u
L
U
U
t
^
E.
7.-.
V1
_c
_
-
u y
E3L
` rú
-
-u-
C
t
c.
3 C
C
C`t._
r..:.
u ..
y
Oq
.
ry
_°
^
aJ.
,
C
..
-L ñ
v
u
--9.
_:
_
_
.U.
r
..
I -_ -`_
__o. _
_
` oc = 0. C
C
V L C
c,
á
ú-r 7 E
C
C
..
z
_
O
L
L
Or'7_
d_
u
C
v
C
3.
L
.. L
._
ÿ
C
u
.Eu
c
.:
"
°E
r-
ÿ.l_Cr.
%
c
r._
C?
3
3
J
ÓI W
Ñ
7
ú
.
O
5
E
C
.
_r
^
.-
.`
n
.u.
ÿ
7
c
ö u
cu
E
_
J
E
O
u
d
C
2_
C U
Ä
ti
L
j=
.u : N
^
O
z
h.
i
7... 7 ``
E
E
.
7
E
7..
O_
3
>
m
u
c_
d
L
u
u'C
_-c
c
J
O
L
^
.:L A
.
L
ai
c
G.`"
p U
7 7.;
.e
>. n
Cz
_
t?=7 _ú:.
u
u
ei
'4,
u
OL
L L..
-
v 0
_^
C
C
=
T
_
'Si
Ç
O O
L
L`^
¡ c^
.
0
7
^
.y
ì
°
ú ñ cn
.n.
15
.CL
c
7
7
7 L
U
_C 3
E=
J
c
=
c`^.
,
Ce
ñ
LC.,
7 C_. L^L CL-' 3'_"`Lr 1
=
i'
r_ .....ñL?L.r nïr s9
úr
3
L C^
U
iY.
`
` `
ç
n ú
u
n 3
i. :L
ÇC
W á
ìn
C
O-
P
L.
c
.. u u
7U
Ó
O
ú Ci>:
Q
C
Ç
U
n
7ai, 1
ayVU?
C
n
,..........2
`
_= -0
.:
.
L_``- u..
u
:-0
n
-0
J
n V
c
v
L
c
3 C
Ä
j.`^.
v
CZ
C
"'
E- 7
L7
Q.
.J
-0
O.
U-
L
:L
cc
CL7.^. L
E
'
E
.
U
éc
7- t
424.
c <Y
..ì
..
o
n 0
7L
iV7
..
L
LLú
Á
E
6
r
°
N
5
.
=D
E -- 7 QL:^
uu
ïu uu L_=u
Q
c_1 ,..,.....2.4,
=
r- ÿ.x=."' n. () u 7 ó_ U_
O
zn:
ÿxxx..
=x
_^
JxL z ^
C
_.E
Jc
Cz4_n `c G
....
.1
u
cL ` Tc 3LLL
7
: x
--íV
u u
O
-..
_Z
.c.-4
.
ruo
c
U
7
vi.4.'.'J
7
.
o
e¿
L
C
. 7`c
;
L
7a
O.
E
L
y
w
n
S
O
J
C
n
CL
i
c
.
un
r
C vL
ÿ
.,
ci
ci
:
n
7
c
= ` -
E
7
7
tú
ú
ú
u
:L
u:LL
Á
C
2L,¡
v
L.
-^ `fL L 7v
J
,
-.r
- L_
_ -_ J
> 3 5L
.:
ñ
-^
ç
LC
r
.
Á
L
7
r
: ^.r
Ç
c
E U n
u
:
ñ
E
`
u; ú
Es r.z 7
:íGt
.0: 7
L r`. n..n
a
C
v`
0
c`3i
_
Ä==
.E
=
E
d
C
ÑW rL
L
r
-
Ó..
:L
g n
u
Ç
ü
E
7
`
:.
C
tC
:9
r¡
O
-
.X
.'.
Ç
.i7 L
c
_
-
.c.
O
O
_
r
-r-=:E_ f c
' _?:
;L.
> U
CD
2
n
y O
r r
u`
`
- CL
N.`,2... 3
-
,; Lu
...
. :á
O
C
O
C
o
E
rL
- r
E
U
`L
14:
L
n
..
;,7
7
E E
n u
V
E
`0
Ln
U
O
°
i
_ú
E
Ti
v
G_
r
v
7
7C
L
n
r0
.Q
.
L
í0
c ú R O
u
.. a
ÿ ...
7? f
22Etr ni.'
ÿ.
E
-E
ú7`
T
_L
.
_
:
Ú
..'
L
.,`
Ó^,t
c
- =ì'
c4
_
L
L J
c
-_
-L u.
`
(i L
1
iI
J UT L
,ó'
7
:
c^-'r"
cffióóóuEróóoó,Yic
s- u
n
-- 7%r7cC
° t
:ÿ r
c`.. - úx 5
L
º':t üO~ tt ó..: áL cid tiV...:
ú;- ç.c~
7z `- ä5 .c -o=L
; I!i
-r
^-+
-----
u
C
.3
..
.'.
L -
©John
F.
O
i
C
t"."
Ñ
¿,'1
U
v
=
_
5
c.
_ ...
..
a
C
_
i
c C
c.--
1
P1
c,
.
7
5 = ..
ú
?
..
'57;
.1;
.0u
Cl
V M
E
C
pO
...
LZL
-L
~O
Z
O.
E.
.ru.
ú c,
Ó
v
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Z.O
p
ó
ñ n O
r. 6 3 u
C
m LL'
Q ú c
.
v
c.;
.
1::7"----u
0.
-Ti C
¡¡
M
=i
Q
E
ö
_
£,-s.
.
w
aci
C
ª+
4;
O:
'.2
°.,
c
E
O
2
?+`.'
u E
y
v
00
U
!O
á
o¿
W'
n
n
O
PHILCO RCD. CH. PAGE 20-9
MODEL M-20
TONE ARM DAMPER
TONE ARM SHELL
54-7946.1
35.2687-1
5HOW DER SCREW
56-7408-1
SHOCK MOUNT
5.1-.4729
CARTRIDGE RETAINING SPRING
SHAFT AND SWIVEL MTG. BRACKET
56-6796
56-7402
SHOCK
MOUNT
54.4729
NEEDLE GUARD
56-7612
SHOULDER SCREW
56-7408-1
CARTRIDGEAlli
VERTICAL TIMING PULL CORD
76-4649
NEEDLE PRESSURE SPRING
56-7403
76-2982-3
PIN, SHAFT AND SWIVEL IMO
56-7011
CONTACT PLATE
76-4647
FABRIC
TUBING
FRONT RETAINER PLATE
WIRE SPACER
56-7406
REAR RETAINER PLATE
MTG
SCREW
SHAFT AND SWIVEL ASSY.
76-5207-1
FIBER WASHER
FIGURE 13.
LEAD WASHER
ADJUSTING SCREW
4-40 X 7/16
RWS1958
MTG
TP -9-219
TONE -ARM ASSEMBLY
3OLT
MAGNETIC INDEX STOP
76-5497
4-40 X 5/16
WASHER
STOP SPRING
IW51919FA3
56-4613
TRIP FINGER
54-7613-1
CLAMP SCREW
10-32 X I
TRIP RECEIVER
STOP SPRING
56-7491
56-4613
WASHER
TRIP ARM STOP
56-4614
TRIP ARM
76-4204
MTG
NUT
4-40
CLAMP SCREW NUT
56-7042
FIGURE 14.
e
TRIP -ARM AND TRIP -RECEIVER ASSEMBLIES
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
TP -9-202
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-10 PHILCO
MODEL M-20
OIL
MTG. SCREW
6X5/8
GREAS
WASHER
MTG. SPACER
56-4926
SHOCK MOUNT
54-4501
SHOCK MOUNT
MOTOR
35.1430
MTG. SPACER
56-4926
WASHER
54-4501
HAIRPIN FASTENER
\'
y
CLOTH WASHER
MTG. SCREW
6 X
5/8
IDLER WHEEL
76-5267
MOTOR SHAFT LEVER SPACER
56.7698
COMPRESSION SPRING
56-7548
DRIVE
BELT
PULLEY ASSY.
54-7959
45.6499
HAIRPIN FASTENER
FIGURE 15.
TP -9-204
MOTOR ASSEMBLY-PART NO. 35-1430
SHOCK MOUNT
54-4501
IDLER WHEEL
45.6558
PULLEY
45-6559
SHOCK MOUNT
54-4501
SHOCK MOUNT
54-4501
FIGURE 16.
°John
F.
MOTOR ASSEMBLY-PART NO. 35-1433
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
TP -9-4556
PHILCO RCD. CH. PAGE 20-11
MODEL M-20
SELECTOR LEVER
56-7500
SELECTOR LINK BAR
56-7505
DETENT ROLLER
56-7501
FABRIC TUBING
1/8 X 5/32
RUBBER TUBING
"E" WASHER
1
W 60980FE7
PUSH OFF ACTUATOR
56-4588
DETENT SPRING
56-7502
"E" WASHER
1
W 60971
FE
7
GREASE
SPACER
56-7594
45 RPM
TRIP ACTUATOR
76-5262
HORIZONTAL ACTUATOR
76-5323
GREASE
HORIZONTAL TIMING LINK
56-7023
WASHER
"E" WASHER
1W60980FE7
SAFETY SPRING
56-4608
45
VERTICAL TIMING LINK
56-7023
ACTUATOR SPRING
RPM TRIP RESET LEVER
ACTUATOR SPINDLE
56-7503
56-7504
56-7625
VERTICAL ACTUATOR
76-5322
TRIP LATCH RETURN SPRING
56-7033-2
TP -9-220
FIGURE
©John
F.
17.
ACTUATOR AND SPEED -CHANGE ASSEMBLIES
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-12 PHILCO
MODEL M-20
"E" WASHER
HAMMER ACTUATOR SPRING
56-7033
1
W60977FE7
CURVED WASHER
1W56306FE15
1
"E" WASHER
1
WASHER
W52323FA3
W60977FE7
HAMMER
76-5324
WASHER
56-7497
SPACER
WASHER
45 RPM TRIP LATCH ASSY.
1
W52323FA3
76-5247
MOUNTING PLATE ASSY.
76-5245
TRIP LOCK SCREW
CONTROL SPRING'
56.5760
TRIP
56-7486
SPACER
56-7497
LOCK WASHER
MOTOR POWER SWITCH
42-1867
TRIP LOCKNUT
BRIDGE 56 -5761.1
BRIDGE MTG. SCREW
"E" WASHER
CONTROL SLIDER*
56-5759.1
1
W60977FE7
TRIP
PLATE
76-5252
"E" WASHER
1
W60977FE7
WASHER
CAM GEAR ASSY.
76-3995-2
TP -9-221
FIGURE 18.
©John
F.
CAM -GEAR AND BRIDGE ASSEMBLIES (BRIDGE ASSEMBLY PARTS
ARE IDENTIFIED BY *)
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
PHILCO RCD. CH. PAGE 20-13
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-14 PHILCO
MODEL M-20
PUSH OFF SLIDE PLATE
SPACER
GREASE
56-7306
PIN
56-7701
MTG. SCREW
PUSH
GREASE
7"
10"-12" HOLD-DOWN
PUSH OFF BLADE
RETURN SPRING
56-7412
10"-12" HOLD-DOWN
BUMPER
7" PUSH OFF BLADE
56-7513
7"
OFF ROD
56-7307
54-4592-
10"-12" HOLD-DOWN SPRING
MTG. SCREW
PUSH OFF BLADE SPRING
56-7322
56-7575
MTG. SCREW
7" HOLD-DOWN SPRING
BALL
56-7514
10
10"-12"
W2510
PUSH OFF COVER
7" HOLD-DOWN BUMPER
GREASE
54-7941
PUSH OFF SADDLE
7" HOLD-DOWN WIRE
-
56-7309
7"
PUSH OFF COVER
MTG.
SCREW
WASHER
MTG. SCREW
CONTROL BUTTON MTG. SHAFT
56-7509
SHELF ASSEMBLY SPRING
56-4630
FULCRUM PLATE
56-7510
SPRING RETAINER WASHER
56-4627
RING SPRING
56-4628
GREASE
CONTROL BUTTON
76-3993-1
GREASE
SPEED NUT
CONTROL BUTTON
76-3993-1
SCREW
6-32 X 1/4
RETURN SPRING
56-4600
LOCK WASHER
PUSH OFF HANGER
56-7507
REAR PUSH OFF BAR
56-4774
SAFETY SLIDER
56-4599-1
FRONT PUSH. OFF BAR
56-7515
FIGURE 20.
©John
F.
RECORD -SHELF AND PUSH -OFF ASSEMBLIES
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
TP -9-203
PHILCO RCD. CH. PAGE 20-15
MODEL M-20
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Actuator Assembly
Actuator, horizontal
Actuator, trip, 45 r.p.m.
Actuator, vertical
"E" washer
"E" washer
Link, horizontal and vertical timing (2 )
Reset lever, 45 r.p.m. trip
Spacer
Spindle, actuator mounting
Spring, actuator (2)
Bridge Assembly
Bearing assembly, turntable
Bridge
Control link
Control slider
Cover, motor switch
Spring, control
Switch, motor power
Cam -Gear Assembly
Bushing, index lever
"E" washer
Hammer
Index lever, cam locking
Latch assembly, 45 r.p.m. trip
Mounting plate assembly
Spacer (2)
Spring, hammer actuator
Spring, index lever
Spring, 45 r.p.m. trip -latch return
Trip finger, of trip latch
Trip plate
Washer (2)
Washer, curved
Index -Selector Assembly
Bracket, selector
Feeler (2)
76-5323
76-5262
76-5322
1W60980FE7
1W60971FE7
56-7023
56-7504
56-7594
56-7503
56-7625
76-3998-1
76-2991
56-5761-1
56-7506
56-5759-1
76-4010
56-5760
42-1867
76-3995-2
56-7493
1W60977FE7
76-5324
56-7492
76-5247
76-5245
56-7497
56-7033
56-4603
56-7033-2
56-7486
76-5252
1W52323FA3
1W56306FE15
56-7477
76-5249
1W36521FA3
56-7478
56-7494
56-7305
56-7479
56-7495
1W5711FE7
Pin
Selector (2)
Selector hinge
Spacer
Spring, feeler (2)
Spring, selector hinge
Tubular slip
Motor Assembly, 60 cycles
35-1430
(see figure 15)
Cable -and -plug assembly, motor power 41-3869
54-7959
Drive belt
76-5267
Idler wheel
45-6499
Pulley assembly
54-4501
Shock mount (3)
56-4926
Spacer, mounting
56-7698
Spacer, motor shift lever
56-7548
Spring, compression
©John
F.
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
Motor Assembly, 60 cycles
(see figure 16)
Idler wheel
Pulley
Shock mount (3)
Spacer, mounting
Motor Assembly, 25 cycles.
Motor Assembly, 50/60 cycles
Conversion kit for 50 -cycle
operation
SERVICE
PART NO.
35-1433A
45-6558
45-6559
54-4501
56-4926
35-1446
35-1442
40-7848
Push -Off -Bar Assembly
Actuator, push -off
Bar, push -off, front
Bar, push -off, rear
Hanger, push -off
Safety slider
Spring, return
Push -Off and Shelf Assembly
Ball
Bumper, 10"-12" hold-down
Bumper, 7" hold-down
Control button (2)
Fulcrum plate
Hold-down wire, 7"
Pin
Push -off blade (7")
Push -off rod
Shaft, control -button mtg.
Slide plate, 10" and 12" push -off
Spring, 7" hold-down
Spring, 10" and 12" hold-down (2)
Spring, 7" push -off blade
Spring, 7" push -off blade return
Spring, ring
Spring, shelf assy.
Washer, spring retainer
56-4588
56-7515
56-4774
56-7507
56-4599-1
56-4600
76-5259
W2510
54-4592
54-7941
76-3993-1
56-7510
56-7309
56-7701
56-7513
56-7307
56-7509
56-7306
56-7514
56-7322
56-7575
56-7412
56-4628
56-4630
56-4627
Speed Change
Detent assembly
Lock, detent plate
Roller, detent
Selector lever
Selector link bar
Spring, detent
Tone Arm (complete)
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
76-5261
56-7499
56-7501
56-7500
56-7505
56-7502
35-2692-3
Bracket, mounting for shaft and swivel 56-7402
Cartridge
Contact plate
Damper, pyralin
Guard, needle
Needle
Pin, shaft and swivel
Pull -cord assembly, vertical timing
Retainer plate, front
76-4649
76-4647
54-7946-1
56-7612
35-2693
56-7011
76-2982-3
56-6795
20-16 PHILCO
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL M-20
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST (Continued)
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE
PART NO.
Retainer plate, rear
Screw, shoulder, swivel mounting (3)
Shaft -and -swivel assembly
Shock -mount, swivel mounting (3)
Spacer, wire, shaft and swivel pin
Spring, cartridge retaining
Spring, needle pressure
Spring, safety, pull -cord
Stanchion, tone arm
Tone-azr.: shell
Trip Arm
Index stop, magnetic
Nut, clamp screw
Pull -cord assembly, horizontal timing
Spring, safety, pull -cord
Spring, stop (2)
Trip -arm stop
Trip finger
Trip receiver
Washer (2)
Washer, lead
i
I
DESCRIPTION
56-6794
56-7408-1
76-5207-1
54-4729
56-7406
56-6796
56-7403
56-4608
56-5746-1
35-2684-1
Miscellaneous
Base-plate and tone -arm -stanchion
assembly
Bumper, rubber, tone -arm rest
Cable clamp
Driver, 45 r.p.m. record
Insert (adaptor), 45 r.p.m. record
Spindle
Cotter pin, spindle retaining
Spring, spindle
Switch, tone -arm -output selector
Tone-arm rest
76-4204
76-5497
56-7042
76-2982-2
56-4608
56-4613
56-4614
54-7613-1
56-7491
IW51919FA3
8W51958
Felt ring, turntable bearing
AThis motor
is
45 RPM
2 PRONG'
NEEDLE
I
WHITE
__I_-
-
TONE -ARM
ASSEMBLY
z-7\
\L___/ t
45 RPM
/C-
I
J
1.1F
ST D
PLAY
O
PHONO INPUT
PLUG
o
I
l
-
L
BLACK
LONG
PLAY
L
-1/
TONE -ARM OUTPUT
SELECTOR SWITCH
42-1873
ON-OFF
SWITCH
PHONO
MOTOR
FIGURE 21.
©John
F.
ZW35740
56-7508
42-1873
56-6376
54-7385
not stocked. Order Part No. 35-1430.
.01
O
LONG PLAY
76-5256
54-4647
56-2832
56-7747
54-4744
76-3926-1
Turntable
STD PLAY
GREEN
SERVICE
PART NO.
PHONO
MOTOR
POWER
WIRING DIAGRAM OF MODEL M-20
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
TRAV-LER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-1
MODEL A
Trav-ler Record Changer
Model
A
OPERATION OF RECORD CHANGER
For 10" records the long side of the record shelf (11) must be turned
counterclockwise (Fig. 6) so that it points toward the spindle (47).
For 12" records, the short side of the record shelf (11) must be
turned counterclockwise so that it points toward the spindle (47).
In either case, always
This
a click is heard..
one of two slots on the
rect positioning of the
turn the record shelf counterclockwise until
will be the 10"-12" index lever (9) engaging
This insures cor10"-12" index
cam. (12).
or
playing.
cycling
mechanism during
Lift the record holddown plate (20) Fig. 6 to the rear of the record
shelf (11)(if it is not already there) and place two or three records
Return the record holdon the spindle (47) and record shelf (11).
holding them in place.
records
on
the
down plate (20) so that it rests
Turn the control knob (29) to the Reject position and hold momentarRelease the control knob (29) and it will return to the ON posily.
ition for automatic operation.
If the
mechanism is working properly more records may be added.
10" or 10 - 12"
standard records not mixed, and to operate on 115-117 volts 60 cycles.
This changer was designed
to play automatically 12
-
CYCLE OF OPERATION
Drawings A through 5 show Trav-ler Model A Record Changer progressing
through a complete cycle of operation.
shows the bottom view of the Record Changer with the drive
Fig. B shows the bottom view of the Record
belt in place.
and
wheel
Changer with the drive wheel and belt removed and the main cam (40)
All parts visible from the bottom of the Record Changer
in place.
are labeled in these 2 drawings.
Fig.
A
through 5, the drive wheel (41) and main cam (40) have
been omitted for sake of clarity and to show operation of otherwise
The main cam, however, hes been shown in these drawings
hidden parts.
to illustrate its position.
line
as a dotted
If Figs.
1
Only those parts are labeled in Figs. 1 - 5B which are operative or
referred to in that particular phase of cycle. Figs. 1, 1A, and 1B
illustrate the parts of the Record Changer in the OFF or normal position.
To start the change cycle, turn the control knob (29) to the Reject
position as shown in Fig. 2A. Release the control knob and it will
automatically return to the ON position as shown in Fig. 3A.
This causes the reject arm actuating lever (26 Fig. 2) to move to the
left, causing the reject arm (35 fig. 2) to pivot and push the ON e
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-2 TRAV-LER
MODEL A
And at the same time
OFF switch (22 Fig. 2) to the ON position.
point A of the reject arm (25 Fig. 2) pushes against the release arm
(35 Fig. 2) releases its hold on the cam pawl (39 Fig 2C) allowing it
1.41
to drop down and engage the raised portions of the drive wheel
Fig. 2C).
The drive wheel is driven by the drive belt (142) and drive
pulley (146 Fig. A)
(
.
The pickup arm
This section starts turning the main cam ()40 Fig. B).
(point C) in
the
depression
lift (56 Fig. 3B) which normally rests in
depression
out
of
the
is
forced
the top of the main cam (140 Fig. 3C)
of the
cam
for
the
duration
surface
of
the
end rides around the flat
forces
the
pickup
arm
lift
(56)
time,
the
the
same
At
change cycle.
D,
cam
follower
(114,
point
And
the
Fig.
3B)
upward.
pickup arm (62
Fig. 3) in following the inside contour (E Fig. 3C) of the main cam
moves the pickup (62 Fig. 3A) away from the turntable (54 Fig. 3A)
(Assuming start of new cycle.
so that a record will be free to drop.
soon as point F of the main cam (140 Fig. 3C) moves against the
ejector roller (15 Fig. 3) the roller is forced away from the main
cam and the roller shaft (15) see exploded view) in turn forces the
ejector plate (16) Fig. 3A and 6 forward and pushes a record off the
record shelf (11 Fig. 14A)
As
the tension of the
(140 Fig. 3) continues to turn,
ejector spring (31 Fig. 3) forces the ejector roller (15) to follow
the outside contour of the main cam (140 Fig. )4.). This allows the
ejector plate (16 Fig. 14.A) to return to its normal position.
As the main cam
Near the end of the change cyclé as the cam follower (114, point D,
Fig. 14) reaches point G of the inside contour of the main cam (140
Fig. 4C), the pickup arm starts moving toward the turntable (514
Fig. 14.A), and when it is directly over the starting point of the record, the main cam (140 Fig. 14C) moves until the depression C, in the
main cam, is directly under the pickup arm lift (56 Fig. )B), which
causes the pickup arm (62 Fig. 14B) to lower onto the record.
As the main cam (140 Fig. )4) ends its' revolution, the cam pawl (39
Fig. )4D) comes in contact with point B on the release arm (35 Fig. 14)
and is lifted up from contact with the drive wheel (141 Fig. A also
Fig. )j1)) and thereby stopping the main cam in its original position.
The pickup arm is now free to move across the record.
Fig. 5 shows how the pickup trip arm (13) has followed the pickup arm
The pickup arm is at the
(62 Fig. 5A) as it moved across the record.
end of the record and the serrated end of the pickup trip arm has
(Also
moved against the release arm tension bracket (33 Fig. 5).
The backward and forward movement caused
see 33 on exploded view).
by the grooves at the end of the record forces the release arm tension bracket (33 Fig. 5) to pivot, and the pivot point applies pressure to the release arm (35 Fig. 5) forcing it away from the cam pawl
(39 Fig. 2C) allowing the cam pawl to drop and engage the main drive
wheel (141 Fig. 2C), thereby starting another change cycle.
o
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
TRAV-LER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-3
MODEL A
(7) RECORD HOLD DOWN PLATE
(6) RECORD SUPPORT
SHELF IN 10"
POSITION
(1) SPINDLE
(5)
PICKUP
REST POST
3
(4)
POSITION
CON1 ROL
SWITCH
(2) TURNTABLE
(3) PICKUP ARM
BOTTOM
BOTTOM VIEW
CAM
FIG. A
DRIVE WHEEL
BELT
©John
F.
IN
AND
PLACE
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
VIEW
FIG. B
IN PLACE
RCD. CH.
©John
F.
PAGE 20-4 TRAV-LER
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
TRAV-LER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-5
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-6 TRAV-LER
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
TRAV-LER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-7
MODEL A
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-8 TRAV-LER
MODEL A
x4.
C
a)
.0
'-1
,
3
ri
m
.1
0
-1
r1
'O
C
i-'
0) a>
7
m
C m
.-1 .-1
0.-1
0
4,g.,
t.
E
,
m
o
3
.-1
Na
C..4~
7
.0
.0 .0
t. 4.
O
E
r-1
t.
r1
.000
am0.03mm
A.1 ., m .0
).-)
C.
O
F. at
4-'
a)
m
U r1 m m a)
W
ri +1 A> r1>il E0
r1
A
m
O
2.,-42.,-4t. A. E
L> a) m
m.1
W£
COCO
m
'-1
4.
UCi) A
U a)
+,
I.-1
CO
ri
t. 4' a o
4-).1
m.0 m,C
.0 t.
4>
.1
13
m
O
Ge
r-1
N r'l
-e-
r-1 '
r1
.-1
C,
4-)0
a
C.
C
a.,
Co.
a)
T
A E,C
.
m
4)
t.
,O
t.
a)
v\ m
s...OCO
0
4>m
X
t.
o
m
,C
U
t.
m
ó
a>
Ç. .0 m
..-4
U
N
0
m
.-1
0
'O
o)
0
'O
O
.('.
m a)
m
4a)
t.
U
a
a)
t.
t.
m
F
.1
C.
r1010.>m+>P.t.>a a
7 r-1 7 0'0 C 7 4) m
a P x E 0X ,G
N
m
>
r-,
m
.i
t. 4. '0
-10P G
C,--100A
4> a C U 4'
.,
.i
o
OU
ri
O
o
CD t.
'0
+-1t.
3
'o m 0)
0.-1,--1 F.. 0
K
m
m
m
m
y
./.1m
0
U
0)
r1
.-)
m m
4> O E l',
C r1 t. ..' O
a) m
Q) 4-)
m
m
Q)
a0
i
o,r
1
r1
riLCU.r/x,>,>.>m
N
r-.
N
3
0
u..
CO
m
4)
.-1
W
m
CU
0
°
C
0
m
4
3.0 AI
o
>a
4>
r'7
r1
m
a>,.>aaCacuacU
r1 N
r1
r'L2`1\ r -I
of
a)
oc.)
>
0.0
0 7
4>
m
x'0
m C
ZO
rl
N
1+%_-e.1
X
CA
UCHoac
N
O
4'
.1 0
.+
7
C
.1
r-1 a> U'0
o
4>
.0
4> r1 4>
.[Yi .1 .0 r1 4) .1 C
T-.00-0
m'O a m ri
0
m> Eryi
mA
.1
m
4>
. a)
7
r, 0) Na
a) p>,C >a 6) r1 .0 ri C
N m a) 41 m
a) 3 3 a) Ó
N ri U
r1 +> t. ,L', m
7'O U O D
U
U a)
U U
4> ri
A .0
0 03 0 0 .-k 0 >0 0 0 0 .54 0
m
ri Cm rlO '0 m+'
C
'0 00 g)
a C ri r1 r
C.).-..-1
U r-1 4)
O r1 U.
a a) r1 o -(a) C.1 .1 a a a a) a a) 'O a >, m a .x
0 r1 a) r1 /-, O., .1 ,C m r1 .=7 m m N m .0
7 m C. .0 m co
m
4)
CO
m
t. .1
r1 O
C
C.
C.
CO
>a
0
0
13,0
CO
ri
O
.r./0
m'O r1
41 U
'O 4> m
C r1 Q.
m m
4)
'O
CU C
C CO
000 4.0.p.-10>, 3
t. T ri N
P..-100.0 040 pr-.
.04-/a)
C
0
m.1 r1
av
.yC m0 4..c000.,-.
.0
a>
17
v x 1`
.1
4-.
m
.iri ri
CU
m.-1
a) m
f.
-a
.-1 m
7
a
f.
X
4> +> a)
4.
.1
r-1
C
C m C
a
C 4. C
A
arl
m
m
.0 O m E CO
t. m
3
4-).----COW
4) OM
> 0.11\ a a)
0)-I
r1
I
p.m
0
0
y)
I
C
u-m7
i
O. a) A
a
m m
m,C 4>
f.
,
m
>0.
CO
4
m
a
m
O
CU
a)
m
m
r1
mEt.
m
r
.0
4>
E
t. o . .
r--1
-1
-1
4-.
,G
.1
-1
m
a>
U
O
r
4>
m
;
V
N
4>
4.
m
m
, ^ --rrn
.0
E
t00;E t.
m
t.-,o
a.
m
CO
CO
4)
.0
(D
4) m
0
m
m m
-i --'.1
C.
4)
-F-1
r1
X
a
7
o
CO
G.
._.
Cl) m
C
A.
0 --I 0 0
33
.
r1
.
r1
0-1
a
U
N
-'.0C titiC
t
'O
t.
m
m
'O
P..,
m a) >
> C 41 .1
C.
r1 r1 m 0
.
N
r'.ri
O
E_,
O
m
a)
'O
t.
>
O
C
G.
0
0
C
m
N.
+>
O
0
4>
E
0
.0
4.
3
t.
m
C-)
co
©John
F.
r1
0
.0
r1
0)
o)
N
m
T)
O Ae
4>
0
.1
K m t.
E m 4>
m
m5E
0
t.
m
a-
C 0
m 3
.1 ,C O
P. 4' 3
"^
.
f
o
4'
m m
.0 a)
C
ü .0
..
m
0
0
> r-/
C
0
0
4'
m m
mt.
>titr
0
C
O
.-I
XO
a0)
V
m R.
m
3
.
4>
m
t.
A
4>
a 4>O
m
m
r1
+>
4>
m
m
0 t.
t.
U 4. 7
U O m 0
C +1
'O
a)
t.
U'0
U
a)
06)00
U
.00000H0
4. t. C. O1:3 i-.
C.
.
(V
.....
rtil.f`.-i
a)
a)
N r'Ler1 N
(
0
4'
-5)
7
O
C
m
t.
A
t.
m
3
O
4'
A
4'
0
4'
C
0
m
el
O
mcO.
m0
O U
'O m
0
r1
r1
'o
C
7
3
m
p
Y,
10
t.
..
O
E
m
a
X
O
M
tl.
)Q
a
X
U
H
m
U m
(;
R
ÿ
N
m
7
0
CO
O
r/
(3
Z
E1
--LO
0
ó
al.
m.,Q.
c r-1
o a) C gq,, a)
o > O E>
0
m.1
4).1 m.1
4>
C 4> t. 4'
C.
d>
O
m m
I.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
O
0).-10.e.
>a a> .1 v
>'
.1
r
ri
v u1
7 a '0
C.
r.
a
A..5C
r1
a)
m>
.1
C.
4> O
4.
c.-
o y
7
0
0
0
a(3(3za
3(33(3..,
r1
.-1
o
41
m 4>
m
.1
t.;
C.
3
C
.1
C
C
o
t.
m
o
(D
t.
0
m
O
O
4>
4'
0
m
m
C.
U
0
-,
A.
CCU
ri
a)
>moE
X.,.,4-'
4. ri 'O
m
>
C
m
4> a)
C.
C.
V
G..,
o
3
U
am
.-1 a)
.1
.
U
r1
C.
m_
G
CO
7
X
.1
t.
4>
4,030E/...
c
t
.,
too
4)
a
00
C.
>
Ç.
t.
m
4-/
.1
o
7
.0 3 .1
a
CO
1
O
v,
ri .i
t.
Ú
4>
N r+_,-}
V
m
.i
t.
.....
a)
o t.3:aa(3(3
r1
N
.--4t.
C.
a)
4>
U
C
C
r/
..-i-1
m
O
O
m
U m
C
a)
E
m
4>
CU
0
E
m
CO
t.
4>
r.
4-)cN
u r1
P.,-.1 >
0.iA
a)t
i)
>
A.
4>
.r,
O.1
O
CD
0
4->.-A
a) O m
---
7
.1
O+> t)UE
o t. m
0
r-1
m
C
r1
O
U
t.
C.
0
Pa.
A.
'O
CU
4>
C.
4.
4)
r-1
.1
m
60
1>
+r
C
'O
t. C CU
t..1 C
'0 0 3.1
a)
CO
m
>'a
.O
C
.1
mt.
4'
m
va)
w
C
U.1
4>
m,-#
4>
'O
.,
0
a
m
C
a
7
XV
U te
w 3p.
V
-,
.
4-,.1
CO
C
a
4-'
m
,.Z
m
4>
.
r1
N rn
--o
a)
E
t.
.
r1
m
a)
CO
C
m
A
'
C
4)
t.
t.
4>
aa(z aU
...
C
TJ
E
..4
a
U
ÿrn
C
m
r1
3
r-.
wn
W
CO
m
.--
.
Q)
.0
.1
r.
7
4'
4>
C
CO
m
C
m
-a
CO
--
4>
,0
4)
C
N
r1
.1
.-i
o
7
V
C.
m
4>
CO
'0
>
CU
I
7
C
7
R.
m
-m
a`r
m (V ---
.
4>
C
4).-I A
-
Ó
1`
m
Ñ
-,..-1
E
C
C
m
P
C
ó
,A
o
-X
1
V
4)
.0
.-,
m
O
r1
7N
m(3
.
r1
20-9
TRAV-LER RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL A
-I-3
N
U]
a)
ó
cd
p61)
a)
g,
O
C)
a)
cl)
H
-P
ca
U)
M
r1
r Ua)
bp a)
O
cd
5
e
,1
H
m
a!
g-4
o
cd
U)
U
g-1
0
O
3
a)
4p
W
a
o
bp
r1
ca
40
...LIP
a)
D
. r ")
,i
,
,
a
a
a
easeri
3
, , o<
+
eá
3 3
¢
-z
,
Hx
z z.
os~o oai3o aaauzpwa)aopbno
a a ,caa)a)a a)Caa
IH
` -P.,-1a
r1X
-I
E1
Q
U)
o
Ci
r-I v) +)
r1
H
a)
a)
,--I
H
a)
as
a)
cZE1cZxP
r1
p
s:
ai
as
+3
a) a)
>
r1
>t+(1)
r1
-P a)
>
ai
O
cd
cd
a)
F-1
g,
g,
Ú
ó
ai
N
rI ri rI
ai a)
g -i
g -i
cd
(1)
1
a)
,C-,
-i
a)
cd
4-'
9:1
+)
ai
U)
P. Z
cf)
cv
o o
r1
r-1
.4
.,-) r-+
Z
E1a, w
a)
\
+)
N .g N
bp
x rrp-I r1 XcY1
m
X
-P
Q) Mc)
rá
cd
CO
td 0 0
F ri ri
r1 r
a a)
a
oZQQWU)HQC/)PqE1
r1 E
Pi
+)
a)
cd
>~
w
H
a)
a)
i
Q)
C7 ai
CO
CePa cÖ
(1)CO(1)s~(I)
0r-1
H
a)
F+
mElCntd
L>aa)
a)
a)
cn
o o r1
a)
a)
r1
ca
m
td
af
O
0a
bp
U
.0
o a zN z P
Z
X
.0 U
v)
P. Pi
\O
cYl
N \O
\o
o
H
E1
<acYLC\\O NC'O
p,
M c"1
cYl
O\ O r1 N
M-
LC\O L`CO O\ O
M-1-n O L`
HN
L(11111.1\ L111 n
L
Ñ
I-C)
f 111 Lt1111
CV
M
01-1-Pa)
I
4-3
\O
4H
4i
c4--4
ce
,.
U)
+)
c-i
p.
ti
F.,
a)
g-4
as
-P
O
a)
o
o
P,
ái`
>
g-i
r1
?S
P
a)
(1)
o<4
m<
7:1E1
U) a)
O
E
f-i <4 rU
0 0
i--1
a.
a)
E
ó
>C
bp
a)
a
rI
zs
as
cd
>`.,
H
r -I
P,
r-1
,C.,
a.s:
ul 0
Nr-I
o+2 3
\a)
l-
+2
GO
O
cd
p
H
-P
a
N
r-I M
05
F -I
F-,
?C
a)ooG4
S1
S 3- i:
r,
CV
a)
rl a
g
o
U)NQ,r1
TJ
H
rl
ao
I
PII>C r1
a)g.g,
(Da)p .x
o:
ra p r z rs
rzs ri c0 o>~ a) a) Ori
S-i
a)
S-,
F.,
g-,
g-,
0 0 0 0
f -i
I
aO
cd
+)
-I-:
Q
<
g-t
a)
S-4
p
S-i
<4
<
a) -,-3
4-D
a
a)
a)
a) a)
cd
-P
ai
-.p
a)
f1
R,r-0iU)
ri
(1))
0 0
r-1
bo
0
og
3 f, -I
;-i0a)
U)
S+
ti
-+)
I~
al
4-)
tia
(1)
r-I
I
() a)
0 C) O a)
O
ai r - r- r-D ,-D ,-D
o\J
W W WW fZx1za(Z<= oPPW
P\Oh-Ifs.xr-1I-1E1Pr-1PC)W
a) -P 4.3
o
ca
-I
O O
r N M--tr\, \C) N-03 Q\ r-I H H
I
©John
F.
rl
r
-I r1
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
(1)
ri\ \O
H
(`CO Q\ O H
H
r-1
f\O
a)
02
cd
a)a)a)Z
o0000075
o ri o o H .,-3-.-D =
F-4
>~
0ar1
PO
g-,bpo-,C!)fZQ
gi
Ñ
O O
oo
ai î.i
W
-I-3U)
4-1a)g,E e
x gO
5
p g
0Ti
fs, +3 +3 -P +3 +3
O
F-,
F..i
rl
ao
Cr) a
+)
a
1~
cd
rI .,
4-, roiÉ-i ,r0-I
a)r1aimP,4-,0e
-+
í.d
g
b0
r-1
, ÑQr
F-,
bp
bp4-,
-2 P-1
P
Ca
a
bp
riai1r1I-i
a)aa) 3or1 asmro
tdcoa)r1
ofZP-103<
v)í.)_ í%U)Z-
4-3
a)
O
rO
(1)
a
IZ
N-00 Q\ O H N
H NN NN N N N N N N
Cr
M
J
D
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-1
MODELS 133-6 146,
160, 161, 161
INDEX ADJUSTMENT
RECORD WEIGHT
----7
SHELF
PUSHOFF BLADE
SPINDLE
RECORD
PICKUP ARM
SWITCH BUTTON
PHONO.
RUBBER NEEDLE PAD
PICKUP ARM REST
MOTOR
CORD
V
CONNECT TO 105-125
ONLY
60 CYCLE CURRENT
DESCRIPTION
The Webster -Chicago Model 146 is a single post, spring cushioned spindle, automatic record changer. Simple in
design and operation, it provides manual or automatic
playing of a 1" stack of 10" or 12" records with a minimum
of waiting time between records during automatic operation. When set for automatic operation, Model 146 re-
turns the pickup arm to the rest position after the last
record, although the motor continues to revolve until
attended.
Model 146 features the exclusive Webster -Chicago Velocity Trip mechanism. The pickup arm is not actuated
by "lead-in" springs and there is a minimum of lateral
pressure. The arm travels freely in either direction. This
lack of lateral pressure or inertia add immeasurably to
the life of records and is considered to be as important
as extra light vertical pressure, which in some instances
would result in poor tracking at extremely low or high
frequencies. This free floating arm permits "home recordings" or "inside out" records up to 12" size to be played
manually.
Model 146 will change warped or rough -edged records,
at the same time assuring maximum protection to the
finest discs.
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
CORD
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODELS
20-2 WEBSTER
133-6 14.6,
160, 161,
1614.
OPERATION
MOTOR
R.P.M.
Do not
motor to
under any circumstances connect the
a source of direct current or alternating
current of any other frequencies.
PICKUP
The high impedance crystal cartridge supplied
may be of the fixed permanent point or remov-
able needle type.
the latter, use a needle
which is not more than 11/16 inches long for most
satisfactory results.
Some desirable qualities of a good needle are
faithful reproduction, low surface scratch or hiss,
long wearing qualities, minimum record wear
and rugged construction.
The Webster -Chicago Nylon Needles are particularly adaptable for use with your Webster Chicago "146' Do not use single play or cactus
needles for automatic operation. Such needles
require frequent replacement or sharpening and
are not designed to play a full stack of records.
OPERATION
If it is
-
AUTOMATIC
1.
Turn the Record Shelf forward or back for ten
or twelve inch records.
2.
With the record ballast weight lifted and turned forward out of position, place up to a 1"
stack of 10" or 12" records on the spindle so
that the bottom record rests on the step of the
spindle and on the Record Shelf.
Turn the record ballast weight and lower it
until it rests on the top record.
Move the control knob from the STOP position
(nearest the pickup arm rest) to the START REJECT position (farthest from the pickup arm
rest) and release. The control will then drop
back into the automatic playing position and
the mechanism will continue to operate automatically until the last record is completed.
The pickup arm will then return to the "rest"
position and the motor will continue to revolve
until the control knob is returned to the STOP
position.
To reject any record while playing in the automatic position, move the control knob momentarily to the START-REJECT position and
3.
4.
5.
release.
©John
F.
The mechanism may be turned off at any
time or during any portion of the change cycle
by moving the control knob to the STOP position.
NOTE:
Connect the motor cord to a source of 105-115 volt
60 cycle current only. If it is desired to operate
the changer on 50 cycle current, a special motor
pulley (Part No. 17X412-11) must be used in place
of the one supplied with the changer in order to
drive the turntable at the required speed of 78
The pickup arm may be moved horizontally at
any time without damage to the mechanism.
However, the pickup arm cannot be returned to
the pickup arm rest until the change cycle has
been completed.
After the last record has been played, the entire
stack may be removed from the turntable at one
time. The simplest procedure is as follows:
a. Place the pickup arm on the pickup arm rest.
and turn the record ballast weight out of
position.
c. Place the fingers of both hands under opposite
edges of the bottom record.
d. Do not apply pressure to the top record. (Keep
your thumbs free.)
e. Lift the stack of records straight up following
the contours of the spindle. This permits the
stack' of records to follow the curve of the spindle without binding and greatly facilitates the
removal of the stack.
b. Lift
OPERATION
-
MANUAL
1.
Turn the Record Shelf to the TWELVE inch
position (this is not essential but permits more
clearance in loading and unloading records.)
2.
Place a record on the turntable.
Move the control knob from the STOP position
to the AUTOMATIC position, then toward the
spindle to the MANUAL position, as indicated
by the arrow on the control knob.
No harm will result if the knob is accidentally
moved to the START -REJECT position. If a
twelve inch record is on the turntable, the arm
will automatically index to the edge of the
record. If a ten inch record is on the turntable,
the needle will be set down gently on the rubber pad and the arm may be moved to the
edge of the record.
Place the needle gently on the edge of the
record. Particular care should be exercised if
your pickup has a sapphire point needle. Although the sapphire is very hard and long
wearing, it is extremely brittle and may be
fractured or chipped if dropped on the record
To stop the mechanism at any time, move the
control knob to the STOP position.
3.
4.
5.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE
20-3
133-6 146,
161,
160,
164
MODELS
SERVICE INFORMATION
are accurately adjusted, lubricated and
tested at the factory. However, service repairs
and adjustments sometimes become necessary.
This bulletin should be studied carefully before
making any adjustments or replacing parts.
Cam Assembly (32), allowing it to engage the
Main Cam Actuating Gear (31) and driving it
through the change cycle. The pressure from the
Automatic Trip Arm required to actuate the trip
mechanism is negligible.
The functions and most probable misadjustments
of the main assemblies are as follows (reference
numbers refer to the exploded views
The Automatic Trip Arm follows the movement of
the Pickup Arm through a weighted friction clutch
(34). This clutch must be kept free of oil and
grease. If the clutch does not cause the Automatic
Trip Arm to trip the mechanism, clean the clutch
parts with carbon tetrachloride. This clutch should
All units
operate the trip mechanism without placing undue drag on the movement of the pickup arm.
Also check for:
THE AUTOMATIC TRIP FAILS
TO FUNCTION
The Main Cam Assembly (32) and Actuating
Gear (31) are the heart of the record changer.
The Main Cam Assembly drives the mechanism
associated with the action of the Pickup Arm (7)
and the Record Selector assemblies. It, in turn,
gear train (28, 29, 30) and the
Turntable which is rim driven by the phonograph
is driven by the
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (32) binding.
Slight burr on end of the Actuating Pawl or
on the underside of the hook end of the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly.
1.
2.
Actuating Pawl stuck (part of Main Cam As-.
sembly (32) engaged by the hook end of the
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33).
Automatic Trip Arm (35) bent and not hitting
the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33).
Automatic Trip Arm (35) fails to touch the
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly.
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33) rubbing on the underside of the Main Cam Actuating Gear (31)
No velocity lead-in groove or eccentric groove
in the center of record.
3.
4.
motor.
The Main Cam Assembly and Actuating Gear is
put in motion or "tripped" by means of the "automatic" trip or by the manually operated "reject"
trip. When the movement of the Pickup Arm toward the spindle is greater than 1/4" in 1/2 revolution of the turntable, the Automatic Trip Arm (35)
trips the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33).
This releases the Actuating Pawl on the Main
5.
6.
.
7.
32
7O
I,
._
84
WHEN PONT2eIS
ON ROLLER
%
D
ADJUST IF NECESSARY
Fig.
©John
F.
BY
Fig.
1
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
BENDING AT POINT "D"
2
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-4 WEBSTER
MODELS 133-6
146,160,
8.
161,
164
Foreign matter in record groove.
Also check for:
9.
Badly worn record.
1.
10.
Badly bent or worn needle.
2.
3.
J
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33) rubbing
on Main Cam Actuating Gear (31).
Manual Trip Lever (54) binding.
"Disengage Roller" broken on Velocity Trip
and Roller Assembly (33).
PICKUP ARM LIFT TOO HIGH
OR TOO LOW
I
The vertical movement of the pickup arm is con54
31
R.
no,
r
ImI
I
Y
33
3S
11;
34
A
trolled by the angle of the pickup arm raising
lever (37 and Fig. 4). The needle shouldjipproach
the top record of a full stack of 10" records on the
turntable with approximately I/"" clearance.
To
Fig.
3
1.
adjust:
Put a full stack of 10" records ON THE TURNTABLE.
IF THE "REJECT" TRIP FAILS
TO FUNCTION
2.
When the control knob is moved to the extreme
START -REJECT position, the hair spring of the
Reject Trip Lever Arm (54) actuates the Velocity
Trip and Arm Assembly, putting the change
mechanism in cycle. See Fig. 1.
Check tor:
1.
"Reject" trip hait spring
broken.
2.
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33) binding.
3.
Actuating Pawl stuck (part of Main Cam Assembly 32).
of
Lever 54 bent or
IF THE MECHANISM CONTINUES
TO CYCLE
Trip the "Start -Reject" control and rotate the
turntable clockwise until the needle clears the
top record of the stack by about 1/16"
3. Be sure the notch in the pickup arm raising
disc engages the pickup arm raising lever.
4. If the needle does not clear the top record or
if it raises too high, adjust by bending the
pickup arm raising lever (37) at points X and
Y as indicated in Fig. 4.
CAUTION: All adjusting bends should be made
slowly, using slight but firm, easy pressure.
Be sure the set screws in the Pickup Arm Raising
Disc (36) are not loose and are properly positioned in the alignment holes as explained in the
paragraph on Needle Setdown Indexing.
RECORDS
At the completion of the change cycle, the Actuating Pawl is disengaged from the Main Cam
Assembly Actuating Gear by the hook end of the
NE EDLE
U
rfc
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly, which has
been returned to its normal position by the reset
points on the Main Cam Drive Gear, Fig. 2.
the clearance between the lip on the Velocity
Trip Lever and the edge of the Main Cam is too
small, it will prevent the hooked end of the Velocity Trip Lever from engaging the trigger. Adjust
the clearance between the lip ("D" of Fig. 2) on
the Velocity Trip Lever and the Main Cam to be
If
within i%"," and 1/¡;4" when the roller is contacting the point of one of the reset points on the
Actuating Gear
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Fig.
4
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE
MODELS 133-6
161, 164
NEEDLE SET DOWN INDEXING
INCORRECT
The horizontal movement of the pickup arm (7) is
controlled by the eccentric excursion of the Pickup
Arm Raising Lever (37) moving the Pickup Arm
Raising Disc (36) when actuated by the Main Cam
Assembly (32). The eccentric screw (part of 8).
accessible through the top of the pickup arm (7),
should take care of any normal position adjustment. Turn this screw clockwise to index the needle in toward the spindle and counter -clockwise
to index the needle out away from the spindle.
Should further adjustment be necessary, proceed
as follows:
1. Set the eccentric screw, just mentioned, to a
middle position.
2. Set the Record Shelf (4) to the 10" position.
3. Operate the mechanism by revolving the turntable manually until the needle drops to within
1/8" of a ten inch record on the turntable.
4. Be sure the notch in the Pickup Arm Raising
Disc (36) engages the Pickup Arm Raising
Lever (37).
5. The No. 8 Bristol set screws "A" of the Pickup
Arm Raising Disc (36, Fig. 3) have pointed ends
which fit into off center holes in the Pickup
Arm Pivot (9). Alternately loosen one screw
and tighten the other until the needle rests
above the record lead-in groove at the desired
point. Be sure that both set screws are tight
when this adjustment is completed.
6. Complete the change cycle of the mechanism
and place the pickup arm on the Pickup Arm
Rest (10). The tongue of the Pickup Arm Raising Disc (36) should now rest against the post
which supports the sub plate assembly. If the
pickup arm does not rest in the proper position on the pickup arm rest, bend the tongue
closer to or away from this post until the pickup arm is correctly positioned.
REMEMBER: Always slight but firm, easy
bends!
7. Turn the Record Shelf to 12" and check the
needle drop on a twelve inch record. Make
any additional adjustments with the eccentric
screw mentioned previously.
ERRATIC INDEXING
Indexing in either the 10" or the 12" position is
controlled through the presence or absence of
pressure from the Compression Spring (45), on
the Pickup Arm Raising Lever bracket, forcing
the stud to travel the inside edge or the outside
edge of the groove in the bottom of the Main
Cam. The compression on this spring is changed
as the Record Shelf is changed from the 10" to
the 12" position. Improper adjustment of the
spring tension will result in erratic indexing.
In the 12", position, the spring should be just free.
In the 10" position the compression of the spring
holds the stud of the Pickup Arm Raising Lever
against .the outside edge of the groove. If the
compression tension needs adjustment:
1. Turn the Record Shelf (4) to the 12" position.
2. Trip the Reject control and rotate the Turntable clockwise until the push off Blade reaches
its farthest forward position. At this point the
cam follower will be at the highest point on
the Main Cam ("A" of Fig. 5).
3. Loosen the lock bolts of (41) and (42).
4. Be sure that the Record Shelf is held in the
extreme 12" position while adjusting the Record Shelf and Push -off Blade fingers.
5. At the same time, push the Push -off Blade forward as far as possible and push the Push -off
Blade and Record Shelf Assembly downward
tight against the Housing (6).
6. Position the Record Shelf finger and the Toggle
Assembly (41) so the 12" finger of the Push -off
The upturned end of the Pickup Arm Pivot Shaft
Bracket (Fig. 3) prevents the Pickup Arm from falling off the Pickup Arm Rest. There should be 1/ba"
clearance between the tongue of the Pickup Arm
Raising Disc (36) and the bottom of the groove
F.
146,160,
formed by the Bracket and the Base Plate Post.
Bend the Bracket end up or down to secure proper positioning of the Disc tongue and the Pivot
bracket. Be careful to bend the end only or the
Bracket will bind on the Pickup Arm Pivot Shaft.
The Bracket should not be too high or the Disc
tongue will rub on it when the needle approaches
the edge of a 12" record, causing "glide in" on
the first few grooves of the record.
PICKUP ARM DROPS OFT REST
©John
20-5
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Fig.
5
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-6 WEBSTER
133-6 146,
160, 161, 164
MODELS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fig.
5.
6
Blade finger (42) looks like Fig. 6. A visual
spacing of approximately ¡¡" between the
rounded edge of the toggle assembly arid the
Push -off Biade finger when viewed directly
from the bottom of the record changer is required. See Fig. 6. Since these two parts lie
on different planes, this adjustment must be
made by observation only.
7.
While .holding the Push -off Blade and Record
Shelf Assembly tight against the Housing (6),
push the Index Toggle Assembly (41) against
the spacer (40) and tighten the lock bolt.
8.
Tighten the Push -off Blade bracket lock bolt,
leaving approximately 1%.4" clearance between
the shoulder of the Record Shelf shaft and the
Push -off Blade finger bracket (42).
Turn the record Shelf (4) to the 12" position.
Trip the Reject control and rotate the Turntable
until the Push -off Cam Follower reaches the
highest point on the Main Cam ("A" of Fig. 5).
Loosen the Push -off Blade finger (42) clamp
bolt.
Push the Push -off Blade forward as far as possible and hold the Push -off Blade and Record
Shelf assembly downward tight against the
hous:ng (6).
Tighten the Push -off Blade finger clamp bolt
(42), leaving 1/;4" vertical clearance between
the shoulder of the Record Shelf shaft and the
Push -off Blade finger (42).
CHANGE CYCLE STARTS BEFORE
END OF RECORD
the Trip Assembly chatters while the changer
is running or if the changer cycles before the entire record is played, there is probably insufficient
clearance between the hook end of the Velocity
Trip and Roller Assembly and the actuating gear.
This clearance should be adjusted to be within
1/1_," to 144" by bending the lever at point "C" as
shown in Fig. 7.
If
I
M
I
Illilllllllllll IIII111111'lil 111!11
l'
lililil
RECORD FAILS TO DROP
The record must leave the spindle step just prior
to or at least by the time it leaves the record
shelf. If the spindle is too far from the record shelf,
the record will hang up on the spindle step and
fail to drop.
To
adjust:
Press down on the edge of the turntable nearest
the Record Shelf to secure proper spacing. DO
NOT bend the spindle itself. Also be sure a standard record is used when aking this adjustment.
A standard 10" record has a diameter of 97/8" ±
1/32". A standard 12" record measures 1178" ±
1/32" in diameter.
the changer still fails to drop records, put the
mechanism in cycle and watch the movement of
the Push -off Blade. If it fails to protrude beyond
the edge of the Record Shelf when at its greatest
forward position, adjust the Push -off Blade finger
position:
If
©John
F.
Fig.
7
LAST RECORD REPEATS
The weight of the records on the Spindle keeps
the Automatic Shut Off Lock Lever (59) from dropping and engaging the Pickup Arm Raising Disc.
The dropping of the last record releases the Automatic Shut Off Lock Lever, permitting it to drop
and prevent the Pickup Arm Raising Disc from
moving the Arm onto the record when the change
cycle starts.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-7
MODELS 133-6
160, 161, 16
146,
the last record continues to play:
I. Check the Spindle to be sure that it moves up
and down freely.
2. With no records on the Spindle, and with the
mechanism at rest, the hook of the Automatic
Shut Off Lock Lever (59) should clear the top
of the Pickup Arm Raising Disc by 'A2". Adjust,
if necessary, by bending the Automatic Shut
Off Lock Lever slightly.
If
Fig.
8
REPLACEMENT OF PARTS
TO REPLACE PICKUP CARTRIDGE
A Pickup cartridge can be most easily replaced
by first removing the Pickup Arm.
1. Hold the Pickup Arm firtnly with left hand.
2. Remove the spring from between the pins of
the hinge bracket.
3. Using a tool such as a screwdriver, press in on
one of the blue steel Pickup Arm hinge brackets while lifting up on the arm. This will release the Pickup Arm Hinge pin.
4.
5.
Repeat on the other pickup arm bracket.
The Pickup Arm, when released from the hinge
brackets, may then be turned over and laid
on the turntable for easy access to the cartridge.
TO REPLACE THE PICKUP ARM
The Pickup Arm may be replaced in its bracket
as follows:
Hook the roller on the rear of the hinge assembly under the Pickup Arm lift stop, inside the
Housing (6).
1.
Using a pair of long nose pliers, place the pickup arm hinge brackets, one at a time, over the
pins in the Pickup Arm Pivot Shaft (9) bracket.
2.
The retaining spring need not be replaced unless
the unit is to be re -shipped.
In performing this operation, be sure that the pickup cord lies outside of the hinge and does not be-
come wedged in the bracket.
LUBRICATION
Model 146 Record Changers leave the factory
completely oiled and lubricated. Under normal
conditions this should be sufficient for approximately one year or 1,000 hours of operation.
When operated under extreme conditions of dust
or heat, this operation should be performed more
frequently as required.
Do not permit any oil or grease to get on the
rubber Idler Drive Wheel or the Motor Sleeve, on
Turntable Drive Rim or on the Automatic Trip
Arm clutch. Any oil or grease on these points
should be removed using Carbon Tetrachloride.
The recommended lubricants and points of lubrication are as follows:
-
1.
No. 10 OIL (Apply With Small Oil
Can or Medicine Dropper)
Motor Bearings. Saturate top and bottom felts.
2.
Pickup Arm Shaft.
A
Drop one drop each to
bottom bearing point, bracket hole through
Main Base Plate.
Ball Bearing Assembly.
Idler Wheel Felt.
3.
4.
B
-A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NON FLUID LUBRICANT (Apply
With Small Brush)
Idler Wheel Link.
Turntable Shaft Stud.
Pickup Arm Hinge Pins.
Knife edge of Pickup Arm Raising Lever.
Main Cam Bearing. (It is necessary to remove the sub -plate assembly to lubricate this
bearing.)
6.
7.
8.
9.
Teeth of Main Cam Actuating Gear.
Track of Main Cam Gear.
Teeth of Large and Small idler gears.
Raising lever Bracket bearing surfaces.
AVOID EXCESSIVE LUBRICATION
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-8
©John
F.
WEBSTER
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE
20-9
MODELS 133-6 146,
160, 161, 16.
M
C
>C
4-1O
>C
'V'
e'
CO
v-4
N
N
ñ.
ñ.
N
a.
O
CO
N
.-M-.
>4
>C
N
O
O.
Q)
O
a.
V'
O
P.
N
M
>C
.--'
O
N
a.
O
)
Q)
N
1O
vo
C)
(D
>C
O
a.
1.1')cD
M
N
)
(V
O
L.r)
N
N
N
cD
>C
N
a.
.-.
CV
...
X
V'
_a
¡-+
C'
O
(D
O
N
O
O
-'
C')
(V
d
a.
°
z
0
z
°John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
O
O
>C
n
CM
P.
CV
r-'
N
N
N
(D
C)
>C
N
a
V
N
N
20-10 WEBSTER
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODELS 133-6
160, 161,
1L+6,
164
27-
'
28
30-
31
34
gl)
29
35
1411111111,
36
33
32
38
37
Exploded View
Below Main Plate
44/
óY
46
48
41
49
2Nll"l/r/`
/fi
,ol%
%ñi
,,,: ,
1/yru,,,.
lOrri/
II
l//G
Ilóoid/'
glllll_
...TN
1-ip,,.
a
50
-51
Cp
52
55
-53
©John
F.
54
IIIIII
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
56
57
\\\\\\\
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-11
MODELS 133-6
160, 161,
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Illustration
Part
No.
No.
27
41P333
Shoulder Screw
28
47P024
Gear
29
47P023
Gear
30
45P342
Coupler
31
11X032
Gear
32
11X033
Cam and Trigger Assembly
33
11X320
Velocity Trip and Roller
34
41P576
Clutch Weight
35
45P568
Automatic Trip Arm
36
11X227
Tone Arm Raising Disc
37
11X046
Tone Arm Raising Lever
37
46P044
Tension Spring Raising Lever
39
46P139
Tension Spring Raising Lever
40
41P607
Spacer
41
1.1X287
Lever and Toggle Assembly
42
11X312
Push -off Lever
43
46P162
Tension Spring
44
46P151
Compression Spring
45
46P152
Compression Spring
46
11X319
Cam Lever and Bracket
47
46P158
Tension Spring
48
17X412-12
Motor Shaft Sleeve
17X412-11
Motor Shaft Sleeve
49
15X090
Motor
50
25P363
51
41P592
52
25P367
Rubber Motor Shock Mount
Motor Mount Sleeve
Motor Mount Washer
53
26P312
Motor Mount Belt
54
11X291
Trip Lever and Wire Assembly
55
32X045
A. C.
56
32X039
A. C. Switch
57
46P117
58
45P347
59
11X316
4
©John
F.
.-
Description
-
Large Idler
Small Idler
Idler Gear
Trip Resetting
-
117
-
-
Push-off Lever
-
Toggle Lever
Toggle Lever
Cam Lever
V., A.
-
C.
60 Cy.
50 Cy.
- 60
Switch
Cover
Tension Spring Trip Lever
Pickup Arm Pivot Bracket
No -Record Lever
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Cycle
161j.
14.6,
20-12 WEBSTER
RCD. CH. PAGE
246
MODEL
.
.2..
b
º
gb
ó[ t
CI
to
"2 N.
ÿ
m
b
-d
ó 4
>-.
o..
ºo
m.4
ái
tó
bóO
b0
"a Ñmo
o
Tm
H
o
Ñ
Q
º:
'
m
'
m
m
a
m
m
á
á
b
TS
a)
á
PI
ÿ
v
a
ñ
'
a
.
q
I-4y
a
E-
x
°
á
a
""
ÚT 0
a
Nb
m
b
.Q
b
b
0
0
E
n
.Ñ
ti
oö
á
a
CD
r. -0
>-.
a)
a)
ß.
O
G)
m
q
CV
Na
-b
Ñ
d,
T.1)
m
bá
b
q
b
b
N
'" o
Li
Ú
N
N
-
1
ri..
0
d a
m
H
®
'N
a
p,
I
á
,oi
u
a
.9..
Ti.,
Ú
º;
O
^
°
m
L.
ó
v
Ó
Fj
aa
b
b
3
p
-.g
=lo
ú
'p.
a
N
x
tT
N
>
>
o.m7 r1
m
w
a.
0
Fi
m
.,..
vO
-
co
L.
Ñ.m..
O
(A0.
m
b
c.
'
ó
Q
a
m
E-
p
. º ó'má .b
I
d
-b
m
áo
O
,.
1
-
t7
b
N
3
" 7
q
m
3.ÿ
d a
z
ÿ
°
Ñ
:«1:1
3
O
u
O
2
/
x7'..-2,
ö
m
m
aui
U .2 ó
w
p
>
O
Ú
N
ti
C7
P,
g
º:
ó
a,
re)
Ú
á
0
L.
,
N
m
áN
á
Á
b
º.1
m
b
E-
'
ri
m
.N.
>
°p
L.
Ñ
é
c.
O
>
rmii
John F. Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
ñW
w
o ú
Ñó
O"tT
,W
pv
ú
a . ?'
b rq.
O". w
N
'13r . b.b
CS
d
d
o
N
d
óa
Gá
t
.[
_
tlwmÁ
`m
zo
Q.
º
>'
m
-g w
.m
u
N.
0b>.
15
4
5
b
r..
m
ót
s
'
~ú
á
m
ó
"4a
m
" á
x d? b
o
b m>
.
ti
m
dgN
gcom"
g
m
m
O
d
3
d
t7
A.
d
NO
°m
á
m
091
"
Op
>
ÿ
°:
"
U3
s.
ÿ
65
°
d` b.o
Á
Gi
qmm
"
aÑ
m
,
a.4
m
N "
m
T
N
Ó
o-od
15d?` a
ti
d
ú
a.
u-
)
.
ÿA
ó
rá 40
n
ú
N
x
b
CJ
'e
tn
dT2
o
2 p"
u
ca
Ñ
4w
b
d _a
u;
7:
c.
N
mdmñ
L.
ö
á'
>á x
d»"m ma
.N
Q.
-0
ó
>o_
Ñ Ú>á
m
m
á
m
mm
s, A
li
Q
O
d
Ó
m
pt7 ó.q
ta a'
à
b
á
ra
ch
°m
'o á°
b'; -Ñ
03
ó
ÿ'2
b
á
71;rn
[
F'
ta
'á
ó
> U
Na
<Ai
O
>
e.
N
O
;
u. 0
12
co
Ñ
m3
'Z'..'
n
d
a4ó
F.t
ó x
d
>
ó
4
Ñ
t
mV
b
d
á
Ñ
CA
H
po
d
pÑ
.`k' vá
a)NÑ ám
N
3
m
.Ç
El
.
Ñ3
á
Ó Ú
mm
"
Q
E
-0
S. b
Ñ
Ó ö
g
q
p
;
m
ú
'M>.Op,CE.,
mß.d
m
0
Ú
o
m
Q
a
ei
y ó
b
a
m
w
'y
a
e
°
d
m
°
máo
á.
F
x
ó°.Ád_daº?
L.
>'.m4A
mp
aúb>
ú
°°El
Ts.
ó
d
()-
?
m
,
Ñ á
b
00
3
Fiti
ÿp,
00
ó
ó
°m
°
.
ót
úm o ó áaa p
u
ñá m.w
a a°
b
c
R.
1:1
>
çNm
20-13
MODEL 246
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE
SPEED CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS
1.
Move the Speed Control Lever to either "331/3
or 78" as required for microgroove or standard records.
Moving the Speed Control Lever also turns the
motor power on.
2.
Move the needle pressure counterbalance
weight back for 7 gram needle pressure and
the .001" tip radius needle point required by
microgroove records Move the weight lever
forward for normal pressure and the .003" tip
radius needle point required by the usual 78
R.P.M. records.
The Red or White dots on the Pickup Arm and the
Speed Control Knob should match. The proper
needle point will then be in position for the
record speed selected.
However, after the last record is completed or
while the mechanism is in cycle the pickup arm
cannot be returned to the pickup arm rest until
the change cycle has been completed.
After the last record has been played, the entire
stack may be removed from the turntable at one
time. The simplest procedure is as follows:
a. Place the pickup arm on the pickup arm rest.
b. Lift
c.
Turn the Record Shelf forward or back for ten
or twelve -inch records. Do not turn this shelf
while a record is changing or the mechanism is
in cycle.
2.
With the record ballast weight lifted and turned forward out of position, place up to a 1"
stack of 12" or 10" records on the spindle so
that the bottom record rests on the step of the
spindle and on the Record Shelf.
3.
Turn the record ballast weight and lower it
until it rests on the top record.
4.
Move the "Manual -Reject" Control toward you,
to the "Reject" position, and release it. The
Control will then drop back Into the automatic
playing position and the records will be
changed automatically until the last record is
completed. The pickup arm will then return to
the "Rest" position and the motor will continue
to revolve until the Speed Control is turned to
the OFF position.
reject any record while playing in the automatic position, move the "Manual -Reject" Control to the REJECT position and release.
©John
F.
apply pressure to the top record. (Keep
your thumbs free.)
e. Lift the stack of records straight up following
the contours of the spindle. This permits the
stack of records to follow the curve of the
spindle without binding and greatly facilitates
the removal of the stack.
FOR "MANUAL" RECORD CHANGE
We recommend that microgroove
records never be played with the control in the
"Manual" position. The microgrooves are easily
scratched and the automatic rest position of the
pickup arm plus the use of the "Reject" position
of the control knob make manual playing unnecessary. However, manual operation when playing standard 78 R.P.M. records is often desirable.
CAUTION:
1.
Place a record on the turntable.
2.
Move the "Manual -Reject" Control Knob toward the spindle to the "Manual" position, as
indicated by the arrow on the Control Knob.
No harm will result if the knob is accidentally
moved to the "Reject" position. If a twelve inch record is on the turntable, the ann will
automatically index to the edge of the record.
If a ten -inch record is on the turntable, the
needle will be set down gently on the rubber
pad and the arm may be moved to the edge
of the record.
3.
Place the needle gently on the edge
record.
5. To
The pickup arm may be moved horizontally at
any time without damage to the mechanism.
of
Place the fingers of both hands under opposite
edges of the bottom record.
d. Do not
FOR AUTOMATIC RECORD CHANGE
1.
and turn the record ballast weight out
position.
www.americanradiohistory.com
the
stop the mechanism at any time move the
Speed Control Lever to the OFF position.
4. To
Rider
of
20-14 WEBSTER
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL 246
SERVICE INFORMATION
All units are accurately adjusted, lubricated and
tested at the factory. However, service repairs
and adjustments sometimes become necessary.
This bulletin should be studied carefully before
making any adjustments or replacing parts.
The functions and most probable misadjustments
of the main assemblies are as follows (reference
numbers refer to the exploded views
Cam Assembly (32), allowing it to engage the
Main Cam Actuating Gear (31) and driving it
through the change cycle. The pressure from the
Automatic Trip Arm required to actuate the trip
mechanism is negligible.
The Automatic Trip Arm follows the movement of
the Pickup Arm through a weighted friction clutch
(34). This clutch must be kept free of oil and
grease. If the clutch does not cause the Automatic
Trip Arm to trip the mechanism, clean the clutch
parts with carbon tetrachloride. This clutch should
operate the trip mechanism without placing undue drag on the movement of the pickup arm.
Also check for:
THE AUTOMATIC TRIP FAILS
TO FUNCTION
1.
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (32) binding.
2.
Slight burr on end of the Actuating Pawl or
on the underside of the hook end of the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly.
3.
Actuating Pawl stuck (part of Main Cam Assembly (32) engaged by the hook end of the
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33).
Automatic Trip Arm (35) bent and not hitting
the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33).
Automatic Trip Arm (35) fails to touch the
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly.
The Main Cam Assembly (32) and Actuating
Gear (31) are the heart of the record changer.
The Main Cam Assembly drives the mechanism
associated with the action of the Pickup Arm (7)
and the Record Selector assemblies. It, in turn,
is driven by the gear train (28, 29, 30) and the
Turntable which is rim driven by the phonograph
4.
motor.
The Main Cam Assembly and Actuating Gear is
put in motion or "tripped" by means of the "automatic" trip or by the manually operated "reject"
trip.- When the movement of the Pickup Arm toward the spindle is greater than 1/8" in 1/2 revolution of the turntable, the Automatic Trip Arm (35)
trips the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33).
This releases the Actuating Pawl on the Main
"
54
31
6.
7.
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33) rubbing on the underside of the Main Cam Actu-
ating Gear (31).
No velocity lead-in groove or eccentric groove
in the center of record.
Ire
Ì
ia
5.
111111111M
34
la
WRI.'1111
.
A
33
ADJUST IF NECESSARY
Fig.
©John
F.
BY
Fig.
1
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
BENDING AT POINT "D".
2
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-15
MODEL 246
8.
9.
10.
Also check for:
Foreign matter in record groove.
Badly worn record.
Badly bent or worn needle.
1.
2.
3.
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33) rubbing
on Main Cam Actuating Gear (31).
Manual Trip Lever (54) binding.
"Disengage Roller" broken on Velocity Trip
and Roller Assembly (33).
PICKUP ARM LIFT TOO HIGH
OR TOO LOW
The vertical movement of the pickup arm is con-
trolled by the angle of the pickup arm raising
lever (37 and Fig. 4). The needle should approach
the top record of a full 1" stack of recoitis on the
turntable with approximately '.'"," clearance.
To
1.
adjust:
Put a full 1" stack of records ON THE TURNTABLE.
IF THE "REJECT" TRIP FAILS
TO FUNCTION
When the control knob is moved to the extreme
START -REJECT position, the hair spring of the
Reject Trip Lever Arm (54) actuates the Velocity
Trip and Arm Assembly, putting the change
mechanism in cycle. See Fig. 3.
Check for:
1.
2.
3.
"Reject" trip hair spring of Lever 54 bent or
broken.
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (33) binding.
Actuating Pawl (32) stuck (part
Assembly).
of Main
Cam
2.
Trip the "Start -Reject" control and rotate the
turntable clockwise until the needle clears the
top record of the stack by about I , (;"
3.
Be sure the notch in the pickup arm raising
disc engages the pickup arm raising lever.
4. If the needle does not clear the top record or
if it raises too high, adjust by holding the pickup arm raising lever (37) at point X and bending at Y as indicated in Fig. 4.
CAUTION: All adjusting bends should be made
slowly, using slight but firm, easy pressure.
Be sure the set screws in the Pickup Arm Raising
Disc (36) are not loose and are properly posi-
tioned in the alignment holes as explained in the
paragraph on Needle Setdown Indexing.
IF THE MECHANISM CONTINUES
TO CYCLE
At the completion of the change cycle, the Actuating Pawl is disengaged from the Main Cam
Assembly Actuating Gear by the hook end of the
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly, which has
been returned to its normal position by the reset
points on the Main Cam Drive Gear, Fig. 2.
the clearance between the lip on the Velocity
Trip Lever and the edge of the Main Cam is too
small, it will prevent the hooked end of the Velocity Trip Lever from engaging the trigger. Adjust
the clearance between the lip ("D" of Fig. 2) on
the Velocity Trip Lever and the Main Cam to be
within ?, ,"" and 1;,; {" when the roller is contacting the point of one of the reset points on the
If
Fig.
Actuating Gear.
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
4
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL
20-16 WEBSTER
24-6
NEEDLE SET DOWN INDEXING
INCORRECT
The horizontal movement of the pickup arm (7) is
controlled by the eccentric excursion of the Pickup
Arm Raising Lever (37) moving the Pickup Arm
Raising Disc (36) when actuated by the Main Cam
Assembly (32). The eccentric screw (part of 8)
accessible through the top of the pickup arm (7),
should take care of any normal position adjustment. Turn this screw clockwise to index the needle in toward the spindle and counter -clockwise
to index the needle out away from the spindle.
Should further adjustment be necessary, proceed
as follows:
1. Set the eccentric screw, just mentioned, to a
middle position.
2. Set the Record Shelf (4) to the 10" position.
3. Operate the mechanism by revolving the turntable manually until the needle drops to within
1/8" of a ten inch record on the turntable.
4. Be sure the notch in the Pickup Arm Raising
Disc (36) engages the Pickup Arm Raising
Lever (37).
5. The No. 8 Bristol set screws "A" of the Pickup
Arm Raising Disc (36, Fig. 1) have pointed ends
which fit into off center holes in the Pickup
Arm Pivot (9). Alternately loosen one screw
and tighten the other until the needle rests
above the record lead-in groove at the desired
point. Be sure that both set screws are tight
when this adjustment is completed.
6. Complete the change cycle of the mechanism
and place the pickup arm on the Pickup Arm
Rest (10). The tongue of the Pickup Arm Raising Disc (36) should now rest against the post
which supports the sub plate assembly. If the
pickup arm does not rest in the proper position on the pickup arm rest, bend the tongue
closer to or away from this post until the pickup arm is correctly positioned.
REMEMBER: Always slight but firm, easy
bends!
7. Turn the Record Shelf to 12" and check the
needle drop on a twelve inch record. Make
any additional adjustments with the eccentric
screw mentioned previously.
formed by the Bracket and the Base Plate Post.
Bend the Bracket end up or down to secure proper positioning of the Disc tongue and the Pivot
bracket. Be careful to bend the end only or the
Bracket will bind on the Pickup Arm Pivot Shaft.
The Bracket should not be too high or the Disc
tongue will rub on it when the needle approaches
the edge of a 12" record, causing "glide in" on
the first few grooves of the record.
ERRATIC INDEXING
Indexing in either the 10" or the 12" position is
controlled through the presence or absence of
pressure from the Compression Spring (45), on
the Pickup Arm Raising Lever bracket, forcing
the stud to travel the inside edge or the outside
edge of the groove in the bottom of the Main
Cam. The compression on this spring is changed
as the Record Shelf is changed from the 10" to
the 12" position. Improper adjustment of the
spring tension will result in erratic indexing.
In the 12" position, the spring should be just free.
In the 10" position the compression of the spring
holds the stud of the Pickup Arm Raising Lever
against the outside edge of the groove. If the
compression tension needs adjustment:
1. Turn the Record Shelf (4) to the 12" position.
2. Trip the Reject control and rotate the Turntable clockwise until the push off Blade reaches
its farthest forward position. At this point the
cam follower will be at the highest point on
the Main Cam ("A" of Fig. 5).
3. Loosen the lock bolts of (41) and (42).
4. Be sure that the Record Shelf is held in the
extreme 12" position while adjusting the Record Shelf and Push -off Blade fingers.
5. At the same time, push the Push -off Blade forward as far as possible and push the Push -off
Blade and Record Shelf Assembly downward
tight against the Housing (6).
6. Position the Record Shelf finger and the Toggle
Assembly (41) so the 12" finger of the Push -off
PICKUP ARM DROPS OFF REST
The upturned end of the Pickup Arm Pivot Shaft
Bracket (Fig. 3) prevents the Pickup Arm from falling off the Pickup Arm Rest. There should be 1/;4"
clearance between the tongue of the Pickup Arm
Raising Disc (36) and the bottom of the groove
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Fig.
5
WEBSTER RCD. CH.PAGE
20-17
MODEL 246
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fig.
5.
6
6. A visual
spacing of approximately 1-¡;4" between the
rounded edge of the toggle assembly and the
Push -off Blade finger when viewed directly
from the bottom of the record changer is required. See Fig. 6. Since these two parts lie
on different planes, this adjustment must be
made by observation only.
Blade finger (42) looks like Fig.
7
While holding the Push -off Blade and Record
Shelf Assembly tight against the Housing (6),
push the Index Toggle Assembly (41) against
the spacer (40) and tighten the lock bolt.
8.
Tighten the Push -off Blade bracket lock bolt,
leaving approximately 164 clearance between
the shoulder of the Record Shelf shaft and the
Push -off Blade finger bracket (42).
Turn the record Shelf (4) to the 12" position.
Trip the Reject control and rotate the Turntable
until the Push -off Cam Follower reaches the
highest point on the Main Cam ("A" of Fig. 5).
Loosen the Push -off Blade finger (42) clamp
bolt.
Push the Push -off Blade forward as far as possible and hold the Push -off Blade and Record
Shelf assembly downward tight against the
housing (6).
Tighten the Push -off Blade finger clamp bolt
(42), leaving 1/s4" vertical clearance between
the shoulder of the Record Shelf shaft and the
Push -off Blade finger (42).
CHANGE CYCLE STARTS BEFORE
END OF RECORD
the Trip Assembly chatters while the changer
is running or if the changer cycles before the entire record is played, there is probably insufficient
clearance between the hook end of the Velocity
Trip and Roller Assembly and the actuating gear.
This clearance should be adjusted to be within
1/3_" to 1,;64" by bending the lever at point "C" as
shown in Fig. 7.
If
31
IJ I111i11111111111111P
RECORD FAILS TO DROP
The record must leave the spindle step just prior
to or at least by the time it leaves the record
shelf. If the spindle is too far from the record shelf,
the record will hang up on the spindle step and
fail to drop.
To
32
adjust:
Press down on the edge of the turntable nearest
the Record Shelf to secure proper spacing. DO
NOT bend the spindle itself. Also be sure a standard record is used when aking this adjustment.
standard 10" record has a diameter of 97,8" ±
1,i2". A standard 12" record measures 1178" ±
1i1" in diameter.
If the changer still fails to drop records, put the
mechanism in cycle and watch the movement of
the Push -off Blade. If it fails tc protrude beyond
the edge of the Record Shelf when at its greatest
A
forward position, adjust the Push -off Blade finger
position:
©John
F.
,
2 TO 6
lilllllm1!I
Fig.
,
33
m
0
7
LAST RECORD REPEATS
The weight of the records on the Spindle keeps
the Automatic Shut Off Lock Lever (59) from dropping and engaging the Pickup Arm Raising Disc.
The dropping of the last record releases the Automatic Shut Off Lock Lever, permitting it to engage the Pickup Arm Raising Disc and prevent
the Pickup Arm from moving onto the record. The
Pickup Arm then comes to rest on the Rest Button.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL 2Lj 6
20-18
WEBSTER
If
the last record continues to play:
1.
Check the Spindle to be sure that it moves up
and down freely.
2.
With no records on the Spindle, and with the
mechanism at rest, the hook "D" of the Automatic Shut Off Lock Lever (59) should clear the
top of the Pickup Arm Raising Disc by 1/32"
Adjust, if necessary, by bending the Automatic
Shut Off Lock Lever slightly.
2.
Lower the bushing until it just clears the idler
wheel.
3.
Tighten the set screw.
SLOW SPEED
1.
Idler wheel (23) or (74) may be cocked at an
angle. Bend the mounting bracket (25).
2. Too
strong tension on Idler Link Tension Spring
(26) or (85). Stretch spring slightly.
Idler Wheel Link (25) may be binding
in mounting hole. Carefully bend out the lip
so the Idler Wheel rides more firmly on the
rim of the Turntable.
3. Lip of
MOTOR DOES NOT TURN ON
Fig.
The top switch leaf of the AC switch (60) may
be bent, preventing contact when the Speed Control Lever ìs moved to 331/; or 78. Bend the Switch
8
LAST RECORD WILL NOT PLAY
explained above, the weight of records on the
spindle prevents the Automatic Lock Lever (59)
from dropping. As the Cam Lever and Bracket
assembly (46) moves forward to engage the Push off Blade Actuating Lever (42), Fig. 5, point A
of the Cam Lever (46), Fig. 8, should also move
forward under point B of the Automatic Shut Off
Lock Lever (59) to make certain it does not drop
until the last record has dropped to the turntable
and the Pickup Arm is in position to play. If
point A does not engage point B, the Lock Lever
(59) will drop to engage the Pickup Arm Raising
Disc (36) and the Pickup Arm will return to the
rest position without playing the last record.
As
adjust, bend B so they engage properly. It
may be necessary to bend (46) at point C, then
readjust point D so it engages the Pickup Arm
Raising Disc (36) correctly.
leaf by means of a small screw driver inserted
through the small opening in the plastic protecting
cover or bend the switch mounting bracket.
STALLS DURING CHANGE CYCLE
Too weak tension on Idler Link Spring (26) or
(85). Tighten spring
ERRATIC SPEED ("WOW")
Remove any dirt or excess flocking from the inside rim of the turntable. Check the rubber drive
wheel for a flat spot or "out of round".
The idler wheel links (23) should be loose on the
shoulder rivets but not sloppy. If too loose, erratic
speed will result.
1.
Remove the motor.
2.
Carefully stake the shoulder rivet move securely to insure smooth operation.
To
78 R.P.M. AT BOTH SPEED SETTINGS
The 78 R.P.M. bushing on the motor shaft should
be low enough to clear the 331 R.P.M. idler
wheel. If it is too high:
1.
Loosen the bushing set screw, using a No.
Bristol wrench.
©John
F.
8
as required.
3.
Idler wheel cocked at an angle. This may
have been caused by forcing the Turntable
onto the spindle and bearing (18) with the
Speed Control Lever in either the "331/;" or
"78" position. Remove the Turntable and carefully bend the idler wheel (23 or 74) so the
idler wheel link stud (part of 84) is perpendicular. Always have the Speed Control at
OFF when putting on the Turntable.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE
20-19
MODEL 246
NEEDLE JUMPS GROOVES
ON 33% R.P.M.
Check the needle pressure, using a Clarkstan
needle pressure gauge. Pressure should be between 7 grams and 9 grams.
To increase the pressure, use a heavy wire or
---e
Fig. 9
--
small steel rod to turn the spring shaft (63).
BOTH NEEDLE POINTS TOUCH
AT ONCE
1.
2.
Needle point is bent. Replace needle.
Needle mounting bracket "fingers" improperly
bent. See Fig. 9.
REPLACEMENT OF PARTS
TO REPLACE THE NEEDLE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen the needle set screw, using a small
screw driver.
Remove the needle.
Insert new needle with the flat side of the
needle shank facing the needle set screw. Be
sure the needle shank is all the way in to the
bottom of the needle hole.
Tighten the set screw. The needle point should
be parallel to the sides of the needle slot and
evenly spaced between the walls of the slot.
TO REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE
Remove the two set screws, one on each side
of the cartridge.
2. Lift the cartridge from the pickup arm mounting studs and remove the Tilt Spring from its
mounting hole.
3. Insert the Tilt Spring in the new cartridge.
4. Seat the cartridge on the mounting studs, insert and tighten the two set screws.
The holes in the cartridge bracket are elongated.
Position the cartridge so it fits solidly against the
back finger of the mounting bracket when the
needle weight counterbalance lever is in the "forward" or microgroove position and solidly against
the front finger of the bracket when the counter -
Fig.
balance lever
is in
11
the "back"' or 78 R.P.M.
position.
1.
TO REPLACE THE PICKUP ARM
Closely observe the original placement of the pickup cord and replace it in the
same position. (See Fig. 10.) Do Not push hard on
the needle end of the cartridge. Bending the
mounting bracket will cause improper tracking
or even cause both needle points to touch the
record at once.
1. Remove mounting screws from mounting studs
CAUTION:
A
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
and
B,
Fig. 10.
Gently remove hinge assembly from the mounting studs.
Remove tension spring anchor from mounting
stud A. (See Fig. 11.)
Loosen No. 8 Bristol set screw and remove
needle pressure counterbalance arm.
Remove the tilt control Lever. Do not disassemble the springs from this lever.
Remove the pickup cord and tilt spring
brackets.
Remove the cartridge mounting screws and
the cartridge.
Reassemble the parts to the new pickup arm in
reverse order. Read the paragraph regarding
replacement of the cartridge.
7.
Fig. 10
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-20 WEBSTER
MODEL 2L16
LUBRICATION
Model 246 Record Changers leave the factory
completely oiled and lubricated. Under normal
conditions this should be sufficient for approximately one year or 1,000 hours of operation.
When operated under extreme conditions of dust
or heat, this operation should be performed more
tom bearing point, bracket hole through Main
Base Plate.
3.
Ball Bearing Assembly.
4.
Idler Wheel Felt.
B
frequently as required.
any oil or grease to get on the
rubber Idler Drive Wheel or the Motor Sleeve, on
Turntable Drive Rim or on the Automatic Trip
Arm clutch. Any oil or grease on these points
should be removed using Carbon Tetrachloride.
The recommended lubricants and points of lubrication are as follows:
1.
2.
-
FLUID LUBRICANT (Apply
With Small Brush)
Do not permit
A
-A NON
No. 10 OIL (Apply With Small Oil
Can or Medicine Dropper)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Motor Bearings. Saturate top and bottom felts.
Pickup Arm Shaft. Drop one drop each to bot-
8.
9.
Idler Wheel Link.
Turntable Shaft Stud.
Pickup Arm Hinge Pins.
Kiíife edge of Pickup Arm Raising Lever.
Main Cam Bearing. (It is necessary to remove the sub -plate assembly to lubricate this
bearing.)
Teeth of Main Cam Actuating Gear.
Track of Main Cam Gear.
Teeth of Large and Small idler gears.
Raising lever Bracket bearing surfaces.
AVOID EXCESSIVE LUBRICATION
Cut Away View
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-21
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODEL
2Lj
20-22 WEBSTER
6
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Illustration
Part
No.
No.
23
42X196
24P013
42X183
42X184
27P157
42P199
49X063
21X283
11X385
49P099 -C
24P004 -C
49X -89-C
11X358
50P204
11X292 -C
25P269
11X058
41P414
25P333
26P687
25P030
50P125
11X366
24
25P041
25
11X375
46P179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Felt Washer
Spring Clip
64
11X386
42P201
65
11X405
66
50P125
45P700
46P176
46P178
71
26P474
Cartridge
Cartridge Mounting Screw
72
20X1244
20X1247
11X368
39P044
41P632
78P410
45P757
25P345
26P276
50P216
63
67
68
69
70
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
F.
Record Weight Assembly
Record Weight Cushion
Push Off Blade
Record Shelf
Record Weight Groove Pin
Housing
Pickup Arm
Pickup Arm Hinge Assembly
Pickup Arm Shaft
Pickup Arm Rest
Needle Pad
"Reject -Manual" Lever
Spindle
Spindle Retainer Clip
Turntable
Bearing Race Washer
Bearing Race
Turntable Bearing
Turntable Bearing Lock Washer
Turntable Bearing Nut
Idler Wheel (78 R.P.M.)
Fibre Washer
Idler Link
Link Tension Spring (78 R.P.M.)
Pickup Arm Counterbalance Spring
Counter Weight Lever
Crank Lever Assembly
Spring Clip
Crank Lever Spring Retainer
Crank Lever Spring
Cartridge Tilt Spring
26
©John
Description
11X381
46P175
27P102
46P134
Light Pickup Cord Assembly
Heavy Pickup Cord Assembly
Idler Wheel (331/2)
Speed Control Lever
Bushing
Dial
Toggle Bracket
Lock Washer
Hex Nut
Retainer for
11X381
Two Speed Shaft Assembly
Tension Spring
Shoulder Rivet
Link Tension Spring
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-23
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-24 WEBSTER
MODFI,
246
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
©John
F.
Illustration
Part
No.
No.
27
41P333
28
47P024
29
47P023
30
45P342
31
11X032
32
11X033
33
11X320
34
41P576
35
45P568
36
11X227
37
11X036
38
46P044
Pickup Arm Raising Lever
Tension Spring
39
46P139
Tension Spring
40
41P607
41
11X287
42
11X312
.43
4612162
44
46P151
45
46P152
46
11X319
47
46P158
48
17X450
Spacer
Lever and Toggle Assembly
Push -Off Blade Actuating Lever
Tension Spring
Compression Spring
Compression Spring
Cam Lever and Bracket Assembly
Tension Spring
Drive Sleeve
49
15X097-1
50
25P363
51
41P592
52
25P367
53
26P312
54
11X291
55
23P009
56
41P333
57
46P117
58
45P347
59
11X316
60
32P052
61
11X397
62
45P755
86
11X132
Description
Shoulder Screw
Large Idler Gear
Small Idler Gear
Idler Gear Coupler
Trip Resetting Gear Assembly
Cam and Trigger Assembly
Velocity Trip
Velocity Trip Clutch Weight
Automatic Trip Arm
Pickup Arm Raising Disc
Motor
Motor Shock Mounts
Motor Mount Sleeve
Motor Mount Washer
Motor Mount Bolt
Trip Lever and Wire Assembly
Friction Disc
Stud Mounting- Screw
Tension Spring
Pickup Arm Pivot Bracket
Automatic Shut Off Lock Lever
Motor Switch
Two Speed Lever Assembly
Link Release
Complete Gear Assembly
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER
RCD. CH. PAGE
20-25
MODELS 256, 256-1
SPINDLE
RECORD SELECTOR
POST
SPINDLE STEP
RECORD BALLAST
WEIGHT
SPEED CONTROL
LEVER
COUNTER WEIGHT
.4E-
LEVER
TURNTABLE
INDEX ADJUSTMENT
PICKUP ARM
PICKUP ARM
REST
ON BUTTON
AUTOMATIC -MANUAL
CONTROL
NEEDLE SETDOWN PAD
DESCRIPTION
The Webster -Chicago Model 256 is a dual speed,
single post, spring cushioned spindle, automatic
record changer. Simple in design and operation,
it provides automatic or manual playing of up
to a 1" stack of 10" or 12" standard 78 R.P.M. or
microgroove 331 R.P.M. records.
Model 256 returns the pickup arm to the rest position after playing the last record, although the
motor continues to revolve until the "331A OFF
78" Speed Control Lever is moved to the OFF
position. This is especially important when playing the microgroove records for it eliminates the
necessity of manually lifting the pickup arm or
setting it down on the easily scratched micro grooves. The idler wheels are also pulled away
from the motor shaft when the Speed Control
Lever is in the OFF position, eliminating the pos -
-
sibility of a flat spot developing on the rubber
wheels with consequent wow.
Model 256 also features the exclusive Webster Chicago velocity trip mechanism. The pickup
arm is not actuated by "lead-in" springs and
there is a minimum of lateral pressure. The arm
travels freely in either direction. This lack of
lateral pressure or inertia adds immeasurably to
the life of records and is considered to be as important as extra -light vertical pressure, which in
some instances would result in poor tracking at
extremely low or high frequencies. The free floating arm permits "home recordings" or "inside
out" records up to 12" size to be played manually.
Model 256 will change warped or rough edged
records, at the same time assuring maximum protection to the finest discs.
OPERATION
PICKUP
The special pickup cartridge supplied has a replaceable tandem point needle. A unique connection between the cartridge and the needle
weight counterbalance automatically lowers the
proper point into playing position when the
counterbalance is adjusted for light or normal
needle pressure. When the counterbalance
weight is turned back, the needle pressure is the
7 grams required for proper playing of the micro-
©John
F.
groove records. When it is turned forward to the
side of the pickup arm the normal weight for
standard 78 R.P.M. records is at the needle point.
The voltage output is normally lower when playing microgroove records. The volume control of
the radio or amplifier must be turned up further
when they are played.
Any 331 R.P.M. records other than microgroove
should be played with the standard needle and
standard needle weight.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH.PAGE
20-26
WEBSTER
MODELS 256, 256-1
MOTOR
5.
Connect the motor cord to a source- bf 105-120
volt, 60 cycle current only. If it is desired to operate the changer on 50 cycle current, special
motor shaft bushings must be used in order to
drive the turntable at the required speed of 78
Press the ON button.
To reject any record while playing in the
AUTOMATIC position, press the ON button.
6.
After the last record has been played, the entire stack may be removed from the turntable
at one time. The simplest procedure is as
follows:
a. Turn the Record Ballast Weight back out of
position.
b. Place the fingers of both hands under opposite edges of the bottom record.
R.P.M. or 331/3 R.P.M.
under any circumstances connect the
a source of direct current (DC) or alternating current of any other frequencies.
Do not
motor to
SPEED CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS
1.
c. Do not
Move the Speed Control Lever to either "331/3"
or "78" as required for microgroove or standard
records.
Moving the Speed Control Lever also turns the
motor power on.
2. Move the needle pressure counterbalance
weight back for 7 gram needle pressure and
the .001" tip radius needle point required by
microgroove records. Move the weight lever
forward for normal pressure and the .003" tip
radius needle point required by the usual 78
R.P.M. records.
The Red or White dots on the Pickup Arm and the
Speed Control Knob should match. The proper
needle point will then be in position for the record speed selected.
FOR AUTOMATIC RECORD CHANGE
1.
Turn the Record Selector Post to "10" or "12"
for ten or twelve inch records. The Record
Selector Post is pivoted and turns in a counterclockwise direction to the 10" position and
clockwise to the 12" position as indicated by
the arrows. Do not use the Ballast Weight
as a handle to turn the
post. Turn by grasping the head of the Record Selector Post with the thumb and forefingers.
apply pressure to the top record.
(Keep your thumbs free.)
d. Lift the stack of records straight up following the contours of the spindle. This permits
the stack of records to follow the curve of
the spindle without binding and greatly
facilitates the removal of the stack.
FOR "MANUAL" RECORD CHANGE
We recommend that microgroove records never be played with the control in the
"Manual" position. The microgrooves are easily
scratched and the automatic rest position of the
pickup arm plus the use of the "Reject" position
of the control knob make manual playing unnecessary. However, manual operation when
playing standard 78 R.P.M. records is often
CAUTION:
desirable.
1.
Place a record on the turntable.
2.
Turn the Record Selector Post to the "12"
position. (This is not essential but permits
more clearance in loading and unloading
records.)
3.
Turn the Selector Switch (sleeve of ON button)
to MANUAL.
4.
Place a record on the turntable. It may facilitate this operation if the record is placed over
the spindle at an angle, with one edge of the
record held below the level of the Record
Selector Post Shelf. Records may be removed
in the same manner.
2.
Turn the Selector Switch (sleeve of ON button)
to AUTOMATIC.
3.
With the Record Ballast Weight turned back,
place up to a 1" stack of 12" or 10" records
on the spindle so that the bottom record rests
on the step of the spindle and the shelf of the
Record Selector Post.
5.
Press the ON button.
6.
Place the needle gently on the edge of the
record. Do not lift the pickup arm too high as
this will cause it to catch in the Automatic
Stop Lock position.
Turn the Record Ballast Weight forward to rest
on the top record.
7. To
4.
©John
F.
stop the mechanism at any time, turn the
Speed Control to the "OFF" position.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE
MODELS
20-27
25, 25-1
SERVICE INFORMATION AND ADJUSTMENTS
are accurately adjusted, lubricated and
tested at the factory. However service repairs
and adjustments sometimes become necessary.
This bulletin should be studied carefully before
making any adjustments or replacing parts.
All units
The functions and most probable misadjustments
of the main assemblies are as follows (reference
numbers refer to the exploded view
THE AUTOMATIC TRIP FAILS
TO FUNCTION
The Main Cam Assembly (38) and Actuating Gear
(36) are the heart of the record changer. The
Main Cam Assembly drives the mechanisms associated with the action of the Pickup Arm (5)
and the Record Selector assemblies. It, in turn,
is driven by the gear train (29, 30, 31) and the
Turntable which is rim driven by the phonograph
motor.
The 'Main Cam Assembly and Actuating Gear is
put in motion or "tripped" by means of the "automatic" trip or by the manually operated "reject"
trip. When the movement of the Pickup Arm toward the spindle is greater than 1/8" in 1/2 revolution of the Turntable, the Automatic Trip Arm (33)
trips the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (37).
This releases the Actuating Pawl on the Main
Cam Assembly (38), allowing it to engage the
Main Cain Actuating Gear (36) and driving it
through the change cycle. The pressure from the
Automatic Trip Arm required to actuate the trip
mechanism is negligible.
clean the clutch parts with carbon tetrachloride.
This clutch should operate the trip mechanism
without placing undue drag on the movement of
the pickup arm.
Also check for:
1. Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly binding.
2. Slight burr on end of the actuating pawl or
on the underside of the Velocity Trip hook.
3. Actuating Pawl stuck (part of Main Cam Assembly (38) engaged by the hook end of the
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (37).
4. Automatic Trip Arm (33) bent and not hitting
the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (37).
5. Automatic Trip Arm (33) fails to touch the
Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly.
6. Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (37) rubbing on the underside of the Main Cam Actuating Gear (36).
7. No velocity lead-in groove or eccentric groove
in the cefiter of record.
8. Foreign matter in record groove.
9. Badly worn record.
10. Badly bent or worn needle.
IF THE "REJECT" TRIP FAILS
TO FUNCTION
When the "On" button is pressed, the hair spring
of the "reject" trip lever arm (65), actuates the
Velocity Trip and Arm Assembly, putting the
change mechanism in cycle.
Check for:
1. "Reject" trip hair spring of Lever (65) bent or
broken.
2. Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (37) binding.
3. Actuating Pawl (part of Main Cam Assembly
38) stuck.
The Automatic Trip Arm (33) follows the movement of the Pickup Arm through a weighted friction clutch (32). This clutch must be kept free
of oil
and grease. Should
it
become necessary,
.-
i
11111
"._
41
54
31
33
©John
F.
34
A
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODELS 256,
20-28 WEBSTER
256-1
IF THE MECHANISM CONTINUES
TO CYCLE
At the completion of the change cycle, the Actuating Pawl is disengaged from the Main Cam
Assembly Actuating Gear (36) by the hook end
of the Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (37)
which has been returned to its normal position
by the reset points on the Main Cam Drive Gear
(Fig. 3). This hook should be adjusted for about
1/fi4" clearance from the bottom of the Main Cam
Drive Gear (36), Fig. 1. Greater clearance may
permit the pawl to bounce past the hook and reengage, causing the mechanism to continue to
cycle.
If the clearance between the lip on the Velocity
Trip Lever and the edge of the Main Cam is too
small, it will prevent the hook end of the Velocity
Trip Lever from engaging the trigger. Adjust the
clearance between the lip (D, Figs. 3 and 5) on
the Velocity Trip Lever of the Main Cam to be
within 1/64" when the roller is contacting the point
of one of the protrusions on the Actuating Gear.
Also check for:
1. Velocity Trip and Roller Assembly (37) rubbing on Main Cam Actuating Gear (36).
2. Manual Trip Lever (65) binding.
3. "Disengage Roller" broken on Velocity Trip
and Roller Assembly (37).
sure the notch in the Pickup Arm raising
disc (34) engages the pickup arm raising lever
3. Be
(40).
4. If the needle
if it raises too
does not clear the top record or
high, adjust by bending the pickup arm raising lever at the point indicated in
Fig. 4.
CAUTION:
All adjusting bends should be made
slowly, using slight but firm, easy pressure.
Be sure the set screws (A of Fig. 1) of the pickup arm raising disc are not loose and are properly
positioned in the alignment holes as explained
in the paragraph on Needle Setdown Indexing.
Fig. 4
NEEDLE SET DOWN INDEXING
3
s_
TO
64
weN POINTWIs
The horizontal movement of the pickup arm (5) is
controlled by the eccentric excursion of the Pickup Arm Raising Lever (40) moving the Pickup
Arm Raising Disc (34) when actuated by the
Main Cam Assembly (38). The eccentric screw
(part of 6), accessible through the top of the
pickup arm (5), should take care of any normal
position adjustment. Turn this screw clockwise
to index the needle in toward the spindle and
counter -clockwise to index the needle out away
from the spindle.
ON ROLLER
ADJUST IF NECESSARY BY BENDING AT POINT "D".
Fig.
3
PICKUP ARM LIFT TOO HIGH
OR TOO LOW
The vertical movement of the pickup arm is controlled by the angle of the Pickup Arm Raising
Lever (40), Fig. 4. The needle should approach
the top record of a full stack of 10" records on
the turntable with approximately
To
1.
adjust:
Put a full stack
of 10"
1/H"
clearance.
records ON THE TURN-
TABLE.
2.
Press the "On" button and.rotate the Turntable
clockwise until the needle clears the top record of the stack by about 1/8".
©John
F.
INCORRECT
Should further adjustment be necessary, proceed
as follows:
1. Set the eccentric screw, just mentioned, to a
middle position.
2. Set the Record Selector Post (42) to the 10"
position.
3. Operate the mechanism by revolving the Turntable manually until the needle drops to within
1/8" of a 10" record on the turntable.
4. Be sure the notch in the Pickup Arm Raising
Disc (34) engages the Pickup Arm Raising
Lever (40).
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER
With a No. 8 Bristol wrench in each of the set
screws of the Pickup Arm Raising Disc (35) as
indicated in A, Fig. 1, alternately loosen one
screw and tighten the other until the needle
rests above the record lead-in groove at the
desired point.
6. Complete the change cycle of the mechanism
anti position the Pickup Arm on the rest button (10). If necessary, bend the tongue of the
Pickup Arm Raising Disc closer to or away from
the Base Plate Post until the Pickup Arm is
correctly seated on the rest button when the
tongue is touching the Base Plate Post.
NOTE: All adjusting bends should be slight but
5.
firm, easy bends.
CHANGE CYCLE STARTS BEFORE
END OF RECORD
the trip assembly chatters while the changer is
running, or if the changer cycles before the entire record is played, there is probably insufficient
clearance between the hook end of the Velocity
Trip and Roller Assembly (37) and the Actuating
Gear (36). This clearance should be adjusted to
be within 1A2" to 1/s4" by bending the lever at
point "C" shown in Fig. 5.
If
36
L
2
37
fiir.
11111i1111111f1'I1111111111
min
38
Fig.
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-29
MODELS 256, 256-1
RECORD DROPS ON PICKUP ARM
As the change cycle is started, the first motion of
the inclined outer bottom surface of the Main Cam
(38) causes the Record Selector Post (42) to move
toward the Spindle about 3/32 inch. This position
is maintained until the Pickup Arm has made its
full outward' lateral excursion at which time the
Record Selector Post again moves toward the
spindle, causing the bottom record to drop into
playing position.
If the Record Selector Post (42) has been bent
back, away from the Record Spindle, it is possible
for a standard record to rest on the spindle step,.
with its edge just over the edge of the Record
Selector Post shelf. Then as the change cycle is
started, the record is pushed off the spindle by
the initial movement of the Record Selector Post,
so that it drops on the Pickup Arm.
To correct this condition, the Rocker Arm Assembly must be adjusted so that the Record Selector
Post is brought nearer to the spindle. This adjustment is made in the following manner:
1. With the mechanism at rest, remove the Turntable and replace the Record Spindle. Set the
Record Selector Post to the position for playing
12 -inch records and place a 12 -inch record on
the Record Spindle.
2. Insert a short screwdriver through the motorboard opening into the screw slot as shown at
"A" in Fig. 6. Clockwise rotation of the screw
will increase the distance between the Record
Spindle and the Record Selector Post; counterclockwise rotation will decrease it.
It is recommended that the distance between the
edge of the record and the step of the Record
Selector Post be held to just over 1/32 of an inch so
that records with rough or sharply beveled edges
will not catch on the outer edge of the Record
Selector Post.
CAUTION: Be certain that a standard size record
is used in making this adjustment. A standard
10" record measures 97/8" ± 1/32" diameter. A
standard 12" record measures 117/8"
1/321
diameter.
-
5
MORE THAN ONE RECORD
IS DROPPED DURING A
CHANGE CYCLE
The floating latch at the top of the Record Spindle
is so spaced that only one record at a time can
slide between the heel of the latch and the step
of the spindle. The hole in the latch is elongated
so that the latch can slip into the spindle recess
when records are being removed.
If more than one record is dropped at a time, it
will be found to be due to:
1. Foreign matter in spindle recess causing the
latch to stick.
2. Exceptionally thin records.
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Fig.
6
RCD. CH. PAGE
MODELS
20-30 WEBSTER
256, 256-1
PUSH OFF POST ANGLE INCORRECT
The Record Selector Post should be adjusted so
that the curve of the shelf matches the curve of
the record. See Fig. 7.
To adjust this angle:
1. Turn the Record Selector Post to the "10" position.
2. Place a ten -inch record on the Spindle in the
normal position for automatic playing.
3. With a No. 8 Bristol wrench in each of the set
screws (point A, Fig. 7), alternately loosen one
and tighten the other until the Record Selector
post angle is correct. Be sure that both set
screws are tight at the completion of this ad-
justment.
GLIDE IN ON 12" RECORDS
1
2.
Check tension of compression spring (47A) as
explained above. Spring should be free in 12"
position.
Remove any cause of friction in Index Lever
(47).
3.
Tongue of Pickup Arm Raising Disc (34) should
not touch beveled edge of pickup arm pivot
shaft bracket (35) when the needle is on the
edge of a 12" record. Bend the end of the
bracket if necessary.
LAST RECORD DOES NOT PLAY
The weight of the records on the Spindle keeps
the Automatic Shut Off Lock Lever (44) from dropping and engaging the Pickup Arm Raising Disc
(38), thus permitting the mechanism to continue
to cycle.
The Push Off Post (50) moves forward slightly at
the beginning of each change cycle. The bracket
"B" on this post is then underneath the elevated
hook "A" on the Automatic Shut Off Lock Lever
(44). This forward movement takes place before
the last record drops so the change cycle should
WRONG
CORRECT
continue. However the dropping of the last record releases the Automatic Shut Off Lock Lever,
permitting it to drop and shut off the mechanism
when the change cycle starts after the last record.
If the last record does not play.
1. Bend the elevated hook "A", Fig. 8 forward so
that it will overlap the Push Off Post bracket
"H" about 1/32" with a record on the spindle.
WRONG
ERRATIC INDEXING
Indexing in the 10" or the 12" position is controlled through the presence or absence of pressure from the Compression Spring (47A) on the
Pickup Arm Raising Lever (40). The compression
on this spring is changed as the Record Selector
Post (42) is changed to the 10" or 12" position.
Improper adjustment of the spring tension will
result in erratic indexing. In the 12" position,
the spring should be just free. In the 10" position, the compression of the spring holds the stud
of the Pickup Arm Raising Lever (40) against the
outside edge of the groove, forcing the stud to
travel the inside edge or the outside edge of the
groove in the bottom of the Main Cam (38).
To adjust:
Bend the slotted arm (part of 40) for proper tension and smooth clearance of the spring guide
arm (47).
©John
F.
Fig.
8
LAST RECORD CONTINUES TO PLAY
1.
2.
Check the record spindle to be sure that it
moves up and down freely.
With no records on the spindle, check the Automatic Shut Off Lock Lever (44). The lower hook
end of this arm ("C") should catch the Pickup
Arm Raising Disc (34) at the beginning of the
cycle to prevent travel of the Pickup Arm,
causing it to drop on the OFF button. With no
records on the Spindle and with the mechanism at rest, this hook should clear the top of
the Pickup Arm Raising Disc by 1/i2". Adjust,
if necessary, by inserting a screw driver in the
hole in the bottom base plate and bending
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-31
MODELS 256, 256-1
lip "D". Never attempt to move the Pickup
Arm Raising Disc up or down.
3. The elevated hook "A" on the Automatic Shut
Off Lock Lever will sometimes lock with the
bracket "B" on the Record Selector Post (50) if
the drop of the record is delayed. More clear-
ance can be obtained by bending the elevated
hook "A" away from the bracket.
78 R.P.M. AT BOTH SPEED SETTINGS
The 78 R.P.M. bushing on the motor shaft should
be low enough to clear the 331/s R.P.M. idler
wheel. If it is too high:
1. Loosen the bushing set screw, using a No. 8
Bristol wrench.
2. Lower the bushing until it just clears the idler
wheel.
3. Tighten the set screw.
2.
3.
ERRATIC SPEED ("WOW")
Remove any dirt or excess flocking from the inside rim of the turntable. Check the rubber drive
wheel for a flat spot or "out of round".
The idler wheel links (26) should be loose on the
shoulder rivets but not sloppy. If too loose, erratic speed will result.
1.
2.
3.
Remove the motor.
Carefully stake the shoulder rivet more securely to insure smooth operation.
Idler wheel cocked at an angle.
BOTH NEEDLE POINTS TOUCH
AT ONCE
1.
SLOW SPEED
1.
STALLS DURING CHANGE CYCLE
Too weak tension on Idler Link Spring (25 or (90).
Tighten spring as required.
2.
Idler wheel (24) or (91) may be cocked at an
angle. Bend the mounting bracket (26).
Too strong tension on Idler Link Tension Spring
(27) or (90). Stretch spring slightly.
Lip of Idler Wheel Link (26) may be binding
in mounting hole. Carefully bend out the lip
so the Idler Wheel rides more firmly on the rim
of the Turntable.
Needle point is bent. Replace needle.
Needle mounting bracket "fingers" improperly
bent. See Fig. 9.
MOTOR DOES NOT TURN ON
The top switch leaf of the AC switch (61) may be
bent, preventing contact when the Speed Control
Lever is moved to 331/3 or 78. Bend the Switch
Leaf by means of a small screw driver inserted
through the small opening in the plastic protecting cover or bend the switch mounting bracket.
ss
Fig.
9
REPLACEMENT OF PARTS
TO REPLACE THE NEEDLE
1. Loosen the needle set screw, using a small
2.
3.
4.
screw driver.
Remove the needle.
Insert the new needle with the flat side of the
needle toward the set screw. Be sure the
needle shank is all the way in to the bottom
of the needle hole.
Tighten the set screw. The needle point should
be parallel to the sides of the needle slot and
evenly spaced between the walls of the slot.
or even cause both needle points to touch the
record at once.
1. Remove mounting screws from mounting studs
A
2.
and
B,
Fig. 10.
Gently remove hinge assembly from the mounting studs.
TO REPLACE THE PICKUP ARM
Closely observe the original placement of the pickup cord and replace it in the
same position. (See Fig. 10). Do not push hard
on the needle end of the cartridge. Bending the
mounting bracket will cause improper tracking
CAUTION:
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
Fig. 10
RCD. CH.PAGE 20-32 WEBSTER
MODELS
256, 256-1
Seat the cartridge on the mounting studs, insert and tighten the two set screws.
The holes in the cartridge bracket are elongated.
Position the cartridge so it fits solidly against the
back finger of the mounting bracket when the
needle weight counterbalance lever is in the
"forward" or 78 R.P.M. position and solidly
against the front finger of the bracket when the
counterbalance lever is in the "back" or microgroove position.
4.
Fig.
3.
4.
5.
6.
11
Remove tension spring anchor from mounting
stud A. (See Fig. 11.)
Loosen No. 8 Bristol set screw and remove
needle pressure counterbalance arm.
Remove the tilt control lever. Do not disassemble the springs from this lever.
Remove the pickup cord and tilt spring
brackets.
7.
Remove the cartridge mounting screws and the
cartridge.
Reassemble the parts to the new pickup arm in
reverse order. Read the paragraph regarding
cartridge replacement.
TO REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE
1.
2.
3.
REPLACE PICKUP ARM BRACKET
AND SHAFT ASSEMBLY
1.
Disc.
Remove Disc and Clutch parts by sliding them
off the bottom of the Pickup Arm Shaft and pull
shaft out of changer from above.
To replace, reverse the procedure and adjust the
Pickup Arm Raising Disc for proper operation.
2.
REPLACE RECORD POST AND
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove the two set screws, one on each side
of the cartridge.
Lift the cartridge from the pickup arm mounting studs and remove the Tilt Spring from its
mounting hole.
Insert the Tilt Spring in the new cartridge
Loosen Bristol screws in Pickup Arve Raising
4.
5.
6.
Remove the Pickup Arm Assembly.
Remove the four nuts under the main plate
which hold the Crescent Assembly.
Unhook the Rocker Arm Return Spring.
Remove the Rocker Arm Pivot Pin.
Lift out the Record Selector Post, Rocker Arm
and Crescent Assembly as a unit.
In replacing the Rocker Arm Assembly, note
paragraph "Replacing the Sub -Plate Assembly."
LUBRICATION
Model 256 Record Changers leave the factory
completely oiled and lubricated. Under normal
conditions this should be sufficient for approximately one year or 1,000 hours of operation.
When operated under extreme conditions of dust
or heat, this operation should be performed more
frequently as required.
Do not permit any oil or grease to get on the
rubber Idler Drive Wheel or the Motor Sleeve,
on Turntable Drive Rim or on the Automatic
Trip Arm clutch. Any oil or grease on these
points should be removed using Carbon Tetrachloride.
The recommended lubricants and points of lubrication are as follows:
A
1.
-
2.
3.
4.
B
Pickup Arm Shaft. Drop one drop each to bottom bearing point, bracket hole through Main
Base Plate.
Ball Bearing Assembly.
Idler Wheel Felt.
-A Non Fluid Lubricant (Apply With
Small Brush)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Idler Wheel Link.
Turntable Shaft Stud.
Pickup Arm Hinge Pins.
Knife edge of Pickup Arm Raising Lever.
Main Cam Bearing. (It is necessary to rembve the sub -plate assembly to lubricate this
bearing.)
Teeth of Main Cam Actuating Gear.
Track of Main Cam Gear.
Teeth of Large and Small idler gears.
Raising lever Bracket bearing surfaces.
No. 10 OIL (Apply With Small Oil
7.
Can or Medicine Dropper)
8.
Motor Bearings. Saturate top and bottom felts.
9.
AVOID EXCESSIVE LUBRICATION
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-33
This view shows a Model 21+5 mechanism. It is used because
it shows the dual speed mechanism and main actuating gear
assembly.
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
RCD. CH.PAGE 20-34 WEBSTER
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEB TER RCD. CH. PAGE 20-35
MODELS 256, 256-1
PARTS LIST
Illustration
Part
No.
No.
2
49P074
46P126
3
45P464
4
49X029
49X068
21X283
11X385
45P350
49P111
49P112
11X139
24P022
49P027
25P333
11X133
50P204
11X289
25P269
1:X058
41P414
26P687
25P030
50P125
11X366
25P046
11X375
46P179
39P044
41P632
78P410
45P757
25P345
26P276
50P216
11X381
46P175
11X386
11X429
11X405
50P125
46P176
45P700
46P180
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
70
71
72
73
74
75
-
Lock Washer
Spindle
Spindle Retaining Clip
Turntable
Bearing Race Washer
Bearing Race Assembly
Turntable Bearing
Bearing Nut
Felt Washer
Retaining Clip
78 R.P.M.
Idler Wheel
Fibre Washer
Link Assembly
78 R.P.M.
Link Tension Spring
Speed Control Knob
Shaft Bushing
-
-
Dial
Toggle Bracket
Lock Washer
Hex Nut
89
26P474
20X1244
20X1247
90
46P134
Link Tension Spring
91
11X368
Idler Wheel
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
F.
-
Record Stabilizer Weight
Record Weight
Tension Spring
Spring Retaining Bracket
Record Selector Post
Pickup Arm less cartridge and hardware
Pickup Arm Mounting Hinge
Pickup Shaft Assembly
Crescent Plate
Reject Button
Pickup Arm Rest
"Automatic -Manual" Control
Needle Pad
Escutcheon
Retainer for 11X381
Two Speed Shaft Assembly
Tension Spring
Pickup Counterbalance Assembly
Counterbalance Weight Lever and Set Screw
Crank Lever Assembly
Spring Clip
Crank Lever Spring
Crank Lever Spring Retainer
Cartridge Tilt Spring
Cartridge and Bracket Assembly
Cartridge Mounting Screw
Internal
Pickup Cord Assembly
External
Pickup Cord Assembly
76
©John
Description
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
-
331A
--
331,
R.P.M.
R.P.M.
RCD. CH. PAGE 20-36 WEBSTER
©John
F.
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
WEBSTER RCD. CH.PAGE 20-37
MODELS 256, 256-1
PARTS LIST
Illustration
Part
No.
No.
28
29
30
41P333
47P024
47P023
45P342
41P576
45P568
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
47A
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
54A
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
92
93
94
95
96
©John
F.
Description
Shoulder Screw
Large Fibre Gear
Small Fibre Gear
Idler Gear Coupler
Velocity Trip Clutch Weight
Automatic Trip Arm
11X227
Tone Arm Raising Disc
Not stocked as replacement item
11X032
Trip Reset Gear
11X320
Velocity Trip
11X033
Cam and Trigger Assembly
46P139
Tension Spring
11X046
Raising Arm Lever Assembly (includes springs)
46P022
Tension Spring
Not a replacement item
23P009
Friction Disc
11X079
No -Record Lever
41P443
46P012
11X049
46P011
11X141
46P017
11X142
41P421
50P125
50P125
15X097
17X450
25P363
41P592
25P367
26P312
11X396
41P444
32P052
45P755
45P361
46P123
11X158
46P117
11X397
25P343
25P342
11X132
25P367
25P222
26P046
26P748
Pin
Compression Spring
Selector Lever and Collar Assembly
Compression Spring
Rocker and Roller Assembly
Tension Spring
Rocker Arm Lever
Retaining Pin
Clip
Clip
Motor
Motor Shaft Sleeve (60 cycle)
Rubber Shock Motor Mounts
Motor Mounting Sleeve
Motor Mounting Washer
Motor Mounting Bolt
"Automatic -Manual" Control Assembly
"Automatic -Manual" Control Shaft
A.C. Switch and Bracket Assembly
Link Release
"Reject" Trip Actuating Lever
Compression Spring
"Reject" Trip Lever and Wire Assembly
Trip Lever Tension Spring
Two Speed Lever Assembly
Washer
"C" Washer
Idler Gear Assembly
Washer
Lock Washer
Nut
Shoulder Screw
Rider
www.americanradiohistory.com
t